OQ-0305-Study List For OQ-0305 - Pipe Inspection

21
20
4/
OQ-0305-0
/1
09
Study List for OQ-0305 - Pipe Inspection
ed
at
er
en
G
F
PD
Checklist - Template: OQ-0305-0

Publication Date: 02/11/2020
Effective Date: 02/11/2020
Table of Contents
OQ-0305 - Study List for OQ-0305 - Pipe Inspection 1
E-25 - Field Wrapping with Petrolatum Tape Wrap Systems for Distribution Piping 2
E-25 - GDA for E-25 9
E-25 - Tailboard for E-25 12
21
E-30 - General Requirements for Coatings for Exposed Transmission and Distribution Pipelines 13
E-30 - GDA for E-30 31
20
E-30 - Tailboard for E-30 35
TD-4008S - Attachment 1 - Gas Operator Qualification Abnormal Operating Conditions (AOC) 37
4/
TD-4186S - Internal Corrosion Control of Gas Facilities 38
TD-4186P-100 - Internal Corrosion Control: Liquid and Solid Sampling and Testing 55
/1
TD-4186P-100 - Minor Revision GDA for TD-4186P-100 66
TD-4186P-100 - GDA for TD-4186P-100 69
09
TD-4186P-100 - Tailboard for TD-4186P-100 71
TD-4186P-200 - Internal Corrosion Control: Design Review 72
ed
TD-4186P-200 - GDA for TD-4186P-200 87
TD-4186P-300 - Internal Corrosion Control: Corrosion Rate Monitoring 91
at

TD-4186P-300 - GDA for TD-4186P-300 106
er
TD-4186P-400 - Internal Corrosion Control: Mitigation 110

en
TD-4186P-400 - GDA for TD-4186P-400 125

TD-4186P-500 - Internal Corrosion Control: Annual Program Review 129
G
TD-4186P-500 - GDA for TD-4186P-500 138

TD-4186S - GDA for TD-4186S 142
F
TD-4186S - Tailboard for TD-4186S 147

PD
TD-5100P-01 - Leak Repair and Pipe Inspection Documentation 149

TD-5100P-01-JA01 - Leak Repair, Inspection, Gas Quarterly Incident Report (A-Form) Job Aid 163
TD-5100P-01-JA02 - Gas Incident Dig-in Report Addendum (A-1 Form) Job Aid 227
TD-5100P-01-JA03 - Pipe Inspection Form Job Aid 257
TD-5100P-01 - FAQ for TD-5100P-01 272
TD-5100P-01 - GDA for TD-5100P-01 277
TD-4820P-05 - Repair Method Selection for Steel Distribution Pipeline 285
TD-4820P-05 - GDA for TD-4820P-05 309
EMS-4762 - Specification for Furnishing and Delivery of ½ Inch CTS through 8 Inch IPS
Polyethylene (PE) Ball and Plug Valves 313
EMS-4762 - Attachment 1 - Pacific Gas and Electric Company (Company) Approved Valves and
Manufacturers 327
EMS-4762 - MRGDA for EMS-4762 328
21
TD-4188P-02 - Atmospheric Corrosion Inspection of Exposed Metallic Piping Systems 330
20
TD-4188P-02 - GDA for TD-4188P-02 367
TD-4711S - Natural Gas Pipe Wrap and Flange Gasket Removal, Handling, and Disposal 372
4/
TD-4711P-01 - Gas Asphaltic Pipe Wrap Removal, Handling, and Disposal 384
/1
TD-4711P-01 - Attachment 1 - Asphaltic Pipe Wrap and Gasket Material Code List 404
TD-4711P-01 - Attachment 2 - Example of Completed Chain of Custody and Forensic Laboratory
09
Reports 408
TD-4711P-01 - Attachment 3 - Collecting Asphaltic Pipe Wrap Sample 413
TD-4711P-01-JA01 - Reviewing Asbestos Lab Reports 417
ed
TD-4711P-01 - GDA for TD-4711P-01 425
at
TD-4711P-02 - Flange Gaskets-Removal, Handling, and Disposal 431

er
TD-4711P-02 - TD-4711P-02 - Tailboard 449

TD-4711P-02 - TD-4711P-02 - GDA 451
en
TD-4711S - GDA for TD-4711S 458

TD-4711S - Tailboard for TD-4711S 462
G
F
PD
p1
This bundle contains the documents needed for preparing to pass the exam/evaluation for:
OQ-0305, “Pipe inspection”
21
20
4/
/1
09
ed
at
er
en
G
F
PD
Page 1
p2
GAS DESIGN STANDARD E-25

FIELD WRAPPING WITH PETROLATUM TAPE
WRAP SYSTEMS FOR DISTRIBUTION PIPING
Publication Date: 10/21/2020 Effective Date: 01/01/2021 Rev. 4
Purpose and Scope
21
This gas design standard (GDS) provides Pacific Gas and Electric Company (PG&E or
Company) requirements and specifications for the field-application of a petrolatum tape wrap
system to meters, regulators, valves, and distribution piping. Refer to GDS E-30, “General
Requirements for Coatings for Exposed Transmission and Distribution Pipelines,” and
20
GDS E-35, “General Requirements for Coatings for Buried Transmission Pipeline,” for
specifications of transmission lines and coating distribution piping co-located with transmission
lines.
4/
1 General Information
/1
1.1. Coating selection
09
A. Table 1 and Table 2 list approved petrolatum tape wrap systems for application
per this GDS.
Table 1. Approved Trenton Tape System

ed
Component Product Unit Material Code
Primer Temcoat 3000 8-Pound (lb) Cans M130151
(4 cans per case)
16-Ounce Tubs M130171
at
(40 tubs per case)

Filler Fill-Putty Mastic Filler 2″ × 13″ Blocks M130090
(20 blocks per case)
er
Wrap Wax-Tape #2a 2″ × 9″ Rolls M560381

(aboveground tape, (48 rolls per case)
firming, suitable for 4″ × 9″ Rolls M560382
en
painting) (24 rolls per case)

6″ × 9″ Rolls M560383
(16 rolls per case)
G
9″ × 18″ Rolls M561543

(6 rolls per case)
Mechanical Damage MCO 110 Outerwrap 4″ × 12″ Rolls M561594
Protection Outerwrap 4″ × 27″ Rolls M561595
F
6″ × 27″ Rolls M561596

9″ × 40″ Rolls
PD
M561597
PG&E Internal Information “PG&E” refers to Pacific Gas and Electric Company, a subsidiary of PG&E Corporation. Page 1 of 7
©2020 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved.
Page 2
p3
Field Wrapping with Petrolatum Tape Wrap Systems

E-25
for Distribution Piping
Table 2. Approved Denso / Densyl Tape System

Primer Denso Primer Paste 5.5 lb Tubes M130115
21
(4 tubes per carton)
Filler Densyl Profiling Mastic 4 lb Blocks M130114
(6 blocks per carton)
20
Wrap Densyl Wax Tape 2″ × 33″ Rolls M130108
(36 rolls per case)
4″ × 33″ Rolls M130110
(18 rolls per case)
4/
6″ × 33″ Rolls M130112
(12 rolls per case)
8″ × 33″ Rolls
/1
M130113
(8 rolls per case)
12″ × 33″ Rolls M130106
09
(6 rolls per case)
Mechanical Damage Denso Glass Wrap 3″ × 9″ Rolls M561537
Protection Outerwrap (15 rolls per case)
4″ × 30″ Rolls M561538
(5 rolls per case)
ed
8″ × 40″ Rolls M561539
(3 rolls per case)
at
B. Petrolatum tape wrap coating systems are compatible with all existing
non-defective, sound-coating systems and must not be applied over deteriorated
er
coating systems. Follow environmental condition and surface preparation

requirements per this GDS (see Section 2 and Section 3).
en
C. Ensure that all tape wrap system components are from the same manufacturer.
D. Petrolatum tape wrap coating systems must not be used on piping that exceeds
140°F operating temperature.
G
E. Table 3 lists approved topcoats that can be applied over the outer layer of the
petrolatum tape wrap system to support supplemental UV-protection and color
F
consistency. The coating can be supplied in a color to match the local PG&E
equipment. Refer to GDS E-30, Table 2, “Approved Coating Systems for Gas
PD
Piping and Equipment Exposed to Severe Conditions,” for a cross-reference to

common PG&E colors. The use of a tint base version of the approved products in
Table 3 as a base for color matching is acceptable.
Page 2 of 7 “PG&E” refers to Pacific Gas and Electric Company, a subsidiary of PG&E Corporation. PG&E Internal Information
Page 3
p4

E-25
Table 3. Approved Color and UV-Protective Topcoats for Wax Tape or Liquid Epoxy Systems
Single-Component, PPG Pitt-Tech Plus 90-1210 Series 1 Gallon M130172
21
Liquid Acrylic Coating (semi-gloss) 5 Gallon M130173
Single-Component, Sherwin Williams, Sher-Cryl 1 Gallon M130176
Liquid Acrylic Coating (semi-gloss) 5 Gallon M130177
20
Spray Paint Can Aervoe No. 5049 Supreme Rust 1 Can M130045
Shield for Field Applications of
Small Repairs (meter gray)
4/
2 Environmental Conditions
/1
2.1. Work must be completed under the proper environmental conditions per the coating
manufacturer’s product data sheet (PDS) and this GDS.
09
2.2. Prepare surfaces and apply coatings per the following conditions:
A. Air, surface and material temperature per Table 4.

ed
B. Surfaces must be clean, dry, and free of dust.
C. Work area must be free of airborne dust to prevent contamination of prepared

at
surfaces or freshly applied coatings.

1
Table 4. Petrolatum Wax Tape Coating Reference Values
er
Material Recommended Material Air Temperature Surface Temperature

Temperature (°F) (°F)
en
(°F)
Primer Paste 50‒90 0‒140 0‒110
Fill Putty / Mastic Filler 40‒140
Petrolatum Tape Wrap 0‒110
G
Overwrap 0‒125
1. Nominal ranges for application. Consult supplier product data sheet (PDS) for more specific information and operating
temperature ranges.
F
PD
Page 4
p5

E-25
3 Surface Preparation
3.1. If the surface has been previously coated with a paint (not a “tape-type” product),
21
remove any dust, dirt, oil, grease, and other foreign material per Society for Protective
Coatings (SSPC) Surface Preparation Standard (SP) 1, “Solvent Cleaning.” After surface
has been thoroughly cleaned, remove all loose rust, scale, paint, and other foreign
matter using a wire brush or other suitable tool per SSPC-SP 2, “Hand Tool Cleaning.”
20
3.2. If the surface has been previously coated with a tape-type product that is damaged or
deteriorating, cut the tape around the damaged area, extending at least 1″ outside the
4/
boundary of the damaged area. Remove all loose tape and then remove all materials,
primer, and dust per SSPC-SP 1. After surface has been thoroughly cleaned, remove all
loose rust, scale, paint, and other foreign matter in the damaged area using a wire brush
/1
or other suitable tool per SSPC-SP 2.
09
4 Petrolatum Tape Application
4.1. After surface preparation, the primer material must be applied to all prepared surfaces in
an even film per the coating manufacturer’s PDS. Application can be via brush, roller, or
ed
by hand.
4.2. If the surface includes irregular fittings or other anomalies (e.g., discontinuities, sharp
edges) at transitions (e.g., between pipe and flanges, tees), use the supplied filler
at
materials per the coating manufacturer’s PDS to fill and wrap these areas to create a
smooth surface for tape application. Ensure that the filler does not “bridge” over
discontinuities. The filler must be pressed into place across all discontinuities to contact
er
the underlying surface and provide a smooth outer surface.
4.3. Apply the petrolatum tape wrap per the coating manufacturer’s PDS. The tape must be
en
spiral-wrap applied with an overlap of 55%, effectively providing a double-thickness

cover. Smooth the tape when applying to remove any air pockets and ensure contact
with the surface primer or filler. The tape must always cover 100% of the pipe
G
circumference.
4.4. Wrap all tape surfaces with mechanical damage protection outerwrap tape. Outerwrap
F
tape must always overlap by 55%. Open the outerwrap only when it is ready to use.
PD
4.5. Extend the tape wrap on to any existing retained coating, intact coating, or tape.
4.6. For valves or meters, the tape materials may be cut into smaller, more manageable
pieces. Press the wax tape pieces down firmly to conform to the surface, starting from
the center area and working outwards, starting from the bottom of the valve and working
upwards. Continue building to establish a two-layer (minimum) covering of the entire
surface.
Page 5
p6

E-25
4.7. Where color consistency is required or where the product will be directly exposed to
sunlight, apply a color and UV-protective topcoat (refer to Table 3) directly over the
outerwrap tape per the coating manufacturer’s PDS. Allow the outerwrap to cure before
21
applying a color topcoat.
5 Inspection
20
5.1. Complete a visual inspection of the finished product to ensure that the tape and
outerwrap are adhered tightly to the pipe. Extra attention must be given to any complex
joints where the tape is more difficult to wrap, ensuring there are no buckles or holidays
4/
in the tape coatings.
5.2. Use the reference values listed in Table 4 as material inspection acceptance values.
/1
Check environmental conditions (e.g., temperature) at the start of coating activities.
09
5.3. Complete repairs per Section 6, as needed, to conform to this GDS.
6 Repair
6.1. Repair holidays and other damaged areas by cutting away any defective wax tape and
ed
re-preparing the surface per Section 3. Complete the reapplication of the petrolatum
tape per the coating manufacturer’s PDS.
at
er
en
G
F
PD
Page 6
p7

E-25
Target Audience
Personnel from gas transmission and distribution, gas construction, gas pipeline operations and
21
maintenance (GPOM), insulation and coatings (I&C), construction management, transmission
inspection, gas engineering, standards and qualifications, corrosion engineering, integrity
management, and other personnel involved in specifying and applying coatings.
20
Definitions
NA
4/
Compliance Requirement / Regulatory Commitment
/1
Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) Title 49, Transportation of Natural and other Gas by
Pipeline: Minimum Federal Safety Standards, Section (§) 192.461, “External corrosion control:
09
Protective coating”
References
Gas Design Standard E-30, “General Requirements for Coatings for Exposed Transmission and
ed
Distribution Pipelines”
Gas Design Standard E-35, “General Requirements for Coatings for Buried Transmission
at
Pipeline”
Society for Protective Coatings Surface Preparation Standard 1, “Solvent Cleaning”

er
Society for Protective Coatings Surface Preparation Standard 2 “Power Tool Cleaning”
en
Appendices
NA
G
Attachments
NA
F
Revision Notes
PD
Revision 4 has the following changes:
1. Document title revised to reflect that polyethylene (PE) tape is no longer the approved tape
wrap system for distribution piping.
2. Removed all references of PE tape for field wrapping.
3. Added petrolatum tape surface preparation, application, inspection, and repair instructions.
4. Added optional color and UV coatings and instructions.

Page 7
p8

E-25
Asset Type: Gas Transmission and Distribution
Function: Design, Construction, Maintenance, and Operation
21
Document Contact: Gas Design Standard Responsibility List
20
4/
/1
09
ed
at
er
en
G
F
PD
Page 8
p9
Gas Guidance Document Analysis (GDA)

E-25, Rev. 4
21
Document Type Gas Design Standard (GDS)
Workflow Revision
20
1. Why Is the Document Being Revised?
This GDS revision updates the requirements and specifications for the field-application of a petrolatum
4/
tape wrap system to meters, regulators, valves, and distribution piping to align with current Pacific Gas
and Electric Company (PG&E or Company) practices.
/1
2. What Is Changing?
09
Key changes include:
 Document title revised to reflect that polyethylene (PE) tape is no longer the approved tape wrap
system for distribution piping.
ed
 Removed all references of PE tape being the approved material for field wrapping.
 Added petrolatum tape surface preparation, application, inspection, and repair instructions.
at
 Added optional color and UV coatings and instructions.

3. Major New Risks or Changes to Existing Mitigated Risks (such as Process Safety risks)
er
NA
4. Stakeholders
en
Table 1. Technical Stakeholder Reviewers (required to be considered)
Department / Work Center Title (and Role if applicable) Name Review Date
G
(or reason if NA)

Corrosion Engineer, Document Steward Bruce Wiskel 09/2020
Corrosion Engineering
Manager, Document Approver Lee Haynes 09/2020
F
Gas Engineer, Document Coordinator John Heflin 09/2020

Standards Engineering
PD
Principal Engineer, Lead Engineer Tuesdai Powers 10/2020

Process Safety Senior Gas Process Safety Engineer Megan Noyes 02/2020
Quality Management NA – No associated quality assessments
Operator Qualification Expert Gas Qualification Specialist Jeff Dunham 08/2020
Gas Strategy and Solutions NA – No technology changes required
Regulatory Compliance NA – No governing federal or state pipeline regulations
PG&E Academy Senior Learning Strategist Debbie Alton 08/2020
As-Built Records NA – Does not affect as-built documents
SQ-09-F01, Gas Operations Guidance Document Analysis

PG&E Internal Information ©2020 PG&E Corporation. All rights reserved. Page 1 of 3
Page 9
p10

E-25, Rev. 4
Table 2. Target Audience Usability Review (stakeholders that may review)
21
Department / Work Center Title Name Review Date
Applied Technology Services
Senior Advising Coatings Specialist Judy Cheng 01/2020
(ATS)
20
Supervisor Donald Pomi 01/2020
Insulation and Coating (I&C)
Specialist John Gutierrez 01/2020
4/
Gas Training Governance Gas Construction Engineering
Adam Linney 04/2020
Committee (GTGC) Supervisor
/1
5. Electronic Document Routing System (EDRS) Reviewers and Approvers
09
Approvers: John Heflin, Tuesdai Powers, Bruce Wiskel, Lee Haynes
6. Cost / Schedule Information
NA
ed
Effective Date: 01/01/2021 (effective date reflective of large target audience)
Corrosion Engineering, with the help of Standards Engineering, will distribute a communication once
at
published. Corrosion Engineering will also hold meetings and provide training sessions to affected
personnel.
er
7. Review Frequency
At least once every 5 calendar years, not to exceed 63 months, to the date.
en
8. Cancellations
Document Number Title Description Reasons for Cancelation

G
Replaces non-compliant/obsolete
Changes to Field-
liquid adhesives, surface cleaning No longer relevant to this
TD-E-25B-001 Wrapping with
solvent, and cold-applied tapes listed document.
F
Cold-Applied Tape
in previous revisions of GDS E-25.
PD
9. Manuals
Utility Manual TD-4180M, Gas Transmission and Distribution Manual: Corrosion Control Volume

Page 10
p11

E-25, Rev. 4
10. Document Properties
21
Functional Area
☐ CNG-LNG ☐ Compression and Processing ☐ Customer Connected Equipment ☒ Distribution Mains
20
☒ Distribution Services ☐ Measurement and Control ☐ Storage ☐ Transmission Pipe
Target Audiences
4/
☐ Asset Strategy ☐ Facility Integrity Management ☐ Leak Repair ☐ R&D and Innovation
☐ Associate Distribution Engineers ☐ GPOM (I&R) ☐ Leak Survey ☐ Records and Information
Management
/1
☐ Compliance and Risk ☐ Gas Control Strategy and Support ☐ Locate and Mark ☐ Regulatory Compliance
☐ Contract Management ☐ Gas Distribution Control Center ☐ Mapping (Transmission and Distribution) ☐ Risk Management
09
☒ Corrosion Mechanics ☐ Gas Emergency Preparedness ☐ Metering Plant ☐ Service Planning
☒ Corrosion Services ☐ Gas Operations Leadership ☐ Picarro ☐ Sourcing
☐ Data Quality ☐ Gas Service Representatives ☐ Pipeline Engineering ☐ Super Gas Ops
☐ Dispatch and Scheduling ☐ Gas Transmission Control Center ☐ Pipeline Safety Enhancement Plan ☐ System Planning
ed
Engineering
☒ Distribution Construction ☒ General Construction ☐ Program Management (Transmission ☐ Technology and Tools
and Distribution)
☐ Distribution Engineering ☐ Hydrotesting ☐ Project Management (Transmission and ☐ Transmission Construction
at
Distribution)
☐ Distribution Integrity Management ☐ Investment Planning ☐ Qualifications ☐ Transmission Engineering
☐ Estimating ☐ LNG|CNG Operations ☐ Quality and Improvement ☐ Transmission Integrity

er
Management
GODOCS
en
CONSTRUCTION ENGINEERING MAINTENANCE & OPERATIONS EMERGENCY / ADMIN

☐ As-Builts ☐ Applicant Design Manual ☒ Corrosion Control ☐ Dispatch and Scheduling
G
☒ Coatings ☐ Asset Knowledge Management ☐ Damage Prevention ☐ Emergency Plans

☐ Gas Guidance Document
☐ Construction Methods ☐ Distribution Engineering ☐ Field Services (GSRs)
Process
☐ Engineering for Integrity ☐ Gas Operations Quality
☐ Environmental and Safety ☐ Gas Control and Clearances
F
Management Management
☐ Engineering Material
☐ Excavation ☐ Integrity Management (IM) ☐ Gas Safety Excellence
PD
Specifications
☐ Gas Design Standards for Construction ☒ Gas Design Standards ☐ Leak Survey and Response ☐ Operator Qualifications (OQ)
☐ Inspection and Operation ☐ Process Safety ☐ Major Stations
☐ Plastic ☐ System Planning ☐ Measurement and Regulation (M&R)
☐ Steel Pressure Control ☐ Transmission Engineering ☐ Steel Pipeline Maintenance and Repair
☐ Strength Testing and Commissioning ☐ Valve Maintenance
☐ Welding and Nondestructive

Examination (NDE)

Page 11
p12
DOCUMENT NAME: Field Wrapping with Petrolatum Tape Wrap Systems for Distribution Piping
21
DOCUMENT NUMBER: E-25, Rev. 4
TAILBOARD ISSUED: 10/21/2020 TAILBOARD BY: 01/01/2021
20
4/
What is changing?
/1
 Updated title of gas design standard (GDS) to reflect that polyethylene (PE) tape is no longer the
approved field-wrapping system, replacing it with petrolatum tape.
09
 Removed all references of PE tape, replacing with petrolatum tape as the only approved field-
wrapping system for meters, regulators, valves, and distribution piping.
 Added optional color and UV-protective topcoats as a supplemental system to petrolatum tape.
ed
Why does it matter?
at
This GDS revision updates the requirements and specifications for the field-application of a petrolatum
tape wrap system to meters, regulators, valves, and distribution piping to align with current Pacific Gas
and Electric Company (PG&E or Company) practices.
er
Required Action
en
Target audience must review and become familiar with the contents of this GDS.
Tools and Training

G
NA
Timeline
F
Date Activity
PD
10/21/2020 Publication date.

01/01/2021 Tailboard by date.
01/01/2021 Effective date.
SQ-09-F02, Gas Operations Tailboard

PG&E Internal Information ©2020 PG&E Corporation. All rights reserved. 1 of 1
Page 12
p13
GAS DESIGN STANDARD E-30

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR COATINGS FOR
EXPOSED TRANSMISSION AND DISTRIBUTION
PIPELINES
Purpose and Scope
21
This gas design standard (GDS) provides the approved general product specifications and
requirements for the application and inspection of exterior protective coatings applied to
exposed steel gas transmission (GT) pipeline, including pipeline in underground vaults. It is
20
intended for use by GT personnel, general construction (GC) personnel, and contractors
performing work on Pacific Gas and Electric Company (PG&E or Company) assets. For meters,
regulators, valves, and associated exposed piping, see GDS E-31, “Protective Coating for
Meters, Regulators, Valves, and Connected Distribution Piping.”
4/
This document is the main GDS for all coating project requirements for all exposed pipe and is
/1
intended to be used in conjunction with the other GDS’s in the E-30 series. Table 1 provides a
summary of the GDS E-30 series.
09
Table 1. GDS E-30 Series
GDS Applications Coating Types
E-30, “General Requirements for
Coatings for Exposed Transmission and General Information
ed
Distribution Pipelines”
E-30.1, “Coating Application on Exposed Mainline Pipe, Stations, Girth Liquid Epoxy Primers / Polysiloxane
Transmission and Distribution Pipelines” Welds (field application) and Acrylic Topcoats
at
E-30.2, “Coating Application on Exposed UV Exposed Spans, Covered Liquid Epoxy Primers / Polysiloxane
Transmission and Distribution Pipe Spans, Mechanical Supports (field and Acrylic Topcoats; Petrolatum
Spans” application) Tape Wrap Systems
er
E-30.3, “Coating Application on Exposed Covered Vaults, Open Vaults, Liquid Epoxy Primers / Polysiloxane
Transmission and Distribution Pipe in Vault Penetrations and Acrylic Topcoats; Moisture
Vaults” (field application) Tolerant Primer Systems
en
E-30.4, “Coating Application on Air-to- Air-to-Soil Transition Zones Liquid Epoxy Primers / Polysiloxane
Soil Transition Zones” (field application) and Acrylic Topcoats; Petrolatum
Tape Wrap Systems
E-30.5, “Coating Application on Exposed Mainline Pipe in High Mechanical Abrasion Resistant Coatings
G
Gas Transmission Lines in Mechanical Wear Environments

Wear Areas” (field application)
E-30.6, “Coating Application to Miscellaneous Structures and Liquid Systems

F
Miscellaneous Exposed Structures and Components (field application)

Components”
PD
E-30.7, “Shop-Applied Coatings on Mainline Piping, Regulators, Liquid Systems and Powder Coatings
Exposed Piping and Miscellaneous Valves, Meters, Risers, and
Components” Components with
Shop-Applied Coatings
Page 13
p14
General Requirements for Coatings for Exposed Transmission and

E-30
Distribution Pipelines
1 General Information
1.1. Compliance with all requirements and specifications in this GDS achieves the desired
21
long-term performance of a coating system. When applying a coating to gas piping,
monitor and control all application and environmental factors (e.g., surface preparation,
coating thickness, application method, and surface and ambient temperatures).
20
1.2. The coating applicator must obtain the Company’s written approval for any deviations
from this GDS, applicable standards, and referenced drawings. In case of conflict
between this GDS and the coating applicator’s procedure, the project engineer must
4/
consult corrosion engineering personnel for approval before performing coating work.
1.3. The specifications in this GDS are not all inclusive. Use of these guidelines does not
/1
relieve coating applicator of the responsibility to supply a finished product capable of
performing its designed service.
09
1.4. When work involves handling or transporting pipe, follow the requirements of
Engineering Material Specification (EMS) 4113, “Specifications for Handling, Storing and
Transporting Bare and Coated Carbon Steel Pipe” and GDS A-36, “Design and
Construction Requirements Gas Lines and Related Facilities.”
ed
1.5. During application, curing, and handling, ensure that the coating is not physically
damaged or contaminated with any foreign material from any source.
at
1.6. Refer special requirements, applications, or unusual circumstances to corrosion

engineering personnel for guidance before coating work.
er
1.7. Coating repair work on PG&E transmission and distribution lines can be divided into
three scenarios based on the extent of coating damage and the age of the coating
en
system. The scenario for a project will be provided by PG&E and may consider the cost
of the different repair options. The scenario selected will impact the choices for surface
preparation and coating selection.
G
 Touch-up: Areas with minimal damage or small defects.

F
Spot prime and overcoat: An intermediate repair strategy intending to extend the
overall life of the coating without incurring the cost of complete repair.
PD
 Complete repair (replacement): Coatings showing extensive breakdown.
1.8. All areas that will not be overcoated must be masked and protected from damage.
1.9. Before coating, the coating applicator should inspect the layout and identify locations
where access is difficult or not available to meet the specification requirements and
report to the project engineer.
Page 14
p15
General Requirements for Coatings for Exposed Transmission

E-30
and Distribution Pipelines
1.10. Topcoat color requirements are as follows:
A. Unless otherwise specified, the topcoat color must match (visually) the existing
21
color. Table 2 provides a listing of standard topcoat colors often used within
PG&E facilities and the SAE-AMS-595 standard (formerly FED-STD-595) cross
reference for color specification. Note that the existing color is often faded, and
the Table 2 colors are preferred.
20
B. Colors for primer materials are not controlled, however the primer colors should
contrast with the required topcoat color as a visual aid during application of the
4/
topcoat.
C. Topcoat materials can be tinted to meet the color requirements. The use of a tint
/1
base version of an approved material with a MAT CODE (material code) is
allowable.
09
Table 2. AMS-STD-595 Cross Reference to Common PG&E Colors
Common PG&E Color SAE-AMS-595 Color Chip Number
PG&E #400 Meter Gray #16187
ed
PG&E ANSI #70 or PG&E 108 Silver Gray #16480
PG&E 605 Sand Gray #13522
at
PG&E 124 Beige #13523

PG&E Coastal Gray #13531
er
PG&E 610 Green #14081

PG&E 633 Light Green #14151
PG&E 607 Gray Green #14159
en
2 Safety and Work Requirements

G
2.1. PG&E environmental services personnel, safety department team personnel, or

industrial hygienists, must have access to the work site and have authority to shut down
F
the field-applied coating process, if necessary.

PD
2.2. Only qualified personnel can perform surface preparation and coating operations.
Coating applicator personnel are responsible for familiarizing themselves with the
manufacturer’s safety data sheet (SDS) and product data sheet (PDS), for all
coating-related materials and with all equipment manuals.
2.3. All work must be performed in a safe manner and per all applicable safety rules,
including those listed in Utility Standard SAFE-1001S, “Injury and Illness Prevention Plan
(IIPP) Standard,” the Code of Safe Practices (CSP), and all associated supplier’s SDS.
Page 15
p16

E-30
2.4. This GDS contains covered tasks requiring qualifications. Consult the PG&E Gas
Qualifications Task List or contact the Gas Qualification department for covered task
information, including date available and effective dates.
21
2.5. Employees performing coating work must wear the personal protective equipment (PPE)
required by PG&E procedures, along with PPE recommended by the coating
manufacturer. Employees must comply with Utility Standard SAFE-2006S, “Respiratory
20
Protection Standard.” Consult with the local PG&E safety representative to resolve any
conflict between PG&E procedures and the coating manufacturer’s recommendations
regarding personal protective equipment.
4/
2.6. Follow the requirements in Utility Standard SAFE-2004S, “Asbestos Standard,” if the
coating work involves disturbing asbestos containing material or is being performed in an
/1
area that may contain asbestos. Refer to Utility Standard TD-4711S, “Natural Gas Pipe
Wrap and Flange Gaskets–Removal, Handling, and Disposal” and Utility Procedure
09
TD-4711P-01, “Gas Pipe Wrap Removal, Handling, and Disposal.”
2.7. Follow the requirements in Utility Standard SAFE-2005S, “Lead Standard,” if the coating
work involves removal of lead coatings or is being performed in an area that may contain
ed
lead. If coating application will require the disturbance of existing coating that is known to
be applied before 1978 or if the age of the existing coating is unknown, the existing
coating must be tested for the presence of lead.
at
2.8. Follow requirements in Utility Standard SAFE-1006S, “Permit Required Confined Space
Standard,” if the coatings work is being performed in locations that are defined as
confined spaces (e.g., vaults).
er
2.9. When abrasive blasting or power tool cleaning such as grinding, complete a hot work
permit per Utility Procedure TD-4640P-01, “Hot Work Control – Fire Prevention.”
en
3 Applicable County, State, and Federal Regulations

G
3.1. Coating work must conform to all applicable local, state, and federal regulation including,
but not limited to, California Air Resources Board (CARB), local Air Pollution Control
District, Cal/OSHA, and the Department of Fish and Game.
F
3.2. Before performing work, project manager or project team acquires all federal, state, and
PD
local land acquisition, temporary construction easements, and environmental and

ministerial permits.
4 Material Disposal
4.1. Dispose of all used and unused materials, abrasives, supplies, and paint containers
appropriately. Coordinate disposal with the environmental field specialist (EFS) or other
responsible party supporting the project generating the waste or the facility receiving the
waste.
Page 16
p17

E-30
5 Storage and Handling of Coating Material
5.1. Obtain current SDS and PDS for the materials received to ensure compliance with the
21
requirements.
5.2. Store coating materials per manufacturer's SDS and PDS. Climate-controlled product
storage may be required.
20
5.3. Receive all materials for use in their original unopened containers with original labels
intact. Exceptions are allowed for shop-applied plural component systems using bulk
4/
(drum) material feeds.
5.4. Dispense materials on a “first-in, first-out” basis to avoid exceeding shelf life.
/1
5.5. Under the following conditions, reject and immediately remove from the jobsite any
09
materials showing:
 Expired shelf life

ed
Damage to containers; if there is any question as to whether product container
was compromised (minor dents are acceptable)
 Bulging sides or lids on containers; such damage may indicate improper storage
at
 Exposure to extreme climate conditions

er
 Mixed or improperly labeled products
5.6. Dispose of rejected materials properly per PG&E guidelines.

en
5.7. Verify product color and consistency upon opening each container. Discrepancies may
indicate improper storage.
G
5.8. Vendor must supply multi-component coating materials in kit form.

F
6 Training and Qualification

PD
6.1. Before performing coating activities (e.g., surface preparation, mixing coatings,
application of coatings, inspection, and direct supervision of coating activities), coating
personnel must complete training established in this GDS and associated standards
related to the work.
6.2. All coating personnel must hold appropriate operator qualifications (OQs) or be working
with an OQ-qualified person on a one-to-one ratio to perform applicable work. For
covered task information, including date available and effective dates, please consult the
Guide to Operator Qualifications in the Technical Information Library (TIL) or contact the
Gas Qualifications department.
Page 17
p18

E-30
7 Environmental Conditions
7.1. Prepare surfaces, apply, and cure all coatings under the range of prevailing conditions
21
indicated in the appropriate PDS unless otherwise noted in the standard.
7.2. Do not perform work when environmental conditions are outside of the requirements
identified in the appropriate PDS or PG&E standard. Controlled environment by
20
containment may be required. Containment may also be required to ensure that waste
products do not enter the local environment.
4/
7.3. The surface temperature and relative humidity is expected to remain stable for enough
time for the completion of abrasive blasting, applying coating, and curing. Check
environmental conditions at the following times:
/1
 At the start of coating activities
09
 Every 4 hours during surface preparation and coating application
 Whenever conditions change significantly

ed
7.4. Coating work, including curing, must be performed under the following conditions:
A. Air temperature, surface temperature, dew point, relative humidity, and material
at
temperature as required by the coating reference values of the appropriate

document in the E-30 series (see Table 1).
er
B. Surface to be coated must be clean, dry, and free of dust.
C. Work area must be free of airborne dust that would contaminate prepared
en
surfaces or freshly applied coatings.
D. When compressed air is used, perform a white blotter test per ASTM
G
International (ASTM) D4285, “Standard Test Method for Indicating Oil or Water in
Compressed Air,” to verify the cleanliness of compressed air for each
compressor system at least once per shift.
F
8 Surface Preparation
PD
8.1. Follow the general requirements in this section, the PDS, and the appropriate E-30
series GDS (see Table 1) for specific surface preparation requirements.
Page 18
p19

E-30
8.2. General Requirements
A. Proper surface preparation is key to achieving the desired coating performance.
21
The extent of surface preparation is based on the coating material, service
needs, and application constraints.
B. All surface preparation and coating work must be performed with enough lighting
20
(minimum 20 foot-candles) to permit the operators to see their work and conduct
thorough and accurate inspection of blasted surfaces.
4/
C. Visually inspect the steel gas pipeline and components to be coated for any
visible signs of corrosion (i.e., pitting) or other damage to the steel that requires
attention, before performing surface preparation. If there are signs of corrosion or
/1
damage, an engineering evaluation is required.
09
D. Identify the extent of the coating repair work; (e.g., touch-up, spot prime and
overcoat, or complete repair. Figure 1, Figure 2, Figure 3, and Figure 4 illustrate
the differences.
ed
at
er
en
G
F
PD
Figure 1. Touch-Up Painting Limited to an Area of <144 Square Inches Requiring Repair
(1) Figure 1 shows a coated surface with a single defect requiring touch-up
repair. The total exposed steel surface area requiring repair is less than
144 square inches (in2) and repair is limited to this location. The surface
may be prepared following Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC)
Surface Preparation Standard (SP) 11, “Power-Tool Cleaning to Bare
Metal,” following surface cleaning with SSPC-SP 1, “Solvent Cleaning.”
Page 19
p20

E-30
8.2 (continued)
21
20
4/
/1
09
ed
Figure 2. Illustration of Multiple Damaged Coating Areas on a Pipeline
at
er
en
G
F
PD
Figure 3. Repair of Multiple Damage Areas Using a Spot Prime and Overcoat Protocol
(2) Figure 2 and Figure 3 depict spot prime and overcoat work. Figure 2
suggests areas of multiple defects or one single defect wherein the areas
are larger than 144in2. Surface preparation via abrasive blasting (SSPC-
SP 10 / NACE No. 2, “Near-White Metal Blast Cleaning) or power tools
(SSPC-SP 11) is required. Figure 3 shows the application of the repair
materials.
Page 20
p21

E-30
8.2 (continued)
a) The repair of these areas requires abrasive blasting or power
21
tooling of the damaged coating and retained coating. The surface
preparation should meet the standards per the E-30 series or the
PDS of the product applied. Damaged areas with edges within 6″
of each other should be treated as a single area for repair. The
20
areas of retained coating between or around damaged areas to a
point 2″ beyond the edge of the outermost repair areas should be
prepared for overcoating via abrasive blasting per SSPC-SP 7,
4/
“Brush-Off Blast Cleaning” or SSPC-SP 3, “Power Tool Cleaning”.
The limits of repair should be marked as a circumferential band
around the pipe. These bands will mark an area 2″ beyond the
/1
extent of the bare metal repair. All areas with spot blasting should
be feathering into the retained coating. (The surface preparation
09
should extend completely around the pipe in preparation for the
coating to be applied around the pipe.)
ed
at
er
en
G
F
Figure 4. Complete Repair

PD
(3) Figure 4 shows a complete repair protocol. In this situation the entire
coating is removed via abrasive blasting to meet the SSPC-SP 10
standard. The entire area is primed and top-coated with the approved
systems. Alternatively, where the primer remains intact, the existing
sound coating is prepared by SSPC-SP 3 or SSPC-SP 7 to allow a
topcoat to be applied over the entire pipeline.
Page 21
p22

E-30
8.2 (continued)
E. The prepared surface must not be contaminated with dirt, dust, metal particles,
21
oil, water, or any other foreign material from any source, including, but not limited
to, pipe transportation systems, processing equipment or tools, or airborne
contaminants. The pipe surface and its anchor profile may not be scarred or
burnished.
20
F. For previously coated surfaces (repair and/or recoating), remove any defective
coating, such as blistered, peeling, or delaminated coating, and 1″ to 2″ of the
4/
surrounding acceptable coating. Test the “edges” of the remaining coating with a
putty knife to ensure that all loose coating is removed. Avoid feathering these
surrounding areas using a sanding or grinding tool that eliminates the local
/1
surface profile. Feather the retained, intact coating, using the same abrasive
stream or mechanical tool providing the requisite surface profile. The final visual
09
appearance of this area may be rough, not smooth.
8.3. Solvent Cleaning (SSPC-SP 1)

ed
A. All surfaces must be cleaned of contamination (e.g., dirt, oil, grease) per
SSPC-SP 1 before performing surface preparation.
B. Apply the solvent to the surface by spraying onto the surface or wetting a rag
at
with the solvent.
(1) Use lint free rags to prevent the contamination of the cleaned surface with
er
cloth fibers. Rags should be replaced frequently to avoid cross

contamination from one surface to another. Always use a clean rag for
the final surface wipe.
en
8.4. Hand or Power Tool Cleaning (SSPC-SP 2, 3, and 11)

G
A. If SSPC-SP 11 is allowed, a steel surface cleaned with power tools to bare metal
must be free of all visible oil, grease, dirt, dust, rust, paint, oxide, corrosion
product, or mill scale when viewed without magnification. Slight residues of paint
F
and scale may be retained at the bottom of corrosion pits.

PD
(1) Surface imperfection such as sharp fins, burrs, silvers, laminations, sharp
edges, weld splatter or burning slag, must be removed.
(2) The prepared substrate should have a minimum of 1 mil profile.
B. If SSPC-SP 2 or SSPC-SP 3 is allowed, remove all loose mill scale, rust, paint,
and other loose, detrimental, foreign matter per the specification.
Page 22
p23

E-30
8.5. Abrasive Blasting (SSPC-SP 6, SP10)
A. Environmental issues related to abrasive blasting must be coordinated with the
21
environmental field specialist (EFS) or other responsible party supporting the
project
B. A compressor sufficiently powerful to operate the equipment must be used to
20
deliver air to a blast pot permitted by CARB.
C. Abrasive blast media must produce an angular surface profile. Only use abrasive
4/
blast media certified by and in accordance with CARB and/or the local air quality
district for outdoor abrasive blasting. Use of reclaimed or recycled abrasive is
prohibited unless equipment is designed to utilize reclaimed or recycled media.
/1
The use of shot as a blast media is prohibited, unless permitted in another E-30
series GDS (See Table 1).
09
D. Employees performing abrasive blasting must wear approved safety equipment.
E. References to “abrasive blasting” shall be taken to mean a surface preparation of

SSPC-SP10/NACE No. 2, or SSPC-SP 6, “Commercial Blast Cleaning” to a
ed
surface profile specified by the appropriate E-30 series document.
F. SSPC SP-10 surfaces shall be free of all visible oil, grease, dirt, dust, rust, paint,
at
oxide, corrosion product, or mill scale when viewed without magnification.

Random staining is limited to 5% of each 3″ × 3″ area. Staining may include light
shadows, streaks, or discoloration related to previous rusting, mill scale, or
er
coating.
G. SSPC SP-6 surfaces must be free of all visible oil, grease, dirt, dust, rust, paint,
en
oxide, corrosion product, or mill scale when viewed without magnification.

Random staining is limited to 33% of each 3″ × 3″ area. Staining may include
light shadows, streaks, or discoloration related to previous rusting, mill scale, or
G
coating.
H. Abrasive blast-cleaned surfaces, must be re-blasted if any of the following

F
conditions exist:

PD
Showing unacceptable discoloration or flash rusting after abrasive

cleaning
 Not coated within the same shift as blast cleaning (or within 12 hours of
final abrasive blasting)
 Not meeting the surface cleanliness standard
Page 23
p24

E-30
8.6. Brush-off Blasting (SSPC-SP 7)
A. When specified, abrasive blast any existing coating to be retained and
21
overcoated per SSPC-SP 7/NACE No. 4, to create a profile to adhere the new
coating system. This is intended to roughen the coating for better adhesion of the
topcoat, not to remove the coating.
20
B. Brush-off cleaned surfaces must be free of all visible oil, grease, dirt, dust, loose
rust, loose oxide, loose corrosion product, or loose mill scale when viewed
without magnification. Loose products are those that can be removed with a dull
4/
putty knife.
C. Any bare steel exposed during the brush-off blasting process must be repaired
/1
per the spot prime procedure. Feather edges of existing coating 1” to 2” around
the periphery of exposed steel. Before overcoating, spot prime the exposed steel.
09
9 Coating Mixing and Application
9.1. Before beginning work, set up containment to protect surfaces not to be coated from
overspray and coating drips.
ed
9.2. Before mixing, ensure coating material is within the manufacturer’s recommended
temperature range. Environmental controls may be required to meet project-specific
at
requirements for pot life and cure time.
9.3. Review mix procedures, pot life, expected application speed, and material quantity to
er
minimize waste.
9.4. Mix coatings in strict accordance with the requirements of the appropriate PDS. Once
en
opened, mix liquid coatings at the required ratio as stated by the manufacturer’s PDS
(e.g., partial quantities, full quart, gallon, 5 gallon) unless using cartridges or plural
component spray systems. Mixing of partial kits is allowed.
G
9.5. Mix coatings in a well-ventilated area and use all recommended PPE.
9.6. Thinning is only allowed when specified in a PDS or E-30 series GDS (see Table 1). If
F
thinning is required and authorized, use only the types, brands, and amounts of thinner
PD
stipulated by the coating manufacturer.
9.7. Use the application method and equipment suitable for applying a uniform film of coating
material at the correct thickness. Brushes, rollers, trowels, spray equipment, and
manufacturer approved cartridge systems may be suitable. The coating applicator must
ensure that coating materials remain mixed during application.
9.8. Brush apply a stripe coat to hard-to-reach areas, irregular surfaces, and areas exhibiting
surface imperfections, such as weld, corners, and edges, to work the material into those
surfaces.
Page 24
p25

E-30
9.9. Take wet film thickness (WFT) measurements as needed to verify applied coating is
within manufacturer’s recommended WFT parameters.
21
9.10. Use of two component materials beyond the pot life is prohibited.
9.11. Only apply coatings under specified environmental conditions (e.g., ambient
temperature, dew point, relative humidity, surface temperature). Environmental controls
20
may be required in high wind, dust, and insect areas to protect the coating from
contamination.
4/
9.12. Apply the next coat within the manufacturer recoat window. Abrade the coating surface
before applying next coat if maximum recoat window has exceeded.
/1
10 Inspection
09
10.1. This section provides the minimum requirements for the inspection of the coatings
applied to transmission piping.
10.2. The coating applicator is responsible for the quality of the coating work per this GDS
including monitoring the quality as described in this section and stopping operations
ed
when conditions could adversely affect the quality of the finished work.
10.3. Choose measurement locations based on assessment of work. This typically means
at
performing quality control (QC) measurements in more challenging locations of the work.
10.4. Ensure measurement and test equipment are properly calibrated and in good working
er
condition. For approved measurement tools and calibration requirements, refer to GDS
E-50, “Calibration of Coating Measuring and Test Equipment.”
en
10.5. Ensure storage temperatures are within range of the manufacturer’s PDS.
10.6. At least once per shift before use, perform a white blotter test per ASTM D4285 to verify
G
the cleanliness of compressed air for each compressor system.
10.7. Perform a profile inspection at all blasted surfaces per Method B (depth micrometer) or
Method C (replica tape) of ASTM D4417, “Standard Test Methods for Field
F
Measurement of Surface Profile of Blast Cleaned Steel.” Retention of replica tape is not
PD
required.
10.8. Ensure dry film thickness (DFT) of applied coating meets requirements of the E-30
series GDS. See applicable E-30 series GDSs for measurement frequency.
10.9. Ensure finished coating is smooth and free of application defects (e.g., pinholes,
fisheyes, sags, holidays). Repair is required for excessive drips, running, sagging, or
other discontinuities.
10.10. For epoxy, wax tape coatings, and topcoats, complete a visual inspection over the entire
surface and repair all holidays and other coating defects. If any defect is found from
visual inspection, the coating should be repaired.
Page 25
p26

E-30
10.11. Inspect all coated surfaces including areas under supports, slings, soil plugs, and
cribbing.
21
10.12. For epoxy coatings that will be buried, complete holiday detection inspection over the
entire buried surface and repair all holidays and other coating defects.
10.13. Verify that there is enough cure time for backfill (if applicable), and perform a physical
20
verification of cure (e.g., thumbnail hardness, pencil hardness, shore hardness, chemical
cure test) as applicable for the type of coating used and per manufacturer’s
recommendations.
4/
10.14. Before backfilling, perform a visual inspection to verify applied coating is free of damage
and defects.
/1
10.15. For the riser kit patch coating repair, visually inspect (self-inspection or third-party) and
09
ensure there are no visible air-pockets under the riser kit patch surface.
10.16. Complete and submit Form TD-4185P-01-F01, “Coating Inspection Report.”
11 Repairs
ed
11.1. Make every effort to correct deficient work at the earliest possible time.
at
11.2. Complete repairs per specification requirements.
12 Recordkeeping
er
12.1. Retain records per the Record Retention Schedule.

en
G
F
PD
Page 26
p27

E-30
Target Audience
Personnel from gas transmission and distribution, gas construction, gas pipeline operations and
21
maintenance (GPOM), insulation and coatings (I&C), construction management personnel,
transmission inspectors, gas engineering, standards engineering, corrosion engineering,
integrity management, and other personnel involved in specifying and applying coatings.
20
Definitions
Coating Applicator Qualified personnel holding appropriate OQs who perform the
4/
surface preparation and coating application of protective coating
systems to pipeline segments OR an individual who performs the
work under the span and control of the personnel who holds
/1
appropriate OQs. If required, the applicator also receives coating
manufacturer’s required training.
09
Coating Inspector The qualified coating inspector possesses the appropriate
certification or training for the project. This coating inspector also
possesses required OQs. This inspector cannot be the same person
ed
as the coating applicator, except for when self-inspection is identified
in the subject coating standard. The coating inspection may be part
of the coating application crew.
at
Material manufacturer A company manufacturing specific products or systems applied.
Pipe Any pipe or tubing used in the transportation of gas, including

er
pipe-type holders.
Pipeline All parts of those facilities where gas travels in transportation,

en
including pipe, valves, and other appurtenance attached to pipe,

compressor units, metering stations, regulator stations, delivery
stations, holders, and fabricated assemblies.
G
Quality control (QC) A function providing routine and consistent checks within the process
to ensure integrity and correctness of a product or service. This
F
process works to identify, correct, and prevent errors.

PD
Quality assurance (QA) A process separate from QC, performed by personnel not directly
involved in the process. QA validates controls within this process are
effective in ensuring the quality of product or service meets specified
requirements.
Surface preparers Personnel performing any form of surface preparation to pipeline

segments anytime during a coating project.
Page 27
p28

E-30
Definitions (continued)
Transmission line Any pipeline that operates over 60 pounds per square inch gauge
21
(psig) and is not a gathering line or houseline. Transmission lines are
classified as backbone transmission, local transmission, or
distribution feeder main (DFM) as defined below. For this standard,
local transmission lines and DFMs are grouped together under the
20
term “local transmission lines.”
 Backbone transmission lines transport gas over long distances
from the interconnection points with gathering systems,
4/
interstate pipelines, and storage fields.

/1
Local transmission lines interconnect with backbone
transmission lines or sources of supply.

09
DFMs branch off backbone or local transmission lines and
transport gas to large volume customers or to distribution
systems (which operate at pressures at or below 60 psig).
Compliance Requirement / Regulatory Commitment

ed
Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) Title 49, Transportation of Natural and other Gas by
Pipeline: Minimum Federal Safety Standards, Section §192.461, “External corrosion control:
at
Protective coating”
References
er
ASTM D4285, “Standard Test Method for Indicating Oil or Water in Compressed Air”
en
ASTM D4417, “Standard Test Methods for Field Measurement of Surface Profile of Blast
Cleaned Steel”
Pacific Gas and Electric Company Code of Safe Practices (CSP)

G
Engineering Material Specification 4113, “Specifications for Handling, Storing and Transporting
Bare and Coated Carbon Steel Pipe”
F
Gas Design Standard A-36, “Design & Construction Requirements”

PD
Gas Design Standard E-30, “General Requirements for Coatings for Exposed Transmission
Pipeline”
Gas Design Standard E-30.1, “Mainline Coating Application on Exposed Transmission Pipe”
Gas Design Standard E-30.2, “Crossing Span Coating Application on Exposed Transmission
Pipe”
Gas Design Standard E-30.3,” Coating Application on Exposed Transmission Pipe in Vaults”
Page 28
p29

E-30
References (continued)
Gas Design Standard E-30.3,” Coating Application on Exposed Transmission Pipe in Vaults”
21
Gas Design Standard E-30.4, “Coating Application on Air-to-Soil Transition Zones”
Gas Design Standard E-30.5, “Coating Application on Exposed Gas Transmission Lines in
20
Mechanical Wear Areas”
Gas Design Standard E-30.6, “Coating Application to Miscellaneous Exposed Steel Structures
4/
and Components”
Gas Design Standard E-30.7, “Shop-Applied Coatings on Exposed Piping and Miscellaneous
/1
Components”
Gas Design Standard E-50, “Calibration of Coating Measuring and Test Equipment”
09
Society for Protective Coatings Surface Preparation Standard 1, “Solvent Cleaning”
Society for Protective Coatings Surface Preparation Standard 2, “Hand Tool Cleaning”
ed
Society for Protective Coatings Surface Preparation Standard 3, “Power Tool Cleaning”
at
Society for Protective Coatings Surface Preparation Standard 6. “Commercial Blast Cleaning”
Society for Protective Coatings Surface Preparation Standard 7 / National Association of

er
Corrosion Engineers No. 4, “Brush-Off Blast Cleaning”
Society for Protective Coatings Surface Preparation Standard 10 / National Association of

en
Corrosion Engineers No. 2, “Near-White Blast Cleaning”
Society for Protective Coatings Surface Preparation Standard 11, “Power Tool Cleaning to Bare
Metal”
G
Utility Procedure TD-4640P-01, “Hot Work Control – Fire Prevention”

F
Utility Procedure TD-4711P-01, “Gas Pipe Wrap Removal, Handling, and Disposal”
PD
Utility Standard SAFE-1001S, “Safety and Health Program Standard”
Utility Standard SAFE-2004S, “Asbestos Standard”
Utility Standard SAFE-2005S, “Lead Standard”
Utility Standard SAFE-2006S, “Respiratory Protection Standard”
Utility Standard TD-4008S - Attachment 1, “Covered Task List,”
Page 29
p30

E-30
References (continued)
Utility Standard TD-4181S, “External Corrosion Control of Gas Facilities”
21
Utility Standard TD-4711S, “Natural Gas Pipe Wrap and Flange Gaskets–Removal, Handling,
and Disposal”
20
Appendices
NA
4/
Attachments
/1
NA
09
Revision Notes
Revision 7 has the following changes:
1. Changed GDS title to reflect that GDS provides general requirements, splitting specific
ed
requirements provided in GDS E-30, Rev. 6 into 7 subdocuments.
2. Added new figures in the Section 8, “Surface Preparation.”

at
3. Added Table 2 which cross references common PG&E color to the official SAE-AMS-595
standard.
er
Asset Type: Gas Transmission and Distribution

en
Function: Design, Construction, Maintenance, and Operation
Document Contact: Gas Design Standard Responsibility List

G
F
PD
Page 30
p31

E-30, Rev. 7
21
Document Type Gas Design Standard (GDS)
Workflow Revision
20
1. Why Is the Document Being Written / Revised?
This GDS revision implements a structure change to improve ease of use by keeping the general
4/
requirements for the selection and application of coatings to exposed pipelines with GDS E-30 and
creating subdocuments for application-specific requirements.
/1
2. What Is the Topic (if new) or What Is Changing (if revised)?
09
This document has been completely rewritten. Key changes include:
 Updated title from “Selecting and Applying Coatings on Exposed Gas Piping,” to “General
Requirements for Coatings for Exposed Transmission and Distribution Pipelines.” This change
keeps general requirements in GDS E-30 and moves specific requirements for certain
ed
applications to subdocuments (e.g., coating application for spans to GDS E-30.2, “Coating
Application on Exposed Transmission and Distribution Pipe Spans”).
 Cancels the following utility bulletins associated with GDS E-30:

at
o Utility Bulletin TD-E-30B-001, “New Coating System for Air-to-Soil Transitions.”

er
o Utility Bulletin TD-E-30B-002, “Amerlock 2 or 400 Clarification.”
 Language and structure of the documents have been updated for clarity.
en
 Added new figures in Section 8, “Surface Preparation.”
 Added Table 2 that cross references common PG&E colors to the official SAE-AMS-595 standard.
G
NA
F
PD

PG&E Internal Information © 2020 PG&E Corporation. All rights reserved. Page 1 of 4
Page 31
p32

E-30, Rev. 7
5. Stakeholders
21
20
(or reason if NA)
Corrosion Engineer, Document Steward Bruce Wiskel 09/2020
Corrosion Engineering
Manager, Document Approver Lee Haynes 09/2020
4/
Gas Engineer, Document Coordinator John Heflin 09/2020
Principal Engineer, Lead Engineer Tuesdai Powers 10/2020
/1
Process Safety Senior Gas Process Safety Engineer Megan Noyes 02/2020
09
Operator Qualification Expert Gas Qualification Specialist Jeff Dunham 08/2020
Regulatory Compliance NA – No governing federal or state pipeline regulations
ed
PG&E Academy Senior Learning Strategist Debbie Alton 08/2020
at

er
Applied Technology Services

Senior Advising Coatings Specialist Judy Cheng 01/2020
(ATS)
Supervisor Donald Pomi 01/2020
en
Insulation and Coating (I&C)

Specialist John Gutierrez 01/2020
Gas Training Governance Gas Construction Engineering
Adam Linney 04/2020
Committee (GTGC) Supervisor
G

F
Approvers: John Heflin, Tuesdai Powers, Bruce Wiskel, Lee Haynes

PD

Page 32
p33

E-30, Rev. 7
21
NA
Effective Date: 01/01/2021 (additional effective time provided for large target audience)
20
Corrosion Engineering, with the help of Standards Engineering, will distribute a communication once
published. Corrosion Engineering will also hold meetings and provide training sessions to affected
4/
personnel.
8. Review Frequency
/1
09
9. Cancellations
Document
Title Description Reasons for Cancelation
Number
ed
Provided instructions for a
New Coating System for Incorporated into GDS E-30
TD-E-30B-001 preferred coating system for air-
Air-to-Soil Transitions subdocuments.
to-soil transitions.
Provided clarification for when
at
Amerlock 2/400 Incorporated into GDS E-30

TD-E-30B-002 to use Amerlock 2 or 400
Clarification subdocuments.
protective coating.
er
10. Manuals
Utility Manual TD-4180M, Gas Transmission and Distribution Manual: Corrosion Control Volume
en

Functional Area
G

☒ Distribution Services ☐ Measurement and Control ☐ Storage ☒ Transmission Pipe
F
PD

Page 33
p34

E-30, Rev. 7
Target Audiences
21
Management
20
4/
/1
Engineering
09
and Distribution)
☒ Distribution Engineering ☐ Hydrotesting ☐ Project Management (Transmission and ☒ Transmission Construction
Distribution)
☐ Distribution Integrity Management ☐ Investment Planning ☐ Qualifications ☒ Transmission Engineering

ed
Management
GODOCS
at

☐ As-Builts ☐ Applicant Design Manual ☒ Corrosion Control ☐ Dispatch and Scheduling
☒ Coatings ☐ Asset Knowledge Management ☐ Damage Prevention ☐ Emergency Plans

er

☐ Construction Methods ☐ Distribution Engineering ☐ Field Services (GSRs)
Process
en
☐ Environmental and Safety ☐ Gas Control and Clearances

Specifications
☐ Gas Design Standards for Construction ☒ Gas Design Standards ☐ Leak Survey and Response ☐ Operator Qualifications (OQ)
G
F

PD

Examination (NDE)

Page 34
p35
DOCUMENT NAME: General Requirements for Coatings for Exposed Transmission and Distribution Pipelines
21
DOCUMENT NUMBER: E-30, Rev. 7
20
What is changing?
4/
This gas design standard (GDS) revision implements a structural change to improve ease of use,
consolidating all general coating requirements and creating multiple subdocuments to address specific
/1
requirements that are designed to be used in conjunction with GDS E-30.
This revision cancels Utility Bulletin TD-E-30B-001, “New Coating System for Air-to-Soil Transitions,” and
09
Utility Bulletin TD-E-30-B-002, Amerlock 2 or 400 Clarification.”
 Changed title from, “Selecting and Applying Coatings on Exposed Gas Piping,” to, “General
ed
Requirements for Coatings for Exposed Transmission and Distribution Pipelines.”
 Added Figure 1, Figure 2, Figure 3, and Figure 4 to Section 8.
 Added Table 2 to Section 1 that cross references common colors used by Pacific Gas and Electric
at
Company (PG&E or Company) to the official SAE-AMS-595 standard.

 The following subdocuments have been created to address specific coating requirements:
er
o GDS E-30.1, “Coating Application on Exposed Transmission and Distribution Pipelines,”

incorporates information from the previous version of GDS E-30, providing expanded detail of
specific requirements for liquid coatings on exposed transmission and distribution piping.
en
o GDS E-30.2, “Coating Application on Exposed Transmission and Distribution Pipe Spans,”
provides requirements and specifications for the field application of liquid coatings to exposed
transmission and distribution piping that crosses spans.
G
o GDS E-30.3, “Coating Application on Exposed Transmission and Distribution Pipes in Vaults,”
provides the requirements and specifications for the field application of coatings to pipelines,
valves, and components located in vaults.
F
o GDS E-30.4, “Coating Application on Air-to-Soil Transition Zones,” provides the requirements
and specifications for coating piping under both “sweating” and “non-sweating” conditions.
PD
o GDS E-30.5, “Coating Application on Exposed Gas Transmission and Distribution Lines in
Mechanical Wear Areas,” provides the requirements and specifications for the field application of
coatings to piping that experience high levels of mechanical wear (e.g., pipe support bearing
surfaces, exposed pipes subjected to damage from animals or erosion).
o GDS E-30.6, “Coating Application to Miscellaneous Exposed Structures and Components,”
provides the requirements and specifications for the field application of liquid coatings to
miscellaneous, exposed structures and components that support transmission pipeline
operation, but do not directly convey gas (e.g., structures at compressor stations, storage tank
exteriors, flooring).
What Is Changing (continued)

PG&E Internal Information © 2020 PG&E Corporation. All rights reserved. 1 of 2
Page 35
p36
o GDS E-30.7, “Shop-Applied Coatings on Exposed Piping and Miscellaneous Components,”

provides requirements and specifications for the shop application of coating exposed to steel
transmission piping and miscellaneous components (e.g., valves, regulators).
21
Why does it matter?
20
This revision improves ease-of-use by providing the general requirements for coating selection and
application and focusing specific requirements for different aspects of coating application in the new
subdocuments.
4/
Required Action
/1
Target audience must review and become familiar with the contents of this GDS and all associated
subdocuments.
Tailboard sign-off is required for GDS E-30, but not for subdocuments. Tailboard sign-off for specific
09
subdocuments may be performed for groups that frequently perform the specific work described in those
subdocuments.
Tools and Training

ed
NA
Timeline
at
Date Activity
er

01/01/2021 Tailboard by date.
en
G
F
PD

Page 36
p37
Utility Standard: TD-4008S
Attachment Publication Date: 10/21/2020 Effective Date: 11/20/2020 Rev: 0a
Operator Qualification Program Requirements
Attachment 1, Gas Operator Qualification Abnormal Operating Conditions (AOC)
21
Definition Abnormal operating condition means a condition identified by the operator
that might indicate a malfunction of a component or deviation from
normal operations that might do one or both of the following:
20
 Indicate a condition exceeding design limits.
 Result in a hazard to persons, property, or the environment.
4/
Introduction Examples of abnormal operating conditions that personnel must recognize
/1
and react to include, but are not limited to, those listed below.
09
Pressure-Related  Uncontrolled or unauthorized leakage of natural gas
Conditions
 Pipeline pressure deviations exceeding design limits
 Conditions requiring shutdown or pressure reduction in a pipeline
ed
Material /  Material failure or defect
at
Equipment Failure
Conditions  Malfunctioning component or component failure
 Loss of protection on the pipeline
er
 Low or high odorant

en
Facility Damage  Pipeline system damage

Conditions
 Unintended movement or abnormal loading on the pipeline
G
Facility  Emergency alarms

F
Instrumentation or
Control Systems  Activation of a pipeline safety device
PD
Conditions  Unexplained gas facility status change
REVISION NOTES
Where? What Changed?
Material / Equipment Added “low or high odorant”
Failure Conditions
section
Page 37
p38
Publication Date: 07/16/14 Effective Date: 01/01/16 Rev: 0a
Internal Corrosion Control of Gas Facilities
SUMMARY
21
This utility standard establishes internal corrosion control requirements for Pacific Gas and
Electric Company (Company) owned gas transmission, gathering, storage, and metallic
distribution facilities.
20
TARGET AUDIENCE
Personnel performing or supervising internal corrosion control work.
4/
SAFETY
/1
Potential hazards impacting the requirements governed by this standard include, but are not
limited to, the following conditions:
09
 Chemical hazards
 Electrical hazards
ed
 Traffic conditions
 Construction sites
at
 Environmental surroundings
er
en
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION TITLE PAGE

G
1 General ............................................................................................................. 2
2 Design and Construction of Transmission Lines ................................................ 8
F
3 Monitoring and Routine Maintenance ................................................................ 9

4 Mitigation......................................................................................................... 12
PD
5 Idle Pipelines and Dead Legs .......................................................................... 12

6 Distribution Assets .......................................................................................... 12
7 Program Review.............................................................................................. 12
8 Records........................................................................................................... 13
PG&E Internal ©2021 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved. Page 1 of 17
Page 38
p39
REQUIREMENTS
21
1 General
Metallic pipelines must be protected from internal corrosion in accordance with the Code of
Federal Regulations (CFR), Title 49, Part 192, Subpart I, “Requirements for Corrosion
20
Control.”
 49 CFR 192.475 “Internal corrosion control: General”
4/
 49 CFR 192.476 “Internal corrosion control: Design and construction of transmission
/1
line”
 49 CFR 192.477 “Internal corrosion control: Monitoring”
09
1.1 Investigating Corrosive Gas
Corrosive gas may not be transported by pipeline, unless the corrosive effect of the gas on the
ed
pipeline has been investigated and steps have been taken to minimize internal corrosion.
[49 CFR 192.475 “Internal corrosion control: General” (a)]
The corrosive effect of gas on pipelines is investigated through the following:

at
1. Gas Testing
er
Gas testing at gas receipt points (including from storage, gathering, and production
lines) must be performed to detect the presence of potentially corrosive constituents
en
and determine if additional monitoring is needed. Gas testing may consist of continual
monitoring using gas chromatographs, sample collection and subsequent analysis in a
laboratory, or field testing using stain tubes or equivalent. Tests should measure the
concentration of carbon dioxide (CO2), hydrogen sulfide (H2S), oxygen and water vapor
G
present in the gas stream. See Gas Utility Standard TD-4580S, “Natural Gas Quality,”
for additional information if needed.
F
a. Sample Collection and Analysis

PD
Gas testing must be performed at gas receipt points. Testing for water vapor,
H2S and CO2 content should be performed annually, at a minimum. Additional
gas testing frequencies and constituents may be required at the discretion of
corrosion services. Acceptable gas sampling methods include gas
chromatography, sample bottle collection, stain tubes, or equivalent. See Utility
Work Procedure WP4300-18, “Sampling Natural Gas,” for additional information
if needed.
Page 39
p40
Section 1.1 (continued)
21
b. Results Interpretation
Gas testing results must be reviewed by corrosion services against the criteria
20
presented in Table 1 to determine if additional corrosion investigation is
necessary. The Gas Quality Department must notify corrosion services of gas
quality testing results that exceed the criteria in Table 1 as reported by online
monitoring systems within two weeks. Additional investigation may include
4/
checking for the presence of liquid, performing water testing, performing
corrosion rate monitoring, and obtaining duplicate samples.
/1
Table 1. Criteria for Additional Corrosion Investigation based on Gas Testing.
09
Constituent Criteria
More than 0.25 grains of H2S, measured as H2S, per one hundred standard
H2S
cubic feet (4 parts per million [ppm])
CO2 More than 1% by volume of CO2
ed
More than 7 pounds of water vapor per million standard cubic feet (MMscf) at
H2O 800 pounds per square inch gauge (psig) or less; dew point over 20 degrees
Fahrenheit if gas is supplied at over 800 psig
at
Note: The limit values in this table are generally coming from tariff limits for merchantable
gas. Additional scientific assessments are required to determine what values are necessary
er
to create a potentially corrosive environment.

en
c. Records
Data from gas chromatographs must be maintained by gas operations. Gas

G
spot testing locations and results must be maintained by the associated facility.
A copy of the records must be sent to corrosion services annually.
F
2. Liquid and Solid Sampling

PD
NOTE
The Company considers gas to be corrosive if it contains a combination of gas and

other contaminants in the presence of free (liquid) water or other electrolyte which
may result in metal loss that is considered to be significant by corrosion services.
Compressor oil is not considered a potentially corrosive contaminant.
Liquid sampling must be performed to monitor for the presence of potentially corrosive
constituents and to determine if additional monitoring is needed.
Page 40
p41
Section 1.1.2 (continued)
21
a. Identifying Appropriate Sampling Locations
Liquid samples must be collected as part of maintenance activities on an
20
opportunistic basis, including during separator maintenance, during drip
blowing, during bottom tap drainage, following maintenance pigging, and during
any other activities where liquids may be sampled. Liquid samples may also be
collected from strategic locations selected by corrosion services.
4/
b. Evaluating Locations Exceeding Water Vapor Criteria for the Presence of
/1
Liquids
Well sites upstream of Company pipelines that have the potential to contain
09
standing liquids or contain gas with greater than 7 pounds per MMscf of water
vapor (i.e., downstream of a wet well, but upstream of dehydration facilities)
should be evaluated for the presence of liquids. The results of these
evaluations are recorded on Gas Utility Form TD-4186P-100-F01, “Liquid
ed
Sampling Log.”
c. Frequency
at
Liquid samples must be collected as follows:

er
Except for situations of repeated exposures of the same internal surface

during a completion of a task or in a short period, when a gas pipeline,
vessel, pig trap, meter tube, or tank is opened a liquid sample must be
en
collected when sufficient volume is available. Some internal surfaces

(e.g., pig launchers/receivers, meter tubes, gas filters) may be
repeatedly exposed several times over a short period of time in the
completion of a task. In situations that fall under these parameters,
G
contact corrosion services for a recommended sampling frequency.
 At drips and bottom taps annually, at a minimum. See Section 3,

F
“Monitoring and Routine Maintenance.”

PD
 Following the first cleaning pig run performed as part of routine

maintenance or in-line inspection. See Gas Utility Procedure TD-4186P-
400, “Internal Corrosion Control: Mitigation.”
 Whenever a pipeline is cut open or removed from the line and there is a
capturable amount of liquid for sampling.
 IF an upset condition is known to have occurred,
THEN a reasonable effort should be made to locate and obtain a liquid

sample for analysis.
Page 41
p42
Section 1.1.2.c (continued)
21
 Depending on corrosion monitoring results or other considerations,
Corrosion Engineering may designate a gas stream in a section of
piping as corrosive. In the absence of other monitoring the location must
20
be sampled twice per calendar year, but not to exceed 7-1/2 months to
the date. However, corrosion services may recommend more frequent
sampling.
4/
 At the discretion of corrosion services.
/1
d. Sample Collection and Analysis
Liquids must be collected and evaluated according to the procedure described
09
in Gas Utility Procedure TD-4186P-100, “Liquid and Solid Sampling and
Testing.”
e. Results Interpretation
ed
(1) Liquid sample analysis results must be reviewed to determine if
additional monitoring or investigation is necessary.
at
 IF liquid sample collection identifies water via a positive

indication on water finding paper in the field or subsequent lab
er
analysis determines a water content greater than 5% by volume

and lab test results exceed any of the criteria in Table 2 below,
en
THEN an internal corrosion mitigation plan must be developed.

(See Section 4)
 IF liquid sample collection identifies water via a positive

G
indication on water finding paper in the field or subsequent lab

analysis determines a water content greater than 5% by volume
and lab test results DO NOT exceed any of the criteria in Table 2
F
below,
PD
THEN further review may be needed as determined by corrosion

services.
 IF the field water test does not indicate free water and the results
of the laboratory tests do not indicate a concentration of water in
the sample greater than 5%,
THEN the sample is considered non-corrosive and no further

action is indicated.
Page 42
p43
Section 1.1.2.e (continued)
21
Table 2. Criteria for Additional Corrosion Investigation based on Liquid Analysis, prioritized order.
Constituent Criteria
Bacteria Greater than 1000 counts/mL (4th bottle indication and
20
(via serial dilution) higher)
pH Less than or equal to 4.3 as measured in water sample
Fe Greater than 100 mg/l in water sample
Fe/Mn Ratio Fe greater than 100 mg/l in water sample and Fe/Mn ratio
4/
(approximates ratio of steel) between 0.64 – 1.24 for older
steel or 0.64 – 1.64 for newer steel.
/1
Cl- Greater than 30,000 ppm
Inhibitor Vendor specified
09
(2) Liquid sample analysis results must be compared to other analysis
results from the same location. Significant deviations from the average
composition or the previous sample may warrant additional corrosion
ed
investigation. Additional investigation may include review of operating
conditions, gas sample collection, and corrosion rate monitoring (see
Gas Utility Procedure TD-4186P-300, “Internal Corrosion Control:
at
Corrosion Rate Monitoring.”)
f. Records
er
 Evaluations for the presence of liquids and liquid sampling results must
be recorded on Gas Utility Form TD-4186P-100-F01, “Liquid Sampling
en
Log,” and, where applicable, on Gas Utility Form TD-4186P-400-F01,

“Evaluation and Mitigation Plan for Internal Corrosion Assessment.”

G
A record of all liquid sample collection locations and results must be

kept by the associated facility.
 A copy of all records must be sent to corrosion services annually per

F
Section 8, “Records.”
PD
3. Mitigation
See Section 4 for mitigation planning.
Page 43
p44
1.2 Inspecting Internal Surface of Pipes
21
1. Whenever any pipe is removed from a pipeline for any reason, or whenever the interior
surface of the pipeline is exposed, the internal surface must be inspected for evidence
of corrosion.
20
a. IF internal corrosion is found,
THEN the following actions must be taken:
4/
(1) The adjacent pipe must be investigated to determine the extent of
/1
internal corrosion.
(2) Replacement must be made to the extent required by the applicable
09
remedial measures paragraphs of 49 CFR 192.485, “Remedial
measures: Transmission lines”, 49 CFR 192.487, “Remedial measures:
Distribution lines other than cast iron or ductile iron lines” , or 49 CFR
192.489, “Remedial measures: Cast iron or ductile iron pipelines”.
ed
(3) Steps must be taken to minimize the internal corrosion. [49 CFR
192.475(b)]
at
2. Periodically inspect facilities that are opened on a periodic basis such as:

er
Sand Caps
 Filter separators
en
 In-line inspection (ILI) launchers and receivers
3. The following documents comply with the above requirements:

G
 Gas Utility Form TD-4110P-03-F01, “Leak Repair, Inspection, and Gas

Quarterly Incident Report (A-Form)”
F
 Gas Utility Procedure TD-4186P-300, “Internal Corrosion Control: Corrosion

PD
Rate Monitoring”
 Gas Utility Procedure TD-4186P-400, “Internal Corrosion Control: Mitigation”
 Gas Utility Procedure TD-4100P-05, “Selection of Steel Gas Pipeline Repair

Methods”
Page 44
p45
2 Design and Construction of Transmission Lines
21
[49 CFR 192.476)
2.1 Design and Construction: Except as provided in Section 2.2 below, each new transmission line
20
and each replacement of line pipe, valve, fitting, or other line component in a transmission line
must have features incorporated into its design and construction to reduce the risk of internal
corrosion. At a minimum, unless it is impracticable or unnecessary to do so, each new
transmission line or replacement of line pipe, valve, fitting, or other line component in a
4/
transmission line must meet the following: [49 CFR 192.476(a)] (See Section 2.5.)
/1
1. Be configured to reduce the risk that liquids will collect in the line.
[49 CFR 192.476(a)(1)]
09
2. Have effective liquid removal features whenever the configuration would allow liquids
to collect. [49 CFR 192.476(a)(2)]
3. Allow the use of devices for monitoring internal corrosion at locations with significant
ed
potential for internal corrosion. [49 CFR 192.476(a)(3)]
2.2 Exceptions to Applicability: The design and construction requirements of Section 2.1 above do
not apply to pipeline installed or line pipe, valve, fitting or other line component replaced before
at
May 23, 2007. [49 CFR 192.476(b)]
2.3 Change to Existing Transmission Line: When an operator changes the configuration of a
er
transmission line, the operator must evaluate the impact of the change on internal corrosion
risk to the downstream portion of an existing transmission line and provide for removal of
en
liquids and monitoring of internal corrosion as appropriate. [49 CFR 192.476(c)]
2.4 Design and Construction Records: Records must be maintained demonstrating compliance
with this section. Provided the records show why incorporating design features addressing
G
2.1.1, 2.1.2, or 2.1.3 of this section is impracticable or unnecessary, this requirement may be
fulfilled through written procedures supported by as-built drawings or other construction
records. [49 CFR 192.476(d)]
F
2.5 The following documents comply with the above requirements:

PD
1. New or replaced pipelines must follow applicable gas design standards including the
following:
 Gas Design Standard A-34, “Piping Design and Test Requirements”
 Gas Design Standard A-05, “Piggable Pipeline”
Page 45
p46
21
2. Gas Utility Procedure TD-4186P-200, “Internal Corrosion Control Design Review,”
must be followed whenever a new transmission, gathering, or storage pipeline is
designed or an existing one is modified. Prior to construction, corrosion services must
20
review the design for internal corrosion threat and complete the Internal Corrosion
Review Stamp (Figure 1) applied to transmission line construction drawings.
4/
INTERNAL CORROSION (IC)
DESIGN & CONSTRUCTION REVIEW
/1
IC Threat YES NO
09
(Per RMP-16)
IC Review Completed By
LAN ID Date
(Corrosion Engineer or Designate)
ed
Corrosion engineering has reviewed
this design and incorporated any
at
necessary IC design and construction

considerations. Documentation of the
review and actions taken are in the
er
job package and incorporated in this

design.
en
EDRS Routing Number:
Figure 1. Internal Corrosion Review Stamp

G
3 Monitoring and Routine Maintenance
3.1 Monitoring [49 CFR 192.477]

F
IF corrosive gas is being transported,

PD
THEN coupons or other suitable means must be used to determine the effectiveness of steps
taken to minimize internal corrosion. Each coupon or other means of monitoring internal
corrosion must be checked two times per calendar year, but with intervals not exceeding 7-1/2
months to the date. [49 CFR 192.477]
 Refer to Gas Utility Procedure TD-4186-300, “Internal Corrosion: Corrosion Rate

Monitoring,” for corrosion rate monitoring device selection, placement, result
interpretation, and records.
Page 46
p47
21
 Electrical resistance probes and permanently mounted ultrasonic thickness (UT)
probes must be read and recorded, at a minimum, two times per calendar year at
intervals not to exceed 7-1/2 months to the date, unless indicated otherwise by
20
corrosion services. Readings must continue for the life of the system or until the probe
is retired from service.
 Corrosion rate monitoring coupons must be installed for 1 month at a minimum, but
4/
must be changed two times per calendar year at intervals not to exceed 7-1/2 months
to the date.
/1
 Corrosion rate monitoring for the effectiveness of mitigation must be performed two
times per calendar year at intervals not to exceed 7-1/2 months to the date.
09
3.2 Routine Maintenance
Routine maintenance activities must be performed to minimize the potential for corrosive
ed
conditions within the pipeline system. These activities must be performed in addition to
corrosion mitigation activities and in locations where active corrosion has not been identified.
1. Drips
at
Drip maintenance is vital to maintaining the integrity of drips. Routine drip blowing must
er
be performed to remove liquids that have accumulated in drips.
a. Frequency.
en
 Drips must be blown annually, at a minimum.
 IF 500 ml or more of liquid is present,

G
THEN drips must be blown bi-monthly, not to exceed 2-1/2

months to the date, unless indicated otherwise by corrosion
F
services.
PD
 IF a drip is found dry (less than 500 ml of liquid) for 6

consecutive inspections,
THEN the drip can be blown once each calendar year, not to
exceed 15 month intervals.
 A damaged or malfunctioning drip tube must be repaired or removed

within 3 years, not to exceed 39 months to the date unless exempted by
corrosion services.
Page 47
p48
21
b. Sampling.
Samples must be collected if liquids are present when drips are blown.
20
Samples must be collected, tested, and results interpreted according to Section
1.1.2 and Gas Utility Procedure TD-4186P-100, “Internal Corrosion - Liquid and
Solid Sampling.”
4/
c. Documentation.
/1
Drip blowing information must be recorded on Gas Utility Form TD-4186P-100-
F01, “Liquid Sampling Log.” A copy of each record must be sent to corrosion
services annually.
09
2. Bottom Taps
Bottom tap drainage is required to decrease the amount of liquids present in the
ed
pipelines.
a. Frequency.
at
 Bottom taps must be drained annually, at a minimum.
 IF 500 ml or more of liquid is present,

er
THEN bottom taps must be blown bi-monthly, not to exceed

en
2-1/2 months to the date, unless indicated otherwise by

corrosion services.
 IF a bottom tap is found dry (less than 500 ml of liquid) for 6

G
consecutive inspections,
THEN the bottom tap can be drained once each calendar year,
F
not to exceed 15 month intervals to the date.

PD
 A damaged or malfunctioning bottom tap must be repaired or removed

within 3 years, not to exceed 39 months to the date unless exempted by
corrosion services.
b. Sampling.
Samples must be collected if liquids are present when bottom taps are drained.
Samples must be collected, tested, and results interpreted according to Section
1.1.2 and Gas Utility Procedure TD-4186P-100, “Internal Corrosion - Liquid and
Solid Sampling.”
Page 48
p49
21
c. Documentation.
Bottom tap drainage information must be recorded on Gas Utility Form TD-
4186P-100-F01, “Liquid Sampling Log.” A copy of each record must be sent to
20
corrosion services annually.
4 Mitigation
4/
Internal corrosion mitigation plans must be developed as described in Gas Utility Procedure
TD-4186P-400, “Internal Corrosion Control: Mitigation.”
/1
5 Idle Pipelines and Dead Legs
09
5.1 Swift retirement of idle pipelines that contain liquids is strongly recommended. Retiring idle
pipelines significantly reduces the risk of internal corrosion in those lines and therefore
eliminates the need to treat these idle pipelines with other corrosion methods.
ed
5.2 Operational dead legs (i.e., those which have no flow because of shut valves) should be
flushed annually, if practical.
at
6 Distribution Assets
Identification and removal of internal corrosive conditions on transmission assets greatly

er
reduces the internal corrosion threat on distribution assets. Periodic reviews of internal
corrosion issues such as liquid upsets, internal corrosion leaks, and identification of liquids
en
must be considered in any further investigations on distribution assets.
7 Program Review
G
Corrosion services must perform an annual review of activities and the data related to internal
corrosion of gas transmission, gathering, and storage lines at the end of each year as
described in Gas Utility Procedure TD-4186P-500, “Internal Corrosion Control: Annual Review
F
Process.”
PD
Page 49
p50
8 Records
21
8.1 Corrosion control records must be maintained as described in Gas Utility Standard TD-4180S,
“General Corrosion Control of Gas Facilities.”
20
Divisions and districts must retain internal corrosion records (monitoring records,
sampling analyses and data sheets) as long as the pipeline remains in service.
 Divisions and districts must send copies of internal corrosion records to corrosion
4/
services annually. However, if districts or divisions encounter a condition that is urgent
or notably unusual (e.g., outside established criteria), corrosion services must be
/1
notified immediately.
 Refer to the various internal corrosion procedures for specific record keeping
09
requirements, if needed.
 Refer to Section 2.4 for design and construction records, if needed.

ed
8.2 Retain records per the Records Retention Schedule.
END of Requirements
at
DEFINITIONS
er
Bottom Tap: Tap installed at the bottom of a pipeline designed to drain and remove liquids.
Corrosion: The deterioration of a substance, usually metal, resulting from a reaction with its
en
environment.
Corrosion Coupon: A small, carefully weighed and measured specimen of metal that
provides a means of monitoring and measuring corrosivity within a system. By observing the
G
milli-inches per year (mpy) corrosion rate of an exposed coupon, information can be gained
regarding the material's life expectancy.
F
Corrosion Rate: The time rate of change of corrosion. It is typically expressed as depth of
wall loss per unit time, or milli-inches per year (mpy).
PD
Corrosometer: See Electrical Resistance (ER) Probes.
Dead Legs: Sections of pipe through which there is no flow. Dead legs may vary in length
from a few feet to several hundred feet. A dead leg may be present all of the time or
intermittently depending on pipeline operations. Dead legs are more susceptible to internal
corrosion than flowing pipelines because liquid and solids that enter the dead leg have no
means of being removed.
Drips: A device intended to facilitate the removal of liquids, sampling of liquids, or both.
Page 50
p51
Electrical Resistance (ER) Probes: An electronic probe that determines metal loss over time
by measuring the increase in the resistance of the electrode as its cross-sectional area is
21
reduced by corrosion. The resistance of the electrode is then compared with the resistance of
the standard, non-exposed electrode.
20
Liquid: A substance that tends to maintain a fixed volume but not a fixed shape.
Pitting: Cavities formed in the surface of a material caused by corrosion.
4/
IMPLEMENTATION RESPONSIBILITIES
/1
Corrosion services ensures all impacted personnel are aware of this standard.
Superintendents and supervisors communicate this standard to personnel who perform
09
internal corrosion control work and ensure that personnel are trained and qualified to perform
these tasks.
GOVERNING DOCUMENT
ed
Gas Utility Standard TD-4180S, “General Corrosion Control of Gas Facilities”
COMPLIANCE REQUIREMENT / REGULATORY COMMITMENT

at
49 CFR 192.475 “Internal corrosion control: General”

er
49 CFR 192.476 “Internal corrosion control: Design and construction of transmission line”
49 CFR 192.477 “Internal corrosion control: Monitoring”

en
49 CFR 192.485, “Remedial measures: Transmission lines”

G
49 CFR 192.487, “Remedial measures: Distribution lines other than cast iron or ductile iron
lines”
49 CFR 192.489, “Remedial measures: Cast iron or ductile iron pipelines”

F
PD
Page 51
p52
REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
21
Developmental References:
49 CFR 192, Subpart I, “Requirements for Corrosion Control”
20
NACE SP0106-2006, “Control of Internal Corrosion in Steel Pipelines and Piping Systems”
Supplemental References:
4/
Gas Transmission and Distribution Manual: Corrosion Control Volume
/1
Gas Design Standard A-05, “Piggable Pipeline”
Gas Design Standard A-34, “Piping Design and Test Requirements”
09
Gas Utility Standard D-S0353/S4112, “Physical Inspection of Pipelines, Mains and Services”
Gas Utility Procedure TD-4100P-05, “Selection of Steel Gas Pipeline Repair Methods”
ed
Gas Utility Procedure TD-4110P-03, “Performing and Documenting Leak Survey”
Gas Utility Procedure TD-4412P-07, “Patrolling Pipelines”

at
Gas Utility Procedure TD-4186P-100, “Liquid and Solid Sampling and Testing Procedure”
er
Gas Utility Procedure TD-4186P-200, “Internal Corrosion Control: Design Review”
Gas Utility Procedure TD-4186P-300, “Internal Corrosion Control: Corrosion Rate Monitoring”
en
Gas Utility Procedure TD-4186P-400, “Internal Corrosion Control: Mitigation”
Gas Utility Procedure TD-4186P-500, “Internal Corrosion Control: Annual Review Process”
G
Gas Utility Form TD-4110P-03-F01, “Leak Repair, Inspection, and Gas Quarterly Incident
Report (A-Form)”
F
Gas Utility Standard TD-4580S, “Natural Gas Quality,”

PD
Gas Utility Procedure TD-4580P-07, “Gas Quality Monitoring and Response”
Utility Work Procedure WP4300-18, “Sampling Natural Gas,”
Utility Work Procedure WP4330-02, “Removal and Control of Liquids from Gas Pipelines and
Maintenance and Operation of Associated Gas Conditioning Equipment”
Gas Rule 21, “Transportation of Natural Gas”
Risk Management Procedure RMP-16, “Threat Identification”
Page 52
p53
APPENDICES
21
NA
ATTACHMENTS
20
NA
DOCUMENT RECISION
4/
Gas Design Standard O-16, “Corrosion Control of Gas Facilities” is being replaced by the
/1
following document set:
 Gas Utility Standard TD-4180S, “General Corrosion Control of Gas Facilities”
09
 Gas Utility Standard TD-4181S, “External Corrosion Control of Gas Facilities”
 Gas Utility Standard TD-4186S, “Internal Corrosion Control of Gas Facilities”

ed
 Gas Utility Standard TD-4188S, “Atmospheric Corrosion Control of Gas Facilities”
 Gas Utility Procedure TD-4181P-101, “Cathodic Protection Area (CPA) Design and
at
Modification”
 Gas Utility Procedure TD-4181P-201, “Cathodic Protection Monitoring and Restoration”

er
 Gas Utility Procedure TD-4181P-202, “Cathodic Overprotection”

en
 Gas Utility Procedure TD-4181P-301, “Rectifier Maintenance and Adjustment”
 Gas Utility Procedure TD-4186P-100, “Internal Corrosion Control: Liquid and Solid
G
Sampling and Testing”
 Gas Utility Procedure TD-4186P-200, “Internal Corrosion Control: Design Review”

F
 Gas Utility Procedure TD-4186P-300, “Internal Corrosion Control: Corrosion Rate

PD
Monitoring”
 Gas Utility Procedure TD-4186P-500, “Internal Corrosion Control: Annual Program

Review”
Page 53
p54
DOCUMENT APPROVER
21
Sumeet Singh, Vice President, Asset and Risk Management
DOCUMENT OWNER
20
Keldon Cox, Gas Engineer, Standards and Procedures
DOCUMENT CONTACT
4/
Jonathan Rigotti, Senior Corrosion Engineer, Corrosion Engineering Services
/1
REVISION NOTES
09
Revision 0a
Records Added records retention statement.
ed
Revision 0
All This is a new utility standard replacing the internal corrosion control
requirements portion of Gas Design Standard O-16, “Corrosion Control of
Gas Facilities.”
at
O-16 is being updated and rewritten to comply with the new Company
guidance document requirements, and is being reorganized and
er
expanded into the following four standards with multiple procedures under
each standard:
 General corrosion control
en
 External corrosion control

G
 Internal corrosion control
 Atmospheric corrosion control

F
See the Guidance Document Analysis for details.

PD
Page 54
p55
Utility Procedure: TD-4186P-100
Internal Corrosion Control: Liquid and Solid Sampling and Testing
SUMMARY
21
This utility procedure describes steps for sampling and testing liquids and solids from Pacific
Gas and Electric Company (PG&E or Company) gas pipeline systems for internal corrosion
evaluation. Chemical and bacteria analysis of the samples is used to evaluate internal
20
corrosion activity and the effectiveness of internal corrosion control.
This utility procedure applies to liquid and solid sampling.
4/
Level of Use: Informational Use
/1
TARGET AUDIENCE
Personnel engaged in or supervising liquid and solid sampling and testing from gas pipeline
09
systems.
SAFETY
ed
Potential hazards impacting this work include, but are not limited to, chemical hazards.
BEFORE YOU START

at
Personal Protective Equipment (PPE)
The following PPE must be worn by field personnel (or must be available for use if
er
indicated) along with other applicable PPE as specified in the Code of Safe Practices.
 Gloves (latex or nitrile)

en
 Respirator or mask (must be available)

G
Operator Qualifications (OQ)
This procedure contains covered tasks requiring qualifications. Please consult the
F
PG&E gas qualifications task list or contact the Gas Qualifications department for
covered task information, including date available and effective dates.
PD
Collection Equipment
 See Appendix A, “Equipment Checklist.”
 Place a dedicated sample refrigerator in the shop facility, if possible. Use this
refrigerator only for samples.
 Request blank labels from Applied Technology Services (ATS).
Page 55
p56
TABLE OF CONTENTS
21
SUBSECTION TITLE PAGE
1 General ............................................................................................................. 2
20
2 Collecting Liquids .............................................................................................. 4
3 Collecting Solids................................................................................................ 4
4/
4 Storage and Transfer ........................................................................................ 5
5 Records............................................................................................................. 7
/1
Appendix A, Equipment Checklist ...................................................................................... 11
09
PROCEDURE STEPS
1 General
ed
WARNING
at
Injury may result from improper disposal of hazardous waste and sharps.
er
1.1 Dispose of hazardous liquid waste, solid waste, and sharps (needles, broken glass) properly.
 Maintain separate containers for liquid waste, solid waste, and sharps throughout field
en
testing.
 Solid waste is not permitted in the liquid waste container, including ampoules
G
containing liquid.
1.2 To reduce potential contamination and limit dissolved gasses being released, keep sample
F
bottle capped unless actively withdrawing a sample.

PD
1.3 When recording liquid levels, keep the liquid container level and read the center of the
meniscus at eye level.
Page 56
p57
1.4 Label each container with the same information. The label must include:
21
 Name and LAN ID of personnel performing the sampling
 Sampling location
20
 Date and time sampled
 Pipeline number
4/
 Approximate mile point
/1
1.5 By default, district or division personnel obtain or draw the samples. Circumstances may
require other personnel to collect samples.
09
1.6 Sample at a drip or other sampling location where liquids or solids are present in the pipeline.
1.7 Track sampling and testing with Form 62-1174, “Chain of Custody Record,” and either Form
ed
TD-4186P-100-F01, “Liquid Sampling Log,” or Form TD-4186P-100-F02, “ILI Sampling Log.”
1. Complete Form 62-1174, with the following information:

at
a. Contact information for personnel delivering the sample.

er
b. Destination facility (see Step 4.3).
c. Requested turnaround time on tests.

en
d. Information for each sample (up to 12 different samples can be included on this
form). This is important, so the test data can be identified with the proper
sample.
G
e. Tests to be performed on each sample (see Step 4.4).

F
f. Accounting information for laboratory test billing.

PD
g. Recipients of results. Include corrosion services representative at a minimum.
2. For in-line inspection (ILI) projects, complete Form TD-4186P-100-F02. For all others,
complete Form TD-4186P-100-F01.
Page 57
p58
2 Collecting Liquids
21
2.1 Prepare two new Nalgene or equivalent sample containers, caps, and labels, per Step 1.4:
 One 60 mL container for bacteria testing
20
 One 500 mL container for the remainder of the testing
2.2 Blow the system for several seconds into an appropriate container (e.g., truck, drum, bucket),
4/
removing striated material so the sample closely resembles the bulk fluid composition.
/1
1. IF only a small amount of liquid is expected,
THEN collect the liquid directly as a sample.
09
2. As needed, retrofit the line so that the sample may be collected into the container.
3. IF an intermediate device is used to capture the liquids before depositing them into the
ed
sample container,
THEN clean and sterilize the intermediate device with alcohol after each sample is
taken to prevent contamination.
at
2.3 Fill both bottles to the top with liquid to eliminate air (if sufficient volume of liquid is present)
and secure the lids tightly.
er
 If insufficient liquids are present to fill both bottles, fill the 500 mL bottles first and do
en
not use the 60 mL bottle.
2.4 Record sampling on Form 62-1174, and Form TD-4186P-100-F01 or Form TD-4186P-100-
F02.
G
3 Collecting Solids
F
NOTE
PD
Types of solid samples include solids in the form of debris; scale or deposits; sludge;
and biofilms or slime.
3.1 When possible, isolate and collect in separate containers samples that display different
properties, such as color, texture, density, or composition.
3.2 Prepare a new, clean 250 mL sample container or plastic 8-ounce sample bag, such as a
Whirl PakR.
 Label per Step 1.4.
Page 58
p59
3.3 Collect solids with a sterile tongue depressor or clean stainless steel spatula that has been
sterilized with an alcohol swab.
21
 Hard tenacious deposits may be scraped off the pipe or vessel surface.
20
IF a sample is originally moist,
THEN protect it from drying out by completely filling an air-tight container with sample.
4/
 IF a plastic bag is being used to contain the sample,
/1
THEN squeeze the bag to eliminate the air after sampling and seal the bag.
 Identify where the sample is being collected and look carefully for any difference in
09
color, texture, density, or composition in the solid materials present inside the piping.
For different materials, multiple solid or sludge samples may be required.
3.4 Record sampling on Form 62-1174.

ed
4 Storage and Transfer
4.1 Before delivery to ATS, store the containers in a cool dark environment (approximately 40°F),
at
if possible. Do not freeze the containers or store them in a location containing food.
er
4.2 Check for specific Company rules governing the transportation of the samples. Follow labeling
and packaging requirements for shipping hazardous materials.
en
4.3 As early as possible, inform ATS laboratory personnel that the sample will be delivered for
testing.
1. Primary contact: Elgin Moreton

G
PG&E ATS
3400 Crow Canyon Road, San Ramon, CA 94583
Office: (925) 866-5520
F
Mobile: (650) 515-6419

E-mail: EPM8@pge.com
PD
2. Alternate contact: Surinder Sidhu

PG&E ATS
3400 Crow Canyon Road, San Ramon, CA 94583
Office: (925) 866-5245
E-mail: SKSG@pge.com
Page 59
p60
4.4 On Form 62-1174, request the following tests.
21
1. Liquid samples:
a. Water content (% by volume).
20
(1) IF greater than 1% water by volume is detected in the sample,
THEN analyze for the following:
4/
 pH
/1
 Specific gravity
09
 Total dissolved solids (TDS)
b. Iron (Fe), Manganese (Mn), Chloride (Cl-).

ed
c. Presence of bacteria.
 Request that bacteria test results be sent separately from the rest of the
results.
at
d. California State Administrative Manual (SAM) list of 17 metals that can qualify
er
waste as hazardous.
NOTE
en
Preferred techniques for performing solid sample analysis are provided; however,
alternative techniques yielding similar information are permitted.
G
2. Solid samples:
a. Elemental composition. Preferred technique: energy dispersive spectroscopy.

F
b. Crystalline material identification. Preferred technique: X-ray powder diffraction.

PD
4.5 Transfer the sample to the lab.
1. Deliver the sample to the contact[s] listed in Step 4.3.
2. For the most accurate test results, deliver samples to ATS on ice within 24 hours of
taking the sample whenever possible.
4.6 If the recommended storage and transfer conditions cannot be met, the samples still have
value. Test data must be interpreted based on storage and delivery conditions.
Page 60
p61
4.7 Expect e-mailed test results between 5 to 10 days after receipt of the samples (bacteria test
results about 1 month after receipt). Expect a summary of results at the beginning of the
21
report.
4.8 IF test results are outside acceptable limits,
20
THEN request retesting for confirmation.
a. IF results are confirmed,
4/
THEN create an action plan, as needed, that includes additional testing,
/1
mitigative action, or both.
b. See Utility Procedure TD-4186P-400, “Internal Corrosion Control: Mitigation,”
09
for more information.
5 Records
ed
5.1 Retain the following forms at the district or division office for as long as the pipeline remains in
service:
 Form TD-4186P-100-F01, “Liquid Sampling Log,” or Form TD-4186P-100-F02, “ILI

at
Sampling Log”
 Form 62-1174, “Chain of Custody Record”

er
 Laboratory testing reports

en
5.2 Retain records per the Records Retention Schedule. In case of conflict with any part of this
procedure, retain records per the Record Retention Schedule.
G
END of Instructions
DEFINITIONS
F
NA
PD
Gas pipeline operations and maintenance (GPOM) superintendents and supervisors will roll
out new utility procedure revision, with support from standards engineering and corrosion
engineering personnel. Standards engineering personnel will confirm with regulatory
compliance personnel the transition from variance to Revision 1 of this utility procedure.
GOVERNING DOCUMENT
Utility Standard TD-4186S, “Internal Corrosion Control of Gas Facilities”
Page 61
p62
21
Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) Title 49, Transportation, Part 192—Transportation of
Natural and Other Gas by Pipeline: Minimum Federal Safety Standards, Section 192.475,
“Internal corrosion control: General”
20
“Internal corrosion control: Monitoring”
4/
/1
“Corrosion control records”
09
Records and Information Management:
Information or records generated by this procedure must be managed in accordance with the
Enterprise Records and Information (ERIM) Policy, Standards and Enterprise Records
ed
Retention Schedule (ERRS). Refer to GOV-7101S, “Enterprise Records and Information
Management Standard,” and related standards. Management of records includes, but is not
limited to:
at
 Integrity

er
Storage
 Retention and Disposition

en
 Classification and Protection
REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
G
F
NACE International SP0106-2006, “Control of Internal Corrosion in Steel Pipelines and Piping
Systems”
PD
NACE International TM0194, “Field Monitoring of Bacterial Growth in Oil and Gas Systems”
Form 62-1174, “Chain of Custody Record”
Utility Procedure TD-4186P-400, “Internal Corrosion Control: Mitigation”
APPENDICES
Appendix A, “Equipment Checklist”
Page 62
p63
ATTACHMENTS
21
Form TD-4186P-100-F01, “Liquid Sampling Log”
Form TD-4186P-100-F02, “ILI Sampling Log”
20
DOCUMENT RECISION
Utility Procedure TD-4186P-100, revision 0b, “Internal Corrosion Control: Liquid and Solid
4/
Sampling and Testing,” published 07/19/2017
/1
DOCUMENT APPROVER
Kevin Armato, Manager, Corrosion Engineering Services
09
DOCUMENT OWNER
John Heflin, Gas Engineer, Standards and Procedures

ed
DOCUMENT CONTACT
Jason Klechka, Supervisor, Corrosion Engineering Services

at
REVISION NOTES
er

Revision 1a
en
Step 1.7 Added reference to TD-4186P-100-F02.

Step 1.7.2 Added direction to use TD-4186P-100 for ILI projects.
Step 2.4 Added reference to TD-4186P-100-F02.
G
Step 5.1, first bullet Added reference to TD-4186P-100-F02.

Attachments Added Form TD-4186P-100-F02, “ILI Sampling Log”
F
PD
Page 63
p64
Revision Notes (continued)
21
Revision 1 (Publication Date: 12/19/2018, Effective Date: 12/31/2018)
All Removed requirements for field testing.
Summary Revised summary of procedure to cover all personnel instead of just
20
ATS and Corrosion Engineering.
Target Audience Removed reference to “internal corrosion evaluation.”
Abnormal Operating Removed due to no longer applying to procedure.
4/
Conditions (AOC)
Section 1 Removed Steps 1.3, 1.4, 1.6, and 1.7.
/1
Step 1.1 Moved Step 1.1 and the attached steps to Steps 1.1.1.
Step 1.2 Moved Section 1.2 to Step 1.1.2.
09
Step 1.5 Moved Section 1.5 to Step 1.1.3.
Section 2 Removed Steps 2.2.6 and 2.2.7.
Step 2.2.4 Moved step 2.2.4 to Step 2.2.3, now listed as 2.2.3(b) and 2.2.3(c).
ed
Section 3 Moved Step 3.1.2 into Note at beginning of Section 3.
Rewrote Sections 3.1 and 3.2 into their individual steps.
Definitions Removed definitions that were no longer used or referenced.
at
Appendices Removed appendices B, C, and D.

Appendix A Culled list to align with current process.
er
TD-4186P-100-F01 Removed the following columns: Temperature, Sample Collected,

Water Present, pH, and Bacterial Inoculation Performed.
en
G
F
PD
Page 64
p65
Appendix A, Equipment Checklist

Page 1 of 1
21
The following equipment may be needed, depending on the types of tests performed.
20
1. Laboratory gloves _____
2. Safety glasses _____
4/
3. Paper towels _____
/1
4. Sharps container _____
5. 60 mL sample bottles (https://us.vwr.com/ Item# 16124-982) _____
09
6. 250 mL sample container for solids _____
7. 500 mL sample bottles (https://us.vwr.com/ Item# 16124-988) _____

ed
8. Liquid waste container _____
9. 8 oz. sample bags _____

at
10. Cooler with ice _____

er
11. Tongue depressors or stainless steel spatula _____
12. Alcohol swabs _____

en
13. Blank labels _____

G
F
PD
Page 65
p66
Minor Revision Guidance Document Analysis (MRGDA)

Internal Corrosion Control: Liquid and Solid Sampling and
Testing
TD-4186P-100, Rev. 1a
Document Type Utility Procedure
21
Workflow Minor Revision
20
As part of corrective action from CAP# 118363392, the ILI Engineering team has created a new form
4/
TD-4186P-100-F02, “ILI Sampling Log” which will be used exclusively for in-line inspection (ILI)
projects. This new form has additional columns for the ILI run which allow a record of what liquid/debris
was removed from the pipeline with each run, as well as ties that run to the sample itself. This form
/1
was originally piloted during 2020. Refer to approved variance in EDRS routing 2020-64388 for
additional information. The variance will be canceled upon publication of TD-4186P-100-F02.
09
Section/Step What to Change/Add/Delete

ed
Step 1.7 Add highlighted text:
Track sampling and testing with Form 62-1174, “Chain of Custody Record,” and
either Form TD-4186P-100-F01, “Liquid Sampling Log” or Form TD-4186P-100-
F02, “ILI Sampling Log.”
at
Step 1.7.2 Add highlighted text and remove the following:

For in-line inspection (ILI) projects, complete Form TD-4186P-100-F02. For all
er
others, complete Form TD-4186P-100-F01 for all liquid samples.

Step 2.4 Add highlighted text:
en
Record sampling on Form 62-1174, and Form TD-4186P-100-F01 or Form TD-

4186P-100-F02.
Step 5.1, first bullet point Add highlighted text:
G
Form TD-4186P-100-F01, “Liquid Sampling Log,” or Form TD-4186P-100-F02, “ILI

Sampling Log”
Attachments Add Form TD-4186P-100-F02, “ILI Sampling Log.”
F
PD
NA - No new Process Safety risks are being introduced with this revision.
GGD-08-F01, Minor Revision Gas Guidance Document Analysis

Page 66
p67

Testing
TD-4186P-100, Rev. 1a
4. Stakeholders
21
Table 1. Stakeholder Reviewers
20
Corrosion Engineering Expert Gas Engineer, Document Hamed Habibi 08/2020
Steward
Standards Engineering Gas Engineer, Document John Heflin 10/2020
4/
Coordinator
Standards Engineering Principal Engineer, Lead Engineer Tuesdai Powers 10/2020
/1
Corrosion Engineering Manager, Document Approver Lee Haynes 10/2020
Standards Engineering Supervisor Matt Davidson 08/2020
09
ILI Engineering Supervisor Curt Liljedahl 08/2020
ILI Engineering Supervisor Lanthy Le 10/2020
ILI Engineering Gas IM Engineer Hunter Dender 10/2020
Gas Construction Engineering Supervisor Justin Phelan 08/2020
ed
Gas Construction Engineering Field Engineer Emma Favela 08/2020
Gas Construction Engineering Field Engineer Carlos Taboada 08/2020
at
Gas Construction Engineering Field Engineer Justin Williams 08/2020

Gas Construction Engineering Field Engineering Technician Jessica Priest 08/2020
er

Approvers: Hamed Habibi, John Heflin, Tuesdai Powers, Lee Haynes
en
EDRS Routing Number: 2020-70551

6. Cost Information
G
NA
7. Schedule Information
F
Priority: ☒ Regular (monthly publication) ☐ High (publish within 24 hours of EDRS approval)
PD
Reason (for High priority only): NA

The form added in this revision was originally tailboarded to affected personnel by ILI Engineering
when the variance was approved. Standards Engineering will work with ILI Engineering to send out
similar communication to affected personnel.
8. Cancellations
NA

Page 67
p68

Testing
TD-4186P-100, Rev. 1a
9. Manuals ☒ No Change to Manuals
21
Functional Area ☒ No Change to Functional Area
20
☐ CNG-LNG ☐ Compression and Processing ☐ Customer Connected Equipment ☐ Distribution Mains
☐ Distribution Services ☐ Measurement and Control ☐ Storage ☐ Transmission Pipe
4/
Target Audiences ☒ No Change to Target Audiences
/1
Management
09
☐ Contract Management ☐ Gas Distribution Control Center ☐ Mapping (Transmission and ☐ Risk Management
Distribution)
☐ Corrosion Mechanics ☐ Gas Emergency Preparedness ☐ Metering Plant ☐ Service Planning
☐ Corrosion Services ☐ Gas Operations Leadership ☐ Picarro ☐ Sourcing

ed
Engineering
at
☐ Distribution Construction ☐ General Construction ☐ Program Management (Transmission ☐ Technology and Tools
and Distribution)
er
Distribution)

en
Management
Business Processes (GODOCS) ☒ No Change to Business Processes

G

☐ As-Builts ☐ Applicant Design Manual ☐ Corrosion Control ☐ Dispatch and Scheduling
☐ Coatings ☐ Asset Knowledge Management ☐ Damage Prevention (indicate subtype)1 ☐ Emergency Plans
F
☐ Construction Methods ☐ Distribution Engineering ☐ Field Services (GSRs) ☐ Gas Guidance Document
Process
PD
☐ Environmental and Safety ☐ Engineering for Integrity ☐ Gas Control and Clearances ☐ Gas Operations Quality
☐ Excavation ☐ Engineering Material ☐ Integrity Management (IM) ☐ Gas Safety Excellence
Specifications
☐ Gas Design Standards for Construction ☐ Gas Design Standards ☐ Leak Survey and Response ☐ Operator Qualifications (OQ)

Examination (NDE)
1. Damage Prevention subtypes: Locate and Mark, Patrolling, Public Awareness

Page 68
p69

TD-4186P-100, Rev: 1
21
Workflow Revision
1. Why is the guidance document being written / revised?
20
This utility procedure is being revised to align with the current Maintenance and Operations testing
practices. Through a Notice of Violation (NOV), corrosion engineering personnel learned that
procedures for the testing of liquids and solids were inconsistent for drips. This revision provides more
4/
clarity on testing procedures and practices for sampling and testing of liquids and solids, and on who
performs each task.
/1
A variance is in place until the end of 2018, excluding Gas Pipeline Operations and Maintenance
(GPOM) from the requirements of field testing during liquid and solid drip sampling. This revision
09
eliminates the need for that variance.
2. Is the guidance document new or revised? If it is revised, what will change? If new, what is the
topic?
ed
Revised. Field testing is no longer required during the sampling process for liquids, solids and bacteria.
Only laboratory testing is required.
3. Does this project introduce any major new risks or change existing mitigated risks, such as
at
Process Safety risks?

NA
er
4. Stakeholder Identification
en
Department / Work Center Role Name (or reason) Review Date

Corrosion Engineering Document Steward Jason Klechka 07/03/2018
G
Standards Engineering Document Coordinator John Heflin 09/05/2018

Standards Engineering Lead Engineer Jerrod Meier 12/11/2018
F
Corrosion Engineering Document Approver Kevin Armato 07/03/2018

Process Safety Gas Process Safety Engineer Stephen Sass 10/11/2018
PD
Supervisor, Construction Records

Quality Management Kevin Lieberman 10/10/2018
Quality Control (QC)
Operator Qualification NA – No OQs associated with document
Gas Strategy and Solutions NA – No SAP updates required
Gas Engineer, Gas Operations
Regulatory Compliance Justin Leany 12/10/2018
Compliance and Risk
PG&E Academy NA – No training updates required

Page 69
p70

TD-4186P-100, Rev: 1
21
Department / Work Center Role Name Review Date
Gas Pipeline Operations and Superintendent, GPOM Bay Area
Matt McLaughlin 07/03/2018
Maintenance (GPOM) South/Central Coast
20
Director, Gas Transmission and
GPOM Distribution (T&D) Pipeline Operations Kelly Ball 07/03/2018
and Maintenance (O&M)
4/
Superintendent, Gas T&D Pipeline
GPOM John Martin 10/08/2018
O&M – Central Valley
/1
Supervisor, Gas T&D Pipeline
GPOM Bill Nunes 10/08/2018
O&M – Rio Vista
09
Superintendent, Gas T&D Pipeline
GPOM Lance Johnson 10/19/2018
O&M – Bay Area North/Storage
Corrosion Engineering Supervisor Michael Briones 07/10/2018
Corrosion Engineering Corrosion Engineer, Principal Preston Ford 07/10/2018
ed
Corrosion Engineering Corrosion Engineer Christopher Nguyen 07/03/2018

at
Approvers: John Heflin, Jason Klechka, Jerrod Meier, Kevin Armato

er
6. Detail any needed cost or schedule information

NA
en
Effective Date: 12/31/18. Revision represents reduction in stringency, so extended time for training is
not needed.
G
7. How often will the guidance document be reviewed?

F
At least once every calendar year, not to exceed 15 months, to the date.
PD

Page 70
p71
DOCUMENT NAME: Internal Corrosion Control: Liquid and Solid Sampling and Testing
21
DOCUMENT NUMBER: TD-4186P-100, Revision 1
TAILBOARD ISSUED: 12/19/2018 TAILBOARD BY: NA
20
4/
What is changing?
This revision of Utility Procedure TD-4186P-100 removes the field testing requirement for sampling liquids
/1
and solids. This utility procedure now only requires laboratory testing.
09
Why does it matter?
This utility procedure is being revised to align with current testing practices in the Maintenance and
Operations organization. Through a Notice of Violation (NOV), corrosion engineering personnel learned
that the testing procedures for the testing of liquids and solids were inconsistent for drips. A variance is in
ed
place until the end of 2018, excluding Gas Pipeline Operations and Maintenance (GPO&M) from the
requirements of field testing during liquid and solid drip sampling. This revision eliminates the need for
that variance.
at
Required Action
Target audience members must review the utility procedure.
er
Tools and Training

en
NA
Timeline
G
Date Activity
F

PD

Page 71
p72
Publication Date: 07/17/2019 Effective Date: 10/16/2019 Rev: 1
Internal Corrosion Control: Design Review
SUMMARY
21
This utility procedure provides the internal corrosion (IC) control design review process for
Pacific Gas and Electric Company (PG&E or Company) new or modified gas transmission,
gathering, and storage lines or line components.
20
TARGET AUDIENCE
4/
Personnel who are responsible for submitting and reviewing design drawings for IC control
/1
review.
SAFETY
09
Compliance with this procedure reduces the risk of IC in transmission, gathering, and storage
lines, increasing public and personnel safety. No specific safety concerns are associated with
the use of this procedure by a user performing the IC control design review.
ed
BEFORE YOU START
Corrosion personnel performing the IC design review must receive training from the
at
appropriate subject matter expert (SME) corrosion engineer.

er
TABLE OF CONTENTS
en
1 General ............................................................................................................. 2
G
2 Preliminary Design Review Steps...................................................................... 2

3 IC Control Design Review Submittal Process .................................................... 7
F
4 IC Control SME Design Review ......................................................................... 9

PD
5 Records........................................................................................................... 11
Page 72
p73
PROCEDURE STEPS
21
1 General
1.1 Project owner or designee ensures that the IC design review is completed for:
20
 New transmission, gathering, or storage lines
 Replacement of existing transmission, gathering, or storage line piping, valves, fittings,
4/
or other line components
/1
1.2 The IC control design review ensures compliance with the requirements of Utility Standard TD-
4186S, “Internal Corrosion Control of Gas Facilities.” Refer to Code of Federal Regulations
(CFR) Title 49, Transportation, Part 192—Transportation of Natural and Other Gas by
09
Pipeline: Minimum Federal Safety Standards, Section (§) 192.476, "Internal corrosion control:
Design and construction of transmission line."
2 Preliminary Design Review Steps

ed
2.1 Project owner or designee performing the IC control review is responsible for the following:
1. Record the completion of each applicable step on Form TD-4186P-200-F01, “Internal

at
Corrosion Control Design Review Checklist for Transmission, Gathering, and Storage
Lines.”
er
2. Determine if corrosion services personnel must be involved in the design review

process. Refer to Figure 1, “Design Review Flow Chart.”
en
G
F
PD
Page 73
p74
21
20
4/
/1
09
ed
at
er
en
G
F
PD
Figure 1. Design Review Flow Chart
Page 74
p75
2.2 Consider the following for Form TD-4186P-200-F01:
21
1. For pipelines less than or equal to 2″ in diameter:
a. An IC design review cannot be completed because accurate critical angle
20
calculations cannot be determined for pipelines that are less than or equal to 2″
in size.
(1) IF new pipeline design is greater than 2″ in diameter,
4/
THEN continue to Section 2.2.2.
/1
(2) IF new pipeline design is less than 2″ in diameter,
09
THEN proceed to Section 2.2.7.
2. For temporary or permanent piping configuration:

ed
a. Piping configuration that involves the pipeline returning to its original design
does not need to be considered for IC review. Examples of temporary piping
configuration include:
at
(1) Hydrotest with temporary pressure test piping

er
(2) Like-for-like valve or straight pipe replacements
(3) Non-traditional in-line inspection (ILI)

en
b. IF new design is not for temporary piping configuration,

G
c. IF new design will return to its original piping configuration,

F

PD
Page 75
p76
Section 2 (continued)
21
3. Review for current assigned IC threats.
a. For new or modified transmission, gathering, or storage line designs, check for
20
current assigned IC threats through a source such as the geographical
information system (GIS) database or TIMP WAP on project’s MPs. Check for
current assigned threats to any segments of the line and to source pipelines.
4/
(1) IF a current IC threat is assigned,
/1
(2) IF a current IC threat is not assigned,
09
4. Calculate the critical angle.

ed
a. The critical angle is the angle in which liquids would hold up during normal
operation of the pipeline. To calculate this angle, the following information is
required:
at
(1) Pipeline outer diameter (OD)

er
(2) Pipeline wall thickness (WT)

en
(3) Maximum operating flow rate
(4) Minimum operating pressure

G
(5) Nominal operating temperature
5. Compart the calculated critical angle to all vertical inclinations in the current design
F
configuration.
PD
Example: If the calculated critical angle is 10°, and there are 12° elbows in the design,
then the design would exceed the critical angle.
a. IF the critical angle is exceeded,
b. IF the critical angle is not exceeded,
Page 76
p77
Section 2 (continued)
21
6. Inspect for IC threats and remove liquids per ILI assessment.
a. IF the pipeline being designed is on an ILI schedule,
20
b. IF the pipeline being designed is not on an ILI schedule,
4/
THEN contact the appropriate SME corrosion engineer for assistance in
/1
completing Form TD-4186P-200-F01.
7. Check for dead legs and stubs.
09
a. IF a dead leg or stub is present in the design,
THEN contact the appropriate SME corrosion engineer for assistance in

ed
completing Form TD-4186P-200-F01.
b. IF a dead leg or stub is not present in the design,

at
THEN continue completing sections A, D, and E of Form TD-4186P-200-F01.

er
en
G
F
PD
Page 77
p78
3 IC Control Design Review Submittal Process
21
3.1 Project owner or designee is responsible for:
1. Completion of the “Project Information” section, Section A (“General Design

Questions”), and Section D (“Records”) of Form TD-4186P-200-F01. Corrosion
20
services personnel will complete Sections B, C, and E as needed.
2. IF routing to corrosion services personnel,
4/
THEN submit drawings to the appropriate corrosion engineer or designee for review.
/1
a. Provide two weeks for the design review when possible.
09
b. Submit drawings between the 60%‒90% design stages to allow for design
modifications.
3. If required, resubmit modified drawings to the appropriate corrosion engineer or

ed
designee for final review.
3.2 Submittal Methods

at
Use one of the following methods to submit the job package:
1. Electronic document routing system (EDRS) is the preferred submittal method.

er
a. Submit an EDRS review request to the appropriate corrosion engineer or

designee.
en
b. Include the following:

G
(1) Document title (project name)
(2) Job order number

F
(3) Piping plan drawings

PD
(4) Form TD-4186P-200-F01 with the Project Information section and

Section A completed
Page 78
p79
21
c. Allow 10 business days for the IC control review. The corrosion engineer or
designee reviews the drawings as described in Section 3.1.2.
20
d. After the review is complete and requested changes have been made and
approved, complete one of the following steps:
(1) Print a hard copy of the final drawings for the appropriate corrosion
4/
engineer’s or designee’s signature on the IC review stamp.
/1
(2) Print and attach the EDRS approval page to the job package. “Approved
via EDRS” can be printed in the appropriate IC review stamp box.
09
2. Hard-Copy or Digital (Non-EDRS) Review
a. Print or email a full set of the piping plan drawings for review by the responsible
corrosion engineer or designee.
ed
b. Attach Form TD-4186P-200-F01 with the Project Information section
completed.
at
c. Allow 10 business days for the IC control review. The appropriate corrosion
engineer or designee will review the drawings as described in Section 3.1.2.
er
d. After the review is complete and requested changes have been made and
approved, print a hard copy of the final piping plan drawings for the corrosion
en
engineer’s or designee’s signature on the IC review stamp.

G
F
PD
Page 79
p80
4 IC Control SME Design Review
21
4.1 Review integrity management data.
For modified transmission, gathering, or storage line designs with an assigned IC threat,
20
review data collected by the integrity management personnel, including the following where
applicable:
1. ILI Data
4/
a. IF no evidence of IC greater than 20% wall thickness (WT) is found on the
/1
pipeline or pipeline directly upstream,
THEN ILI will be used for monitoring and no mitigation is required.
09
b. IF evidence of IC greater than 20% is found,
THEN consider monitoring per Utility Procedure TD-4186P-300, “Internal

ed
Corrosion Control: Corrosion Rate Monitoring” and/or mitigation per Utility
Procedure TD-4186P-400, “Internal Corrosion Control: Mitigation.”
2. IC Direct Assessment (ICDA) Data

at
a. IF no evidence of IC greater than 20% WT is found on the pipeline or a pipeline

directly upstream,
er
THEN ICDA will be used for monitoring and no mitigation is required.

en
b. IF evidence of IC greater than 20% is found,
THEN consider monitoring per Utility Procedure TD-4186P-300 and/or

G
mitigation per Utility Procedure TD-4186P-400.
4.2 Review liquid sample database.

F
1. Review the liquid sample database for the line and source lines within five miles of the
PD
project area.
2. Note amount of liquids pulled and corrosive content on Form TD-4186P-200-F01,

Section E.
Page 80
p81
4.3 Review drip locations.
21
1. Determine whether any drips will be affected by the project, such as removing drips for
hydrotesting or ILI upgrades.
20
2. Check detail drawings for drip removals. Consult with the appropriate SME corrosion
services engineer if drips will be added or replaced.
3. Check the corrosion services drip database for drips within five miles of the project
4/
area. Update the drip database if drips are added, removed, or replaced.
/1
4.4 Review A-forms.
1. Review leak and inspection A-Forms within five miles of the project area or back to the
09
gas source, whichever is shorter.
2. Note indications of internal rust, internal pitting, and leaks due to IC.
ed
3. IF evidence of IC is present,
THEN consider monitoring per Utility Procedure TD-4186P-300 and/or mitigation per
Utility Procedure TD-4186P-400.
at
4.5 Review construction drawings.

er
1. Review the proposed piping plan and elevation profile for dead legs, stubs, or low
spots in the pipe. Avoid designing these features where possible.
en
2. IF dead legs, stubs, or elbows that exceed the critical angle calculation cannot be
removed,
G
THEN consider these locations as potential installation sites for IC monitoring devices
per Utility Procedure TD-4186P-300.
F
3. IF practical or necessary to remove liquid,

PD
THEN discuss with the pipeline engineer (PLE) which of the following possible removal
methods is recommended:
a. Separation vessels
b. Dehydration or dewatering units
c. Drips
d. Other unlisted options
Page 81
p82
5 Records
21
5.1 Project owner ensures the following:
1. Completed Form TD-4186P-200-F01 is attached to the reviewed job.
20
2. The IC review stamp is applied to the transmission, gathering, or storage line
construction drawing per Utility Standard TD-4186S, “Internal Corrosion Control of Gas
Facilities.”
4/
/1
END of Instructions
09
ed
at
er
en
G
F
PD
Page 82
p83
DEFINITIONS
21
In-line inspection (ILI): The interior inspection of a pipeline using an electronic instrument or
tool. ILI inspection tools are referred to as pigs, smart pigs, or intelligent pigs.
20
Separation vessels: Vessels designed in a pipeline system to remove liquid and debris from
the gas stream. Also known as filter/separators.
Additional definitions are listed in Utility Standard TD-4186S, “Internal Corrosion Control of
4/
Gas Facilities.”
/1
Corrosion services personnel ensures all impacted personnel are aware of this procedure.
09
Supervisors communicate this procedure to personnel responsible for submitting and
reviewing design drawings for internal corrosion control review and ensure that personnel are
trained to perform these tasks.
ed
GOVERNING DOCUMENT

at

er
Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) Title 49, Part 192—Transportation of Natural and other
Gas by Pipeline: Minimum Federal Safety Standards, Section (§) 192.475, “Internal corrosion
control: General”
en
49 CFR §192.476 “Internal corrosion control: Design and construction of transmission line”
G
49 CFR §192.477 “Internal corrosion control: Monitoring”
49 CFR §192.491 “Corrosion control records”

F
PD
Page 83
p84
REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
21
20
Gas Design Standard (GDS) A-34, “Piping Design and Test Requirements”
4/
GDS A-05, “Piggable Pipeline”
/1
APPENDICES
09
NA
ATTACHMENTS
ed
NA
FORMS
at
Utility Form TD-4186P-200-F01, “Internal Corrosion Control Design Review Checklist for
Transmission, Gathering, and Storage Lines”
er
DOCUMENT RECISION
This document supersedes Utility Procedure TD-4186P-200, “Internal Corrosion Control:

en
Design Review,” Rev. 0, issued 07/2014.
DOCUMENT APPROVER
G
Kevin Armato, Manager, Corrosion Engineering Services
DOCUMENT OWNER
F
PD
John Heflin, Gas Engineer, Standards Engineering
DOCUMENT CONTACT
Jason Klechka, Supervisor, Corrosion Engineering Services
Page 84
p85
REVISION NOTES
21
Revision 1
20
Section 1.2 Removed reference to corrosion services needing to complete internal
corrosion control design review.
Section 2 Added Section 2, “Preliminary Design Review Steps.”
4/
Section 3.1 Added clarification on which groups fill out sections of Form TD-4186P-200-
F01.
/1
Section 3.2 Added steps for corrosion services routing.
Renamed to “IC Control SME Design Review” and removed steps that
09
Section 4
verified if internal corrosion design review was necessary.
Section 4.1.1 Added additional steps regarding review of ILI data.
Section 4.1.2 Added additional steps regarding review of ICDA data.
ed
TD-4186P-200-F01 Section A consists of preliminary design review questions to determine if
additional internal corrosion design review is necessary.
at
The items in section B regarding internal corrosion design SME has been
updated.
er
en
G
F
PD
Page 85
p86
DOCUMENT NAME: Internal Corrosion Control: Design Review
21
DOCUMENT NUMBER: TD-4186P-200, Rev. 1
20
4/
What is changing?
This revision to Utility Procedure TD-4186P-200 and its accompanying form (Form TD-4186P-200-F01,
/1
“Internal Corrosion Control Design Review Checklist for Transmission, Gathering, and Storage Lines”)
include the following key changes:
09
 Steps added to Section 2, “Preliminary Design Review Steps” that, when used with Utility Form TD-
4186P-200-F01, “Internal Corrosion Control Design Review Checklist for Transmission, Gathering,
and Storage Lines.”, determine if additional review by an internal corrosion (IC) subject matter expert
(SME) is necessary.
ed
 Additional steps added to Section 4, “IC Control SME Design Review,” regarding IC control SME
design review.

at
Section A on Form TD-4186P-200-F01 now consists of preliminary design review questions to be

completed for every project.
 Section B on Form TD-4186P-200-F01 contains additional items for review by the IC control SME.
er
Why does it matter?

en
This revision streamlines the IC design process by determining corrosion services personnel involvement
before any design review submittal process.
G
Required Action
Personnel responsible for submitting and reviewing design drawings for IC control review.
F
Tools and Training

PD
NA
Timeline
Date Activity
NA Tailboard by date.
+90 Days Effective date.

Page 86
p87

TD-4186P-200, Rev. 1
21
Workflow Revision
20
1. Reason for Writing / Revising the Guidance Document
This utility procedure revision streamlines the internal corrosion (IC) design process by determining
corrosion services personnel involvement prior to any design review submittal process. The previous
4/
revision required completion of the design review submittal process even when involvement by
corrosion services personnel was not necessary.
/1
2. Description of the Topic (if new) or the Changes (if revised)
Key changes to the procedure and form include:
09
 Steps added to Section 2, “Preliminary Design Review Steps” that, when used with Utility Form
TD-4186P-200-F01, “Internal Corrosion Control Design Review Checklist for Transmission,
Gathering, and Storage Lines.”, determine if additional review by an IC subject matter expert
ed
(SME) is necessary.
 Steps added to Section 4, “IC Control SME Design Review” specific to internal corrosion control
SME review.
at
 Added Figure 1, “Design Review Standard Flow Chart.”

er
 Section A on Form TD-4186P-200-F01 now consists of preliminary design review questions to be

completed for every project.
en
 Additional internal corrosion SME review items included in Section B of Form TD-4186P-200-F01.
G
NA
F
PD

Page 87
p88

TD-4186P-200, Rev. 1
4. Stakeholders
21

(or reason if NA)
20
Corrosion Engineering Document Steward Jason Klechka 03/2019
Standards Engineering Document Coordinator John Heflin 03/2019
Standards Engineering Lead Engineer Jerrod Meier 06/2019
4/
Corrosion Engineering Document Approver Kevin Armato 06/2019
Gas Process Safety Engineer,
Process Safety Vic Stanciu 04/2019
/1
Principal
NA – No OQs associated with document
09
Operator Qualification
Gas Strategy and Solutions NA – No SAP updates required
Regulatory Compliance NA – No previous regulatory compliance commitment
PG&E Academy NA – No support from Academy needed
ed

at

Corrosion Engineering Supervisor Lee Haynes III 03/2019
er
Corrosion Engineering Corrosion Engineer, Senior Sean Yost 03/2019

ILI Engineering Supervisor Ryan Trapp 03/2019
en
Pipeline Engineering & Design Supervisor Dirk Ayala 03/2019

Pipeline Engineering & Design Supervisor Ian Hom 03/2019
Pipeline Engineering & Design Supervisor Nicholas Jordan 03/2019
G
Pipeline Engineering & Design Gas Engineer Eddie Chavez-Gaytan 03/2019

Pipeline Services Manager Wes Crail 03/2019
F
Pipeline Services Supervisor Michael Dale 03/2019

Pipeline Services Supervisor Shane Doong 03/2019
PD
Pipeline Services Gas Pipeline Engineer, Expert Scott Fannin 03/2019

Pipeline Services Gas Pipeline Engineer, Senior Wayne Gilbert II 03/2019
Pipeline Services Gas Pipeline Engineer Christopher Nguyen 03/2019
Station Engineering Supervisor Ghandi Rouainia 03/2019

Page 88
p89

TD-4186P-200, Rev. 1
21
Approvers: John Heflin, Jason Klechka, Jerrod Meier, Kevin Armato
20
NA
Effective Date: 90 days from publication.
4/
7. Review Frequency
/1
8. Cancellations
09
NA
9. Manuals
[For new documents, indicate which manuals (if any) should include this document. If none, select
ed
“NA.” For revised documents, select “NA.]
☒ None/NA O&M Manuals: ☐ TD-4380M (Distribution) ☐ TD-4382M (Transmission)

at
☐ TD-4460M (Welding) ☐ TD-4170M (Plastic) ☐ TD-4180M (Corrosion) ☐ TD-4190M (NDE)

☐ TD-4416M (Damage Prevention) ☐ TD-4950M (Gas Design Standards) ☐ Other (specify)
er
en
G
F
PD

Page 89
p90

TD-4186P-200, Rev. 1
Does this document apply to an asset? ☒ Yes ☐ No
21
Organization
20
Target Audiences
4/
Management
/1
09
☐ Data Quality ☐ Gas Service Representatives ☒ Pipeline Engineering ☐ Super Gas Ops
ed
Engineering
and Distribution)
☒ Distribution Engineering ☐ Hydrotesting ☐ Project Management (Transmission and ☐ Transmission Construction
at
Distribution)

er
Management
GODOCS
en

☐ As-Builts ☐ Asset Knowledge Management ☒ Corrosion Control ☐ Dispatch and Scheduling
G
☐ Coatings ☐ Distribution Engineering ☐ Damage Prevention ☐ Emergency Plans
☐ Engineering Material ☐ Gas Guidance Document

☐ Construction Methods ☐ Field Services (GSRs)
Specifications Process
☐ Gas Operations Quality
F
☐ Environmental and Safety ☐ Gas Design Standards ☐ Gas Control and Clearances
Management
☐ Excavation ☐ Process Safety ☐ Integrity Management (IM) ☐ Gas Safety Excellence
PD
☐ Gas Design Standards for Construction ☐ Transmission Engineering ☐ Leak Survey and Response ☐ Operator Qualifications (OQ)
☐ Inspection and Operation ☐ Major Stations
☐ Plastic ☐ Measurement and Regulation (M&R)
☐ Steel Pressure Control ☐ Steel Pipeline Maintenance and Repair

Examination (NDE)

Page 90
p91
Internal Corrosion Control: Corrosion Rate Monitoring
SUMMARY
21
This procedure describes how to select and locate corrosion rate monitoring devices used to
verify internal corrosion conditions within Pacific Gas and Electric Company (Company)
pipelines. It also describes how to interpret the results of corrosion rate monitoring to
20
determine if mitigation or additional monitoring is needed.
4/
TARGET AUDIENCE
/1
Personnel engaged in or supervising internal corrosion control work.
SAFETY
09
Potential hazards impacting this work include, but are not limited to, the following:
 Chemical hazards
ed
 Electrical hazards
 Traffic conditions
at
 Tripping and slipping hazards

er
 Environmental surroundings

en
Construction sites
ABNORMAL OPERATING CONDITIONS (AOCS)

G
Abnormal operating conditions (AOCs) that could be encountered while performing this
procedure may include, but are not limited to, the following:
F
 Internal corrosion present

PD
 Corrosion rate and pit rate do not meet the acceptance criteria
Page 91
p92
BEFORE YOU START
21
Personal Protective Equipment (PPE): The following PPE must be worn by field personnel
(or must be available for use if indicated):
20
Traffic vest
 Proper footwear
4/
 Long sleeve shirt
/1
 Long pants
 Hard hat (must be available)
09
 Gloves (must be available)
 Safety glasses (must be available)

ed
Operator Qualifications (OQ): Field personnel conducting internal corrosion monitoring must
be certified for the following Operator Qualification tasks (to be updated):
at
 Operator Qualification 03-09.00, Internal Corrosion / Monitor

er
Tools: Use only Company-approved tools and equipment.

en
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION TITLE PAGE

G
1 General ................................................................................................................3
2 Selecting the Corrosion Rate Monitoring Device Location ..................................4
F
3 Selecting the Corrosion Rate Monitoring Device .................................................4

PD
4 Installing and Removing Corrosion Monitoring Devices ......................................6

5 Interpreting the Results of Corrosion Rate Monitoring ........................................7
6 Evaluating Effects of Operating Changes on Monitoring Plans ...........................9
7 Records .............................................................................................................10
Page 92
p93
PROCEDURE STEPS
21
1 General
 Perform corrosion rate monitoring to verify if corrosive conditions are present within a
20
pipeline.
 Perform corrosion rate monitoring whenever mitigation is applied to a pipeline to verify

the effectiveness of mitigation.
4/
 IF there are no additional inputs within a segment of pipeline,
/1
THEN corrosion rate monitoring results at one location can be applied to the remaining
locations.
09
 Perform corrosion rate monitoring on each device per Table 1. “Internal Corrosion
Monitoring Frequencies.”
ed
Table 1. Internal Corrosion Monitoring Frequencies
Liquid Quantity/Analysis Pipeline Features

at
Type Routine Frequency "Dry" Condition Frequency* Reference

Drips Bi-monthly, not-to-exceed 2.5 IF found dry for 6 consecutive periods, TD-4186S
er
months to the date THEN drips can be blown once each

calendar year, not-to-exceed 15 months
en
Bottom Bi-monthly, not-to-exceed 2.5 IF found dry for 6 consecutive periods, TD-4186S
Taps months to the date THEN bottom taps can be blown once
each calendar year, not-to-exceed 15
months
G
Corrosion Rate Monitoring Devices

Type Routine Frequency Special Notes Reference
F
Coupons Must be installed for 1 month Interval at the discretion of corrosion TD-4186S
minimum, but must be changed 2 services.
PD
times per year, not-to-exceed 7.5

months
UT Probes 2 times per year, not-to-exceed 7.5 More-frequent interval is at the discretion TD-4186S
months to the date of corrosion services.
ER Probes 2 times per year, not-to-exceed 7.5 More-frequent interval is at the discretion TD-4186S
months to the date of corrosion services
* Drips/Bottom taps are considered dry if less than 500ml of liquid is collected per TD-4186S
Page 93
p94
2 Selecting the Corrosion Rate Monitoring Device Location
21
2.1 Corrosion services determines the locations for corrosion rate monitoring devices.
 Install corrosion rate monitoring devices such that the device is exposed to the
20
conditions at the bottom of the pipeline where water may accumulate.
 Locate monitoring device where condensing water causing corrosion in the top of the
line is a concern.
4/
 Place devices verifying the effectiveness of mitigation downstream of the chemical
/1
injection point.
 Install devices at locations identified through routine maintenance.
09
 Place devices at locations with a high internal corrosion threat or where internal
corrosion has been found.
ed
 Maintain compliance with Gas Design Standard A-05, “Piggable Pipelines.”
3 Selecting the Corrosion Rate Monitoring Device

at
3.1 General
er
Corrosion services selects the appropriate monitoring device for each location.
 Use electrical resistance (ER) probes (corrosometers) for corrosion rate monitoring,
en
where feasible.
 Several monitoring devices are available and are listed in Section 3.2 below. The
specific monitoring device selected is based on operating conditions and the
G
anticipated type and severity of corrosion.
3.2 Common Corrosion Monitoring Devices

F
A brief description of the most common monitoring devices and their effective use is provided
PD
below.
1. Weight Loss Coupons
Weight loss coupons provide a measurement of general corrosion rate by measuring

the exact weight of the coupon before and after service, and converting material loss to
a corrosion rate. Weight loss coupons may also be visually examined for the presence
of pitting, and pit depths may be measured. However, unless pitting is significant, pit
depth measurements may be difficult to obtain depending on the surface finish of the
coupon. Weight loss coupons cannot determine the mechanism of corrosion. Normal
exposure periods for weight loss coupons vary between 30 days to 6 months.
Page 94
p95
3.2 (continued)
21
2. Evaluation and Monitoring (EM) Coupons
EM coupons provide an extended analysis in comparison to weight loss coupons. In
20
addition to providing information regarding corrosion rate, pitting rate can be
determined, and the type and cause of corrosion can be identified. Additional analyses
may include energy dispersive spectroscopy (EDS) of the corrosion products on the
coupon surface and epifluorescent microscopy of replicas of the coupon surface to
4/
identify the presence of bacteria.
/1
3. Electrical Resistance (ER) Probes
ER probes can be used in a gas or liquid environment. They measure the general
09
corrosion rate based on the change in electrical resistance in the probe element as its
cross sectional area is reduced by corrosion. ER probes cannot be used to measure
pitting rates.
ed
4. Linear Polarization Resistance (LPR) Probes
LPR probes must be used in contact with an electrolyte to work properly. They
measure the degree of resistance to a small applied potential. LPR probes cannot
at
distinguish between general corrosion and pitting; although they can be used in
conjunction with electrochemical noise to identify a potential for pitting. Hydrocarbons
er
can cause fouling of LPR probes; therefore, LPR probes should not be used in
environments where liquid hydrocarbons are known to be present.
en
5. Electric Field Mapping (EFM)
 Electrical Field Mapping (EFM) measures corrosion using a series of sensing

pins that are attached to the external surface of the pipeline. The pins may be
G
welded or glued (permanently mounted) or spring-loaded (temporarily mounted

and movable). EFM determines a corrosion rate by applying a current to the
pipeline and then measuring the voltage created by the distortion of the electric
F
field, which results from corrosion. The voltage measurements over time are
compared to the original measurements (when the monitoring device was first
PD
installed) to identify where corrosion is occurring.
 EFM may be used to monitor for general corrosion or localized corrosion

(pitting) depending on pin placement. The closer together the pins are placed,
the higher the sensitivity to detect localized corrosion.
 EFM may be a preferred monitoring method for locations such as buried low
points that are not accessible on a routine basis. An EFM monitoring device
may also be used following an in-line inspection (ILI) run or internal corrosion
direct assessment (ICDA) examination to monitor the growth of an internal
indication.
Page 95
p96
3.2 (continued)
21
6. Permanently Mounted Ultrasonic Thickness (UT) Probes
NOTE
20
To function properly, most UT probes operate within a specified range of pipeline
wall thickness.
4/
 Permanently mounted UT probes measure the wall thickness of the pipeline in
a specific location. The wall thickness measurements can be compared to
/1
previous measurements at the same location to calculate an average general
corrosion rate. Permanently mounted UT probes are available as single
transducers or in mats with many transducers.
09
 Because UT probes measure wall thickness in the exact area where the probe
is located, the resulting rate is a general corrosion rate, unless the probe is
known to be mounted at the location of a pit (in which case the calculated rate
ed
may be considered a pitting rate).
 Permanently mounted UT probes may be a preferred monitoring method for

at
locations such as buried low points that are not accessible on a routine basis.
Permanently mounted UT probes may also be used following discovery of
internal corrosion to monitor corrosion growth.
er
7. Other Internal Corrosion Monitoring Methods

en
Several other methods for corrosion monitoring are available, such as periodically
drawing off liquids at low points and chemically analyzing the liquids for the presence
of corrosion products. This method, however, does not provide a corrosion rate; it only
indicates the presence of a corrosive environment. See Gas Utility Standard
G
TD-4186S, “Internal Corrosion Control of Gas Facilities,” for additional information on

liquid sampling, if needed. The use of other monitoring methods is at the discretion of
corrosion services.
F
4 Installing and Removing Corrosion Monitoring Devices

PD
Contact corrosion services for instructions on how to install and remove coupons and ER
probes.
Page 96
p97
5 Interpreting the Results of Corrosion Rate Monitoring
21
5.1 General
 Corrosion personnel interprets the results of corrosion rate monitoring to determine if
20
mitigation is required or additional corrosion rate monitoring is needed.
 IF mitigation measures are applied,
4/
THEN corrosion personnel interprets the results of corrosion monitoring to determine
whether the mitigation strategy is effective.
/1
5.2 Pipelines without Mitigation
09
1. When corrosion rate monitoring is performed on a pipeline or associated facility on
which mitigation activities are not currently being performed, compare the results to the
criteria identified in Table 2, “Corrosion Rate and Pit Rate Acceptance Criteria.”
ed
Table 2. Corrosion Rate and Pit Rate Acceptance Criteria
Measurement Criteria
at
General Corrosion Rate < 1.0 mpy*

er
Pit Rate < 5.0 mpy*

*mpy = milli-inches per year
en
2. IF the results of corrosion rate monitoring meet the criteria in Table 2,

G
THEN the following actions can be taken:
a. Continue monitoring per Table 1 at each selected location until the criteria in
Table 2 are met for two consecutive monitoring periods.
F
b. Corrosion personnel determines the need for further monitoring at those

PD
locations.
Page 97
p98
5.2 (continued)
21
3. IF monitoring results exceed either criterion in Table 2,
THEN the following actions must be taken:
20
a. Perform corrosion rate monitoring per Table 1 for a minimum of two
consecutive periods before initiating mitigation measures.
4/
b. IF monitoring data from two consecutive evaluation periods exceeds either
criterion identified in Table 2,
/1
THEN corrosion personnel initiates a mitigation plan by completing Gas Utility
Form TD-4186P-400-F01, “Evaluation and Mitigation Plan for Internal Corrosion
09
Assessment.”
c. Investigate upstream receipt points to determine the source of corrosive gas, if

unknown.
ed
d. See Gas Utility Procedure TD-4186P-400, “Internal Corrosion Control:
Mitigation,” for developing a mitigation plan if needed.
at
5.3 Pipelines with Mitigation
1. When corrosion rate monitoring is performed on a pipeline or associated facility

er
undergoing mitigation, the effectiveness of the mitigation is determined by comparing

the monitoring results to the criteria identified in Table 2 and Table 3, “Criteria for
Immediate Mitigation Strategy Re-Evaluation.”
en
Table 3. Criteria for Immediate Mitigation Strategy Re-Evaluation

G
Measurement Criteria
General Corrosion Rate > 5.0 mpy*
F
Pit Rate > 8.0 mpy*

PD
* mpy = milli-inches per year
2. IF monitoring results for a selected location meet the criteria in Table 2,
THEN mitigation is considered effective in reducing the corrosion rate.
NOTE
Corrosion services may set more restrictive criteria than those in Table 2 (i.e., lower
general corrosion and pitting rates).
Page 98
p99
5.3.2 (continued)
21
a. IF the criteria in Table 2 are met for three consecutive monitoring periods,
THEN corrosion services may consider adjusting or eliminating the mitigation
20
measures in place.
b. Changes in mitigation measures should be accompanied by corrosion rate

monitoring and evaluation.
4/
3. IF monitoring results meet either criteria identified in Table 3,
/1
THEN the mitigation strategy must be re-evaluated within 30 days.
09
4. IF monitoring results exceed the criteria in Table 2, but do not meet the criteria in
Table 3,
THEN proceed with the following:

ed
a. Perform corrosion monitoring per Table 1 for an additional evaluation cycle.
b. IF monitoring results exceed the criteria in Table 3 for two consecutive

at
evaluations,
THEN reevaluate the mitigation strategy.

er
6 Evaluating Effects of Operating Changes on Monitoring Plans

en
6.1 As operating conditions change, corrosion services evaluates the need for changes to
monitoring. Operational changes that initiate such a review include the following:
G
 Addition or removal of receipt points
 Significant change in composition of a gas source (as identified by a change or

F
exception in gas tariff limits)

PD
 Addition of processing units
 Significant changes in operating temperatures or pressures
 Change in flow direction
 Design modifications
6.2 Corrosion services, with the local corrosion supervisor, document data reviewed and changes
made to monitoring plans based on the review.
Page 99
p100
7 Records
21
7.1 Record electrical resistance probe data on Gas Utility Form TD-4186P-300-F01,
“Corrosometer Probe Data Sheet.”
20
7.2 Record ultrasonic thickness probe data on Gas Utility Form TD-4186P-300-F02, “UT Probe
Data Sheet.”
7.3 Record field-related coupon data on Gas Utility Form TD-4186P-300-F03, “Coupon Field
4/
Form.”
/1
7.4 Record corrosion rates exceeding the criteria in Table 2 and Table 3 on Gas Utility Form TD-
4186P-400-F01, “Evaluation and Mitigation Plan for Internal Corrosion Assessment.”
09
7.5 Maintain documentation at the local district or division office.
7.6 Send a copy of the records to corrosion services annually.

ed
at
END of Instructions
er
en
G
F
PD
Page 100
p101
DEFINITIONS
21
See Gas Utility Standard TD-4186S, “Internal Corrosion Control of Gas Facilities.”
20
Corrosion services ensures all impacted personnel are aware of this utility procedure.
Superintendents and supervisors communicate this procedure to personnel who perform
4/
corrosion rate monitoring for internal corrosion and ensure that personnel are trained and
qualified to perform these tasks.
/1
GOVERNING DOCUMENT
09
Gas Utility Standard TD-4186S, “Internal Corrosion Control of Gas Facilities”

ed
at
49 CFR 192.491, “Corrosion control records”

er
REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
en
G
NACE RP0775, “Preparation, Installation, Analysis and Interpretation of Corrosion Coupons in

Oilfield Operations”
F
PD
NA
APPENDICES
NA
ATTACHMENTS
NA
Page 101
p102
FORMS
21
Gas Utility Form TD-4186P-300-F01, “Corrosometer Probe Data Sheet”
Gas Utility Form TD-4186P-300-F02, “UT Probe Data Sheet”
20
Gas Utility Form TD-4186P-300-F03, “Coupon Field Form”
DOCUMENT RECISION
4/
/1
09
Gas Utility Standard TD-4181S, “External Corrosion Control of Gas Facilities”

ed
Gas Utility Standard TD-4188S, “Atmospheric Corrosion Control of Gas Facilities”
Gas Utility Procedure TD-4181P-101, “Cathodic Protection Area (CPA) Design and
at
Modification”
Gas Utility Procedure TD-4181P-201, “Cathodic Protection Monitoring and Restoration”

er
Gas Utility Procedure TD-4181P-202, “Cathodic Overprotection”

en
Gas Utility Procedure TD-4181P-301, “Rectifier Maintenance and Adjustment”
Gas Utility Procedure TD-4186P-100, “Internal Corrosion Control: Liquid and Solid Sampling
G
and Testing”
Gas Utility Procedure TD-4186P-200, “Internal Corrosion Control: Design Review”

F
Gas Utility Procedure TD-4186P-300, “Internal Corrosion Control: Corrosion Rate Monitoring”
PD
Gas Utility Procedure TD-4186P-400, “Internal Corrosion Control: Mitigation”
Gas Utility Procedure TD-4186P-500, “Internal Corrosion Control: Annual Program Review”
Page 102
p103
DOCUMENT APPROVER
21
Sara Peralta, Senior Manager, Corrosion Engineering Services
DOCUMENT OWNER
20
DOCUMENT CONTACT
4/
/1
REVISION NOTES
09
Revision 0a
Records Added records retention statement.
ed
Revision 0
All This is a new utility procedure, part of the document set replacing the
internal corrosion control requirements portion of Gas Design Standard
O-16, “Corrosion Control of Gas Facilities.”
at
er
each standard:
• General Corrosion Control
en
• External Corrosion Control

• Internal Corrosion Control
• Atmospheric Corrosion Control
G

F
PD
Page 103
p104
DOCUMENT NAME: Internal Corrosion Control: Corrosion Rate Monitoring
21
DOCUMENT NUMBER: TD-4186P-300
TAILBOARD ISSUED: 7/16/2014 TAILBOARD BY1: 1/1/2016
20
4/
What is changing?
This is one of several new utility procedures, completely replacing the internal corrosion control
/1
material from Gas Design Standard O-16. This particular procedure covers corrosion rate
monitoring.
09
O-16 is being updated and rewritten to comply with the new Company guidance document
requirements, and is being reorganized and expanded into the following four standards with
multiple procedures (current and future) under each standard:
ed
at

er
Why does it matter?

This document set and the Corrosion Control Manual are being updated:
en
• To comply with regulatory requirements

• For ease of use
• To provide clearer and more detailed guidance
G
The new procedures are organized completely differently than O-16. Instructions are in separate
documents instead of one.
F
The internal corrosion control procedures governed by Gas Utility Standard TD-4186S, “Internal
Corrosion Control of Gas Facilities,” are listed below:
PD
• TD-4186P-100, “Internal Corrosion Control: Liquid and Solid Sampling and Testing”
• TD-4186P-200, “Internal Corrosion Control: Design Review”
• TD-4186P-300, “Internal Corrosion Control: Corrosion Rate Monitoring”
• TD-4186P-400, “Internal Corrosion Control: Mitigation”
• TD-4186P-500, “Internal Corrosion Control: Annual Program Review”
PG&E Internal Information, SL2 © 2014 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved. 1 of 2
GOV-2001S-F02, “Guidance Document Tailboard Form”
Page 104
p105
Required Action
21
Personnel engaged in or supervising internal corrosion control work must:
• Read the new utility procedure to understand:
20
o The process for selecting and locating corrosion rate monitoring devices
o How to interpret the results of corrosion rate monitoring
4/
• Comply with the new utility procedure
/1
Tools and Training
Field personnel conducting internal corrosion monitoring must be certified in accordance with:
09
• Operator Qualification (OQ) 03-09.00, Internal Corrosion / Monitor (to be updated for this
new utility procedure).
ed
Timeline
Date Activity
at
7/16/2014 TD-4186P-300, Rev. 0, published to the TIL, and Tailboard issued.
1/1/2016 Effective date

er
1/1/2016 Tailboard by date

en
1
Attach the completed tailboard roster to this document and retain for record keeping purposes.
G
F
PD
Page 105
p106
Guidance Document Analysis (GDA)

For Internal Corrosion Control: Corrosion Rate Monitoring
TD-4186P-300, Rev. 0
21
Document Author Jonathan Rigotti
Document Owner Keldon Cox
20
Document Approver Sara Peralta
Section 1: Planning
4/
1. Is the guidance document new or revised? If it is revised, what will change?
This is a new utility procedure. This utility procedure replaces part of the internal corrosion control portions
/1
of Gas Design Standard O-16, Corrosion Control of Gas Facilities,” issued 3/09.
The internal corrosion control portions of Gas Design Standard O-16 will be replaced and expanded upon
09
by Gas Utility Standard TD-4186S, “Internal Corrosion Control of Gas Facilities,” and the various Gas
Utility Procedures listed below:
TD-4186P-100, “Internal Corrosion Control: Liquid and Solid Sampling and Testing”
ed
TD-4186P-200, “Internal Corrosion Control: Design Review”
TD-4186P-300, “Internal Corrosion Control: Corrosion Rate Monitoring”
at
TD-4186P-400, “Internal Corrosion Control: Mitigation”

TD-4186P-500, “Internal Corrosion Control: Annual Program Review”
er

Gas Utility Standard TD-4186S, “Internal Corrosion Control of Gas Facilities,” and its associated
en
procedures provide current and more complete information on internal corrosion control in the approved
Company format. These documents are part of a major rewrite of Gas Design Standard O-16.
Gas Design Standard O-16 is being updated and rewritten to comply with new Company guidance
G
document requirements, and is being reorganized and expanded into the following four standards with
F

PD

3. What is the scope?

This utility procedure describes how to select and locate corrosion rate monitoring devices used to verify
internal corrosion conditions within Pacific Gas and Electric Company (Company) pipelines. It also
describes how to interpret the results of corrosion rate monitoring to determine if mitigation or additional
monitoring is needed.
GOV-2001S-F01, Guidance Document Analysis Form (GDA)

PG&E Internal Information, SL2 © 2014 PG&E Corporation. All rights reserved. Page 1 of 4
Page 106
p107

TD-4186P-300, Rev. 0
4. What are the regulatory requirements or other commitments that this guidance document will address?
49 CFR 192.475, “Internal corrosion control: General”
21
49 CFR 192.476, “Internal corrosion control: Design and construction of transmission line”
49 CFR 192.477, “Internal corrosion control: Monitoring”
20
For Gas Operations documents: Answer the questions to the four part test to determine whether the
changes will impact OQ qualifications (covered tasks). Consult the OQ team as necessary. A covered task
4/
may be impacted (or created) if the change meets ALL FOUR of the following:
A. Is the task performed on a pipeline facility? Yes
/1
B. Is the task an operations or maintenance task? Yes
C. Is the task performed as a requirement of 49 CFR Part 192? Yes
09
D. Does the task affect the operation or integrity of the pipeline? Yes
5. Are there any specific safety, health, or environmental issues that need to be addressed?
ed
Internal corrosion can compromise the integrity of pipelines.
Potential exists for employee and public exposure to biocides and inhibitors.
at
6. Who will be required to comply?

Personnel engaged in or supervising internal corrosion control work.
er
7. What are the expected resources needed to comply (e.g., training development and delivery costs,
costs for materials or technology, additional human resources)?
en
See GDA for Gas Utility Standard TD-4186S, “Internal Corrosion Control of Gas Facilities” for expected
costs. Local personnel will need training on new procedure. Operator qualification (OQ) tasks will need to
be updated.
G
8. How will this document be communicated and distributed? When?

This document will be part of the updated Corrosion Control Manual and will be distributed and
F
communicated with the rollout of the manual throughout 2014.

PD
Why communicate? The internal corrosion standard and associated procedures are new Company
guidance documents for Internal Corrosion Control.
Who needs to know about it? Personnel who perform internal corrosion control work.
What are the key messages?
TD-4186P-300, “Internal Corrosion Control: Corrosion Rate Monitoring” describes how to select, locate,
and interpret results from corrosion rate monitoring devices.

Page 107
p108

TD-4186P-300, Rev. 0
When is the effective date?

Once this utility procedure is published on the Technical Information Library, trained personnel may begin
21
to use it. To allow for sufficient time to communicate and train personnel on this procedure, it will become
mandatory for all Gas Operations personnel on January 1, 2016.
What else does the audience need to do?
20
This utility procedure will initially be communicated by email and will be part of a more robust
implementation plan which includes in-person meetings and additional training. Due to the number of
changes to the Corrosion Control Manual, it is strongly recommended that personnel request a new CD
4/
copy of the manual through Gas Technical Document Management.
Which manual does this apply to? Corrosion Control Manual
/1
9. What keywords will employees use to search for this document?
09
Corrosion, Internal, Internal Corrosion, Corrosion Rate Monitoring, ER Probe, Corrosometer, Coupon, UT
Probe
10. Will formal sign off by the members of the target audience be required?
ed
No.
11. What follow-up actions are needed?

at
None.
er
12. What other options have been considered?

None. Implementation of internal corrosion requirements is mandated by the referenced regulation.
en
13. Who needs to review and concur?

Bryon Winget, Supervising Engineer, Corrosion Engineering Services
G

Nancy Maa, Manager, Standards and Procedures
F

At least once every calendar year, not exceeding 15 months to the date.
PD

Page 108
p109

TD-4186P-300, Rev. 0
Section 2: Guidance Document Consistency Check
21
List in the table below existing guidance related to or affected by the proposed new guidance document.
The author determines what actions must be taken to ensure existing resources are consistent with the
new guidance document and will remain so.
20
If there are inconsistencies or uncertainty about whether the other resources will remain in-sync with the
new document, the author develops a plan to address the situation and documents it here.
Name, Location, and Consistent? Recommended Responsible Action
4/
Effective Date Action Person Due
/1
O-16, “Corrosion Control of No O-16 is being Keldon Cox 7/16/2014
Gas Facilities Requirements,” replaced by
Technical Information Library, multiple
09
Corrosion Control Manual, 6/09 documents. These
documents are
part of the O-16
rewrite.
ed
Gas Information Bulletin 230, No GIB 230 will be Keldon Cox 7/16/2014
“Design and Construction replaced by
Controls to Reduce IC in GT
at
TD-4186S and
Pipelines,” Technical TD-4186P-200.
Information Library, 05/07
er
Section 3: Compliance Monitoring

en
Mechanism(s) for Monitoring Compliance Responsible Person
Periodic reviews of corrosion rate monitoring locations Brian Winget

G
Section 4: Stakeholder / Subject Matter Expert Review

F
Name Department Date of Review

PD
Jonathan Rigotti - Lead Corrosion Engineering 3/7/2014

Bryon Winget Corrosion Engineering 3/7/2014
Sara Peralta Corrosion Engineering 3/7/2014
Dave Aguiar Integrity Management 3/5/2014
Bruce Norred Corrosion Engineering 3/5/2014

Page 109
p110
Internal Corrosion Control: Mitigation
0BSUMMARY
21
This procedure describes the process for developing an internal corrosion control mitigation
plan for Pacific Gas and Electric Company (Company).
20
1BTARGET AUDIENCE
4/
Corrosion personnel developing and managing internal corrosion control mitigation plans.
/1
2BSAFETY
Compliance with this procedure reduces the risk of internal corrosion in transmission,
09
gathering, storage, and distribution lines, which results in increased public and personnel
safety. No specific safety concerns are associated with the use of this procedure by a user
developing mitigation plans.
ed
3BBEFORE YOU START
Corrosion personnel developing internal corrosion control mitigation plans must receive
training from the appropriate subject matter expert (SME) corrosion engineer.
at
er
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION TITLE PAGE

en
1 Initiate Mitigation Process....................................................................................2

2 Select Mitigation Method .....................................................................................2
G
3 Develop and Implement Mitigation Plan ..............................................................8

4 Monitor Mitigation Effectiveness ..........................................................................8
F
5 Evaluate Effects of Operating Changes on Mitigation Plans ...............................9

PD
6 Maintain Records.................................................................................................9
Page 110
p111
4BPROCEDURE STEPS
21
1 Initiate Mitigation Process
Corrosion services initiates an internal corrosion mitigation plan for transmission, gathering, or
20
storage facilities as described in this section.
Corrosion services may initiate mitigation processes for distribution as determined by the
number of internal corrosion issues identified on distribution assets in a fixed area.
4/
1.1 Corrosion services identifies locations where one or more of the following conditions exist:
/1
 Corrosion rates from monitoring devices have exceeded the established thresholds as
referenced in Gas Utility Procedure TD-4186P-300, “Internal Corrosion Control:
09
Corrosion Rate Monitoring.”
 Liquid sample collection identifies water via a positive indication on water finding paper
in the field or subsequent lab analysis determines a water content greater than 5% by
ed
volume and lab test results exceed any of the criteria in Table 2 in Gas Utility Standard
TD-4186S, “Internal Corrosion Control of Gas Facilities.”
1.2 Corrosion services develops internal corrosion mitigation plans for the above locations as
at
described in Section 2 below, Section 3, or both.

er
2 Select Mitigation Method
2.1 General
en
 Corrosion services selects the mitigation method for the mitigation plan.
 Corrosion services considers corrosion mechanisms impacting the pipeline when

G
determining the appropriate mitigation method (e.g., biocide should not be used to treat
mechanisms other than microbiologically influenced corrosion [MIC]). Additional
investigation beyond corrosion rate monitoring or discovery of internal corrosion may
F
be needed to make this determination.

PD
 The Company’s general preference is to use liquid removal, biocide, corrosion inhibitor,
gas dehydration, and pigging (cleaning) for corrosion mitigation. However, there are
numerous mitigation strategies that can address different sources of corrosive
conditions. Depending on the root cause of the corrosive conditions, it may be
necessary to use more than one mitigation technique to provide effective mitigation.
Page 111
p112
2.2 Mitigation Techniques
21
A brief description of various mitigation methods is provided below:
1. Gas Dehydration
20
 Installation of gas dehydration facilities can decrease the amount of water vapor
entering the system.
4/
 Existing dehydration facilities may be modified to more effectively remove water
vapor. Factors that may impact the feasibility of design changes include cost of
/1
equipment, footprint of equipment, and necessary effectiveness of dehydration.
2. Liquid Separation
09
 Installation of liquid separation facilities can decrease the amount of liquids
entering the system.
ed
 Existing liquid separation facilities may be modified to more effectively remove
liquids. Factors that may impact the feasibility of design changes include cost of
equipment, footprint of equipment, and necessary effectiveness of liquid
separation.
at
 Operational changes may reduce the potential for liquid upset; for example,
er
increasing the maintenance frequency on scrubbers or filters. Operational

changes such as increasing flow rates may be used to sweep liquids from low
spots into separation facilities.
en
3. Maintenance Pigging
a. General
G
 Cleaning by pigging is an effective way to remove solids and liquids

from a pipeline.
F
 Pigging may be considered part of the mitigation strategy whenever

PD
under-deposit corrosion or microbiologically influenced corrosion (MIC),

or both are contributing corrosion mechanisms.
 Pigging may also be considered for pipelines that have a confirmed

presence of internal corrosion and are known to contain liquids and/or
solids.
 Where pipelines are piggable, consider pigging the pipelines prior to

batch treatment.
 Launcher and receiver facilities are generally necessary to perform

pigging.
Page 112
p113
2.2.3 (continued)
21
b. Frequency
 Base the frequency of pigging on the volume of liquids and/or solids
20
recovered during pigging operations. Corrosion services determines the
initial pigging frequency of the pipelines in the pigging program based
on in-line inspection (ILI) and liquid sample data.
4/
 The resulting volumes of liquids and solids removed should be trended
and used to adjust the pigging frequency.
/1
 Each time pigging is performed, run multiple pigs in succession to
ensure that the line is fully cleaned.
09
c. Pig Types
Pig size and type are dependent on the line and the internal corrosion
ed
mechanism being mitigated.
 Scraper or brush pigs may be used to mitigate internal corrosion related

to solids, deposits, or under-deposit corrosion.
at
 Multi-ribbed or disc pigs may be used to remove liquids from a system

er
where liquid accumulation is contributing to the corrosion. Multi-ribbed or

disc pigs will not remove tenacious scale.
en
 Spheres or foam pigs should generally not be used for mitigation as

they are less effective at removing liquids and solids from the pipeline.
However, they may be considered where the pipeline configuration
prevents the use of scraper pigs or disc pigs. For example, foam pigs
G
may be used in systems with obstructions that prevent other types of

pigs from being used (e.g., diameter changes).
F
4. Scrubbing / Scavenging
PD
a. Scrubbing
 Potentially corrosive constituents (CO2, H2S, O2, or a combination) can

be removed using amine treatment (CO2 or H2S) or catalytic combustion
(O2).
Page 113
p114
2.2.4 (continued)
21
 Factors that may impact the feasibility of installing equipment such as
amine units include the following:
20
Cost of equipment
 Footprint of equipment
4/
 Necessary reduction in constituent concentration
/1
b. Scavenging
 H2S or O2 can also be removed using scavengers (chemical treatment).
09
 Factors that may impact the feasibility of using chemical scavengers
include the following:
ed
 Compatibility with other chemicals being used in the system
 Availability of chemical pumps

at
 Water chemistry
er
5. Biocide
en
WARNING
Biocides may present significant health, safety, and environmental issues.

G
 Biocides may be applied to systems to mitigate microbiologically influenced

corrosion (MIC). Simply attempting to kill microorganisms, however, may not
F
necessarily mitigate MIC. Biocides can be corrosive in concentrated form

because of their low pH.
PD
 Biocides may be applied in either batch or continuous form (in the same
manner as described for corrosion inhibitor application); however, batch
treatment is more common.
 To be effective, the biocide must be able to reach the bacteria attached to the
pipe surface.
 Where pipelines are piggable, it is recommended to use a scraper or wire brush

pig prior to batch treatment to remove any sludge, solids, and biofilms.
Page 114
p115
2.2.5 (continued)
21
 Planktonic bacteria testing with a positive result does not necessarily mean that
MIC is occurring. Positive planktonic bacteria results simply indicate the one
component necessary for MIC to occur is present. Therefore, planktonic
20
bacteria testing results are not used as the single source of information for
determining the need for biocide treatment. Corrosion rate monitoring and
testing for sessile bacteria should be performed to determine the need for
biocide treatment.
4/
 When determining the dosage rates for biocide, consider the following:
/1
 Line history
09
 Expected volume of water
 Flow rates
ed
 Contact time at the target concentration
 Vendor recommendations
at
 Impact of biocide upsets on customer service lines

er
6. Corrosion Inhibitor
a. General
en
 Corrosion inhibitors may be selected to mitigate internal corrosion.

Corrosion inhibitors form a film or lay down a barrier between the metal
surface and corrosive constituents that are present in the pipeline.
G
 Corrosion inhibitors should be selected based on testing to determine

effectiveness at reducing corrosion in the region to be treated and also
F
considering compatibility with other chemicals that are being used.

PD
 Corrosion inhibitors may be applied continuously or in the form of batch

treatments.
Page 115
p116
2.2.6 (continued)
21
 Determine dosage rates for corrosion inhibitor with consideration of the
following:
20
Line history
 Expected volume of water
4/
 Flow rates
/1
 Target residual concentration
 Vendor recommendations
09
 Impact to customer service lines
b. Continuous
ed
 Continuous chemical treatment is typically used when sufficient liquids
are present in a system and ongoing application of chemicals is desired.
at
 It is important to base the chemical injection rate on the volumetric flow

rate of water in the system. The volumetric flow rate of water can be
er
calculated by dividing the volume of liquid removed or recovered from

the pipeline by the time period over which it was removed.
en
 Chemical pumps and tanks are required for continuous injection.

Injection can be performed by using injection or quills.
c. Batch
G
 Batch chemical treatment is typically used in piggable pipelines where

liquids are not transported or their flow is very low or intermittent.
F
 The volume of the chemical diluents used, contact time, and application
PD
interval are important in determining the effectiveness of the inhibitor.
 Batch treatments can also be applied as a slug (as opposed to between

two pigs) in non-piggable pipelines; however, slug treatment is less
effective at coating the entire surface area of the pipeline than batch
treating between two pigs.
Page 116
p117
3 Develop and Implement Mitigation Plan
21
NOTE
Each pipeline may have its own corrosion mitigation plan,
20
depending on the operation environment of that section of the system.
3.1 Corrosion services completes the following:
4/
1. Develop an internal corrosion mitigation plan based on the mitigation method selected
by corrosion services.
/1
2. Document the mitigation plan on Gas Utility Form TD-4186P-400-F01, “Evaluation and
Mitigation Plan for Internal Corrosion Assessment.” The plan should include the
09
following:
 Mitigation method
ed
 Location where mitigation is being applied
 Frequency of mitigation
at
 Dosage rates for any chemical injection

er
 Other information at the discretion of corrosion services
3.2 Corrosion personnel manage mitigation plans for the pipelines in their system.
en
4 Monitor Mitigation Effectiveness
Corrosion personnel monitors whenever mitigation is applied to determine the effectiveness of

G
mitigation.
 Corrosion services selects the monitoring device and location per Gas Utility Procedure
F
TD-4186P-300, “Internal Corrosion Control: Corrosion Rate Monitoring.” Interpretation

of corrosion rate monitoring results for pipelines with mitigation are also located in this
PD
utility procedure.
 Corrosion personnel perform monitoring two times per year, at intervals not exceeding
7-1/2 months to the date per Gas Utility Standard TD-4186S, “Internal Corrosion
Control of Gas Facilities.”
Page 117
p118
5 Evaluate Effects of Operating Changes on Mitigation Plans
21
5.1 As operating conditions change, corrosion services evaluates the need for changes to the
mitigation plan. Operational changes that initiate such a review include the following:
20
Addition or removal of receipt points
 Significant change in composition of a gas source (as identified by a change or

exception in gas tariff limits)
4/
 Addition of processing units
/1
 Significant changes in operating temperatures or pressures
09
 Change in flow direction
 Design modifications
ed
5.2 Corrosion services, with corrosion personnel, document data reviewed and changes made to
mitigation activity plans based on the review.
6 Maintain Records
at
Corrosion personnel ensure the following tasks are performed:

er
 Document chemical injection sites on a map or form.

en
 Send the following information to the district’s environmental coordinator:
 Type of chemical
G
 Volume of the chemical tank
 Location
F
 Ensure chemical injection sites have appropriate fire and material safety data sheet
PD
(MSDS) placarding.
 Document mitigation plan and findings on Gas Utility Form TD-4186P-400-F01,

“Evaluation and Mitigation Plan for Internal Corrosion Assessment.”
 Maintain documents at the local district or division office.
 Send a copy of the records to corrosion services annually.
7 Records

Page 118
p119
21
END of Instructions
5BDEFINITIONS
20
Batch Treatment: Chemical treatment performed by injecting a specified volume of corrosion
inhibitor or biocide at one location or various selected points on a system. Sometimes known
as slug treatment.
4/
Biocides: An additive used to kill or control bacteria.
/1
Cleaning Pig: A utility pig that uses cups, scrapers, or brushes to remove liquid, dirt, sludge,
and other debris from the pipeline.
09
Inhibitors: A chemical substance or combination of substances that, when present in the
proper concentration and forms in the pipeline, prevents or reduces corrosion.
ed
Microbiologically Influenced Corrosion (MIC): Metal corrosion or deterioration which is
aided by metabolic activity of microorganisms.
Planktonic Bacteria: Free-floating or free-swimming bacteria in bulk fluids.

at
Sessile Bacteria: Bacteria attached to a surface.

er
Upset Conditions: Abnormal operating conditions. With respect to internal corrosion, the
concern is when corrosive constituents are temporarily introduced to the gas stream.
en
Under-deposit Corrosion: Localized corrosion under or around a deposit or collection of

material on a metal surface. The deposit(s) may be due to corrosion product accumulation,
precipitation of solids from the water, or microbiological activity.
G
Additional definitions are available in Gas Utility Standard TD-4186S, “Internal Corrosion
Control of Gas Facilities.”
F
6BIMPLEMENTATION RESPONSIBILITIES
PD
Supervisors communicate this procedure to personnel developing internal corrosion control

mitigation plans and ensure that personnel are trained to perform these tasks.
7BGOVERNING DOCUMENT
Page 119
p120
8BCOMPLIANCE REQUIREMENT / REGULATORY COMMITMENT
21
20
4/
9BREFERENCE DOCUMENTS
/1
09
ed
NA
10B APPENDICES
at
NA
ATTACHMENTS
er
11B
NA
en
FORMS
Gas Utility Form TD-4186P-400-F01, “Evaluation and Mitigation Plan for Internal Corrosion
G
Assessment”
F
PD
Page 120
p121
12BDOCUMENT RECISION
21
20
 Gas Utility Standard TD-4181S, “External Corrosion Control of Gas Facilities”
4/
/1
09
Modification”

ed
 Gas Utility Procedure TD-4181P-301, “Rectifier Maintenance and Adjustment”

at
er

en

Monitoring”

G

Review”
F
PD
Page 121
p122
DOCUMENT APPROVER
21
DOCUMENT OWNER
20
DOCUMENT CONTACT
4/
/1
REVISION NOTES
09
Revision 0a
Records Added section, including records retention statement.
ed
Revision 0
internal corrosion control requirements portion of Gas Design Standard
O-16, “Corrosion Control of Gas Facilities.”
at
er
each standard:
en

G

F
PD
Page 122
p123
DOCUMENT NAME: Internal Corrosion Control: Mitigation
21
20
4/
What is changing?
/1
material from Gas Design Standard O-16. This utility procedure covers internal corrosion control
mitigation.
09
ed
at

er
Why does it matter?

en

• For ease of use
G

F
PD

Page 123
p124
Required Action
21
Local corrosion supervisors and corrosion engineering personnel developing internal corrosion
control mitigation plans must:
20
• Read the new procedure to understand how to perform the following:
o Initiate mitigation process
o Select mitigation method
4/
o Develop and implement mitigation plans
/1
o Monitor mitigation effectiveness
o Evaluate effects of operating changes on mitigation plans
09
o Maintain records
• Comply with the procedure
ed
Tools and Training
The procedure lists several mitigation techniques to consider, each of which uses unique tools
and equipment.
at
Corrosion personnel developing internal corrosion control mitigation plans must receive training
from the appropriate subject matter expert (SME) corrosion engineer.
er
Timeline
en
Date Activity
7/16/2014 TD-4186P-400, Rev. 0 published to the TIL, and Tailboard issued.
G

F
1
PD
Page 124
p125

For Internal Corrosion Control: Mitigation
TD-4186P-400, Rev. 0
21
20
Section 1: Planning
4/
This is a new utility procedure. This utility procedure replaces part of the internal corrosion control portions
/1
of Gas Design Standard O-16, Corrosion Control of Gas Facilities,” issued 3/09.
09
ed
at

er

en
G
F

PD


This procedure describes the process for developing an internal corrosion control mitigation plan.

Page 125
p126

TD-4186P-400, Rev. 0
21
20
4/
A. Is the task performed on a pipeline facility? No
/1
09
ed
at

Local corrosion supervisors and corrosion engineering personnel developing internal corrosion control
mitigation plans.
er
en
See GDA for Gas Utility Standard TD-4186S, “Internal Corrosion Control of Gas Facilities,” for expected
costs. Local personnel will need training on new procedure.
G

F

PD
TD-4186P-400, “Internal Corrosion Control: Mitigation” describes the process for developing an internal
corrosion mitigation plan.
When is the effective date? 1/1/2016
mandatory for all Gas Operations personnel on January 1, 2016.
Page 126
p127

TD-4186P-400, Rev. 0

21
20
4/
Corrosion, Internal, Internal Corrosion, Mitigation, Gas Dehydration, Pigging, Biocide, Corrosion Inhibitor,
Bacteria, Corrosion plan
/1
09
No.

None.
ed
at

er

en

G
F
PD

Page 127
p128

TD-4186P-400, Rev. 0
21
20
4/
/1
Gas Facilities Requirements,” replaced by
Technical Information Library, multiple
09
Corrosion Control Manual, documents. These
6/09 documents are part
of the O-16 rewrite.
ed
“Design and Construction replaced by TD-
Controls to Reduce IC in GT 4186S andTD-
Pipelines,” Technical
at
4186P-200.
er

en
Periodic reviews of mitigation plans Bryon Winget

G

F

PD


Page 128
p129
Internal Corrosion Control: Annual Program Review
SUMMARY
21
This utility procedure describes the annual program review for internal corrosion control of the
Pacific Gas and Electric Company (Company) gas pipelines.
20
TARGET AUDIENCE
4/
Corrosion engineers performing the internal corrosion control annual program review.
/1
SAFETY
Compliance with this utility procedure reduces the risk of internal corrosion in transmission,
09
gathering, storage, and distribution lines, which results in increased public and personnel
safety. No specific safety concerns are associated with the use of this procedure by a user
performing the internal corrosion control annual program review.
ed
BEFORE YOU START
Corrosion personnel performing the annual program review must receive training from the
at
er
TABLE OF CONTENTS

en
G
1 General ................................................................................................................2
2 Review Internal Corrosion Related Failures ........................................................2
F
3 Review Evidence of Internal Corrosion................................................................2

4 Review Sampling and Monitoring Results ...........................................................2
PD
5 Review Mitigation Strategy ..................................................................................3

6 Document Annual Review ...................................................................................4
7 Records ...............................................................................................................4
Page 129
p130
PROCEDURE STEPS
21
1 General
1.1 Corrosion services reviews activities and data related to internal corrosion on an annual basis
20
to assess the internal condition of the Company’s gas transmission, gathering, storage, and
distribution system.
1.2 Corrosion services incorporates applicable data from Risk Management Procedure RMP-16,
4/
“Threat Identification” as part of the review.
/1
2 Review Internal Corrosion Related Failures
2.1 Identify the locations of any leaks or ruptures that have occurred due to internal corrosion in
09
the previous year.
2.2 Identify results of failure analyses.

ed
3 Review Evidence of Internal Corrosion
3.1 Review the results of in-line inspections, non-destructive testing, or visual inspections.
at
3.2 Identify the locations of internal indications or anomalies along with the extent and severity of
corrosion.
er
3.3 Where visual inspections were performed, include the accompanying sample results.
4 Review Sampling and Monitoring Results

en
4.1 Identify locations where gas testing, liquid sampling, solid sampling, and corrosion rate
monitoring were performed during the previous year for internal corrosion control purposes.
G
4.2 Compare the results from the previous year with historical results for the same locations.
F
4.3 Identify locations where testing results exceeded the corrosive threshold limits defined in
Gas Utility Procedure TD-4186P-300, “Internal Corrosion Control: Corrosion Rate Monitoring.”
PD
Page 130
p131
4.4 Identify liquid sampling, solid sampling, gas testing or coupon monitoring locations that need to
be added or changed.
21
 Additions or changes may be based on the following:
20
Testing results
 Internal corrosion related failure
4/
 Evidence of internal corrosion
/1
 Changes in operations
 The need for additional information regarding the system
09
4.5 Identify locations where the frequency of corrosion testing needs to be changed.
5 Review Mitigation Strategy

ed
5.1 Review the mitigation strategy from the previous year. Identify the following information, if
applicable:
at
 Pigging frequency

er
Volume of liquids and/or solids removed
 Types of chemical treatment (batch or continuous)

en
 Frequency, rate, or volume of chemical used
 Brand of chemical(s) used

G
5.2 Evaluate monitoring results to determine if corrosion is being mitigated effectively. See
Gas Utility Procedure TD-4186P-300, “Internal Corrosion Control: Corrosion Rate Monitoring.”
F
PD
Page 131
p132
5.3 Identify changes needed to the mitigation plan.
21
1. Changes may be based on monitoring results, internal corrosion failures, evidence of
internal corrosion, or changes in system operation.
20
2. Consideration may be given to reducing or eliminating mitigation activities if monitoring
devices upstream of mitigation indicate that corrosive gas (or liquid) is no longer being
transported.
4/
 IF mitigation activities are reduced or eliminated,
/1
THEN continue monitoring for at least two consecutive monitoring periods to
verify that corrosive conditions no longer exist. See Gas Utility Procedure TD-
4186P-300, “Internal Corrosion Control: Corrosion Rate Monitoring.”
09
6 Document Annual Review
6.1 Document the annual review process using Gas Utility Form TD-4186P-500-F01, “Internal
ed
Corrosion Control Annual Review.”
6.2 Record information related to the internal corrosion mitigation plan for a specific pipeline on
Gas Utility Form TD-4186P-400-F01, “Evaluation and Mitigation Plan for Internal Corrosion
at
Assessment.” Monitoring to be performed should also be contained in this plan.
6.3 Corrosion services maintains a copy of the annual review records.

er
7 Records
en

G
END of Instructions
F
PD
Page 132
p133
DEFINITIONS
21
See Gas Utility Standard TD-4186S, “Internal Corrosion Control of Gas Facilities.”
20
Supervisors communicate this procedure to personnel performing the internal corrosion control
4/
annual program review and ensure that personnel are trained to perform these tasks.
/1
GOVERNING DOCUMENT
09

ed

at

er
REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
en
G
Risk Management Procedure RMP-16, “Threat Identification”

F
APPENDICES
PD
NA
ATTACHMENTS
NA
Page 133
p134
FORMS
21
Gas Utility Form TD-4186P-500-F01, “Internal Corrosion Control Annual Review”
DOCUMENT RECISION
20
4/
 Gas Utility Standard TD-4180S, “General Corrosion Control of Gas Facilities”
/1
Gas Utility Standard TD-4181S, “External Corrosion Control of Gas Facilities”
09
ed
Modification”

at

er
Gas Utility Procedure TD-4181P-301, “Rectifier Maintenance and Adjustment”
en

G

Monitoring”
F

PD

Review”
Page 134
p135
DOCUMENT APPROVER
21
DOCUMENT OWNER
20
DOCUMENT CONTACT
4/
/1
REVISION NOTES
09
Revision 0a
Records Added section, including records retention statement.
ed
Revision 0
internal corrosion control requirements portion of Gas Design Standard O-
16, “Corrosion Control of Gas Facilities.”
at
er
each standard:
en

G

F
PD
Page 135
p136
DOCUMENT NAME: Internal Corrosion Control: Annual Program Review
21
20
4/
What is changing?
/1
material from Gas Design Standard O-16. This particular procedure covers the annual program
review for internal corrosion control.
09
ed
at

er
Why does it matter?

en

• For ease of use
G
F
PD
Page 136
p137
Required Action
21
Corrosion engineers performing the internal corrosion control annual program review must:
• Read the new utility procedure to understand how to perform an annual program review
20
to assess the internal condition of the Company’s gas transmission, gathering, storage,
and distribution lines.
• Comply with the procedure.
4/
Tools and Training
/1
Corrosion personnel performing the annual program review must receive training from the
09
Timeline
Date Activity
ed
7/16/2014 TD-4186P-500, Rev. 0, published to the TIL, and Tailboard issued.

at

er
1
en
G
F
PD
Page 137
p138

For Internal Corrosion Control: Annual Program Review
TD-4186P-500, Rev. 0
21
20
Section 1: Planning
4/
This is a new utility procedure.
/1
09
ed
at

er

en
G

F

PD

This utility procedure describes the annual program review for internal corrosion control of Company gas
pipelines.

Page 138
p139

TD-4186P-500, Rev. 0
21
20
4/
/1
B. Is the task an operations or maintenance task? No
09
ed
at

Corrosion engineers performing the internal corrosion control annual program review.
er
en
Minimal additional resources are needed to train personnel on the new procedure.

G
F
PD
Who needs to know about it? Corrosion engineers performing the internal corrosion control annual
program review.
TD-4186P-500, “Internal Corrosion Control: Annual Program Review” describes the annual program
review for internal corrosion control performed by corrosion services.
mandatory on January 1, 2016.

Page 139
p140

TD-4186P-500, Rev. 0

21
20
4/
Corrosion, Internal, Internal Corrosion, Review, Annual Review, Evidence, Sampling, Monitoring,
Mitigation
/1
09
No.

None.
ed
at

er

en

G
F
PD

Page 140
p141

TD-4186P-500, Rev. 0
21
20
Name, Location, and Consistent? Recommended Action Responsible Action
4/
Effective Date Person Due
/1
O-16, “Corrosion No O-16 is being replaced Keldon Cox 7/16/2014
Control of Gas Facilities by multiple documents.
Requirements,” These documents are
09
Corrosion Control part of the O-16 rewrite
Manual, 6/09
Gas Information Bulletin No GIB 230 will be replaced Keldon Cox 7/16/2014
ed
230, “Design and by TD-4186S and TD-
Construction Controls to 4186P-200
Reduce IC in GT
Pipelines,” 05/07
at
Liquid Sampling No LSP-2 will be replaced by Keldon Cox 7/16/2014

Procedure LSP-2 TD-4186P-100, “Internal
er
Corrosion Control: Liquid

and Solid Sampling and
en
Testing”

G

F
Periodic reviews of annual reviews Bryon Winget

PD


Page 141
p142

For Internal Corrosion Control of Gas Facilities
TD-4186S, Rev. 0
Document Type Utility Standard
21
20
Document Approver Sumeet Singh
Section 1: Planning
4/
/1
This is a new utility standard. This utility standard and its associated procedures replace the internal
corrosion control portions of Gas Design Standard O-16, “Corrosion Control of Gas Facilities,” issued 3/09.
09
Various specific tasks relating to control of internal corrosion will now be handled by new, separate,
detailed procedures. The internal corrosion gas utility procedures governed by this standard are listed
below:
ed
at

er

This utility standard and its associated procedures provide current and more complete information on
en
internal corrosion control in the approved Company format. These documents are part of a major rewrite
of Gas Design Standard O-16. Gas Design Standard O-16 is being updated and rewritten to comply with
new Company guidance document requirements, and is being reorganized and expanded into the
G
following four standards with multiple procedures (current and future) under each standard:
• General corrosion control
F
• External corrosion control

• Internal corrosion control
PD
• Atmospheric corrosion control

The internal corrosion standard and procedures address the inspection, evaluation, assessment,
monitoring, mitigation, and review program for internal corrosion management of Company-owned gas
transmission, gathering, storage, and distribution facilities.

Page 142
p143

TD-4186S, Rev. 0
21
20
4/
/1
B. Is the task an operations or maintenance task? No
C. Is the task performed as a requirement of 49 CFR Part 192? No
09
D. Does the task affect the operation or integrity of the pipeline? No
ed
at

Personnel performing or supervising internal corrosion control work including corrosion field personnel,
corrosion supervisors, corrosion engineering, pipeline engineering, and integrity management personnel.
er
en
Costs are unknown but expected to be approximately $3M capital and $8.8M expense initially. Ongoing
costs are expected to be approximately $0.6M annually to monitor these locations. (Estimated costs do
not include EM monitoring recently proposed.)
G
Expense:
Develop specific inspection and mitigation projects for storage facilities (IMLAPs) and non-specific
F
inspection and mitigation for other transmission assets. Install internal coupons, monitor drips, perform
liquid analysis and non-destructive examinations (NDE).
PD
Capital:
Monitor locations as appropriate. Install IC monitoring and mitigation systems including: 1) chemical
injection pumps, 2) electron microscopy coupon monitoring devices, and 3) ultrasonic thickness (UT)
sensors.
Local personnel will need training on new procedure requirements and will conduct increased liquid
sampling and testing. Operator qualification (OQ) tasks will need to be updated and developed.

Page 143
p144

TD-4186S, Rev. 0

21
20
TD-4186S, “Internal Corrosion Control of Gas Facilities,” establishes internal corrosion control
requirements for Company-owned gas transmission, gathering, storage, and distribution facilities.
4/
TD-4186P-100, “Internal Corrosion Control: Liquid and Solid Sampling and Testing,” provides steps for
sampling and testing liquids and solids from Company gas pipelines for internal corrosion evaluation.
/1
TD-4186P-200, “Internal Corrosion Control: Design Review,” describes the internal corrosion design
review process performed by corrosion services for new or modified gas transmission, gathering, and
09
storage lines or line components.
TD-4186P-300, “Internal Corrosion Control: Corrosion Rate Monitoring,” describes how to select, locate,
and interpret results from corrosion rate monitoring devices.
TD-4186P-400, “Internal Corrosion Control: Mitigation,” describes the process for developing an internal
ed
corrosion mitigation plan.
TD-4186P-500, “Internal Corrosion Annual Program Review,” describes the annual review program for
internal corrosion performed by corrosion services.
at

er
What else does the audience need to do? Print a new copy of the guidance documents and include
them in printed copies of the Corrosion Control Manual.
en
These documents will be part of the Corrosion Control Manual, and will be distributed and communicated
with the Corrosion Control Manual roll out. They will be communicated by email and distributed through
the Technical Information Library (TIL).
G

F
Corrosion, Internal, Liquid, Drip, Bottom Tap, Internal Corrosion, Corrosometer, Coupon, Probes
PD
No.

None.


Page 144
p145

TD-4186S, Rev. 0

Jonathan Rigotti, Corrosion Engineering
21
Bryon Winget, Corrosion Engineering
Corrosion Technical Team
Sara Peralta
Bennie Barnes
20
Sumeet Singh
4/
/1
09
ed
at

Gas Facilities Requirements,” replaced by several
er
Technical Information Library, documents. These

Corrosion Control Manual, documents are part
en
6/2009 of the O-16 rewrite.
Liquid Sampling Procedure No LSP-2 (O-16, Keldon Cox 7/16/2014

LSP-2 Attachment H) will
G
be replaced by TD-
4186P-100, “Internal
Corrosion Control:
F
Liquid and Solid

PD
“Design and Construction replaced by
Controls to Reduce IC in GT TD-4186S
Pipelines,” Technical

Page 145
p146

TD-4186S, Rev. 0
21
Periodic reviews of locations monitored (data will be in PLM and Corrosion Supervisors
20
SAP).
4/
/1
Jonathan Rigotti – Lead Corrosion Engineering 3/7/2014
09
ed
Carol Burke Gas Quality 2/10/2014
Tom Trimble Gas Transmission Measurement & 2/10/2014
Regulation
at
Karen Roth Q&I Quality Verification 3/7/2014

William Mojica Pipeline Engineering 3/7/2014
er
Terry White Station Engineering 3/7/2014
Larry Deniston Regulatory RS&A 3/7/2014

en
Donnie Jue Maintenance & Construction 3/7/2014

Compliance
G
Corrosion Technical Team Various 3/7/2014

Scott Petersen Quality Control – T&R 3/7/2014
Bennie Barnes Integrity Management 3/25/2014
F
PD

Page 146
p147
DOCUMENT NAME: Internal Corrosion Control of Gas Facilities
21
DOCUMENT NUMBER: TD-4186S
20
4/
What is changing?
This utility standard and its associated procedures are completely replacing the portions of
/1
Gas Design Standard O-16 relating to control of internal corrosion on gas facilities.
09
• General corrosion control
• External corrosion control
ed
• Internal corrosion control
• Atmospheric corrosion control
at
Why does it matter?

er
Various specific tasks relating to control of internal corrosion will now be handled by new,
separate, detailed procedures. The gas utility procedures governed by this standard are listed
below:
en
G

F
PD
Required Action
Personnel engaged in or supervising internal corrosion control work must:
• Read the new utility standard to understand internal corrosion control requirements
• Comply with the requirements
Page 147
p148
Tools and Training
21
The utility standard itself does not require special tools or training. The individual utility
procedures list the tools and training applicable to each procedure.
20
Timeline
Date Activity
4/
7/16/2014 TD-4186S, Rev. 0 published to the TIL, and Tailboard issued.
/1
09
1
ed
at
er
en
G
F
PD
Page 148
p149
Publication Date: 06/16/2021 Effective Date: 07/01/2021 Rev: 1b
Leak Repair and Pipe Inspection Documentation
SUMMARY
21
This utility procedure details the process to complete leak repair, dig-in incidents, and pipe
inspection documentation using the following forms:
 Form TD-5100P-01-F01, “Leak Repair, Inspection, Gas Quarterly Incident Report
20
(A-Form)” Referred to as the “A-Form” in this procedure.
 Form TD-5100P-01-F02, “Gas Incident Dig-in Report Addendum (A-1 Form)”
4/
Referred to as the “A-1 Form” in this procedure.
/1
 Form TD-5100P-01-F03, “Pipe Inspection Form”
09
TARGET AUDIENCE
ed
Pacific Gas and Electric Company (PG&E or Company) personnel that document leak repair
dig-in incidents, or perform pipe inspections of gas facilities including: maintenance and
construction (M&C) personnel, general construction (GC) Transmission and Distribution (T&D)
personnel, construction management (T&D) Inspection personnel, personnel performing
at
standby, personnel responding to dig-ins, personnel performing dig-in investigations, leak

survey personnel, field services personnel, corrosion mechanics, mapping (T&D) personnel,
er
distribution integrity management program (DIMP) personnel, transmission integrity

management program (TIMP) personnel, quality control (T&D) personnel and gas quality
management (QM) personnel
en
SAFETY
Use standard safe work practices and equipment listed in the PG&E Gas Operations Personal
G
Protective Equipment (PPE) Matrix.

F
PD
Page 149
p150
BEFORE YOU START
21
Operator Qualifications (OQ) are required, at the date of this publication, for specific sections
of the A-Form and the Pipe Inspection Form as outlined below. Consult the PG&E gas
qualifications task list or contact the Gas Qualifications department for updated OQ
20
requirements and other covered task information,
Form Section OQ OQ Title Requirements
4/
Metallic Pipe Condition To perform visual
OQ 03-05 Pipe Inspection
(External and Internal) inspection
/1
Cathodic Protection System To perform Pipe-to-Soil
OQ 03-06 Pipe-to-Soil Reads
Condition and Casing-to-Soil reads
09
Any coating application or repair must be performed by qualified personnel.
Pressure Test for Facilities
OQ 04-02 operating at 100 psi or
Above (Strength Test)
ed
Leak Test at Operating Not applicable for
Pressure Test #1 OQ 04-03
Pressure Inspection Only
Pressure Test for Facilities
at
OQ 04-04 Operating below 100 psi

(Leak Test)
er
TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT

en
Obtain necessary tools, materials, and equipment to document leak repairs, dig-in incidents,
and inspections.
G
TABLE OF CONTENTS

F
1 General Requirements ...................................................................................... 3

PD
2 Leak Repair, Inspection, Gas Quarterly Incident Report (A-Form) ..................... 4

3 Gas Incident Dig-In Report Addendum (A-1 Form) ............................................ 4
4 Pipe Inspection Form ........................................................................................ 4
5 Document Retention.......................................................................................... 8
Page 150
p151
PROCEDURE STEPS
21
1 General Requirements
1.1 The forms in Table 1 must be completed for specific tasks.
20
Table 1. Form Selection Criteria
Form Number Form Title Description Job Aid
4/
TD-5100P-01-F01 “Leak Repair, Use to document leak Job Aid TD-5100P-01-JA01,
Inspection, repairs and inspections “Leak Repair, Inspection, Gas
/1
Gas Quarterly Incident performed during leak Quarterly Incident Report
Report (A-Form)” repair. (A-Form)”
09
TD-5100P-01-F02 “Gas Incident Dig-in Use to document gas Job Aid TD-5100P-01-JA02,
Report Addendum (A-1 dig-in investigation. “Gas Incident Dig-in Report
Form)” Addendum (A-1 Form)”
TD-5100P-01-F03 “Pipe Inspection Form” Use to document Job Aid TD-5100P-01-JA03,
ed
inspection only when “Pipe Inspection Form”
not repairing a leak.
at
1.2 IF any portion of a buried pipeline is exposed (removal of cover by excavation or natural
means), bare, or coating is deteriorated or removed,
er
THEN the exposed portion must be examined for evidence of external corrosion per Utility
Procedure TD-4181S, “External Corrosion Control of Gas Facilities,” and Code of Federal
en
Regulations (CFR) Title 49, Transportation, Part 192-Transportation of Natural and other Gas
by Pipeline: Minimum Safety Standards, Section (§)192.459 “External corrosion control:
Examination of buried pipeline when exposed.”
G
1.3 IF any portion of a buried gas main or service is exposed (plastic or metallic),
THEN the exposed portion must be inspected and documented with exceptions when
F
distribution main or service is exposed and expected to be deactivated by the end of the
project, refer to Step 4.4.2.
PD
1. Distribution integrity management personnel use the inspection data to comply with
Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) Title 49, Transportation, Part 192-Transportation of
Natural and other Gas by Pipeline: Minimum Federal Safety Standards, Section (§)
192.1007, “What are the required elements of an integrity management program?”
Page 151
p152
1.4 IF a pipeline is being removed or the internal surface of the pipeline is exposed,
21
THEN an internal inspection must be documented per Utility Standard TD-4186S, “Internal
Corrosion Control of Gas Facilities.”
20
2 Leak Repair, Inspection, Gas Quarterly Incident Report (A-Form)
2.1 Company personnel using a tablet that does not have direct access to SAP (e.g., GSRs and
Leak Surveyors) must initiate a paper A-Form when a leak requiring immediate repair (Grade
4/
1 or hazardous leak) is found. Follow requirements below when completing tech down paper
form.
/1
NOTE
09
Data entered into the leak survey and field services tablet does not
immediately transition into SAP.
1. Stand-by per Job Aid TD-4110P-09-JA01, “Gas Leak Grade Checklist,” and hand-off
ed
initiated A-Form to personnel that will perform the leak repair.
2. Personnel who repair a leak must complete Form TD-5100P-01-F01, per Job Aid TD-
5100P-01-JA01. For pipe inspection documentation, refer to Step 4.3 when completing
at
tech-down form.
er
3. Supervisors must review the completed paper A-Form to ensure required fields are
complete, and problem and repair requirements are consistent before entering into
SAP.
en
3 Gas Incident Dig-In Report Addendum (A-1 Form)
3.1 Personnel who investigate a dig-in incident, must complete Form TD-5100P-01-F02 per Job
G
Aid TD-5100P-01-JA02 AND by following Utility Procedure TD-5811P-501, “Dig-in

Investigation.”
F
4 Pipe Inspection Form

PD
4.1 Personnel who perform an inspection of a buried gas facility exposed during routine or
emergency work (e.g., an excavation such as potholing, trenching, and digging, daylighting,
boring, or scraping that result in a buried gas facility being visible), must complete Form
TD-5100P-01-F03, “Pipe Inspection Form” per Job Aid TD-5100P-01-JA03, “Pipe Inspection
Form”.
4.2 Pipe Inspection Form is only required when there is no leak associated to the inspection. For
inspections associated to leaks continue to electronically enter the inspection in the A-Form as
described in Section 2 above.
Page 152
p153
4.3 Complete Pipe Inspection Form using tech down PDF fillable format for non-leak inspections.
Complete the form using a mobile device (e.g., tablet) when available.
21
1. Complete a form for potholes on the same project and attach a sketch to show the
location of all potholes. Be sure to note the latitude and longitude for each location.
20
a. It is recommended that each pothole is numbered so it is easy to cross
reference the pothole from the sketch with the latitude and longitude. Refer to
Job Aid TD-5100P-01-JA03 for example of pothole sketch.
4/
b. A new form must be completed if any of the pothole inspection information
/1
changes.
2. Complete a separate form when there is any attribute change for exposed facilities
09
within the same excavation location (e.g., line number, line size, line material).
4.4 Refer to the below guidance for pipe being deactivated:

ed
1. Plastic pipe inspections must be completed at locations where new facilities tie-in to
existing facilities.
2. If an active main or service is exposed and expected to be deactivated by the end of

at
the project, then the following applies:
a. For distribution plastic and steel mains or services:

er
 Plastic main: Complete one form at each location where the existing
en
plastic main remains in service and connects to the new plastic main
(e.g., at the tie-in location) as shown in Figure 1, “Plastic Mains or
Services to be Deactivated.” For additional clarification see Notes 1, 2,
and 3.
G
 Plastic service: Complete one form at each location where existing

service remains in service and connects to the new main. Locations
F
where the service and main are being deactivated do not require a Pipe
Inspection Form. Refer to Figure 1. For additional clarification see Notes
PD
1, 2, and 3.
Page 153
p154
21
20
4/
/1
Figure 1. Plastic Mains or Services to be Deactivated
09
 Service transfers: Complete one form for all service transfers, unless
Step 4.2 applies.
ed
 Cut-offs: If a service is cut-off at the main, then inspection is not required
on the service stub, but is required on the main, if exposed. See Figure
2.
at
 Service stubs: If cut-off creates a service stub (e.g., property line), then
inspection is required on the entire length of service line that is exposed.
er
It is not necessary to document the inspection of buried plastic stub gas

services if the stub does not show any imperfections or signs of damage
when uncovered.
en
G
F
PD
Figure 2. Plastic Pipe Inspection

Page 154
p155
Step 4.4 (continued)
21
 Steel main: Complete one form for the continuous steel main that is
being deactivated (see Note 1 if there is a change in attributes). Sketch
is not required (see Note 2 for location description).
20
 Steel service: Complete one form for all steel services with same
attributes and include a sketch to show the location of excavations (see
Note 1 if there is a change in attributes and Note 3 for sketch
4/
clarification).
/1
b. For transmission mains: Complete one form per excavation. Sketch is not
required. Refer to Notes 1, 2, and 3 for clarification.
09
3. Ensure mapping records are updated per Utility Procedure TD-9500P-16, “Deactivation
and/or Retirement of Underground Gas Facilities.”
a. IF a map discrepancy is identified,

ed
THEN follow the map correction process in Utility Procedure TD-4460P-11,
“Gas Map Corrections.”
at
Note 1: Complete a new form when there is any attribute change for exposed facilities within the
same excavation location (e.g., line number, line size, line material, corrosion, pitting,
er
gouging, coating material).

Note 2: Include the location description (coordinates, addresses, or street intersections) for each
end of the main in the “Location Description” or “Comment” section. In the “Comment”
en
section, specify that the inspection is for deactivated pipe.

Note 3: Sketch provided with the form does not need to be in accordance with requirements in
Utility Manual TD-4461M, As-Built Redline Handbook. Follow the sketch guidance and
G
examples provided in Job Aid TD-5100P-01-JA03 for excavations (e.g., bell hole, pothole,
pipe deactivation).
F
4.5 Cathodic Protection (CP)

PD
1. Active pipe:
a. Pipe-To-Soil readings are required if bare steel pipe is observed or if coating

has been removed.
Page 155
p156
21
2. Pipe being deactivated:
a. For distribution steel mains in the process of being deactivated, one Pipe-To-
20
Soil reading will be required on the existing steel main (the portion which will
remain in service at the end of the project) at all transition points immediately
adjacent to a new plastic pipe.
4/
b. Reading must be taken at each transition to plastic pipe.
/1
c. Pipe-To-Soil readings are not required at each bell hole location when services
are being disconnected from mains as part of the process to remove from
service.
09
d. Pipe-To-Soil readings are required for steel services that remain in service.
e. Casing-To-Soil reading is required if the casing is accessible either through

ed
wires or direct contact.
4.6 Transmission steel facilities, Pipe Inspection Form is not required:

at
1. For previously retired pipe or pipe that is already deactivated.
2. If an H-form assessment report is provided for the exact same locations.

er
5 Document Retention
en
5.1 Retain records per the Record Retention Schedule.
END of Instructions
G
DEFINITIONS
F
Daylighting: Exposing a facility around its entire circumference, where location, depth and
orientation are visible.
PD
Dig-in: This is when buried gas facilities are damaged by excavators.
Excavation: Any operation in which earth, rock, or other material in the ground is moved,
removed, or otherwise displaced by means of tools, equipment, or explosives in any of the
following ways: blasting, boring, backfilling, removal of aboveground structures by either
mechanical or explosive means, grading, trenching, digging, ditching, drilling, augering,
tunneling, scraping, cable or pipe plowing and driving, or any other way.
Potholing: Creating small excavations for the purpose of visually confirming a facility location,
facility material and facility size.
Page 156
p157
21
See GDA for implementation plan.
GOVERNING DOCUMENT
20
NA
4/
Natural and other Gas by Pipeline: Minimum Safety Standards, Section (§) 192.459 “External
/1
corrosion control: Examination of buried pipeline when exposed.”
09
Natural and other Gas by Pipeline: Minimum Safety Standards, Section (§)192.605,
“Procedural manual for operations, maintenance, and emergencies”
ed
Natural and other Gas by Pipeline: Minimum Federal Safety Standards, §192.709,
“Transmission lines: Record Keeping.”
at

Natural and other Gas by Pipeline: Minimum Federal Safety Standards, §192.933, “What
actions must be taken to address integrity issues?”
er

Natural and other Gas by Pipeline: Minimum Federal Safety Standards, §192.1007, “What are
en
the required elements of an integrity management plan?”
REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
G
UO Standard D-S0353 and CGT Standard S4112, “Physical Inspection of Pipelines, Mains
F
and Services”
PD
Utility Procedure TD-4110P-09, “Leak Grading and Response”
Utility Standard TD-4181S, “External Corrosion Control of Gas Facilities”
Utility Procedure TD-5811P-501, “Dig-in Investigation”
Utility Procedure SCM-2106P-01, “Material Problem Report Procedure”
Page 157
p158
Reference Documents (continued)
21
APPENDICES
20
NA
ATTACHMENTS
4/
Form TD-5100P-01-F01, “Leak Repair, Inspection, Gas Quarterly Incident Report (A-Form)”
/1
Form TD-5100P-01-F02, “Gas Incident Dig-in Report Addendum (A-1 Form)”
09
Form TD-5100P-01-F03, “Pipe Inspection Form”
Job Aid TD-5100P-01-JA01, “Leak Repair, Inspection, Gas Quarterly Incident Report
(A-Form)”
ed
Job Aid TD-5100P-01-JA02, “Gas Incident Dig-in Report Addendum (A-1 Form)”
Job Aid TD-5100P-01-JA03, “Pipe Inspection Form”

at
DOCUMENT RECISION
er
This document supersedes TD-5100P-01, “Leak Repair and Pipe Inspection (A-Form)
Documentation, revision 0a, 09/14/2017.
en
Variance requests EDRS 2017-97436: Pipe Inspection Form not required whenever H-form
Report is provided for the same location on a project, and EDRS 2017-107073: Cathodic
Protection requirements are incorporated in this procedure.
G
Bulletin TD-5100B-001, “Revised Plastic Pipe Inspection Requirements,” incorporated in this

procedure and is being cancelled.
F
DOCUMENT APPROVER
PD
Raymond Thierry, Director, Distribution Integrity Management
DOCUMENT OWNER
Aziza Tarin, Expert Gas Engineer, Gas Guidance Documents
DOCUMENT CONTACT
Aziza Tarin, Expert Gas Engineer, Gas Guidance Documents
Page 158
p159
REVISION NOTES
21
Revision 1b
TD-5100P-01-F01  Removed the Soil Resistivity subsection from the Pipe Condition section.
20
 Added connection type selections in the Pressure Test #1 and Pressure
Test #2 subsections to confirm that the person performing the pipe
connection task holds the appropriate operational qualifications.
4/
TD-5100P-01-JA01  Removed the Soil Resistivity instruction, and updated the screen capture.
 Added instructions for connection type selections, and updated the screen
/1
capture.
Revision 1a (Published Date: 07/13/2018, Effective Date: 10/01/2018)
09
Section 1  Moved pipe inspection requirement for deactivated pipe (formally step
1.7) to Step 4.4.
Section 4  Added new step 4.4 for pipe being deactivated.
ed
TD-5100P-01-JA03  Added “minimum of 4 decimal degrees” requirement for “Latitude” and
“Longitude” fields.
 Replaced PLE with “designated contact” and defined “designated
at
contact” on page 7.
 Added note, “For potholing, address is acceptable if latitude and
longitude coordinates are not available,” to Figure 5.
er
en
G
F
PD
Page 159
p160
21
Revision 1 (Published Date: 03/21/2018, Effective Date: 10/01/2018)
Procedure Revision  Refer to PG&E gas qualifications task list or contact the Gas
20
Qualifications department.
 Incorporated Bulletin TD-5100B-001 in section 1.5, 1.6, 1.7.
 Added Section 4 – Pipe Inspection Form requirements.
4/
TD-5100P-01-F03 Revised form and job aid.  Added comments section
/1
TD-5100P-01-JA03  Changed the form and job aid titles and attachments for sketch
to “Pipe Inspection Form.” and photos.
 Removed sections and fields that  Simplified form from 2-page
09
are captured in other documents: to a 1-page form.
Sections - leak related information,  Not applicable (NA) can be
USA information, and pressure test. checked at the start of a
Fields - soil resistivity, asbestos, major section of the form,
ed
cross-bore camera inspection, pipe eliminating the need to enter
support condition, circumferential NA in every field within a
weld condition, pipe grade/spec. section.
at
 Removed fields that cannot be  Available in PDF fillable

verified or not required for integrity format that can be updated
management, mapping, or corrosion electronically.
er
assessment (e.g., internal liner,  Provide reference samples of

internal pitting or pit depth, near sketch and completed form in
en
public assembly, visual appearance, the job aid.

graphitized).
 Added project information: order #,
asset type, station name.
G
TD-5100P-01-F03  Added inspection fields: installed job #, pipe exposure, line type, CAP #
TD-5100P-01-JA03 or Corrective Work Ticket #, photo for long seam, updated coating type.
F
(continued)
A-Form  No changes were made to the tech down A-Form (TD-5100P-01-F01,
PD
A-1 Form “Leak Repair, Inspection, Gas Quarterly Incident Report (A-Form),” A-1
Form (TD-5100P-01-F02, “Gas Incident Dig-in Report Addendum (A-1
Form),” or associated job aids. Updates will be made to these
documents, to align with SAP, in the next major revision.
Page 160
p161
DOCUMENT NAME: Leak Repair and Pipe Inspection Documentation
21
DOCUMENT NUMBER: TD-5100P-01, Rev.1
20
4/
What is changing?
This is a major revision to the Inspection Only A-form Form TD-5100P-01-F03, “Pipe Inspection
/1
Form.” The high level changes include the following items that will be cancelled or are no longer
effective with the publication of Revision 1:
09
 Utility Bulletin TD-5100B-001, “Revised Plastic Pipe Inspection Requirements”
 Variance EDRS 2017-97436 – Inspection Only Form is not required when H-form Report is
provided for the same location on a project
 Variance EDRS 2017-107073 – Cathodic Protection requirements
ed
Revision 1 removes fields for sections that are typically filled out as “not applicable”, not field
verified, or are captured on other inspection forms. Now not applicable can be checked at the
start of a major section of the form, eliminating the need to write “not applicable” in every field
at
within a section of the form. The revised job aid provides detailed instruction on how to complete
the form.
er
Other major changes are listed below. See procedure revision notes for complete list of changes.
 Allow one form for multiple inspections, must meet criteria in procedure.
en
 Changed the form and job aid titles to “Pipe Inspection Form.”
 Removed leak related fields, record or non-verifiable data.
 Added project information to link the form to the appropriate project.

G
Simplified form from a 2-page to a 1-page form.
Why does it matter?

F
This utility procedure is being revised to update the requirements for pipe inspection
PD
documentation. Pipe inspection form and job aid have been revised to simplify and update
requirements for inspections of buried gas facilities (mains, valves, and services).
This utility procedure is being revised to update the requirements specific to form TD-5100P-01-
F03, “Pipe Inspection Form”. The pipe inspection form and job aid have been revised to simplify
and update requirements for inspections of buried gas facilities (mains, valves, and services). The
revised form will allow personnel to complete one form for multiple inspections of the same pipe
on one project. This will have substantial cost savings in labor and archiving documentation.
Updates to Form TD-5100P-01-F01, “Leak Repair, Inspection, Gas Quarterly Incident Report (A-
Form)” and requirements will be incorporated at the next revision.

Page 161
p162
Required Action
21
Supervisors must communicate the publication of the revised Utility Procedure TD-5100P-01,
“Leak Repair and Pipe Inspection Documentation,” Form TD-5100P-01-F03, “Pipe Inspection
Form,” and Job Aid TD-5100P-01-JA03, “Pipe Inspection Form.”
20
The procedure and new form may be used as soon as published. All of the target audience is
required to follow the new documentation by the effective date.
4/
Tools and Training
/1
Academy training will be updated to incorporate new requirements and revised form.
Timeline
09
Date Activity
ed
at
er
en
G
F
PD

Page 162
Job Aid TD-5100P-01-JA01
Publication Date: 06/16/2021 Effective Date: 07/01/2021 Rev. 0b
Leak Repair, Inspection, Gas Quarterly Incident Report (A-Form) Job Aid
21
Table of Contents
20
A-Form Instructions 3
Job Aid
4/
GROUP 1: Page 1 Instructions
Page #
/1
Header Data 4
Initial Leak Information 5
09
Location 8
USA Information 9
ed
Leak Readings/History 10
Job Aid
Page #
at
Pipe Data 16
er
Pipe Data/Leak Source 17

en
Pipe Data/Leak Cause 19
Pipe Data/Line Material 23

G
Additional Pipe Data 25
Repair Data 26
F
Repair Activity 28
PD
Job Aid
Page #
Repair Activity (continued) 29
Cathodic Protection Condition 31
Pipe Condition 32
Metallic Pipe Condition 33
© 2021 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved.

Page 163
Publication Date: 06/16/2021 Effective Date: 07/01/2021 Rev. 0b
Leak Repair, Inspection, Gas Quarterly Incident Report (A-Form) Job Aid
21
Table of Contents
20
Job Aid
GROUP 4: Page Instructions
Page #
4/
External Inspection
36
/1
Internal Inspection 37
09
Internal Inspection Completion De tails 37
Plastic Pipe 38
Plastic Pipe Inspection Completion Details
Pressure Test #1 ed 41
42
at
Job Aid
Page #
er
Pressure Test #2 45
en
Installation Completion Details 45

Job Aid
G
Page #
Below Ground Sketch 46

F
Gas Quarterly Incident (GQI) Data 47

PD
Job Aid
Page #
Map Data (Mapping Only) 52
Map Info (Mapping Only) 54
Appendix 1: A-FORM CREW GUIDE

57
Revised A-Form with comments of form changes

Page 164
Publication Date: 06/16/2021, Effective Date: 07/01/2021 Rev. 0b
A-Form
21
Leak Repair, Inspection, Gas Quarterly Incident Report (A-Form)
Tech Down/Non-Mobile Reporting
20
Paper Form Instructions
Return to Table of Contents
4/
1. Use revised A- Form for “Tech Down” situations OR non-mobile data collection for leak repair,
inspection, and gas quarterly incidents.
/1
2. Complete all information noted in description as “Required.”
•
09
For Initial Leak, complete page 1 and submit to supervisor.
• For Leak Repair, complete the remaining pages of the form.
Note: Page 1 will be SAP generated, unless form is required to be used for a
Grade 1 Leak, then also complete page 1.
ed
3. Use black or blue, permanent, non-erasable ink when completing paper forms.
4. Personal Protective Equipment (PPE), as required for type of work being performed.
at
5. An asterisk sign (*) next to the item name in the Job Aid indicates that it is a new line item
in form.
er
6. Check “Ext Contractor” box throughout form when External Contractor performs
work and/or reporting.
en
7. Before submission, review form to ensure all required boxes are completed and
information is consistent in identifying the problem and requirements for
G
repair.
 Reference Box indicates options to select.

F
PD
© 2021 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved. Page
3 of 64
Page 165
Header Data
21
20
4/
STEPS
/1
Leak Number
1 Sequential number will be assigned by SAP.
(SAP Generated)
09
ed
at
er
en
Proceed to Next Page

G
F
PD
Page
Page
4 of 64166
Initial Leak Information
21
20
4/
/1
STEPS
09
1 DATE REPORTED Month, day, and year (MMDDYY) leak was first reported to Pacific
Required Gas and Electric (PG&E). This could be to the Call Center if it
received a call or any PG&E employee, if notified in the field by the
ed
customer.
2 TIME REPORTED The time (in 24-hour clock) that leak was first
Required reported to PG&E.
at
3 CORRECTIVE WORK Indicate that repair work has been completed.
er
COMPLETED* Note: Purpose to bypass staging notification allowing

Required entry of repair information into SAP.
en
G
F
PD
Page
Page
5 of 64167
21
20
4/
/1
09
STEPS
4 REPORTED BY
Required ed
Indicate how leak was first reported to PG&E. Only SAP will indicate a Post
Repair Check – DO NOT CHECK.
at
Check one
er
5 LINE USE TYPE* Indicate if line usage where leak was found is Transmission or Distribution.
Required
Check one
en
G
6 FACILITY TYPE Indicate if type of facility where leak was found is Main/Regulation/Service.
Required
Check one
F
PD
Page
Page
6 of 64168
21
20
4/
/1
09
STEPS
7 LOCATION MAP: Wall Wall map on which leak is physically located, if it is other
ed
Required: Distribution Only. than recorded location map.
8 LOCATION MAP: Plat Plat map on which leak is physically located,

Required: Distribution Only. if it is other than recorded location map.
at
9 RECORDED LOCATION MAP: Wall map on which leak will be recorded.
er
Wall Required: Distribution Only.
10 RECORDED LOCATION MAP: Plat map on which leak will be recorded.

en
Plat Required: Distribution Only.
11 RECORDED LOCATION MAP: Block number on which leak will be recorded.

Block Required: Distribution Only.
G
12 MAIN WORK CENTER* Main work center of construction crew who performs the
Required work.
F
13 PIPELINE NUMBER The respective transmission line number.

PD
Required for Transmission Pressure

(TP) only.
14 MILE POINT Nearest mile point marker to leaking facility.

If not available, to be calculated by
Mapping department. Transmission
Pressure (TP) only.
15 STATION NUMBER* Regulator station number at location of leak source.
Required, if available.
16 STATION NAME* Regulator station name at location of leak source.

Required, if available.
Page
Page
7 of 64169
Location
21
4
8
20
9
4/
STEPS
/1
1 DIVISION/DISTRICT* Enter the Division name where the leak is found for
Required distribution or the District name for transmission
09
2 HOUSE The address closest to leak location or inspection location
Required including house number, street (name and suffix, such as
avenue, street, etc.), or adequate descriptions of leak location
ed
3 STREET (see Step 9 “Description of Reading Location”).
Required
4 APT/BLDG#
at
Required
5 CITY The city, town or area, and zip code in which leak or inspection is
er
Required located.
6 ZIP CODE
en
Required
7 LATITUDE* Enter the latitude (if known) of the leak as North-South

G
geographic coordinates.
8 LONGITUDE* Enter the latitude (if known) of the leak as East-West

F
geographic coordinates.
PD
9 DESCRIPTION OF READING Clearly describe location of the leak reading or inspection

LOCATION location such as “over Tee,” or “over service at curb.”
Required
Page
Page
8 of 64170
USA Information
21
2
20
4
4/
STEPS
/1
1 USA NOTIFIED Indicate if Underground Service Alert (USA) has been notified.
required
09
2 IF NO, EXPLAIN If USA not notified, provide reason.
Required
ed
3 USA TICKET # PG&E field personnel requests USA Ticket number as required before
Required “Excavating” to repair Grade 2+, 2, and 3 leaks at all times and Grade 1
leaks whenever USA call center is open prior to excavation and/or
at
additional excavation. Enter “None” if there was no USA Ticket number
issued. Required.
er
4 VALID DATE Date USA Ticket number becomes valid and work may begin. This is
Required normally 2 working days. For leaks required to be worked within this
en
two day period, use date the locate request was submitted to USA.
G
F
PD
Page
Page
9 of 64171
Leak Readings/History
21
20
4/
/1
STEPS
09
1 % GAS The sustained reading in percent gas taken during the response.
Required
ed
2 INSTRUMENT Type of instrument used to take the reading on leak:
Required C = Combustible Gas Indicator
V = Visual for indication with other than an M&C Gas Detection instrument
at
or
H = Hydrogen Flame Ionization (waterways and marsh/wetlands only).
Visual leak indications shall be initially recorded as a 0% (Grade 2+, 2 or 3)
er
or 100% (Grade1).
en
3 GRADE Indicate the Leak Grade (1, 2+, 2 or 3) using Utility Procedure TD- 4110P-
Required 09, “Leak Grading and Response” criteria. If no leak is found, enter a 0 in
the Grade field to indicate zero leakage found.
G
If a qualified first responder from other than M&C determines that the leak
is non-hazardous, enter as a Grade 2+. The % Gas will be zero, the
instrument will be “V” and the info code will be “H”. This documents the
qualified first responder’s action. Use the successive lines below to upgrade
F
or downgrade the leak.

PD
Page
Page 172
10 of 64
21
20
4 5 6 7
4/
/1
STEPS
09
4 INFO CODE Info code is required for any Grade 1, 2+, or 2 that is less than 2%
Required gas:
A: Wall-to-wall and traveling
ed
B: Next to, at, or under building
C: Odor & next to public gathering location
D: In foreign structure
at
E: Audible and/or visible
F: On facility in extremely poor condition
er
G: At least second customer call out

H: Leak is reported as 0% gas visual
J: Leak within the scope of work by others
en
M: Migration
N: Grade 3 downgrade is not allowed
S: Leak is suspected to be on a copper service
G
T: T&R Facility
5 READ DATE Date (MMDDYY) reading was taken.

F
Required
PD
6 TIME Time (in 24-hour clock) the reading was taken.

Required
7 OPERATOR LAN ID The LAN ID (Company employee) or contractor ID (contractor

Required employee) of the person who took the leak readings.
Page
© 2021 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved. 11 of 64
Page 173
21
20
4/
/1
STEPS
09
8 EXT CONTRACTOR* Indicate non-PG&E employee by checking Ext Contractor for
Required each line entry. Always indicate throughout this report when
External Contractor.
9 SERIAL #
Required except for visual.
ed
Enter the last 4-digits of the leak survey instrument serial number
used to grade the leak.
at
10 LOCATION REMARKS Enter if it is different than the previous description of reading location.
er
Required
en
G
F
PD
Page
Page 174
21
A
B
C
20
D
14
4/
/1
09
STEPS
11 READINGS LOCATION: Required if the leak is repaired.
ed
A ABOVE GROUND (AG) Indicate if facility is exposed is AG.
B Required if Above If AG, check box of the Initial Leak Source (Service Only)
Ground Check one A) Riser Threads(AG)
at
B) Body of Riser (AG)
12 READINGS LOCATION:* Required if the leak is repaired.

er
C BELOW GROUND (BG) Indicate if facility exposed is BG.

D Required if Below Ground If BG, check box of the Initial Leak Source (Service Only)
en
Check one C) Over Service Near Main (BG)

D) Over Service (BG)
G
13 PAVED WALL TO WALL Indicate if leak is on a gas facility under continuous paving that
Required for non-dig-ins. extends either from centerline of thoroughfare to building wall or
Check one from main to building wall.
F
PD
14 SUSPECTED COPPER* Indicate if you suspect leak source is a copper facility.

Required
Check one
Page
Page 175
21
15
20
16
17
4/
/1
09
STEPS
15 LOCATION SURFACE Select type of surface covering leak: Concrete, Asphalt,
ed
Required For Below Ground Only. Un-surfaced, Water/Marsh/Tidal, In Substructure or
Other.
at
16 OTHER LOCATION SURFACE If “Other” was selected, provide description of surface.
Required
er
17 WITHIN FIVE FEET OF BUILDING* Indicate whether leak source is detectable within five feet
Required for BG leaks of a building or occupied structure. (Refer to Leak
en
Readings/History - p.1)
G
F
PD
Page
Page 176
21
20
18
4/
20
/1
09
STEPS
18 GRADE 2+ REQUESTED Date which qualified person and supervisor recommend that
ed
REPAIR DATE Grade 2+ leak be repaired.
(if less than 90 days) Note: Date may not exceed 90 calendar days from date leak was
found, per TD-4110P-09.
at
Note: SAP will enter required repair date as 90 calendar days,
if no date is entered.
er
19 POTENTIAL HIGH Indicate if it is a potential HCA during a Transmission Line (per

CONSEQUENCE AREA Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) Title 49, Transportation, Part
(HCA) 192-Transportation of Natural and other Gas by Pipeline: Minimum
en
Federal Safety Standards, Section (§)192.3, “Definitions”) survey or

near a transmission line during a distribution survey.
Note: Contact Engineering for guidance.
G
20 SEND ALERT* LAN ID for Construction Supervisor, Distribution Planning Engineer

and Pipeline Engineer to generate email alert for leak in HCA.
F
PD
Page
Page 177
Pipe Data
21
1
2
20
3 4
4/
STEPS
/1
1 LINE USE TYPE* Indicate if line usage is Transmission or Distribution where leak is
Required located.
09
2 FACILITY TYPE* Indicate if facility is Main, Regulation or Service where leak is
Required located.
ed
3 ABOVE OR BELOW GROUND Indicate if location above or below ground.
Required
at
4 LINE USE Distribution Main (<= 60 pounds per square inch gauge
Required if leak was repaired or (PSIG)): A pipe operating at 60 psig or less.
an inspection was performed. Distribution Main (> 60 PSIG): A distribution main operating
er
over 60 psig not classified as transmission. This is validated by

mapping and engineering. Also called Distribution Feeder Main
(DFM).
en
Gathering: a line that transports gas from a current production

facility to a transmission line or main.
Single Service: a service line going directly from the main to
G
the meter location without any taps off it or being a tap itself
Branch Service: a service that is tapped off another service or
is the service that is being tapped. (can be referred to as the
F
mother service or the daughter service)

Transmission (>= 20% Specified Minimum Yield Strength
PD
(SMYS)): a line that operates over 60 psig that meets the code
definition of operating >= 20% SMYS and is not a gathering
line
Page
Page 178
Pipe Data/Leak Source
21
20
4/
/1
09
ed
STEPS
1 LEAK SOURCE*
Required if leak is repaired.
at
(Choose one)
2 STANPAC*
er
Required
3 LEAK SOURCE Bell Joint: Bell and spigot joint. Cast iron only
en
DEFINITIONS COLUMN A Body of Pipe: Surface of pipe.

(Check Applicable Box) Clamp: Previously installed clamp.
Compression Coupling - Plastic: Mechanical Plastic
G
Coupling or Fitting.
Compression Coupling – Stainless Steel: Stainless Steel
compression rings on Amp Fit or Met Fit Fittings.
F
Compression Coupling –Steel: Steel compression ring

Curb Valve: A subsurface valve on the service between the main
PD
and riser.
Drip: A fitting to remove condensate.
Encapsulation: Material completely surrounding a fitting, joint or
clamp to seal it.
Fitting: Device that attaches to a pipe or connects pipes together.
Only use this if a specific type of fitting is unavailable.
Fusion Joint: Heat created junction of two plastic components.
Includes electro fusion joints.
Girth Weld: A butt weld. A circumferential weld. Longitudinal
Weld: A weld along the length of the pipe or fitting. Also called the
seam. Includes spiral welds.
Non-Corrodible Prefab Riser: A non-corrodible vertical service riser
at the service point.
Page
Page
17 of 64179
Pipe Data/Leak Source
21
4B
20
4/
/1
09
STEPS ed Return to Table of Contents
at
4 LEAK SOURCE Other Mechanical Joint: Any mechanical joint not specifically listed
DEFINITIONS (Continued) elsewhere.
er
COLUMN B Other Welds: Any weld not specifically listed elsewhere.

(Check Applicable Box) Pressure Control Fittings (PCF): Fittings attached to the pipe that
is used in procedures to control the flow of gas. Includes Save-A-
en
Valve.
Plastic Tee Cap: Cap on the top of a plastic service tee.
Regulator/Pilot: Device used to control or monitor pressure.
G
Riser: Vertical service riser at the service point.

Riser Insert Kit: Service head adapter on inserted risers for
inserted plastic services.
F
Riser Valve Threads: Threads on riser located on service valve.

Stab Type Fittings: Fittings installed by inserting pipe into fitting
PD
without heat or compression. Includes Perfection and Con-stab

fittings.
Tap Connection: All steel and plastic fittings which attach to one pipe
and connect it to another pipe. Includes farm taps, plastic multi-
saddles and plastic bolt on tees.
Threads: Threads at any location other than the service valve.
Unknown: Use when leak source has not been physically
exposed and source cannot be positively determined. Only use
when pipe is totally or partially replaced or deactivated.
Other: Any location that cannot be classified by listed choices
above. Requires an explanation and supervisor review.
Page
18 of 64180
Page
Pipe Data/Leak Cause

1
21
2A
20
4/
/1
09
ed Return to Table of Contents
at
STEPS
1 LEAK CAUSE* Indicate the most evident cause as it is related to corrosion,
er
Required when a leak is outside forces, damage by others, uncontrollable damage by

repaired. others, failures, human or equipment malfunctions, everything
else.
en
(Check Applicable Box)
2 LEAK CAUSE DEFINITIONS Atmospheric Corrosion: Corrosion leaks on above ground gas-
SECTION A carrying facilities (e.g., leaking external corrosion pit on an above
G
ground gas service riser or on exposed section of main).

Cast Iron Fracture: Cast iron fracture that has cracked on the
body of the pipe. Do not use for cracked bell sealing material.
F
Compression Coupling: Failure of the fitting that holds two pipes

together by compressive forces.
PD
Construction Defect: Improper construction technique (leaking

welds, fusion joints, improper alignment, or hard impinging on pipe).
Damage by Earth Movement: Landslides, upheaving, mudslides,
subsidence or other earth movement
Damage by Electrical Facility: Improper electrical grounds or
shorts.
Damage by Heavy Rains/Flood: Weather damage to the facility
Page
Page
19 of 64181
21
20
4/
3B
/1
09
at
STEPS
3 LEAK CAUSE Damage by 3rd Party: Damage from a 3rd party, not an immediate
er
DEFINITIONS dig-in (e.g., previous gouging of underground pipe which starting to

SECTION B leak or contact of foreign substructure that results in a leak). Can
include thrown or falling objects. If over $1,000 damage, a fire or an
en
explosion resulted, fill out Gas Quarterly Incident section of this form.
Deliberate Acts/Vandalism: Purposeful hostile actions by persons.
Dig-in/Excavation: Damage due to removal of ground covers
G
with equipment or hand tools.

Earthquake: Leaks caused by earthquakes.
Equipment Malfunction: Equipment that does not perform in
F
accordance with intended function or design.

External Corrosion: Leaking corrosion pits that appear on the
PD
outside wall of a buried, steel, gas-carrying pipe. Do not include for

hard object impinging on pipe -- use Construction Defect. Do include
corrosion leaks caused by holidays in pipe wrapping.
Fire or Explosion on Company Facility: Damage caused by fire or
explosion on a Company owned facility.
Fire or Explosion on Customer Facility: Damage caused by a fire or
explosion on a customer’s facility.
Incorrect Operation: Failure to follow established work procedures
and policies.
Page
Page
20 of 64182
21
4C
20
4/
/1
09
at
STEPS
4 LEAK CAUSE DEFINITIONS Internal Corrosion: Leaking corrosion pits that appear on the
er
SECTION C inside wall of a buried, metallic, gas-carrying pipe (Do not use
this code for plugged or scaled copper services or for plastic
pipe).
en
Lightning: Electric discharge from atmosphere. Material

Failure: Material that does not perform in accordance with
intended function or design, or in accordance with the
Company or industry standards.
G
No/Deteriorate Pipe Dope: For leaks where the pipe dope is

no longer present or has become ineffective.
Other Natural Forces: Natural forces other than earthquakes,
F
lightning, mudslides, floods, etc. Possibilities include tornados,

volcanic activity, and high winds.
PD
Plastic Crack Failure: Cracks or splits in the body of the

plastic pipe or plastic fitting caused by stress on pipe or
impingement of hard objects.
Plastic Embrittlement: Plastic material has become
brittle and has lost flexibility.
Previously Damaged: Damage resulting from an event that
did not include current activity.
Rodent: Damage by animals gnawing on the facilities.
Page
Page
21 of 64183
21
20
4/
/1
09
5D
ed
at
er
STEPS
5 LEAK CAUSE DEFINITIONS Root Damage: Damage caused by expansion of
en
SECTION D underground parts of plants.

(Check Applicable Box) Stress Corrosion Cracking: Use when the results of an
internal inspection indicate that the line failed due to stress
cracking (Use for steel pipe only)
G
Unknown (Replaced facility): Cause of failure cannot be

determined because line was replaced without excavation
and viewing of failed facility.
F
Vehicle: Damage by moving vehicles and equipment.

Weld Failure: Weld that does not perform in accordance with
PD
intended function or design.

Incorrect Operation: Failure to follow established work
procedures and policies.
Other: Use this only when the listed causes do not describe
the failure of facility. This is rare.
Inspection Only: Use this only when there is no leak.
Page
Page
22 of 64184
Pipe Data/Line Material
21
20
4/
/1
09
at
STEPS
er
1 LINE MATERIAL Material of gas facility.

Required if the leak is repaired. Copper, Steel, Cast Iron, Ductile Iron, Wrought Iron
en
(Check Applicable Box) or one of the following:

Aldyl A: a type of plastic pipe, originally rosy beige often
discoloring to gray.
PE 2406 (Orange): medium density polyethylene plastic pipe
G
and tubing
PE 2406/2708 (Yellow): medium density polyethylene plastic
pipe and tubing
F
PE 3408 (Black): high density polyethylene plastic tubing

PD
PE 4710 (Black): high density polyethylene plastic tubing

Other Plastic: any other type of plastic pipe including
tennite, PVC, and ABS
Other: Use this only when the listed material types do not
apply. This is rare.
Page
Page
23 of 64185
Pipe Data
4
21
6
20
8
4/
/1
STEPS
09
1 LINE SIZE Indicate size of facility in inches. Use decimals only.
Required if the leak is repaired.
ed
2 INTERNAL LINER Indicate if facility has internal liner.
3 LINE INSERTED Indicate if leaking pipe (main or services) was previously

at
Required if the leak is repaired. inserted into an older pipe by checking Yes or No.
Example: Check Yes if, plastic pipe is inserted in steel casing.
er
Check No if, steel gas carrying pipe.
4 EXISTING EFV Existence of an Excess Flow Valve (EFV) can be by a tag

en
Required whenever Line Use is on meter set, observing the EFV in the field or by observing
“Single Service” and leak is repaired. its operation in the field.
G
5 EFV OPERATED Indicate yes or no if existing excess flow valve operated

Required automatically due to excessive gas flow from damage.
F
6 NEW EFV INSTALLED Indicate yes or no whether EFV was installed during repair.
Installation is required for residential single family single
PD
services on distribution systems with an APD of 10 psig or

more (see numbered document A- 93.3).
7 REASON NO EFV INSTALLED* If applicable, indicate why an EFV could not be installed on
service line during repair work. (Pipe Data – p.2)
8 IF OTHER, EXPLAIN Provide explanation why EFV could not be installed.
Page
Page
24 of 64186
Additional Pipe Data
21
20
10
4/
/1
STEPS
8 MATERIAL PROBLEM REPORT # Number assigned to Material Problem Report from Material
09
Required if leak cause is Material Problem Reporting program.
Failure or Plastic Crack Failure or Available at Material Problem Reporting Online.
involves a mechanical fitting for a Note: Copper service solder leaks and plastic service tee
grade 1 leak. cap leaks are excluded from this requirement.
9 INCIDENT REPORT # ed
Incident Report Number assigned (when applicable).
at
Note: Generated automatically by SAP for Distribution for
Dig-in/Excavation, Deliberate Acts of Vandalism, Damage by
Third Party, Fire or Explosion on Company and Customer
er
Facility, Vehicle.
Transmission must get number manually from Risk Master.
en
10 WAS THE DAMAGE/LEAK Indicate if there are indications that recent nearby work
DISCOVERED AS THE RESULT contributed to the damage or leak. Possible indications of this
OF CURRENT CONSTRUCTION include evidence of recent excavations.
G
ACTIVITY OCCURRING THIS

CALENDAR YEAR?
Required
F
PD
Page
Page
25 of 64187
Repair Data
21
1 2
3 4 5
20
6 7
4/
/1
8 9
09
STEPS
1 RESPONSE DATE Date (MMDDYY) the first qualified PG&E employee
ed
Required responded to the leak report.
2 RESPONSE TIME Time (in 24-hour clock) the first qualified PG&E employee
Required if a Response Date is entered. arrives at the scene.
at
3 GAS LOSS CALCULATION Indicate Yes, if pipe was severed and there is indication
er
Required* of long duration of gas loss.
4 REPAIR COMPLETED BY (LAN ID) LAN ID or company issued ID of the person who
en
Required if the leak is repaired. repaired leak. This is the responsible person in charge
of the repair personnel at the scene.
5 EXT CONTRACTOR* Indicate non-PG&E employee by checking Ext.

G
Required Contractor. Always indicate throughout A-Form

when External Contractor.
F
6 REPAIR COMPLETED IN FIELD ON Date (MMDDYY) leak was repaired.

PD
7 REPAIR COMPLETED IN Time (in 24 hour clock) leak was repaired.

FIELD AT
8 WAS OTHER FACILITY Indicate if other facility was deactivated for additional
DEACTIVATED THAT REQUIRES pressure test.
ADDITIONAL PRESSURE TEST?
9 WELD PERFORMER? If # 8 is yes, indicate if welding was performed

Page
Page
26 of 64188
Repair Data
21
20
8
4/
10
11
/1
12
09
STEPS
ed
8 REPAIR LOCATION Specific location where repair is completed on property.
Required if leak is repaired. Example: Left side of house, behind fence, etc.
Note: Description must match the location sketch location. This
may be different than the leak indication location in the initial leak
at
data. Do not change the initial leak indication location on the first
page.
er
Only change if repair address is different than the front page of A-

form.
en
9 REPAIR REMARKS Detailed description of leak repair work performed.

10 PAVING REQUIRED Indicate if paving is required to restore the location after the
G
Required repair.
11 WAS REPAIR COMPLETED Indicate Yes or No, if leak source on a mechanical joint that can
F
BY TIGHTENING, be repaired by tightening.

LUBRICATING AND/OR Note: If yes, choices must be noted as either Tighten Cap/Bolt-
PD
ADJUSTING? Fitting or Greased-Other – see page 28.

Required for all repaired lines. If no, normal leak grading and response applies.
12 WAS FACILITY DEACTIVATED Indicate if facility was deactivated and returned to service.
AND RETURNED TO SERVICE?
Page
Page
27 of 64189
Repair Activity
21
1
20
4/
/1
09
STEPS
1 REPAIR ACTIVITY CAPITAL OR ed
The type of leak repair performed to fix leak.
at
MAINTENANCE Note: These are organized into capital and expense. If a
(Choose One) capital repair or expense repair on main is performed,
Required if pipe is replaced obtain proper accounting information (PM number).
er
en
G
F
PD
Page
Page
28 of 64190
Repair Activity
21
2
20
4
5
4/
/1
09
STEPS
2 SIZE INSTALLED Indicate size (in inches and tenths) of main or service
Required if pipe is replaced line installed, if main or service was replaced.
Example: ½" Copper Tubing Size (CTS) plastic would be
ed
“00.50"”or a 4" Iron Pipe Size (IPS) main would be
“4.00,” omitting the leading zero.
Note: Provide the inches of the gas carrying pipe
at
installed (i.e. size of plastic pipe inserted in steel not the
steel pipe size. If steel pipe replaced and is the gas
carrying, then size of inches of steel pipe.
er
3 REPLACED WITH Indicate new pipe material: Steel, PE2406/2708, PE4710 or

PE 3408.
en
Required if pipe is replaced
4 COPPER ENTIRELY REPLACED Indicate if all copper on a service line is replaced due to
Required if a leak on a service this repair.
G
containing any copper is repaired by

total or partial replacement or service
deactivation.
F
5 ALDYL A COMPLETELY REMOVED* Indicate if Aldyl A has been completely removed.

PD
Required Note: Aldyl A is a type of plastic pipe, originally rosy beige

often discoloring to gray.
Page
Page
29 of 64191
Repair Activity
21
6
7
8
20
9
10
11
4/
/1
09
STEPS
6 POST RECHECK REQUIRED* Indicate if a post repair recheck is required. The
Required if a repair was made. responsible person and supervisor discuss situation prior
ed
to selecting yes.
7 POST RECHECK DATE Enter post recheck date.

Required if a repair was made.
at
8 PIPELINE ENGINEER CONSULTED?* Indicate if pipeline Engineer has been consulted.
Required
er
9 ENGINEER CONSULTED* (LAN ID) LAN ID of engineer consulted.

en
Required for capital work
10 DATE CONSULTED* Date engineer was consulted.

Required for capital work Note: This is not the date a recommendation was
G
provided. (Repair Activity – page 2-3 of A-Form)

F
11 ACTUAL HOURS OR NO HOURS Provide actual hours or check if no hours were logged for
consulting with engineer.
PD
6 Page
Page
30 of 64192
A-Form Instructions
21
6
7
20
4
8
4/
/1
STEPS
1 PIPE-TO-SOIL (Mv) Only enter for inspections when bare metal is observed and
09
Required for all leak repairs on accessible.
Below Ground (BG) steel facilities.
2 READ TAKEN BY (LAN ID) LAN ID of the Operator Qualified person taking pipe-to-soil
Required when a pipe-to-soil reading reading.
3
is entered
EXT CONTRACTOR* ed
Indicate non-PG&E employee by checking Ext. Contractor.
at
Always indicate throughout A-Form when External
Contractor.
er
4 CATHODIC PROTECTION Check Yes or No to indicate if Cathodic Protection System is

DAMAGED damaged.
en
Required for leak repairs on metallic Note: Damage would be indicated if pipe-to-soil read is
pipe below or above the required Mv or there is contact. If yes,
Corrective form is required.
G
5 IF YES, WAS CORRECTIVE Check Yes or No, if a corrective form was issued, depending
WORK FORM ISSUED? on the answer to step 4.
Required
F
6 PIPE-TO-CASING (Mv) – TP Only Entered for inspections only when casing is observed and
PD
accessible.
7 READ DATE* Date the pipe-to-soil and/or casing to soil measurements

were taken.
8 TROUBLESHOOT Identification number for the Corrective Work Form issued.

NOTIFICATION*
6 Page
Page
31 of 64193
Pipe Condition
21
4
20
4/
/1
09
STEPS
1 LINE MATERIAL-METAL* Check the appropriate box indicating pipe material or check
Required for all inspections. “Other” and fill in the blank.
2 LINE MATERIAL-PLASTIC*
Required for all inspections. ed
Check the appropriate box indicating pipe material or check
“Other” and fill in the blank.
at
3 SOIL TYPE Check the appropriate box indicating soil type or check “Other”
and fill in the blank.
er
Required for all inspections.
4 SURFACE OVER Check the appropriate box indicating the surface covering the
en
Required for all inspections. inspection or check “Other” and fill in the blank.
G
F
PD
6 Page
Page
32 of 64194
Metallic Pipe Condition
21
20
4/
/1
09
STEPS
1 LINE SIZE
ed
Nominal pipe diameter in inches.
at
2 FEET EXPOSED Number of feet exposed on inspected pipe.

er
3 COVER ON PIPE Amount of cover on inspected pipe in inches.

en
4 INTERNAL LINER Check the appropriate box indicating if pipe has an internal liner.
G
5 PAVED WALL TO WALL Check the appropriate box indicating if pipe is under
Required for all inspections. continuous paving from the main to the building wall.
F
PD
6 NEAR PUBLIC ASSEMBLY Check the appropriate box to indicate if pipe is within 100 feet of
Required for all inspections. a school, hospital, church, daycare center, or building that is
occupied by 20 or more persons, regularly occupied 8 hours per
day, 5 days a week.
7 CROSS BORE CAMERA Indicate whether a camera was used to monitor for sewer or
INSPECTION PERFORMED* other subsurface pipe cross boring during repair work.
Required for trenchless boring
repairs. (Metallic or Plastic Pipe
Condition – p.3, 4)
6 Page
Page
33 of 64195
21
20
4/
11
/1
09
ed
STEPS
8 COATING TYPE Indicate the type of covering on pipe protecting it from
at
Required if metallic pipe is inspected. corrosion. Check the appropriate box or check “Other”
and fill in the blank.
er
9 COATING CONDITION Indicate condition of pipe coating.

Required if metallic pipe is inspected
en
and coating is present.
10 COATING DAMAGED Indicate if coating has been damaged.

G
Required if metallic pipe is inspected.
11 COATING REPAIRED Indicate if coating has been repaired or replaced.

F
Required if metallic pipe is inspected.

PD
12 COATING REMOVED* Indicate if existing coating was removed during repair

Required if metallic pipe is work.
inspected.
13 ASBESTOS Indicate if asbestos is present. Check Unknown if

Required if metallic pipe is inspected. undetermined. Applicable to pre-1972 pipe.
6 Page
Page
34 of 64196
21
20
4/
14
/1
15
16
09
17
18
.
STEPS
14 EXPOSED PIPE SUPPORT ed
Indicate if pipe supports/hangars are present and in good
at
CONDITION condition. If supporting ground has been removed, such as in a
Required if metallic pipe is landslide or the hangars have been removed or fallen apart,
inspected. indicate possible lack of support.
er
en
15 ENGINEER CONSULTED LAN ID of the Engineer consulted.

(LAN ID) *
Required.
G
16 CIRCUMFERENTIAL WELD Indicate visual appearance of the weld. If the weld dimensions
CONDITION are not in tolerance, select the box. These boxes are optional,
F
Required if the weld is exposed as it requires a seam to be exposed.

PD
when metallic pipe is inspected.
17 LONG SEAM (TP only) Indicate the type of seam running down length of pipe.
Required for Transmission only
and only if visible.
18 PIPE GRADE/SPEC (TP only) Consult Engineering for guidance. Indicate pipe grade for line.
Required for Transmission only.
Page
Page
35 of 64197
External Inspection
21
8
9
20
10
11
4/
/1
STEPS
1 RUST Indicate amount of corrosion (rust) on pipe as none, light
09
Required when metallic pipe is or heavy.
inspected.
2 PITTING Indicate degree of pitting created by corrosion as none, light or
heavy.
ed
Required when metallic pipe is
inspected.
3 GOUGING Indicate if pipe been dug into gouged as none, light or heavy.
at
inspected.
4 WALL THICKNESS Thickness of pipe in inches.
er
Required for Transmission Note: Consult pipeline engineer.
5 MAXIMUM PIT DEPTH Depth of pit in inches.

en
6 MAXIMUM GOUGE DEPTH Depth of gouge in inches.

G
7 MAX EXTERNAL CORROSION Length of corroded section in inches.

F

PD
8 WALL THICKNESS Indicate if wall thickness was measured.

MEASURERED Note: Consult pipeline engineer.
Required for Transmission
9 GRAPHITIZED (Cast Iron) Indicate if cast iron pipe is discolored and deteriorated.
Required for cast/ductile iron only Note: Required for cast/ductile iron only.
10 MAX GOUGE LENGTH Length of gouge in inches.

11 DEPTH OF DENTS Depth of dents in pipe, both transmission and Distribution in

inches.
Note: Consult pipeline or senior engineer.
Page
Page
36 of 64198
Internal Inspection
21
1
20
4
5 7
4/
/1
STEPS
09
1 IS THE INTERNAL SURFACE Indicate if the internal surface of pipe is visible. If yes, steps
OF THE PIPE VISIBLE?* 2-4 are required to be completed.
2 RUST Indicate amount of corrosion (rust) on pipe. If any rust or

pitting is identified on removed section of pipe, then upstream
ed
inspected. and downstream piping must also be inspected (Use
inspections only form for additional locations).
at
3 PITTING Indicate degree of pitting created by corrosion. If any rust or
Required when metallic pipe pitting is identified on removed section of pipe, then upstream
is inspected. and downstream piping must also be inspected (Use
er
inspections only form for additional locations).
4 MAX. PIT DEPTH Depth of pit in inches. Required for Transmission.

en
Required if Pitting is Light or Only visible if pipe is cut open.

Heavy.
G
5 INSPECTED BY: (LAN ID) LAN ID or Company issued identification number of person who
Required for all inspections. performed the inspection.
6 EXT CONTRACTOR Indicate non-PG&E employee by checking Ext. Contractor.

F
Required Always indicate throughout A-Form when External Contractor.

PD
7 INSPECTED ON: Date inspection occurred.

Required for Transmission
Page
Page
37 of 64199
Plastic Pipe Condition
21
20
6
4/
/1
09
STEPS
1 LINE SIZE Nominal pipe diameter in inches.
ed
2 FEET EXPOSED Number of feet exposed on inspected pipe.

at
3 COVER ON PIPE Amount of cover on the inspected pipe in inches.

er
4 INTERNAL LINER Indicate if pipe has an internal liner.

en
5 PAVED WALL TO WALL Indicate if pipe is under continuous paving from main to
G
Required for all inspections building wall.
6 NEAR PUBLIC ASSEMBLY Indicate if pipe is within 100 feet of a school, hospital, church,
F
Required for all inspections daycare center, or building regularly occupied by 20 or more
persons, 8 hours per day, 5 days a week.
PD
7 CROSS BORE CAMERA Indicate if camera was used to monitor for sewer or other
INSPECTION PERFORMED?* subsurface pipe cross boring during repair work.
Required for trenchless boring
repairs.
Page
Page
38 of 64200
21
20
11
4/
/1
09
STEPS
ed
8 PRINTLINE LEGIBLE Indicate if the printline is visible and legible on pipe/tubing.
Required when plastic pipe is
inspected.
at
9 PARTIAL LEGIBLE Indicate if printline is partially visible and legible on pipe/tubing.
Required when plastic pipe is
inspected.
er
10 SDR OR WALL THICKNESS* Enter SDR (Standard Dimension Ratio) or Wall Thickness of
Required when plastic pipe is plastic pipe installed.
en
inspected.
11 PIPE MANUFACTURER If legible, enter manufacturer’s name printed on pipe.

G
Required if the printline is legible.
12 MANUFACTURE DATE If legible, enter manufacture date (MMDDYY) printed on pipe.

F
Required if the printline is legible.

PD
13 LOCATING WIRE SIZE Enter gauge (10, 12, 14, 16) of locating wire.
Required if Locating Wire is Good
or Bad.
14 LOCATING WIRE CONDITION Indicate condition of insulated locating wire or check the
Required when plastic pipe is “None” box if wire cannot be found.
inspected. Note: If “None” or “Bad” is checked, an EMS marker must be
installed and documented with dimensions on the sketch.
Page
Page
39 of 64201
21
16
17
18
20
19 22
23
4/
/1
STEPS
09
15 PIPE LOCATABLE* Indicate if pipe is locatable.
16 EMS MARKER INSTALLED* Indicate if an EMS Marker was installed.
ed
17 WIRE REPAIRED* Indicate if wire was repaired.
18 GOUGING Indicate if pipe is damaged with gouges.

at
Required when plastic pipe is inspected
19 UNDER STRESS/BENT Indicate if pipe has tensile loading or is bent.

er

en
20 CRACKING Indicate if pipe has cracking.

21 ESTIMATED GOUGE DEPTH If Yes was selected in gouging (step 18), indicate
G
Required percentage range of gouge.

F
22 DISCOLORING TO GRAY Indicate if Aldyl-A pipe has abnormal discoloring.

Required when Aldyl-A is inspected
PD
23 IN CONTACT WITH HARD OBJECTS Indicate if pipe is in contact with hard objects.
Page
Page
40 of 64202
21
20
22
4/
/1
09
STEPS
21 VISUAL APPEARANCE Indicate visual appearance of the fusion. This step is optional as it
requires a seam to be exposed.
ed
Refer to:
 Utility Procedure TD-4170P-31, “Heat Iron Socket Fusion for
Polyethylene Pipe”
at
 Utility Procedure TD-4170P-32, “Heat Iron Saddle Fusion for
Polyethylene Pipe (Manual)”
er
 Utility Procedure TD-4170P-33, “Heat Iron Saddle Fusion for

Polyethylene Pipe (Mechanical Assist Tool)”
 Utility Procedure TD-4170P-34, “Heat Iron Butt Fusion for
en
Polyethylene Pipe (Mechanical)”

 Utility Procedure TD-4170P-35, “Heat Iron Butt Fusion for
Polyethylene Pipe (Hydraulic)”
G
22 TEE CAP CRACKING Indicate if an exposed service tee cap is cracking. This step is
optional as it requires a tee cap to be exposed.
F
ADD’L PIPE EXPOSED (NOT

PD
23 Indicate if additional pipe exposed was not tied to facilities. If

TIED TO FACILITIES)* yes, complete Additional Inspection/Inspection Only (A Form).
24 INSPECTION BY (LAN ID) LAN ID or company issued identification number of person who
Required for all inspections. performed inspection.
25 EXT CONTRACTOR* Indicate non-PG&E employee by checking Ext. Contractor.

Required for all inspections. Always indicate throughout A-Form when External
Contractor.
26 INSPECTED ON Date of Inspection in MMDDYY format.

Page
Page
41 of 64203
Pressure Test 1
21
1
2
20
7
4/
STEPS
/1
(Follow same steps 1 to 24 for completing pressure test #2 on A-Form (Page 5)
09
1 REASON FOR PRESSURE Indicate if reason for pressure test is returned or installation.
TEST*
Required
2 FACILITY TYPE Indicate facility type on which leak is found:
ed
Required Main, Regulation, or Service.
3 TYPE OF TEST Indicate type of test. Use for all material types. If pretested
at
Required for new or returned to pipe is used, attach a copy of pretested status documentation.
service segments of main and/or
services.
er
4 TEST PRESSURE Indicate minimum test pressure in pounds per square inch
Required for new or returned to gauge. Use for all material types. Note: PSI gauge for a
en
service segments of main and/or minimum of 5 minutes for standard distribution 60 psi or
services. less. For 60 psi or more, attach the strength test pressure
report indicating this information.
G
5 TEST DURATION Indicate test time duration in hours/minutes.

Required
F
6 DATE Date test was performed.

Required for new or returned to
PD
service segments of main and/or

services.
7 BY (LAN ID) LAN ID of person who performed test.

Required
8 EXT CONTRACTOR* Indicate non-PG&E employee by checking Ext. Contractor.

Required Always indicate throughout A-Form when External
Contractor.
Page
Page
42 of 64204
Pressure Test 1
21
20
4/
12 13
13
/1
11
09
ed
at
STEPS
er
9 TYPE OF MATERIAL INSTALLED Enter type of material installed and if other, explain.
Required if pipe was replaced.
en
10 PLASTIC MANUFACTURE NAME Enter name of manufacturer of plastic pipe installed as

Required if pipe was replaced with required in Gas Design Standard (GDS) A-93.1, “Installing
G
plastic. and Maintaining a Polyethylene Gas Distribution System”.

Obtain this information from print line on the pipe.
F
11 IF OTHER, MFR* Note additional or different information provided about

Required if the pipe was replaced. material or manufacture.
PD
12 MFG DATE* Enter date that installed plastic pipe was manufactured as
Required if plastic is installed. required in GDS A-93.1. Obtain this information from the
print line on pipe.
13 SDR* OR WALL THICKNESS Enter the SDR (Standard Dimension Ratio) or the Wall
One is required if plastic is installed. Thickness of plastic pipe installed.
14 SIZE Indicate pipe size in number of inches.

Required if plastic is installed.
15 CONNECTION TYPE Indicate connection method used to tie in newly installed
Required if plastic is installed. pipe.
Check one
Page
Page
43 of 64205
Pressure Test 1
21
20
STEPS
4/
16 WELDED BY (LAN ID) LAN ID of person who performed weld. For steel only.
Required if steel is installed.
/1
17 EXT CONTRACTOR* Indicate if welded by non-PG&E (per Utility Procedure TD-
Required 4160P-62, “Distribution Weld Inspection” or Utility Procedure
09
TD-4160P-60,”Weld Inspection” ) employee by checking Ext.
Contractor. Always indicate throughout A-Form when
18 DATE: WELDING INSPECTED Date welding was performed.
ed
PER PG&E D-40 Note: D-40, “Weld Inspection,” has been superseded by
Required if steel is installed. TD-4160P-62 and TD-4160-60.
at
19 INSPECTED BY (LAN ID) LAN ID of the lead person in charge of the repair or inspection.
Required
er
20 EXT CONTRACTOR Indicate if welding NOT inspected by PG&E employee and

Required check External Contractor. Always indicate throughout A-
en
Form when External Contractor.

21 DATE INSPECTED BY (LAN ID) LAN ID of lead person in charge of repair or inspection.
Required
G
22 PLASTIC JOINED BY (LAN ID) LAN ID of qualified person who joined plastic pipe.
F
23 EXT CONTRACTOR* Indicate if non-PG&E employee (must be qualified based

Required on qualifications in Gas Design Standard (GDS) D-34
PD
“Qualifications for Joining Plastic Pipe”) joined plastic by

checking Ext. Contractor.
Always indicate throughout A-Form when External
Contractor.
24 DATE: D-34 QUALIFICATIONS Date plastic was joined.

FOR JOINING PLASTIC
Page
Page
44 of 64206
Pressure Test #2
21
20
4/
/1
09
25 26 27
28 30
ed
29
31
at
STEPS
er
1- PRESSURE TEST #2 NOTE: Complete Pressure Test #2. Follow steps #1-24
24 from Pressure Test #1. Refer to page 42 of this job aid to
follow same steps as Pressure Test #1 to complete form for
en
Pressure Test #2.
25 FINAL TIE-IN POINT SOAP LAN ID of lead person in charge of final tie-in point soap test.
TESTED BY*
G
Required
26 EXT CONTRACTOR Indicate Ext. Contractor, if final tie-in point was inspected by
non-PG&E employee. Always indicate throughout A-Form
F
Required
when External Contractor.
PD
27 DATE The date the final tie-in point soap tested was completed.
28 LEAK REPAIR SOAP TESTED BY LAN ID of lead person in charge of leak repair soap test.
Required
29 EXT CONTRACTOR Indicate Ext. Contractor, if leak repair soap test was inspected
Required by non- PG&E employee. Always indicate throughout A-
Form when External Contractor.
30 DATE Date leak repair soap test was completed.
31 COMMENTS Note any special conditions that were noted during the
inspection and repair.
Page
Page
45 of 64207
Below Ground Sketch
21
20
4/
/1
09
ed
STEPS
1 SKETCH AREA A sketch is required for all below ground repairs. Dimensions
to the property lines are required.
at
Sketch must be in alignment with pre-printed north arrow.
Indicate locations and measurements to all fittings
installed and all squeeze points. Details should be as
er
complete as Gas Service Record.

Additionally, an Electronic Marking System (EMS) marker is
en
required to be installed for facilities not locatable or

deactivated, and stubs and plastic found to have no locating
wire. Indicated them on sketch with dimensions.
G
2 RESPONSIBLE PERSON LAN ID LAN ID of supervisor who reviewed documentation.

Required
F
3 EXT CONTRACTOR* Indicate non-PG&E employee by checking Ext.

Contractor. Always indicate throughout A-Form when
PD
Required
4 DATE Date that documentation was reviewed by supervisor.

Required
Page 208
46 of 64
Gas Quarterly Incident Data
21
20
2 3
4 4 4
4/
6
/1
STEPS
09
1 DAMAGING PARTY TYPE Indicate if damage to PG&E gas facilities was PG&E,
Required Contractor for PG&E or third party; any person or force
(natural, human or unknown) not working for PG&E.
ed
2 DAMAGING PARTY NAME Indicate name of person or business that damaged PG&E gas
facilities. Required if leak cause is dig-in, vehicle, vandalism,
fire or damage by PG&E Electric or a non-PG&E facility. Enter
“NA” if name is not known.
at
3 DAMAGING PARTY OPERATOR Name of individual working for the Damaging Party.
er
4 ADDRESS: Indicate address of person or business that damaged PG&E

HOUSE facilities. Required if leak cause is dig-in, vehicle, vandalism,
en
STREET fire or damage by PG&E Electric or a non-PG&E facility. Enter

“NA” if address is not known.
APT/BLDG#
5 CITY Indicate city or unincorporated area of damaging party.

G
Required if leak cause is dig-in, vehicle, vandalism, fire or

damage by PG&E Electric or a non-PG&E facility. Enter “NA” if
city is not known.
F
6 ZIP CODE Indicate zip code of damaging party. Enter 00000 if zip code is
PD
unknown. Required if leak cause is dig-in, vehicle, vandalism,

fire or damage by PG&E Electric or a non-PG&E facility.
7 PHONE Indicate phone number of damaging party. Include area code.

Required if leak cause is dig-in, vehicle, vandalism, fire or
damage by PG&E Electric or a non-PG&E facility. Enter 000-
000-0000 if phone is unknown.
© 2021 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserv ed. Page
Page 209
47 of 64
21
20
4/
/1
10
09
at
STEPS
8 GAS FLOW STOP DATE Date (MMDDYY) flow of gas was stopped. Required for
er
Department of Transportation (DOT) and California

Public Utility Commission (CPUC) reportable incidents
and dig-ins.
en
9 GAS FLOW STOP TIME Time (in 24-hour clock) flow of gas was stopped. This is
Required if a Gas Flow Stopped Date entered by crew for CPUC reportable incidents and IR
G
is entered. incidents.
10 CUSTOMERS OUT? Indicate if any customers were out of service during

F
Required if leak cause is dig-in, incident.

vehicle, vandalism, fire or damage by
PD
PG&E Electric or a non-PG&E facility.
11 # CUSTOMERS INTERRUPTED Indicate number of PG&E gas customers that were

Required if the leak cause is dig-in, interrupted as a result of gas incident. Required if leak
vehicle, vandalism, fire or damage by cause is dig-in, vehicle, vandalism, fire or damage by
PG&E Electric or a non-PG&E facility. PG&E electric or a non-PG&E facility.
12 # CUST. HOURS Indicate number of hours PG&E gas customer hours were
Required if the leak cause is dig-in, interrupted as a result of gas incident.
vehicle, vandalism, fire or damage by
Page
Page 210
21
20
4/
/1
15
09
18
ed
at
STEPS
er
STEPS 13 - 18: **Required if the leak cause is dig-in, vehicle, vandalism, fire or damage by
en
13 INJURIES? Indicate if there were any injuries to report (Employee and non-
**Required employee).
G
14 # EMPLOYEES INJURED Indicate number of PG&E employees who were injured and required
**Required in-patient hospitalization as a result of gas incident.
F
15 # OTHERS INJURED Indicate number of persons other than PG&E employees who
**Required were injured and required in-patient hospitalization as a result of
PD
gas incident.
16 FATALITIES? Indicate if there were any fatalities to report (Employee and non-
**Required employee).
17 # EMPLOYEES FATALITIES Indicate number of PG&E employee fatalities.

**Required
18 # OTHER FATALITIES Indicate number of fatalities of persons other than PG&E

**Required employees.
Page
Page 211
21
20
4/
/1
09
19 22

at
STEPS
er
19 FIRE? Indicate if a fire resulted from gas incident.

Required if the leak cause is dig-in, vehicle,
vandalism, fire or damage by PG&E Electric
en
or a non-PG&E facility.
20 EXPLOSION? Indicate if a gas explosion resulted from gas

incident. Required if leak cause is dig-in, vehicle,
G

vandalism, fire or damage by PG&E Electric vandalism, fire or damage by PG&E or a non-PG&E
or a non-PG&E facility. facility.
F
21 BALLPARK DAMAGE ESTIMATE* Estimate damage to be in the thousands, hundreds of

thousands, or millions. Approximate best guess.
PD
22 MEDIA PRESENT Indicate if media was on site or involved.

Required if CPUC Reportable is present.
23 MEDIA TYPE Indicate type of media involved.

Required if media is present (#22).
24 NAME(S)/CHANNEL(S) Indicate name or channel of media involved.

Required, if media is present (#22).
Page
Page 212
50 of 64
21
20
4/
/1
09
26
ed 28
at
er
STEPS
25 EST. DATE OF RESTORATION (OR CGI) Estimated date (MMDDYY) service will be
en
Required if Zero Customers Out is No. restored from a reportable incident from initial
report.
G
26 EST. TIME OF RESTORATION Estimated time (in 24 hour clock) service will be
Required if Zero Customers Out is No. restored from a reportable incident from the initial
report.
F
27 DOT REPORTABLE? Indicate if a CPUC Reportable incident was also a

DOT reportable Incident.
PD

vandalism, fire or damage by PG&E electric.
Required if fatality, in-patient hospitalization,
>=$50K of total property damage.
28 CPUC REPORTABLE? Indicate if an incident meets DOT criteria or has

Required if the leak cause is dig-in, vehicle, major news media.
vandalism, fire or damage by PG&E electric
or a non-PG&E facility.
Page
Page 213
51 of 64
Map Data (Mapping Only)
21
1
20
2 3
4 5 6
4/
7
/1
8
09
ed
STEPS
at
1 ACTUAL REPAIR LOCATION* Note if actual repair location differs from initial location
description.
er
2 LOCATION MAP: WALL MAP Wall map on which leak is physically located, if other
Required.: Distribution only than recorded location map.
en
3 LOCATION MAP: PLAT Plat map on which leak is physically located, if other than
Required.: Distribution only recorded location map.
G
4 RECORDED LOCATION MAP: WALL Wall map on which leak will be recorded.
MAP
Required: Distribution only.
F
5 RECORDED LOCATION MAP: PLAT Plat map on which leak will be recorded.
PD
Required: Distribution only.

6 RECORDED LOCATION MAP: BLOCK Block number on which leak will be recorded.
Required: Distribution only
7 FACILITY TYPE* There is room for test information for three types/sizes
of pipe Main, Regulation or Service. Indicate type as
applicable.
8 PIPELINE # Transmission line number.

Required for Transmission Pressure (TP)
only.
Page
Page 214
52 of 64
Map Data (Mapping Only)
21
20
9
4/
10
/1
11
12 13 13 13
09
13 13 14 15
16
ed
STEPS
9 MILE POINT Nearest mile point marker to leaking facility. If not available, to be
at
Transmission Only calculated by Mapping department. Transmission Pressure (TP)
only.
er
10 STATION #* Record station # from wall map where leak was identified.
Optional
en
11 STATION NAME* Record station name from wall map where leak was identified
Optional
G
12 DIVISION/DISTRICT* Record division/district associated to wall map where leak was

identified
F
13 ADDRESS: Record address where leak was identified

HOUSE
PD
STREET
APT/BLDG#
CITY
ZIP CODE
14 LATITUDE* Provide the latitude of the north-south geographic coordinate.
15 LONGITUDE* Provide the latitude of the east-west geographic coordinate.
16 DESCRIPTION OF READING A clear and descriptive location of leak reading or inspection

LOCATION location such as “over tee,” or “over service at curb.”
Required
Page
© 2021Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved. Page 215
53 of 64
Map Info (Mapping Only)
21
2
20
4
4/
/1
09
ed
STEPS
1 NORMALLY CATHODICALLY Indicate if steel pipe is part of a Cathodic protection system.
at
PROTECTED
2 CPA Assigned Cathodic Protection Area number to which facility

er
(Required if Cathodic Protection Area belongs

is marked Yes).
en
3 CPA FUNCTIONAL LOCATION* Location of where CPA function is located
4 MAOP Indicate maximum allowable operating pressure in psig.

G
5 SYSTEM PRESSURE The system Maximum Allowable Operating Pressure

(MAOP) of leaking gas facility:
LP = Low Pressure (<=10.5” Water Column (WC))
F
SHP = Semi-High Pressure (<= 25 psig)

PD
HP = High Pressure (<= 60 psig)

TP = Transmission Pressure (> 60 psig)
6 NOP Indicate the Normal Operating Pressure (NOP) in psig.
7 POSTING REQUIRED* Indicate if posting is required.
8 FEDERAL LAND Indicate if gas facility is located on all lands owned by the
United States, except lands in the National Park System,
lands held in trust for an Indian or Indian tribe.
9 YEAR INSTALLED Indicate year facility was installed.
Page
54 of 64
Map Info (Mapping Only)
21
20
4/
/1
10
09
11 12
14
16

at
STEPS
er
10 ORIGINAL JOB# Enter original installation job number in space provided.

Transmission Pressure (TP) only.
en
11 MAIN INSTALLATION YEAR Required for leaks on services in YYYY format.
12 MAIN CONNECTED TO SERVICES Indicate material of main connected to service. Required

for leaks on services.
G
13 OPERATING MAP/DIAGRAM Indicate Operating Map or Operating Diagram number.

Required for Transmission Pressure (TP) only.
F
14 POTENTIAL HIGH CONSEQUENCES

PD
Indicate if it is during a Transmission Line (49 CFR

AREA (HCA) §192.3) survey or near a transmission line during a
distribution survey. Contact Engineering for guidance.
15 MAPPING REVIEW COMPLETED BY* LAN ID of qualified mapping person who reviewed
Required For repairs and inspections. documentation.
16 MAPPING REVIEW COMPLETED ON* Date on which documentation was reviewed by qualified
Required for repairs and inspections. mapping person.
Page
55 of 64
Mapping Data (Mapping Only)
21
20
4/
/1
09
2
ed 4
at
er
STEPS
1 ACTUAL HCA VERIFIED DATE* Enter date verified as HCA.
Required if HCA is “Yes
en
2 ACTUAL HCA VERIFIED LAN ID * LAN ID that verified as HCA.

G
3 DATE SOURCE OF LEAK WAS Date that source of leak indication was determined.
DETERMINED
F

PD
4 LEAK SOURCE CONFIRMED ON HCA Is leak indication on line that makes location an HCA?
PIPE Check yes or no. Contact Engineering for guidance.
Page
56 of 64
21
20
4/
What’s Changed in the A-Form?
/1
09
RED OUTLINES A NEW ITEM
ed
BLUE OUTLINES SECTIONS IN A NEW LOCATION
at
PURPLE OUTLINES ITEM DESCRIPTION CHANGES
er
en
G
F
PD
Page
© 2021 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserv ed.
Page 219
57 of 64
21
New fields are
highlighted in red.
Leak Number is now
20
found at the top of
the form.
4/
/1
09
ed
at
USA Information is
separate section.
er
There are checkboxes

en
throughout the form to

indicate when an
operator is an External
Contractor.
G
F
PD
The Grade 2+
Requested Repair Date
has moved from below
Leak Readings/ History
table.
Page
Page 220
21
New fields are
highlighted in red.
20
4/
/1
09
ed Information was
at
previously located
under Initial Data on
first page of form.
er
There are now

en
checkboxes
throughout form that
are require to be
checked to indicate
G
when an operator is
an External
Contractor.
F
Wording for this

question has changed.
PD
Repair Activity Section

has changed from
page 3 to page 2.
Page
Page 221
21
New fields are
highlighted in red.
20
There are now
4/
checkboxes
are require to be
/1
checked to indicate
when an operator is
an External
Contractor.
09
Line Material is now
divided into two
sections:
ed
Metal and Plastic.
The following fields are

at
now included within the
Metallic Pipe
Condition or Plastic
er
Pipe Condition
sections (Plastic Pipe
Condition section is
en
on next page):
 Line Size
 Feet Exposed
 Cover on Pipe

G
Internal Liner
 Paved Wall to Wall
 Near Public
Assembly
F
PD
Page
Page 222
21
20
New fields are
highlighted in red.
4/
Inspection
Completion Details
are now broken out in
/1
a separate section.
The following fields are
09
now included within the
section:
 Line Size
 Feet Exposed
ed
 Cover on Pipe
 Internal Liner
 Paved Wall to Wall
 Near Public Assembly
at
There are now
er
checkboxes throughout
form that are require to
A separate form is now
be checked to indicate
available for additional
en
when an operator is an
or inspection only.
This section has been

renamed. A second
G
Pressure Test section

is available on the next
page.
F
PD
Type of Material
Installed and
Manufacturer options
have changed.
Page
Page 223
21
New fields are
highlighted in red.
20
A second section for
documenting testing
and materials
installed is now
4/
included.
Type of Material
/1
Installed and
Manufacturer options
have changed.
09
There are now
ed
at
er
Questions about Soap

Test have changed and
en
are now included

under Installation
Completion Details.
G
F
PD
Page
Page 224
21
New fields are
highlighted in red.
20
4/
/1
09
ed
at
er
en
G
F
There are now

PD
Page
Page 225
21
New fields are
20
highlighted in red.
4/
Gas Quarterly Incident
Data has moved from
page 3.
/1
Gas Flow Stop Date
and Gas Flow Stop
09
Time were moved to
this section from the
Initial Data section.
ed
at
er
en
Map Data has moved

from page 1.
G
Section has been

divided into two parts:
Map Data & Map Info.
F
PD
Page
Page 226
Publication Date: 12/07/2016, Effective Date: 02/07/2017 Rev. 0
Gas Incident Dig-In Report Addendum (A-1 Form) Job Aid
21
Table of Contents
20
A-1 Form Instructions 2
Job Aid
GROUP 1 : Page 1 Instructions
Page #
4/
Header Data 3
/1
Part B 4
09
Part C 5
Part D 7
Part E 8
Part F
Part G ed 9
10
at
Part H 11
er
Job Aid
Page #
en
Part I 14
Part J 17
G
Part K 22
F
Part L 25
PD
Appendix 1: Locate A-1 Form Information on Mobile Device vs. Paper Form 27
Appendix 2: A-1 Form Crew Guide

28
A-1 Form with noted comments of form changes

Page 227
Gas Incident Dig-In Report Addendum (A-1 Form) Job Aid
21
Gas Incident Dig-in Report Addendum (A-Form)
Tech Down/Non-Mobile Reporting
20
Paper Form
Instructions
4/
/1
1. This form is required for “Tech Down” situations OR non-mobile data collection to
be completed in addition to the A Form for all dig-ins whether leaking or not.
09
2. Personal Protective Equipment (PPE): As required for type of work being performed.
3. Use black or blue, permanent, non-erasable ink when completing paper forms.
4. All items noted as “required” must be completed.
ed
5. Where to find form sections (Part A to Part L) on the mobile device is noted at
at
the bottom of each page.
er
6. An asterisk sign * next to the item name in the Job Aid indicates that it is a new
line item in the form.
en
7. Always check box “Ext Contractor” throughout form when External

Contractor performs work and/or reporting.
G
8. Before submission, review form to ensure all required boxes are completed and
that the information is consistent in the identification of the problem and the
requirements of repair.
F
PD
 Reference Box provides options to select answers to questions.

Page 228
A-1 Form Instructions - Header Data
21
20
4/
STEPS
/1
1 LEAK NUMBER Enter leak number from A Form if this is a leaking dig-
Required in.
09
2 NON-LEAK REFERENCE Non-Leak Information System (NLIS) will provide number for
NUMBER a non-leaking dig-in.
Required
ed
at
er
en
G

F
PD
Page
3 of 30229
Page
A-1 Form Instructions – Part B
21
1 2
3
20
4 5 6 7
8
9
4/
/1
09
STEPS
1 PM # Enter PM number assigned to accumulate
Required Dig-in costs.
ed
2 INCIDENT REPORT # Enter Incident Report number. For distribution, this field
will be assigned via Risk Master and link between SAP
and Risk Master will populate the field. For transmission,
at
obtain this number manually.
3 PROVIDE A SUMMARY Provide a concise description of facts. Do not speculate.

er
Required
4 PHOTOS TAKEN? Required Indicate if photos were taken.

en
5 BY WHOM? Required if “Photos LAN ID of person who took photos.

Taken” is Yes.
G
6 EXT CONTRACTOR Indicate if non-PG&E employee by checking Ext.

Required Contractor for each line entry. Always indicate
throughout this report when Ext Contractor.
F
PD
7 OTHER EVIDENCE SECURED? Indicate if other evidence is secured.

Required
8 DESCRIBE Required If Other Describe type of evidence other than photos.

Evidence Secured Is Yes.
9 LOCATION OF DIG-IN Chose location of dig-in. If “Other” is checked,

Required. Choose one. explanation required.
Gas Incident Dig-in Report GCM Mobile Device
Paper Form A-1 Page 1 Part Go to A-1 tab in Mobile Device to open screen to
B: Incident Description complete Parts B through G
Page
4 of 30230
Page
A-1 Form Instructions – Part C
21
20
4/
/1
09
STEPS
1 EXCAVATOR TYPE CAUSING Check appropriate box.
INCIDENT
ed
Note: District is a municipal utility district.
Required
If “Other” is checked, explanation required.
Choose One
at
er
en
G

F
PD
GCM Mobile Device

Paper Form A-1 – Page 1 Go to A-1 tab in Mobile Device to open screen to
Part C: Detailed Damage Report complete Parts B through G
Gas Incident Dig-in Report

Page
5 of 30231
Page
A-1 Form Instructions – Part C
21
20
4/
1 1 2
/1
3 3 3
09
STEPS
1 OWNER INFORMATION SAME Indicate if Excavator is same person or firm as person or
ed
AS DAMAGING PARTY? firm for whom work is being performed.
Required If no, enter owner’s name.
at
2 ALL OR PART OF OWNER Check box if any of owner’s information is unknown.
er
INFO UNKNOWN
en
3 OWNER ADDRESS, CITY AND Complete Address, City and Phone Number with
PHONE NUMBER Area Code.
Required if the owner information
G
same as the damaging party.

F
PD

Owner Information complete Parts B through G
Page
6 of 30232
Page
A-1 Form Instructions – Part D
21
20
4/
/1
1
STEPS
09
1 TYPE OF EXCAVATION Indicate equipment used during excavation. If “Other” is
METHOD checked, explanation is required.
Required
2 IF DIRECTIONAL DRILLING
OR BORING WAS THE
METHOD, WAS IT CROSS
ed
Indicate if directional drilling or boring
is cross boring.
at
Note: Cross boring is any boring activity where bore
BORING?
path was approximately perpendicular to struck facility.
Required if Directional Drilling or
er
Boring is selected.
en
G
F
PD

Part D: Type of Excavation complete Parts B through G
Page
7 of 30233
Page
A-1 Form Instructions – Part E
21
20
4/
Return to Table of Contents 1
/1
STEPS
09
1 TYPE OF WORK BEING Indicate type of excavation work that was being performed
PERFORMED when the gas line was hit.
Required If box “Other” is checked, explanation is required.
Choose one
ed
at
er
en
G

F
PD

Part E: Type of Work Performed complete Parts B through G
Page
8 of 30234
Page
A-1 Form Instructions – Part F
21
1
20
2 3
4
4/
5
/1
STEPS
09
1 USA (Underground Service Alert) Check appropriate box(es). If None is selected, then
MARKINGS VISIBLE AND explain why.
OBSERVED AT THE TIME OF
THE DIG-IN
ed
Required
2 IF MARKS WERE PRESENT, Indicate if marks are present and marked correctly.
WERE THE FACILITIES
at
MARKED CORRECTLY?
Required if any marking type
er
except none was selected.
3 WERE THE FACILITIES IN A Indicate if the facilities are located in Joint Trench.
en
JOINT TRENCH?
Required
G
4 HORIZONTAL DISTANCE FROM Enter distance, in inches, between PG&E markings

PG&E MARKINGS TO LINE to line.
Required if any marking type Note: This indicates alignment of facility with marks.
except None was selected.
F
PD
5 TOTAL DISTANCE FROM Enter distance, in feet, from closest PG&E markings
CLOSEST PG&E MARKINGS to the point of contact.
TO THE POINT OF CONTACT
Required if any marking type
except None was selected.

Part F: USA Markings complete Parts B through G
Page
©© 2016
2016 Pacific
Pacific Gas
Gas and
and Electric
Electric Company.
Company. AllAll rights
rights reserved.
reserved.
9 of 30235
Page
A-1 Form Instructions – Part G
21
1 2
3
20
4/
/1
STEPS
09
1 DOES EXCAVATOR CLAIM Indicate if Excavator called
T O HAVE TO CALLED USA? USA before excavating.
Required
2 IF YES, USA NUMBER

PROVIDED
Required ed
USA ticket number excavator provided. It may be
different than USA ticket number PG&E received, if
PG&E received a USA ticket at all.
at
er
3 IF EXCAVATOR DID NOT CALL Check applicable box(es), if excavator did not call USA.
USA Note:
Required
en
• If box is checked for: “Was told “no conflict/no UG

facilities” By whom?” then, provide name and/or LAN
ID
• If “Other,” then provide explanation
G
F
PD
A-1 Form Instructions – Part H

complete Parts B through G
Page
10 of 30236
21
1 2 3
4 5
20
4/
/1
STEPS
1 LINE PRESSURE Line pressure at location of leak based on charts,
09
Required recorders, and/or models. Consult local gas engineer
for assistance.
2 LINE COMPLETELY Indicate if line has been completely severed.
ed
SEVERED?
Required
at
3 IF NO, AREA OF HOLE IN If line is not completely severed, then provide
SQUARE INCHES measurement of hole in square inches. If area cannot
er
Required if line is not completely easily be determined, secure damaged piece of pipe for
severed measurement to be done later and forward piece to local
gas engineer. This is needed for gas loss calculations.
en
4 THERM BILLING AREA List applicable Therm Billing Area. Engineering will have
this information.
G
5 CALCULATED GAS LOST TO Engineering will calculate using appropriate tables,

ATMOSPHERE IN MCF graphs, PolyFlo or software to determine volume of gas
F
that was lost to atmosphere.

PD

Paper Form A-1 – Page 1 Completed by Supervisor to be entered in SAP
Page
11 of 30 237
A-1 Form Instructions – Part H Reviewer ID
21
20
1 1 2
4/
3 3 4
/1
STEPS
09
1 ABOVE INFORMATION LAN ID followed by date when form was completed by
PROVIDED (LAN ID) person responsible for supplying information on this page
Required Note: Typically a damage prevention supervisor may be
ed
crew lead or other responsible person.
2 BILLABLE? Required Indicate if billable. This information is provided by

at
damage prevention supervisor, but may be a crew lead
or other responsible person.
er
3 SUPERVISOR REVIEW LAN ID followed by date when information was reviewed

BY/DATE Required by person responsible for reviewing information on this
en
page.
Note: A supervisor, if a crew lead or other responsible
person is listed for the previous line.
G
4 PAVING TAG # Enter respective Paving Tag number associated with

work.
F
PD

Page
Page
12 of 30238
A-1 Form Instructions
21
Table of Contents
20
Job Aid
GROUP 2: A-1 FORM PAGE 2 INSTRUCTIONS
Page #
4/
PART I: USA Mark and Locate Information 14
/1
PART J: Mismark Data Information (Locator info, Instrument info, signal, visibility) 17
09
PART K: Inspection Only of critical Facilities & Regulatory Required Field Meet 22
PART L: Reason for dig-in 25
ed
at
er
en
G
F
PD

Page 239
A-1 Form Instructions – Part I
21
1 2 3 4
5 6 7
20
8 9 10
4/
/1
STEPS
09
1 USA NOTIFIED? Required Indicate if USA notified.
2 ACTIVE USA # Required if USA Enter USA information from look up in USA software
Notified is Yes once Supervisor confirms damaging party provided.
3 DATE OF TICKET Required if

there is a USA Ticket number.
ed
Enter data found in USA software.
at
4 DATE ISSUED TO LOCATOR Enter data from ticket or USA software.
Required if there is a USA Ticket
er
number.
5 FIELD MEET REQUESTED? Indicate if a field meet was requested prior to work
Required beginning.
en
6 BY WHOM? Write name of the person who requested the field meet.
Required if Field Meet
G
Requested is Yes.

F

PD
8 FIELD MEET PERFORMED Indicated if field meet was performed. If yes, USA ticket
Required if Field Meet number required (step 2).
Requested is Yes.
9 IF YES, WHEN? Required Enter date when Field Meet was performed.
10 IF NO, WHY NOT? Required Provide reason for no field meet, if one was requested.

Page
Page
14 of 30240
21
20
4/
11 12 13 14
15 16
/1
17 18
09
STEPS
11 DATE ARRIVED Enter date when field meet parties arrived from ticket or
USA software.
12 TIME ARRIVED
ed
Enter time when field meet parties arrived for field
meet from ticket or USA software.
at
13 DATE COMPLETED Enter date when field meet completed from ticket or
USA software.
er
14 TIME COMPLETED (N/A FOR Enter time when field meet was completed from ticket or
PHASED PROJECTS) from USA software.
en
15 EXCAVATOR PROPERLY Indicate if excavator properly delineated excavation

DELINEATE EXCAVATION site, from ticket or USA software.
SITE? Required if there is a USA
G
Ticket Number
16 EXCAVATION PERFORMED Based on field investigations, indicate if excavation

WITHIN DELINEATED AREA? was performed within delineated area.
F

PD
Number
17 SITE DELINEATION MATCH Indicate if site delineation matched the area shown on
THE AREA ASKED FOR ON the USA ticket.
THE USA TICKET? Required if
there is a USA Ticket Number
18 FACILITIES STRUCK IN Indicate if the facilities were struck in the delineated

DELINEATED AREA? Required if area.
there is a USA Ticket Number

Page
Page
15 of 30241
21
20
4/
18
/1
19
09
20
21 22
23
ed
STEPS
18 Which USA marks were in place or Check boxes that apply from ticket or USA software
provided by the PG&E Locator in the and/or field investigations that indicate type of USA
at
excavation area? marks in excavation area.
Required if there is a USA ticket number.
er
19 Explain Conversation If verbal was given for location in excavation area,

explain in detail.
en
20 Weather Indicate type of weather from ticket or USA

Required if there is a USA ticket number. software.
Note: If Other is checked, explain.
G
21 Were facilities marked within two Enter time when field meet was completed from
working days? ticket or from USA software.
Required if there is a USA ticket
F
number.
PD
22 If not, were they marked later as Indicate if marked later, from ticket or USA
agreed? software.
Required if facilities not marked within
two working days.
23 Was the agreed-on time for the Indicate If agreed-on time is noted on USA ticket.
locate documented on USA ticket?
Number

Page
Page
16 of 30242
21
1 2 3
4 5 6
20
4/
/1
09
STEPS
1 LOCATOR’S NAME Enter locator’s name from ticket or USA software.
# and if marks were present and not
ed
marked correctly.
2 LOCATOR’S LAN ID If locator is PG&E employee, enter employee LAN ID.

at
Required

er

4 LOCATOR Indicate if locator is full-time or relief worker.

en

# and marks were present and not
marked correctly (See Part F)
G
5 YEARS OF EXPERIENCE Obtain data from OQ and employee history.

F

PD
6 OQ QUALIFICATION DATE This is available from employee learning history.


Page
Page
17 of 30243
A-1 Form Instructions – Part J
21
20
7
8 9
4/
10 11
12 13
/1
09
STEPS
7 LOCATOR QUALIFIED TO MARK Indicate if locator is qualified
ed
AND LOCATE FACILITIES?
Required if there is a USA Ticket # and
marks were present and not marked
correctly (See Part F).
at
8 WAS THE MAPPING INFORMATION Indicate if Mapping information was accurate.
er
ACCURATE?
en
9 IF NO, EXPLAIN Required Explain if mapping information was in accurate.

G
10 WAS MAPPING NOTIFIED OF Indicate if Mapping was notified. If no, submit Mapping
DISCREPANCIES? Required Correction Form.
F
11 IF NO, EXPLAIN Required Explain why Mapping was not notified.

PD
12 LOCATING INSTRUMENT FAILURE Indicate if there is instrument failure or

OR MALFUNCTION malfunction.
13 IF YES, EXPLAIN Required Explain if machine failed or malfunction.

Page
Page
18 of 30244
21
14 15 16
17
20
18
19
4/
/1
09
STEPS
14 INSTRUMENT MAKE
Required
ed
Enter make of instrument, if there is a USA Ticket number and
marks were present and not marked correctly (See Part F).
at
15 INSTRUMENT MODEL Enter instrument model number if there is a USA Ticket number
Required and marks were present and not marked correctly (See Part F).
er
16 INSTRUMENT SERIAL Enter instrument serial number if there is a USA Ticket number
and marks were present and not marked correctly (See Part F).
en
NUMBER
Required
17 DATE OF LAST Enter date of last calibration number if there is a USA

G
INSTRUMENT Ticket number and marks were present and not marked
CALIBRATION correctly (See Part F).
Required
F
18 LOCATE METHOD USED Check box for method used with instrument, i.e., there is a USA
PD
Required Ticket number and marks were present and not marked
19 IF NOT DIRECT CONNECT, If another method was used to locate repair, explain why.
EXPLAIN WHY
Required

Page
Page
19 of 30245
21
20
4/
19 20
/1
21
22
09
23
ed
STEPS
19 LOCATING WIRE MISSING Indicate if locating wire is missing.
Required
at
20 DISCONNECTED/BROKEN Indicate if locating wire is disconnected or broken.
er
LOCATING WIRE
Required
en
21 CORRECTIVE ACTION TAKEN Enter corrective action taken, if either no locating wire or
Required (if #20 is yes) locating wire was disconnected or broken.
22 SIGNAL INTERFERENCES Check type of signal interference.

G

F
PD
23 EXPLAIN WHY AND WHAT Describe corrective action for signal interferences
CORRECTIVE ACTION WILL BE unless None is selected.
TAKEN

Page
20 of 30246
Page
21
20
4/
/1
24
09
25 26
STEPS
24 ed
**Required if the USA Ticket # and marks are present and not marked correctly
at
to (See Part F) or there is a transmission line number in the Map Data section of the A Form.
26
er
24 GAS TRANSMISSION LINES For gas transmission lines, indicate if the line markers
MARKERS VISIBLE AT INCIDENT are visible at the incident site.
SITE
en
**Required (See above details)
25 DISTANCE FROM THE SITE TO Enter distance (feet) from incident location to closest
G
MARKER 1 line marker.

F
26 DISTANCE FROM THE SITE TO Enter distance (feet) from the incident location to
MARKER 2 second closest line marker.
PD

Page
21 of 30247
Page
A-1 Form Instructions – Part K
21
20
4/
/1
09
1 STAND-BY REQUIRED? (NOTE: THIS Indicate if a stand-by was required by Utility
APPLIES TO COMPANY Procedure D-5811P-301, “Performing a
REQUIREMENTS) Standby.”
ed
Required
2 STAND-BYPERFORMED? Indicate if a stand-by was performed.

at
Required
3 IF REQUIRED AND INSPECTION Provide reason if stand-by is required, but not

er
ONLY WAS NOT PERFORMED performed.

STATE REASON
Required
en
4 FIELD MEET REQUIRED BY Indicate if field meet was required by State

REGULATIONS? Regulations.
G
Required
5 REGULATORY REQUIRED FIELD Indicate if required Field Meet is performed.

MEET PERFORMED?
F
Required
PD
6 IF NO, STATE REASON Provide reason if required Regulatory Field Meet is

Required if Step #5 is “no”. not performed.

Page
22 of 30248
Page
21
20
4/
/1
09
STEPS
7 WERE THE FACILITIES “POT- HOLED” Indicate if facilities were “pot-holed” before
BEFORE EXCAVATION? excavation.
ed
Required if there is a valid USA Ticket
Number and Inspection Only is performed.
(Step #2 – “yes”)
at
8 IF NO, STATE REASON Required if there is Provide reason if facilities were not “pot-holed” prior
a valid USA Ticket Number, and Inspection to excavation.
Only is Performed (Step #2) and facilities
er
were not “pot-holed” before excavation. (Step

#7 – “no”)
en
9 INSPECTION ONLY PERSON’S LAN ID Enter LAN ID of PG&E employee or contractor’s

Required if there is a valid USA Ticket company ID.
G
10 YEARS OF EXPERIENCE Total years with PG&E or contract employer.

F
Required if there is a valid USA Ticket

PD


Page
23 of 30249
Page
21
20
4/
/1
09
STEPS
11 INSPECTION ONLY PERSON Indicate if there is a valid USA Ticket Number and
ed
OQ QUALIFIED? Required if there is a Inspection Only is performed
valid USA Ticket Number and
Inspection Only is performed. (Step #2
at
“yes”)
12 OQ QUALIFICATION DATE Enter OQ qualification date if Inspection Only is

er
Required if there is a valid USA Ticket performed.

Number and Inspection Only is
performed. (Step #2 “yes”) and the
en
Inspection Person OQ is qualified (Step

#11 “yes”)
13 DID EXCAVATOR DIG AT THE Indicate if excavator dig was at agreed time.
G
AGREED TIME? Required if there is a

valid USA Ticket Number and
Inspection Only is performed. (Step #2
F
“yes”)
PD
14 IF NO, STATE REASON Provide reason if excavator dig was not performed at
Required if there is a valid USA Ticket the agreed time
Number and Inspection Only is
performed. (Step #2 “yes”) and
Excavator Dig was not at agreed time.

Page
24 of 30250
Page
A-1 Form Instructions – Part L
21
1 3 6
2 4 7
20
5
8
4/
/1
09
9
STEPS
1 DELINEATED IN WHITE
Required ed
Indicate if Dig-In delineated in white
at
2 USA CALLED Required Indicate if USA was called.
3 WAITED 2 WORKING DAYS Indicate if there was a 2 day waiting period from date USA
er
Required was called.
4 MAINTAINED THE MARKS Indicate if marks at dig-in site were maintained.

en
Required
5 VALID USA TICKET Confirm if information from USA ticket is valid (dates, times,
INFORMATION Required location and work performed).
G
6 HAND DUG WITHIN 2 FEET? Indicate if there was digging by hand within 2 feet of pipe.
Required
F
7 EXPOSED & PROTECTED Indicate if facility was exposed and then protected with a
PD
PG&E FACILITIES? cover.

Required
8 GENERIC ROOT CAUSE Indicate box that best provides description of what happened.
Required
Choose one only
9 EXPLANATION Required if If there is another generic root cause not in list, then provide
“Other” is selected explanation.

Page
25 of 30251
Page
A-1 Form Instructions – Signatures

1
21
1 3
2 2
20
4/
STEPS
/1
1 MAPPING REVIEW BY (LAN Provide LAN ID of person responsible for reviewing
ID/DATE) Required information above and date information was provided
09
(typically a Mapping person).
2 SUPERVISOR REVIEW BY Provide LAN ID of person responsible for reviewing

(LAN ID/DATE) information above and date information was provided
(typically a supervisor)
ed
Required
3 POSTING REQUIRED Indicate if posting required.

at
Required
er
en
G
F
PD

Page
26 of 30252
Page
Locate A-1 Form Information on Mobile Device vs. Paper Form
21
A-FORM A-FORM
20
MANUAL ENTRY MOBILE DEVICE ENTRY
Page 1 - Part B - Incident Description
4/
Page 1 - Part C – Detailed Damage Report
/1
Page 1 - Owner Information
09
GO TO A-1 TAB TO OPEN
Page 1 - Part D: Type of Excavation Method SCREEN TO COMPLETE
PARTS B TO G
Page 1 - Part E: Type of Work Being Performed
Page 1- Part F: USA Markings Visible and Observed at Time of

Dig In
ed
at
Page 1 - Part G: Excavator Provided Information
er
Page 2 - Part H: Gas Lost To Atmosphere
Page 2 - LAN ID Sign Off

en
Page 2 - Part I: USA Mark and Locate Information

G
Page 2 - Marking Information: PG&E locator, weather, timing

of marking, documented on USA ticket COMPLETED BY
SUPERVISOR
Page 2 - Mismark Data: Locator info, Instrument info, signal,
F
FOR SAP INPUT

visibility
PD
Page 2 - Part K: Inspection Only of critical Facilities &

Regulatory. Required Field Meet
Page 2 - Part L: Reason for Dig-In
Page 2 - LAN ID: Sign off

Page 253
Gas Incident Dig-in Report Addendum (A-Form)
21
20
4/
/1
09
What’s Changed in the A 1-Form?
ed
RED OUTLINE BOXES INDICATES NEW ITEM
at
er
en

G
F
PD

Page 254
Gas Incident Dig-in Report Addendum (A-1 Form)
21
There have only been minor changes to A-1 Form. New fields are
highlighted in red.
20
4/
/1
There are now
checkboxes
09
are require to be
checked to indicate
when an operator is
an External
ed
at Contractor.
er
en
G
F
PD
Page
29 of 30
Page 255
Gas Incident Dig-in Report Addendum (A-1 Form)
21
There have only been minor changes to A-1 Form.
New fields are
highlighted in red.
20
4/
/1
09
There are now
checkboxes
throughout the form
ed
that are required to be
checked to indicate
when an operator is
an external contractor.
at
er
en
G
F
PD
Page
Page 256
p257
Pipe Inspection Form Job Aid Rev. 1a
Guidance Document References: Level of Use:

 Utility Procedure TD-5100P-01, “Leak Repair and Pipe Inspection Information
Documentation”
Reference
 Form TD-5100P-01-F03, “Pipe Inspection Form”
Continuous
21
20
Note: Complete a separate form when there is any attribute change for exposed facilities within the same excavation
location (e.g., line number, line size, line material).
Use Ctrl+click on a reference in the table of contents or the list of figures to directly move to it.
4/
Table of Contents
/1
Project Information...............................2 Line Material.......................................4 Inspection - Plastic Pipe Condition.....9
Order Number ....................................2 Long Seam Visible? ...........................4 Pipe Exposure ....................................9
09
Asset Type .........................................2 Coating Type ......................................5 Line Size.............................................9
Station Name......................................2 Coating Condition...............................5 Feet Exposed .....................................9
Location Description...........................2 Coating Damaged? ............................5 Cover over Pipe (in.) ..........................9
House/Bldg #......................................2 Coating Removed?.............................5 Installed Job # ....................................9
ed
Street Name .......................................2 Coating Repaired? .............................5 Line Type............................................9
City .....................................................2 Cathodic Protection ............................6 Line Material.......................................9
Latitude...............................................2 Pipe-To-Soil (mV)...............................6 Printline Legible?..............................10
Longitude............................................2 Casing-To-Soil (mV)...........................6 SDR..................................................10
at
Division...............................................2 Notification No. ...................................6 Manufacturer ....................................10

Inspection Date ..................................2 AOC Present? ....................................6 Manufacturer Date............................10
Notification No. ...................................7
er
Inspector Name ..................................3 Locating Wire Size ...........................10

Inspector ID ........................................3 External Corrosion Present? ..............7 Gouging?..........................................10
Reason For Inspection .........................3 Measurement Required per PLE?......7 Under Stress/Bent? ..........................10
en
Excavation Condition ...........................3 Corrosion............................................7 Tee Cap Present? ............................10

Surface Over ......................................3 Pitting .................................................7 Tee Cap Cracking? ..........................10
Soil Type ............................................3 Gouging..............................................7 Pipe Cracking? .................................10
Paved Wall-To-Wall............................3 Dent Depth (in.) ..................................8 Wire Condition..................................10
G
Pit Depth (in.) .....................................8 Wire Repaired? ................................10

Inspection - Metallic Pipe Condition ...4
Gouge Depth (in)................................8 EMS Marker Installed? .....................10
Pipe Exposure ....................................4
Gouge Length (in.) .............................8 Supplemental Information .................11
Feet Exposed .....................................4
F
Corrosion Length (in.).........................8 Comments ........................................11

Cover over Pipe (in.) ..........................4
Wall Thickness (in.) ............................8 Attachments .....................................11
Line Size.............................................4
PD
Internal surface of pipe visible?..........8 Corrections or Changes ...................11

Line #..................................................4
Internal Corrosion Present? ...............8
Installed Job # ....................................4 Form Reset ..........................................11
Foreign Substance Present?..............8
Line Type............................................4 Reset ................................................11
List of Figures
Figure 1. Metallic Pipe Sample Form……………………………………………………………………………………………………………….12
Figure 2. Plastic Pipe Sample Form..……………………………………………………………………………………………………………….13
Figure 3. Pothole Locations Sample Form……………………………………………………………………………………………...………….14
Figure 4. Excavation Sample Sketch…………………………………………………………………………………………………………...…. 15
Figure 5. Pothole Locations Sample Sketch……………………………………………………………………………………………………….15
© 2018 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved. Page 1 of 1
Page 257
p258
1 5 8 11
2 6 9 12
3 77 10 13
4
21
Project Information
20
1 Order Number Provide project order number (8-digit # associate with project billing i.e.,
41856481, 30954865). If the project has multiple order numbers, provide the
order number that coincides with the excavation location.
4/
2 Asset Type Describe the job’s asset type: Transmission, Distribution, Station, or Dual
Asset.
/1
3 Station Name Provide station name or operating diagram number if inspection is within or
adjacent of a facility fence line, otherwise NA.
09
4 Location Description Provide a detailed description of inspection location.
Transmission: nearest mile point, cross streets, etc.
Distribution: enter “over Tee”, or “over service at curb or main”, reference
ed
existing pipe feature, cross streets, etc.
Station: nearest feature in the station (e.g., 5 ft. north of V-3).
Dual Asset: regulator station number, etc.
at
5 House/Bldg # Provide house or building number closest to excavation location (if available),
otherwise NA.
er
6 Street Name Provide street (name and suffix, such as Avenue, Street, etc.) for the
excavation location.
en
7 City Provide city in which inspection is performed, otherwise NA.

G
8 Latitude
Note: Obtain Surveyor’s coordinates if available
or use handheld GPS enable device (e.g., cell
phone, iPad, Garmin).
F
PD
9 Longitude Transmission asset, as defined in TD-4125P-10, provide latitude and

longitude coordinates in a minimum of 4 decimal degrees.
Distribution asset, if House/Bldg # not available, provide latitude and
longitude coordinates in a minimum of 4 decimal degrees.
10 Division Distribution/Dual Asset: It is required to provide division name for the

inspection location for all distribution projects.
Transmission/Station: If available provide division name. If not available,
enter “Not Available”.
11 Inspection Date Provide month, day, and year (MM/DD/YYYY) inspection was performed.
Page 258
p259
Project Information (continued)

12 Inspector Name Provide name of qualified personnel (e.g., inspector, standby, foreman, field
engineer) who performed the inspection and completed the form.
21
13 Inspector ID Provide LAN ID (PGE) or Employee ID (Contractor) of qualified personnel (e.g.,
inspector, standby, foreman, field engineer) who performed the inspection and
completed the form.
20
1
4/
/1
Reason For Inspection
09
1 Check appropriate box(s) indicating the reason for inspection or check Other and describe. Multiple
boxes can be checked if applicable (e.g., New Business, Other: project D-129 / EC14-021E / Site J).
ed
1
2 3
at
Excavation Condition
er
1 Surface Over Check the box indicating predominate top surface of excavated area or check
Other and describe (e.g., combination of surface: Asphalt / Unsurfaced or gravel
en
driveway).
2 Soil Type Check the box indicating predominate soil type observed in the excavated area
G
or check Other and describe (e.g., combination of soil type: Clay/Sand,

Gravel/Loam or bedrock).
3 Paved Wall-To-Wall Check appropriate box to indicate if pipe is in a paved wall-to-wall area.
F
Wall-to-wall definition, per Utility Procedure TD-4110P-09, “Leak Grading and

PD
Response,” an area is considered to have wall-to-wall pavement when either of

the following conditions exists:
1. There are buildings on both sides of the street with essentially uninterrupted
pavement from the building walls on one side of the street to the building
walls on the other side of the street.
2. A gas main is under continuous pavement from its position to the nearest
buildings and the distance from the gas main to the buildings is less than the
distance to any other areas that allow significant venting.
Page 259
p260
1
2
5
3 6
21
4 7
20
9
10
4/
Inspection - Metallic Pipe Condition
/1
1 Inspection – Metallic Pipe Condition If the inspection is not on metallic pipe, check Not Applicable
09
and proceed to the next section: Inspection – Plastic Pipe
Condition.
2 Pipe Exposure Describe the extent of pipe exposure: Full (e.g.,

circumferentially 360 degree) or Partial e.g., 9 o’clock to 3
ed
o’clock exposure for a pothole).
3 Feet Exposed Provide linear footage of exposed pipe that was inspected.
at
4 Cover over Pipe (in.) Provide measurement in inches from top of pipe to finished
grade.
er
5 Line Size Provide nominal pipe diameter measured in inches for the
inspected pipe (e.g., ¾″, 1″, 12″, 36″).
en
6 Line # Provide the line number for the inspected pipe (e.g., L-401,
DFM-0617-34) or NA if line number does not exist.
G
7 Installed Job # Provide installed job # for inspected pipe. (e.g., PM, GM,
W.O., or MR) if available. This information normally can be
obtained from Plat Maps. If not available, then enter “Not
F
Available.”
PD
8 Line Type Check appropriate box to indicate the inspection is for Main
Line or Service Line.
9 Line Material Check appropriate box indicating pipe material or check Other
and describe the line material.
10 Long Seam Visible? Check appropriate box to indicate if long seam visible. If Yes,
indicate if a photo is attached to the form. Label photo(s) per
instructions on page 11.
Page 260
p261
1
21
2
20
4
5
4/
6
/1
Inspection Metallic Pipe Condition (continued)
09
1 Coating Type Existing coating product on the pipe protecting it from corrosion. Check
appropriate box or check Other and describe the type of coating. For
tape application check single or double wrap.
ed
2 Coating Condition Check appropriate box for pipe existing coating condition:
Excellent Coating Condition: Coating that is well bonded to the

pipe and is equivalent to the new condition.
at
Good Coating Condition: Coating that is bonded to the pipe,

however, may exhibit minor holidays such as cracks, blisters,
er
embedded rocks, or very small amounts of missing coating (e.g.,

due to probing).
en
Fair Coating Condition: Coating that remains well bonded to the

pipe at most locations. There may be more minor flaws and more
missing coating than was found in good coating.
G
Poor Coating Condition: Numerous flaws throughout the inspected

area, including wide cracks or extended zones of missing
coating. Widespread disbondment, extensive moisture under the
F
dis-bonded coating, or an extensive amount of exposed pipe steel

may be present. Any disbondment in a tape coated system shall be
PD
rated as poor.
3 Coating Damaged? Check appropriate box to indicate if existing coating is found to be

damaged.
4 Coating Removed? Check appropriate box to indicate if existing coating was removed.
5 Coating Repaired? Check appropriate box to indicate if coating has been repaired.
6 If coating repaired, explain. If existing coating is repaired, explain the repair and product(s) used
(e.g., applied Protal 7200 and Treton Wax Tape system).
Page 261
p262
1
2 2
3 3
4
5
21
6
7 8
20
9 9
Inspection - Metallic Pipe Condition (continued)
4/
1 Cathodic Protection If cathodic protection reading is not required, check Not Applicable.
Provide clarification in the comment section if needed.
/1
2 Pipe-To-Soil (mV) A Pipe-To-Soil read is required only if bare steel pipe is observed or if
09
coating has been removed. Refer to TD-5100P-01, Section 4.5. Provide
Date clarification in the comment section. Record the Pipe-To-Soil reading.
Provide month, day, and year (MM/DD/YYYY) when reading was taken.
Casing-To-Soil (mV) A Casing-To-Soil read is required only if bare casing is observed or

ed
3
access is available to casing test leads (wires). Refer to TD-5100P-01,
Date Section 4.5.
Record Casing-To-Soil reading. Provide month, day, and year
at
(MM/DD/YYYY) when reading was taken. If casing not present enter NA

for reading. Date does not require an NA and should remain blank.
er
4 Read taken by Name/ID Provide name and LAN ID (PGE) or Employee ID (Contractor) of
operator qualified personnel who took the reading(s).
en
Note: Notification No.

“If low read for Pipe-To-Soil” and/or Abnormal Operating Condition (AOC) observed submit
Other Corrective Work (OCW) ticket in SAP or a CAP notification. It is not required to perform
G
both methods.
5 Notification No. If the Pipe-To-Soil potentials discovered are out of compliance as defined
F
by Utility Standard TD-4181S, “External Corrosion Control of Gas

Facilities,” obtain notification number by performing the following
PD
methods:
 Create Other Corrective Work (OCW) ticket in SAP and record the
notification number on the form. OR
 Submit CAP and record the CAP notification number on the form.
6 AOC Present? Check appropriate box if an AOC is present. Refer to the AOC Job Aid
TD-4110P-03-JA15, “Abnormal Operating Conditions (AOCs) in Leak
Survey,” for necessary steps. If an AOC is not present, check No and
leave the remaining fields blank.
7 Explain If an AOC is identified, explain or describe the condition.
Page 262
p263

8 Notification No. If an AOC is discovered, obtain notification number with the
following methods:
 Create Other Corrective Work (OCW) ticket in SAP and
21
record the notification number on the form. OR
 Submit CAP and record the CAP notification number on
the form.
20
9 Engineer Name / ID If an AOC is identified, the responsible engineer must be
notified. Provide engineer’s name, PG&E (LAN ID) and date of
contact (MM/DD/YYYY).
4/
1
2
/1
2
3
6
09
4
7
5
8
11 9
ed
12 10
Note: External Condition

at
1. The following are designated contacts for each asset:

 Transmission – Pipeline Engineer
 Distribution – Local Distribution Engineer
er
2. If light defect (corrosion, pitting, or gouging) is present, measurement is not required.

3. If heavy defect (corrosion, pitting, or gouging) is present, notify designated contact for further instructions.
4. If corrosion extends beyond exposed excavation, notify designated contact for further instructions.
en
5. Measurements may or may not be required. This is at the discretion of designated contact.
6. If any of steps 6 thru10 are required, all measurements will be performed by designated contact or qualified delegate.
G

1 External Corrosion Present? Check appropriate box if external corrosion is present. If
checked No, each item within this section does not require NA
F
and shall remain blank.

PD
2 Measurement Required per PLE? Check appropriate box if Pipeline Engineer (PLE) confirms that
taking measurement(s) is required. If checked No, each item
PLE ID within this section does not require NA and shall remain blank.
If checked Yes or No provide PLE LAN ID.
Refer to designated contact for each asset per Note 1 above.
3 Corrosion Indicate degree of corrosion observed.
4 Pitting Indicate degree of pitting observed.
5 Gouging Indicate degree of gouging observed.
Page 263
p264

6 Dent Depth (in.) Provide the measured depth of dent on the pipe.
21
7 Pit Depth (in.) Provide the measured depth of pit on the pipe.
8 Gouge Depth (in) Provide the measured depth of gouge on the pipe.
20
9 Gouge Length (in.) Provide the measured length of gouge on the pipe.
4/
10 Corrosion Length (in.) Provide a measured length of the corroded section of pipe.
/1
11 Wall Thickness (in.) Provide the measured Wall Thickness (inches) using Ultrasonic
Thickness (UT) gage (if available) when coating is removed. WT
measurement is required if the location has a welded attachment
09
(Save-A-Valves, Sleeves, Tie-In locations).
12 Explain If clarification needed for items 1 thru 11 provide detail in the

Explain box (e.g., WT – UT gauge not available). If clarification
ed
does not fit in the space provided, add a note to refer to comment
section and provide relevant details in that section.
at
1
2
3
er
4
en
Note: Internal Condition

If the internal surface of pipe is visible and the internal corrosion extends beyond the exposed portion of the
excavation, contact the Pipeline Engineer (PLE). It is at the discretion of the PLE to provide further instructions.
The following are designated contact for each asset:
G
 Transmission – Pipeline Engineer

 Distribution – local Distribution Engineer
F

PD
1 Internal surface of pipe visible? Check the appropriate box if the internal surface of the pipe is
visible. If No is checked, each item within this section does not
require an NA and should remain blank.
2 Internal Corrosion Present? Indicate if corrosion is present. If the Yes box is checked, indicate
the degree of corrosion (i.e., light or heavy).
3 Foreign Substance Present? Indicate if a foreign substance is present. If the Yes box is
checked, indicate if the substance is a solid or liquid.
4 Explain If foreign substance found, explain or describe the substance

(e.g., color, texture, approximate volume).
Page 264
p265
1
2
3
4 5
21
6
7
20
4/
Inspection - Plastic Pipe Condition
/1
1 Inspection - Plastic Pipe Condition If the inspection is not on plastic pipe, check NA and proceed to
09
the previous section: Inspection – Metallic Pipe Condition.
2 Pipe Exposure Describe the extent of pipe exposure: Full (i.e., circumferentially
360º) or Partial (i.e., 9 o’clock to 3 o’clock exposure for a
ed
pothole).
3 Line Size Provide nominal pipe diameter measured in inches for the
inspected pipe (e.g., ¾″, 2″, 6″).
at
4 Feet Exposed Provide linear footage of exposed pipe that was inspected.
er
5 Cover over Pipe (in.) Provide measurement in inches from top of pipe to finished
grade.
en
6 Installed Job # Provide installed job # for inspected pipe. (e.g., PM, GM, W.O.,
MR) if available. This information normally can be obtained from
Plat Maps. If not available, then enter “Not Available.”
G
7 Line Type Check appropriate box to indicate the inspection is for Main Line
or Service Line.
F
8 Line Material Check appropriate box indicating pipe material or check Other
PD
and describe the line material.
Page 265
p266
1 2
6 3
7
4
8
21
5
9 10
11
20
12
13
4/
Inspection - Plastic Pipe Condition (continued)
/1
1 Printline Legible? Check Yes if Printline is legible on pipe. If not legible check No.
Provide SDR (Standard Dimension Ratio) or the Wall Thickness (WT) of
09
2 SDR
plastic pipe installed from the Printline if it is legible, otherwise NA.
3 Manufacturer Provide manufacturer’s company name from Printline if it is legible, otherwise

NA.
ed
4 Manufacturer Date Provide manufacturer’s date (MM/DD/YYYY) from Printline if it is legible,
otherwise NA.
at
5 Locating Wire Size Provide wire size of the locating wire (i.e., 10 gauge or 14 gauge), otherwise
NA (if wire not found in concurrence with Step 11 below).
er
6 Gouging? Check Yes if any gouging is observed on the pipe, otherwise check No.
en
7 Under Stress/Bent? Inspect if the pipe has tensile loading or is bent. Check Yes if the pipe is
under stress/bent, otherwise check No.
G
8 Tee Cap Present? Check Yes if any Tee Cap is present, otherwise check No.
9 Tee Cap Cracking? Check Yes if any cracking is observed on the Tee Cap, otherwise check No.
F
10 Pipe Cracking? Check Yes if any cracking is observed on the body of the pipe, otherwise
PD
check No.
11 Wire Condition
Note: If none is checked for the locating wire, an EMS marker ball must be
installed and shown with dimensions on the attached sketch.
Check appropriate box indicating condition of insulated locating wire or check

None if wire cannot be found.
12 Wire Repaired? If wire condition was checked Poor and wire was repaired, check Yes,
otherwise check No.
13 EMS Marker Installed? Check Yes if EMS marker installed, otherwise check No.
Page 266
p267
1
21
Supplemental Information
20
1 Comments Provide any relevant details or useful information that did not
get captured in the above the sections. If description or
explanation cannot fit in designated boxes in above sections,
4/
provide additional information in comment section.
/1
2 Attachments
Note: Provide detail description of inspection location as
described on Page 2, Step 4. All other assets provide a
09
Note: Label attachments (sketch and/or sketch. Distribution projects do not require a sketch and
photos) with the following it is optional.
information to align with
associated Pipe Inspection Form: Sketch – Provide a sketch of the excavation area and all
1. Project Order Number relevant information. This information should include, but is not
ed
2. Inspector Name / ID limited to the following: street names, line number, mile point,
excavation dimensions, permanent landmark and north arrow
3. Inspection Date
direction, etc. See Figure 4, “Excavation Sample Sketch,” and
at
Figure 5, “Pothole Locations Sample Sketch.”

Photos – Provide relevant photos of the excavation location
er
and its contents. These photos should include, but are not
limited to the following: close up image of long seam, existing
coating condition, external/internal pipe condition, and wire
en
condition, etc.
3 Corrections or Changes To make a correction or change on the form, do the following:

1. Strikethrough original text.
G
2. Enter the corrected information and write LAN ID or

Contractor employee number.
Example: 24” AXTB
F
Do Not use white-out or scratch the original text to make

PD
corrections. If completing the form by hand ensure to write

legibly in blue or black ink OR complete PDF fillable format.
1
Form Reset
1 Reset Click reset button to clear filled out form for new entries.
Page 267
p268
21
20
4/
/1
09
ed
at
er
en
G
F
PD
Figure 1. Metallic Pipe Sample Form
Page 268
p269
21
20
4/
/1
09
ed
at
er
en
G
F
PD
Figure 2. Plastic Pipe Sample Form
Page 269
p270
21
20
4/
/1
09
ed
at
er
en
G
F
PD
Figure 3. Pothole Locations Sample Form
Page 270
p271
Order #: 42135687
Inspector / ID: John Doe / A-000
Target Parking Lot Date: 02/25/2018
L-701 (24”)
21
’ L-702
12 MP 54.23
6’x Lat.: 37.23456
Long.: -121.34567
20
Depth of Cover = 61”
Ski Run Road
N
4/
L-702 (36”)
/1
Hampton Family
09
Main Building
Tree Farm
Vacant Lot (grass)

ed
Figure 4. Excavation Sample Sketch
at
DOC - Depth of Cover Order #: 42135687

er
DOC Inspector / ID: Dave Doe / B-900

PT - Pothole
Crater Lake Rd
Date: 02/27/2018
N
en
Ski Run Road

G
50’ 50’ 50’ 50’

F
PT #1 PT #5
PT #2 PT #3 L-701 (24”) PT #4
PD
2’x2’ 2’x2’ 2’x2’ 2’x2’ 2’x2’

Lat.: 37.23456 Lat.: 37.33456 Lat.: 37.45456 Lat.: 37.54345 Lat.: 37.65345
Long.: -121.23456 Long.: -121.23453 Long.: -121.23346 Long.: -121.23457 Long.: -121.23566
DOC = 52” DOC = 52” DOC = 59” DOC = 60” DOC = 62”
Note: For potholing, location address is acceptable if latitude. and longitude coordinates are not available.
L-702 (36”)
Figure 5. Pothole Locations Sample Sketch
Page 271
p272
FAQ Version: 1
Published: 07/13/2018
Frequently Asked Questions

TD-5100P-01-F03, “Pipe Inspection Form,” Rev. 1a
21
Reference Guidance Documents:
 Utility Procedure TD-5100P-01, “Leak Repair and Pipe Inspection Documentation”
20
 Form TD-5100P-01-F03, “Pipe Inspection Form,” Rev. 1
 Job Aid TD-5100P-01-JA03, “Pipe Inspection Form Job Aid”
4/
This document addresses frequently asked questions in reference to TD-5100P-01, TD-5100P-01-F03,
and TD-5100P-01-JA03 content.
/1
General
09
Q1. The new revision of the Pipe Inspection Form was published 03/21/2018 and is effective
10/01/2018. Can we start using the revised form immediately?
Yes, the timeframe between the publication date and effective date is a transition period for
ed
implementation of the new documents and allows time for the Pacific Gas and Electric Company
(PG&E) academy to update references in the training materials. During the transition period
completing either revision of the form is acceptable.
However, for all construction initiated after October 1, 2018, the new revision (Revision 1) of the
at
procedure and the form must be followed.

If the revised form is published in the middle of a project, it is best to continue with existing form
er
that was used at the start of the project to ensure engineering and inspection requirements are
followed consistently throughout the project.
en
Q2. What are the required Operator Qualifications (OQs) for personnel performing inspection
and completing the Pipe Inspection Form?
 OQ 03-05 – Pipe inspections only (external and internal inspection of buried pipes).
G
 OQ 03-06 – Cathodic protection reads.
Note: The Pipe Inspection Form is for documenting inspection of buried gas main or service
F
(plastic or metallic) only.

The following OQs are not acceptable for belowground inspection and to complete this form:
PD
 OQ 03-04 – Aboveground inspection, including inspection of meter sets and risers.

 OQ 03-13 – Meter set and riser inspections only. This does not include any other material
such as regulator stations or pipe spans.
Note: Refer to PG&E’s OQ Task List for the most up-to-date list of OQs.
Q3. Can multiple inspections be documented on one form?

Yes, only based on the below scenarios:
 Single excavation with steel and plastic pipe material per each section of the form.
 Multiple excavations that include the same pipe material, same attributes, and all the same
inspection information (e.g. potholes and deactivation).
Page 272
p273
TD-5100P-01-F03 FAQ
Version: 1
Q4. If there are four tie-in excavations and the pipe sizes are 2" and 4" in all four excavations, is
the requirement to complete two forms or four forms?
In this scenario, if attributes and conditions do not vary for each size pipe in each excavation, then
complete a total of two forms. Ensure excavation locations are illustrated on a sketch.
If the attributes (aside from the size) and conditions for each pipe is different, then complete a total
21
of four forms.
Q5. Is a sketch required for all other work performed?
20
Yes, all other assets require a sketch (e.g. transmission).
Distribution projects do not require a sketch, unless documenting multiple excavations on one form
(e.g. potholes and deactivation). For distribution, a detailed description of the inspection location
must be entered in the project information section.
4/
Q6. Is there a paper size requirement for the sketch?
/1
For a single excavation, use 8 ½" x 11" size paper. For multiple locations (e.g. potholes or
deactivated pipe), use 11" x17" size paper, if needed, to fit all of the relevant information.
09
Do not use a large size drawing for the sketch (e.g. Issued for Construction (IFC) drawing or to
illustrate the inspection locations), because it will be too large to scan and upload into GIS.
Potholes
ed
Q7. Distribution – when completing one form for multiple potholes and including the sketch, can
the location of the potholes be identified by the address?
at
Yes, on the sketch each pothole location can be identified by either the latitude or longitude
coordinates or the address.
er
The following clarification is added to the TD-5100P-01-JA03, Rev 1a:

Note: For T&D potholing, address is acceptable if Lat. and Long. is not available.
en
Q8. Is there a limit to the number of potholes that can be illustrated on a sketch when the form
is for pipe with same attributes (e.g. 50 pot holes on one drawing)?
No, there is no limit to the number of potholes shown on a sketch per form if there is no change in
G
the pipe attributes. Ensure the locations are properly sketched and all relevant information is legible
and traceable.
Q9. Does each pothole on the sketch need to be dimensioned (depth, length, width)?
F
Yes, the size of the pothole needs to be dimensioned on the sketch to confirm the exposure of the
PD
asset.
Pipe Inspection Form

Q10. Is a new Pipe Inspection Form required if the coating condition, such as cover over pipe,
feet exposed, etc., changes between potholes?
Yes, a new inspection form is required for any attribute change of exposed facility (e.g. line
number, line size, line material, corrosion, pitting, gouging, coating material, etc.) within excavation.
The excavation condition (e.g. surface over, soil type, feet exposed or cover over pipe) may be
noted on the sketch for each location.
Page 273
p274
TD-5100P-01-F03 FAQ
Version: 1
Q11. Are the latitude and longitude coordinates required to be completed in the “Project
Information” section?
For a single excavation location, provide latitude and longitude coordinates in the “Project
Information” section.
For multiple excavation locations (e.g. potholes and pipe deactivation locations) the coordinates or
the address for each location should get captured in the sketch to identify the locations. The
21
“Project Information” section can be left blank.
Q12. If the line is partially exposed and pipe size cannot be determined, is it acceptable to leave
20
the line size entry blank?
No, if pipe size cannot be confirmed, enter NA and in the comment section provide clarification that
the pipe size cannot be determined due to limited exposure.
4/
Q13. For piping inside a station including branches, instrumentation lines, gauge lines, and valve
assembly, such as the bridal systems, blowdown lines, crossties, stubs, etc., that cannot be
/1
classified as either main or service, is it acceptable to leave the options for main or service
unchecked?
Yes, only if the asset is identified as a “station” in the project information section.
09
Q14. If replacing a section of L-109, but a portion of L-132 is exposed in the same excavation that
is not within the scope of construction, is a separate form required for L-132?
Yes, in accordance with TD-5100P-01, Sections 1.2 and 1.3, any exposed portion of buried
ed
pipeline must be inspected and documented.
Q15. If the work is being performed on a 24" diameter, L-109 mainline valve set with 6" diameter
at
blowdown bridle around the valve and a bridle for DFM-0210-01, is one form with a sketch
that illustrates all three lines acceptable?
No, the attributes and conditions for each line will vary, therefore there should be a separate form
er
for each line with associated sketch.
Q16. If an H-form report is provided for the project, is the Pipe Inspection Form required for that
en
same facility?
No, the H-form report will include pipe condition assessment (e.g. external or internal corrosion
condition, coatings, etc.) to meet the requirements in TD-5100P-01. If in doubt, contact the Pipeline
G
Engineer (PLE) to confirm.
Q17. Is any mobile device (cellphone, iPad, etc.) acceptable to obtain latitude and longitude
coordinates?
F
Yes.
PD
Q18. Is there a minimum accuracy (number of decimals) required for latitude and longitude
coordinates?
Yes, a minimum of 4 decimals is required.
This clarification is added to TD-5100P-01-JA03, Rev 1a.
Q19. If work is not performed in front of a house, do we need to provide latitude and longitude for
distribution pipe (e.g. tie-in locations in intersections)? Why is the location description
required if latitude and longitude readings are required?
For distribution, if “House/Bldg #” is not available, provide latitude and longitude coordinates.
The reason the location description is required is to identify the exact inspection location and to
validate the Pipe Inspection Form per the correct location.
Page 274
p275
TD-5100P-01-F03 FAQ
Version: 1
Q20. Inspections can take place on different dates (e.g. external and internal inspection). Which
date should be used?
The “Inspection Date” is the date when the form is completely filled out and can be submitted with
the as-built package. This is the last date when all phases of the inspection are performed.
Q21. What if a contractor performs the inspection and they do not have a LAN ID? Do they print
21
their name and company name?
Third-party contractor (applicant installed) do not inspect PG&E assets and therefore will not
complete pipe inspection form.
20
Second-party contractor inspectors or standby who performs inspection on PG&E assets do have
employee ID.
Q22. Are photos required if the long seam is visible? If the long seam is not visible, are photos
4/
required? Are photos required all the time?
A photo is only required when the long seam is visible. Attach the photo with the form for the
/1
engineer to review and determine the long seam type.
If the long seam is not visible, a photo is not required.
09
Q23. If “fair” or “poor” coating condition is checked, is coating repair required for the section of
pipe that is exposed? Or when exposing the pipe and damage occurs while excavating?
Repair is not required for “as-found” condition.
ed
Coating repair is only required when damage occurs during excavation.
Q24. Is it required to document the Other Corrective Work (OCW) ticket number or CAP number
at
in the “Notification #” field on the form?

Yes, either the CAP notification number or OCW number is required for the form. Both numbers are
not required.
er
Q25. When deactivated steel pipe is reused for casing, is the “Casing-to-Soil” reading required?
en
No.
Q26. Is it the quality control (QC) reviewer’s responsibility to ensure the “Abnormal Operating
Condition (AOC)” section is completed?
G
Yes, if applicable to the project, this section requires validation by QC. The T&D as-built quality
control group must verify the entire form, including this section.
F
Q27. What is the definition of a “heavy” defect? Is there a certain percentage of wall thickness
that can be used?
PD
It is at the discretion of the qualified inspection personnel to determine the extent of the defect and
to consult with the PLE to provide further instructions.
Q28. Why is an inspection of plastic pipe required when exposed?

The plastic pipe inspection is to support the knowledge of system requirements for Distribution
Integrity Management Program (DIMP). It provides insight into the pipe condition and will be used
to validate the type of plastic pipe as we do not consistently capture this information in GIS or job
files.
Q29. If the “Wire Condition” is identified as “poor,” is it required to be repaired?

It is at the discretion of the qualified inspection personnel to decide if the extent of condition
requires repair.
Page 275
p276
TD-5100P-01-F03 FAQ
Version: 1
Q30. When installing an EMS Marker, does the sketch need to meet the requirements in
TD-4461M for drawing a free-hand sketch?
No, the free-hand sketch example in TD-4461M is for as-built red-lines. For the Pipe Inspection
Form, follow sketch instructions and examples provided in the job aid TD-5100P-01-JA03.
When the EMS marker is installed, provide the GPS coordinates for the installed location or
dimensions from a reference point on the sketch.
21
20
Q31. If the “External Corrosion Present?” field is marked “no,” is this because “none” was
selected for “corrosion,” “pitting,” and “gouging?”
Yes. Also, if “No” is checked, then this section may be left blank (does not require NA).
4/
Q32. PLE doesn’t exist on all work streams. If none exist, then who is the point of contact?
/1
The below clarification has been added to Job Aid TD-5100P-01-JA03, Rev 1a.
The following are designated contacts for each asset:
09
 Transmission: Pipeline Engineer
 Distribution: Local Distribution Engineer
Q33. Is the field “Measurement Required per PLE?” only required to be completed if “heavy” is
ed
checked for corrosion, pitting, or gouging per the job aid?
When the defect is “heavy” or when “External Corrosion Present” is checked “yes,” contact PLE
(transmission) or local distribution engineer to determine if measurement is required.
at
Q34. For distribution, is wall thickness measurement required?

er
No.
Q35. Is there a sample form for the distribution steel pipe? If not, should we use the transmission
en
sample form and put NA in the “Line #” field.

The job aid provides a sample form for Metallic Pipe Inspection that can be utilized for both
transmission and distribution. If a field is not applicable for specific asset, then enter NA.
G
F
PD
Page 276
p277

TD-5100P-01, Rev. 1
21
Workflow Revision
20
This revision applies to Form TD-5100P-01-F03, “Pipe Inspection Form.” The pipe inspection form and
job aid have been revised to simplify and update requirements for inspections of buried gas facilities
4/
(mains, valves, and services). The revised form will allow personnel to complete one form for multiple
inspections of the same pipe on one project. This will have substantial cost savings in labor and
/1
archiving documentation.
09
topic?
Revision 1 incorporates the following.
The following will be cancelled or are no longer effective with the publication of revision 1:
ed
 Utility Bulletin TD-5100B-001, “Revised Plastic Pipe Inspection Requirements”
 Variance EDRS 2017-97436 – Inspection Only Form is not required when H-form Report is
at
provided for the same location on a project

 Variance EDRS 2017-107073 – Cathodic Protection requirements
er
The new revision removes fields for sections that are typically filled out as “not applicable”, not field
verified, or are captured on other inspection forms. Not applicable can be checked at the start of a
major section of the form, eliminating the need to write “not applicable” in every field within a section of
en
the form. The revised job aid provides detailed instruction on how to complete the form and when data
is required.
G
Other major changes are listed below. See procedure revision notes for complete list of changes.
 Allow one form for multiple inspections, must meet criteria in procedure.
F
 Changed the form and job aid titles to “Pipe Inspection Form”.
 Removed leak related fields, record or non-verifiable data.
PD
 Added project information to link the form to the appropriate project.

 Simplified from 2-page to a 1-page form.
No changes were made to the tech down A-Form (TD-5100P-01-F01, “Leak Repair, Inspection, Gas
Quarterly Incident Report (A-Form),” A-1 Form (TD-5100P-01-F02, “Gas Incident Dig-in Report
Addendum (A-1 Form),” or associated job aids. Updates will be made to these documents, to align with
SAP, in the next major revision.

Page 277
p278

TD-5100P-01, Rev. 1
21
NA
4. Stakeholder Review
20
4/
(or reason if NA)
Guidance Document Document Steward Aziza Tarin 03/08/2018
/1
Guidance Document Document Coordinator Aziza Tarin 03/08/2018
Process Safety Safety Engineer, Principal Sophia Drugan 03/09/2018
09
Enterprise Compliance NA – no support from change management is needed
Quality Management Manager Sara Burke 03/08/2018
Operator Qualification Senior Manager Mike Bradley 03/08/2018
Gas Strategy and Solutions Business System Specialist Stuart Bond 10/31/2017
ed
Regulatory Compliance Manager Susie Richmond 03/08/2018
PG&E Academy Manager Nancy Arroyoavila 03/09/2018
at
Table 2. Target Audience Usability Review

Name
er
Department / Work Center Role Review Date

(or reason if NA)
Transmission and Distribution (T&D)
Director Pierre Bigras 09/12/2017
Construction Management
en
Construction Management Lead Inspector Joseph Poole 09/11/2017

Transmission Integrity Management
Director George Karkazis 09/12/2017
Program (TIMP)
G
Distribution Integrity Management Director, Document

Raymond Thierry 09/12/2017
Program (DIMP) Approver
Gas Integrity Management
F
TIMP King Ng 10/11/2017

(IM) Engineer
PD
TIMP Gas IM Engineer Thien-An Nguyen 09/11/2017

TIMP Gas Technical Specialist Steven Liu 09/11/2017
DIMP Senior Gas Engineer Curt Liljedahl 10/11/2017
DIMP Senior Gas IM Engineer Charles Chang 09/11/2017
DIMP Gas IM Engineer, Expert Derek Kent 10/11/2017
DIMP Senior Gas IM Engineer Ted Tong 09/11/2017
Facility Integrity Management
Contractor Kofi Inkabi 10/11/2017
Program (FIMP)
Asset Knowledge Management Senior Manager Vincent Tanguay 09/12/2017

Page 278
p279

TD-5100P-01, Rev. 1

(or reason if NA)
21
Direct Assessment and Corrosion Senior Manager Bryon Winget 09/12/2017
Direct Assessment and Corrosion Manager Michael Briones 09/11/2017
Corrosion Engineering Supervising Engineer Jason Klechka 10/11/2017
20
Associate Corrosion
Corrosion Engineering Christopher Nguyen 10/11/2017
Engineer
Distribution Superintendent /
4/
Gas T&D Operation Hanibal Shamoeil 09/11/2017
Functional Lean Lead
Senior Gas Transmission
Pipeline Engineering and Design Nicholas Jordan 10/11/2017
/1
Engineer
Quality Control Field
T&D Quality Control Pete Johnson 08/23/2017
Engineer
09
Gas Transmission Mapping and Gas Technical Specialist,
Travis Peterson 08/23/2017
Pipeline Feature List (PFL) Services Expert
TIMP Contractor Eddie Edmondson 10/03/2017
ed
Gas Pipeline Operations & Maintenance Director Kelly Ball 10/31/2017
Maintenance and Contraction (M&C) /
Director Erik Kurtz 02/01/2018
Leak / Corrosion
at
Gas Transmission General Construction

Supervisor Adam Linney 01/31/2018
Inspection
GTGC Field Engineering Superintendent Mary Molina 01/31/2018
er
Guidance Document Gas Engineer, Expert Tuesdai Powers 02/01/2018

Gas Methods and Practices Supervisor Simon van Oosten 02/01/2018
en
Gas Methods and Practices Supervisor Jeannette Lindemann 02/01/2018

Gas Qualification Operations
Gas Qualification Rick Mills 02/28/2018
Specialist
G

Approvers: Aziza Tarin, Tuesdai Powers, Pierre Bigras, Erik Kurtz, Ty Turner, George Karkazis,
F
Raymond Thierry
PD
Cc: Lily Gharib, Mike Seitz, Ross Leverett, Stephen Simon, Nancy Arroyoavila
Cost savings will occur from reduction of labor time to complete the inspection form, allowing one form
to be completed for multiple inspections on the same job reduces time with validating documentation.
Estimated cost savings is roughly $1.4 million per year for T&D and M&C projects.
There are cost impacts of approximately $100k to create the digital version of the new inspection form,
training employees to use the new form (approximately 2500 employees) and updating current
Academy curriculum.

Page 279
p280

TD-5100P-01, Rev. 1
Effective Date: 10/01/2018, approximately six months between publish and effective date to
communicate to all impacted groups, see Implementation plan below. The procedure and new form
21
may be used as soon as published. All of the target audience is required to follow the new
documentation by the effective date.
20
Implementation Responsibilities:
Standards Engineering Document Communication: Document contact will email communication to the
target audience upon publication.
4/
Gas T&D Construction Management (CM) Conference Call: Pierre Bigras, Gas T&D CM Director, will
/1
communicate to Construction Management personnel: inspectors, alliance contractors, construction
managers, and standby.
09
General Construction (GC) Gas Transmission Conference Call: Ben Campbell, GC Gas Transmission
Director, will communicate to GCGT construction personnel: Superintendents, Supervisors, Foremen,
Field Engineers, Field Engineering Technicians, and Standby.
ed
GC Gas Distribution Conference Call: Michael Seitz, Director GC Gas Distribution (North) and Ross
Leverett, Director GC Gas Distribution (GD) (South), will communicate to GCGD construction
personnel: Superintendents, Supervisors, Foremen, Field Engineers, Field Engineering Technicians,
and Standby.
at
Gas T&D Operations M&C Conference Call: Ty Turner, Director GC M&C (North) and Erik Kurtz,
er
Director GC M&C (South), will communicate to M&C construction personnel: Superintendents,

Supervisors, inspectors, corrosion mechanics, and Standby.
en
Gas T&D Construction Records QC / Field QC Conference Call: Steve Simon, Manager, will
communicate to QC Field Engineers, QC Specialists, and Contractor QC Specialists.

G
F
PD

Page 280
p281

TD-5100P-01, Rev. 1b
21
Impact ☐ Only Updates Material Codes or Document References (sections 1–5 only)
☒ Includes Any Other Changes (complete all sections)
20
4/
On October 1, 2019, the Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration (PHMSA) issued a
significant revision to the Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) Title 49, Transportation, Part 192—
Transportation of Natural and Other Gas by Pipeline: Minimum Federal Safety Standards. Referred to
/1
in the industry as the Transmission Mega Rule (Part 1), the revision affected the following sections:
 §192.227, “Qualification of welders and welding operators”
09
“For steel transmission pipe installed after July 1, 2021, records demonstrating each individual
welder qualification at the time of construction in accordance with this section must be retained for
a minimum of 5 years following construction.”
ed
 §192.285, “Plastic pipe: Qualifying persons to make joints”
“For transmission pipe installed after July 1, 2021, records demonstrating each person's plastic
at
pipe joining qualifications at the time of construction in accordance with this section must be
retained for a minimum of 5 years following construction.”
er
This minor revision satisfies the mandates listed above, enabling personnel to use Form TD-5100P-01-
F01, “Leak Repair, Inspection, Gas Quarterly Incident Report (A-Form),” as a means to document that
welding and plastic pipe connections were performed by qualified personnel.
en
Also, in the Pipe Condition section, the Soil Resistivity subsection was removed because the data is
already being captured in the H-Form provided with the as-built records. There are no requirements in
49 CFR 192 mandating soil resistivity to be documented during a leak repair or when pipe is inspected.
G
F

TD-5100P-01-F01  Remove the Soil Resistivity subsection from the Pipe Condition section.
PD
 Add connection type selections in the Pressure Test #1 and Pressure Test #2
subsections to confirm that the person performing the pipe connection task
holds the appropriate operational qualifications.
TD-5100P-01-JA01  Remove the Soil Resistivity instruction, and update the screen capture.
 Add instructions for connection type selections, and update the screen capture.

Page 281
p282

TD-5100P-01, Rev. 1b
21
NA
4. Stakeholders
20
Department / Title Date Gave
Name
Work Center (and Role if applicable) Provided Input?
4/
Expert Gas Engineer,
Document Steward, Aziza Tarin 05/2021 Yes
/1
Document Coordinator
Principal, Lead Engineer Tuesdai Powers 06/20021 Yes
09
Distribution Integrity
Management Program Director, Document Approver Mike Kerans 05/2021 Yes
(DIMP)
Transmission Integrity
ed
Management Program Supervisor King Ng 03/2021 Yes
(TIMP) Risk
DIMP Risk Expert IM Engineer Charles Chang 03/2021 Yes
at
Work Management Expert Business System

Stuart Bond 05/2021 Yes
Solution (WMS) Specialist
Maintenance and
Supervisor Shawn Oliviera 03/2021 Yes
er
Construction (M&C)
M&C Principal Program Manager Dan Jarmel 03/2021 Yes
en
System Analysis
Program (SAP) Work Senior, Information Technology
Management, Enterprise (IT) Enterprise Resource
Murali Mallangi 03/2021 Yes
Portfolio and Project Planning (ERP) Functional
G
Management (EPPM), Analyst

and Legal
SAP Work Contractor, Enterprise Asset
F
Management, EPPM, Management (EAM) Functional Jeevanandham Kaliappan 03/2021 Yes

and Legal Analyst
PD

Approvers: Mike Kerans, Ty Turner, Tuesdai Powers, Aziza Tarin, Bryon Winget
6. Cost Information
NA

Page 282
p283

TD-5100P-01, Rev. 1b
21
Effective Date: July 1, 2021, to ensure compliance with Transmission Mega Rule (Part 1).
20
The updates are incorporated in the Mobile Asset Inspection application provided by the Digital
Catalyst team and in SAP to align with the tech-down (hard-copy) version of the form. The release
4/
date for the Digital Catalyst and SAP updates is June 19, 2021.
This procedure will be listed in the Standards Engineering “Gas Guidance Document Change
/1
Notification” for the month of June, sent via email.
The document owner or contact will communicate the updates to target audiences during the following
09
meetings:
 Quarterly general construction train-the-trainers meeting, which focuses on gas distribution
 Quarterly M&C train-the-trainers meeting

ed
Leaders of the affected audience in gas operations (e.g., construction, inspection, and field
engineering) will communicate to their teams the updates to Form TD-5100P-01-F01.
at
8. Cancellations
NA
er

en
G
F
PD

Page 283
p284

TD-5100P-01, Rev. 1b

21
20
4/
Management
/1
Distribution)
09
ed
Engineering
and Distribution)
at
Distribution)

er
Management

en

G
Process
F
PD
Specifications

Examination (NDE)

Page 284
p285
Repair Method Selection for Steel Distribution Pipeline
SUMMARY
21
This utility procedure provides criteria for assessing damage levels and repair options for
Pacific Gas and Electric Company (PG&E or Company) steel distribution pipelines and related
facilities with a maximum allowable operating pressure (MAOP) less than or equal to
60 pounds per square inch gauge (psig).
20
4/
TARGET AUDIENCE
Gas engineering, estimating, construction, maintenance, and inspection personnel involved in
/1
determining proper repair methods for steel gas distribution pipeline facilities.
SAFETY
09
Compliance with this procedure ensures that damaged pipelines are correctly repaired
avoiding the likelihood of high consequence events involving loss of gas containment.
BEFORE YOU START

ed
Personnel are responsible for performing only the tasks for which they are trained,
knowledgeable, and qualified.
at
When performing repairs on operating gas piping, ensure appropriate gas clearance and
lock-out tag-out (LOTO) procedures are followed for safe control of energy sources.
er
TABLE OF CONTENTS
en
1 General Information for Repair of Steel Gas Pipelines ...................................... 2

2 Defect Assessment Criteria ............................................................................... 2
G
3 Work Procedures and Design Requirements for Allowable Repair Methods ...... 3
4 Corrosion Control .............................................................................................. 6
F
5 Records............................................................................................................. 6
PD
Appendix A, Non-leaking Corrosion in Body of Pipe or Fitting ............................................ 11

Appendix B, Leaking Corrosion or Mechanical Damage in Body of Pipe or Fitting ............. 12
Appendix C, Non-leaking Cracks or Defects in Welds ........................................................ 13
Appendix D, Leaking Weld Defects .................................................................................... 14
Appendix E, Leaks in Body of Mechanical Fittings or in Clamps ........................................ 15
Appendix F, Non-leaking Mechanical Damage .................................................................. 16
Appendix G, Leaks at Steel or Iron Pipe Threads in Existing Below Ground Piping ........... 17
Appendix H, Leaks at Steel or Iron Pipe Threads in Regulator Stations and Station Piping 20
Appendix I, Leaks at Steel or Iron Pipe Threads at Gas Service Risers and Meters .......... 21
Page 285
p286
21
PROCEDURE STEPS
1 General Information for Repair of Steel Gas Pipelines
20
1.1 Make permanent repairs to the Company’s steel gas distribution pipelines according to the
assessment and method selection criteria listed in this procedure.
4/
 To obtain a waiver to the methods prescribed in this procedure, submit proposal along
with engineering tests and analysis that demonstrate the method will permanently
restore the serviceability of the pipeline per Utility ProcedureTD-4001P-07, “Gas
/1
Guidance Document Variance Process.”
09
1.2 Make repairs when the extent of the defect exceeds that allowed by the appropriate
assessment criteria in the repair selection appendices OR replace the defective section of
piping with a new section of piping.
ed
1.3 Make repairs in accordance with all safe working procedures for the respective conditions.
2 Defect Assessment Criteria

at
2.1 Collect the following information to properly assess the defect:
1. Pipe wall thickness.

er
2. Depth of wall loss or depth of dent.

en
3. Location of defect or leak.
4. Whether cause of metal loss defect is corrosion or mechanical damage.

G
5. Whether the defect is leaking.

F
6. Whether the defect is a crack.

PD
 IF the defect is a crack,
THEN determine if the crack is in a weld or a weld heat affected zone.
2.2 Refer to the appendices of this procedure for defect acceptance criteria and respective repair
methods, provided categorically by defect type. To use this procedure for repair method
selection, refer to the appropriate repair table AND select a suitable repair method from the
options provided.
Page 286
p287
21
1. For leaks and defects in pipeline components and welds, refer to the following tables
listed as Appendices A through F of this procedure:
 Appendix A, “Non-leaking Corrosion in Body of Pipe or Fitting”
20
 Appendix B, “Leaking Corrosion or Mechanical Damage in Body of Pipe or
Fitting”
4/
 Appendix C, “Non-leaking Cracks or Defects in Welds”
/1
 Appendix D, “Leaking Weld Defects”
09
 Appendix E, “Leaks in Body of Fittings or in Clamps”
 Appendix F, “Non-leaking Mechanical Damage”

ed
2. For leaks on steel or iron pipe threads, refer to the following tables listed as
Appendices G through I of this procedure:
 Appendix G, “Leaks at Steel or Iron Pipe Threads in Existing Piping”

at
 Appendix H, “Leaks at Steel or Iron Pipe Threads in Regulator Stations and

er
Station Piping”
 Appendix I, “Leaks at Steel or Iron Pipe Threads at Gas Service Risers and
en
Meters”
3 Work Procedures and Design Requirements for Allowable Repair Methods

G
3.1 Evaluate and repair corrosion or mechanical damage defects in a Double Submerged Arc
Weld (DSAW), seam weld, or heat-affected zone (HAZ) following the same procedures as
those applicable to a defect on pipe base metal.
F
3.2 Design and install pressure-retaining full encirclement (Type B) sleeves in accordance with
PD
one of the following:
 Gas Design Standard (GDS) A-60, “Gas Main Welding Sleeves (Type B Sleeves with
Circumferential Welds)”
 GDS A-60.1, “Dresser Style 110 Sleeve”
 GDS A-60.3, “Dresser Style 220 Sleeve”
3.3 Design and install pressure-containing cans in accordance with GDS A-63, “Gas Main
Repair Can.”
Page 287
p288
3.4 Design and install composite wraps in accordance with the following:
21
 Perform Trident-Seal® repairs per Utility Procedure TD-4820P-11, “Trident-Seal® Gas
Leak Repair.”
 Design and install other approved composite wraps, such as Clock Spring or Diamond
20
Wrap® by ClockSpring-NRI and Armor Plate® by Armor Plate Inc., in accordance with
Company guidance and the manufacturer’s most recent approved installation
procedure. Installers of such products must hold proper qualifications before applying
4/
system to PG&E piping.
/1
CAUTION
09
Mechanical leak repair clamps must not be installed on plastic pipe. Use of clamps
for plastic repair is prohibited by federal code.
3.5 Design and install mechanical clamps in accordance with one of the following:
ed
 GDS B-53, “Skinner Leak Repair Clamps”
 GDS B-53.1, “Repair Clamps”

at
 GDS B-53.2, “High Pressure Clamps”

er
3.6 Individual gas pipe corrosion pits (leaking or non-leaking) may be repaired using a 2 in.
maximum tap fitting such as Mueller Save-A-Valve nipple, Bonny Forge thredolet, or the
en
equivalent, where the diameter of the defect at the surface of the pipe is less than the inside
diameter of the fitting used for repair. Follow GDS A-51, “Cold Tap Branch Connection
Requirements,” or GDS B-23, “Weldolets, Thredolets, and Sockolets,” for installation
procedures.
G
Design and install Save-A-Valve nipples in accordance with the following:
 Save-A-Valve nipples must be installed only within the top quadrant of the pipe (within
F
45° of top-dead-center).
PD
 Save-A-Valve nipples pre-assembled and pre-tapped onto sleeves or mechanical

clamps are not limited in installation orientation and must be aligned with the leak to
control venting gas during the installation of the sleeve, can, or clamp.
 Before installing a Save-A-Valve nipple, ensure the position, orientation, and site
conditions allow conventional operation of tapping equipment in accordance with
Company guidance.
 Save-A-Valve nipples installed over a leaking defect that will not be tapped are not
limited in installation orientation.
3.7 Design and install repair patches per GDS A-64, “Gas Line Patches and Half Soles.”
Page 288
p289
NOTE
21
All welding must be completed by a qualified welder in accordance with a Company
approved repair welding procedure specification.
20
3.8 Conduct repair welding in accordance with the following requirements:
1. Depressurize piping for grinding and fill welding. Follow safe hot working practices if
working on a leak or other repair that removes the weld root.
4/
2. Weld grinding should remove metal in accordance with weld procedure joint design
/1
down to sound metal. See Section 3.9 for information on grinding.
3. IF a crack is discovered in the root or hot pass while grinding,
09
4. THEN discontinue weld repair technique and replace segment of pipe or use other
leaking weld defect repair option per Appendix D.
ed
5. Verify removal of defect.
6. Minimum weld repair length is half the circumference of the weld length or 2 in.,
whichever is less.
at
7. Contour repair weld as close as possible to the original weld profile.

er
8. Complete weld inspections and documentation in accordance with Utility Procedure

TD-4160P-62, “Distribution Weld Inspection.”
en
3.9 IF grinding and/or buffering is being done as a repair, or as an intermediate step in conjunction
with another repair,
G
THEN repair must be performed in accordance with the following steps:
1. Prior to grinding out defects, model the profile of the proposed volumetric wall loss due
F
to the planned grinding, as shown in Figure 1. Model the profile with a smooth contour
slightly deeper than the measured depth of the defect.
PD
Figure 1. Modeled Profile of a Grind Plan
Page 289
p290
21
2. Use a flexible sanding disc, flap disc, or flap wheel with a 60-grit or finer abrasive
appropriate for the amount of material to be removed on the initial pass. Limit use of a
rigid grinding wheel due to the potential to remove excess material, create heat
discoloration, create residual stress, and alter the surface microstructure.
20
 Grinding alone is permitted to a depth of 50% of the nominal material thickness.
4/
 Grinding deeper than 50% up to 80% of the nominal material thickness requires
an additional repair means to be used (e.g., a leak clamp, composite wrap, or
sleeve).
/1
 Grinding deeper than 80% of the nominal material thickness requires an
09
additional pressure rated repair means to be used (e.g., a leak clamp, or
welded sleeve), or the piping should be cut out and replaced.
 For mechanical damage repaired by grinding, use non-destructive examination

(NDE) to confirm removal of any cracking extending from the bottom of the
ed
damage or repair grind area with an additional repair means (e.g., a leak clamp,
composite wrap, or sleeve).
Replace pipe per GDS A-34, “Piping Design and Test Requirements” and GDS A-36 “Design
at
3.10
and Construction Requirements Gas Lines and Related Facilities.”
er
4 Corrosion Control
4.1 Protect each metallic repair against external corrosion, in accordance with Company
en
procedures, as follows:
 Repair must have an approved external protective coating.

G
Repair must be cathodically protected within one year after completion of construction.
5 Records
F
5.1 PG&E must record the date, location, and description of each repair made to pipe and retain
for as long as the pipe remains in service, in accordance with Utility Procedure TD-5100P-01,
PD
“Leak Repair and Pipe Inspection (A-Form) Documentation.”
1. Use Form TD-5001P-01-F01, “Leak Repair, Inspection, Gas Quarterly Incident Report
(A-Form)” to collect this data.
2. For instructions on filling out TD-5001P-01-F01, see Job Aid TD-5001P-01-JA01, “Leak
Repair, Inspection, Gas Quarterly Incident Report (A-Form) Job Aid.”
5.2 Retain records per the record retention schedule.
END of Instructions
Page 290
p291
DEFINITIONS
21
Corrosion: Destructive attack on metal by reaction with the environment.
Dent: A depression in the pipe wall that produces a gross disturbance in the pipe wall’s
20
curvature. Measure the depth of a dent from the lowest point of the dent to the point where the
original contour of the pipe lay before it was dented. The percentage of distortion is defined as
the ratio of the depth of the dent to the actual diameter of the pipe multiplied by 100.
4/
Longitudinal Seam: The weld used to join the plate edges to form pipe manufactured from
plate.
/1
Mechanical Damage: Damage to the pipe surface caused by external forces including
features such as creasing of the pipe wall, gouges, scrapes, smeared metal, arc burns, and
09
metal loss not due to corrosion. Cracking may or may not be present. Dents may or may not
be apparent.
Temporary Measure: Repair techniques that are allowable when a permanent repair is not
ed
feasible at the time the defect is discovered. These repairs must be replaced with permanent
repairs as soon as feasible.
Full Encirclement (Type B) Sleeve: A repair sleeve designed so that welding of the sleeve-
at
ends to the carrier pipe is required. Type B sleeves are capable of containing pressure and
carrying longitudinal stresses, which may be imposed by lateral loads.
er
en
Gas transmission and distribution (T&D) maintenance and construction directors, managers,
superintendents, and supervisors ensure that personnel are trained on and comply with the
requirements of this procedure.
G
Gas T&D construction directors, managers, superintendents, and supervisors ensure that
personnel are trained on and comply with the requirements of this procedure
F
GOVERNING DOCUMENT
PD
Utility Standard TD-4810S, “Steel Pipeline Repair”
COMPLIANCE REQUIREMENT/REGULATORY COMMITMENT

Natural and Other Gas by Pipeline: Minimum Federal Safety Standards, Section (§) 192.309,
“Repair of steel pipe.”

“Remedial measures: General.”
Page 291
p292
Compliance Requirement/Regulatory Commitment (continued)
21
“Remedial measures: Distribution lines other than cast iron or ductile iron lines.”
20
“General.”
4/
/1
“Distribution Systems: Leak Repair.”
REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
09
American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) B-31.8-2010, Gas Transmission and

ed
Distribution Piping Systems, ASME Code for Pressure Piping
at
Gas Design Standard (GDS) A-34, “Piping Design and Test Requirements”
GDS A-36, “Design and Construction Requirements Gas Lines and Related Facilities”
er
GDS A-51, “Cold Tap Branch Connection Requirements”

en
GDS A-60, “Gas Main Welding Sleeves (Type B Sleeves with Circumferential Welds)”
GDS A-60.1, “Dresser Style 110 Sleeve”

G
GDS A-60.3, “Dresser Style 220 Sleeve”
GDS A-63, “Gas Main Repair Can”

F
GDS A-64, “Gas Line Patches and Half Soles”

PD
GDS B-23, “Weldolets, Thredolets, and Sockolets”
GDS B-53, “Skinner Leak Repair Clamps”
GDS B-53.1, “Repair Clamps”
GDS B-53.2, “High Pressure Clamps”
Utility Bulletin TD-A-63B-001, “Gas Branch Repair Cans”
Utility Procedure TD-4120P-62, “Distribution Weld Inspection”
Utility Procedure TD-4820P-11, “Trident-Seal® Gas Leak Repair”
Page 292
p293
APPENDICES
21
Appendix A, “Non-leaking Corrosion in Body of Pipe or Fitting”
Appendix B, “Leaking Corrosion or Mechanical Damage in Body of Pipe or Fitting”
20
Appendix C, “Non-leaking Cracks or Defects in Welds”
Appendix D, “Leaking Weld Defects”
4/
Appendix E, “Leaks in Body of Fittings or in Clamps”
/1
Appendix F, “Non-leaking Mechanical Damage”
09
Appendix G, “Leaks at Steel or Iron Pipe Threads in Existing Piping”
Appendix H, “Leaks at Steel or Iron Pipe Threads in Regulator Stations and Station Piping”
Appendix I, “Leaks at Steel or Iron Pipe Threads at Gas Service Risers & Meters”
ed
ATTACHMENTS
at
NA
DOCUMENT RECISION
er
NA
en
DOCUMENT APPROVER
Erik Kurtz, Director, Gas T&D Ops Maintenance & Construction

G
DOCUMENT OWNER
Jerrod Meier, Principal Gas Engineer, Guidance Documents & Engineering Support
F
DOCUMENT CONTACT
PD
Jerrod Meier, Principal Gas Engineer, Guidance Documents & Engineering Support
Payam Shekari, Gas Engineer, Expert
Page 293
p294
REVISION NOTES
21
Revision 0b
Step 3.4 Updated composite wrap and manufacturer information.
20
Step 3.5 Added preceding Caution about clamps on plastic pipe.
Step 3.6 Replaced reference to A-53 with A-51.
4/
Compliance Requirement Added 49 CFR §192.720.
/ Regulatory Commitment
Appendix B Added “Mechanical Damage” to “Extent of Defect” column.
/1
Appendix I  Removed qualifier “(Leak found on air pressure test)” from “Extent of
Defect” entry “Inlet Threads at New Gas Service Riser Valves.”
09
 In fourth bullet of “Permissible Methods of Repair” for that entry,
added clarification “If leak resulted from a material problem.”
Revision 0a (Publication Date: 12/19/2018 Effective Date 03/19/2019)
ed
Step 3.6 Added “Save-A-Valve nipples installed over a leaking defect that will not
be tapped are not limited in installation orientation.”
Appendix A Replaced “Top Quadrant of the Pipe” with “Save-A-Valves Limited to the
at
Top Quadrant of the Pipe and Must Get Tapped.”

Appendix B Added table notes:
“1. Limitation on fitting orientation does not apply to non-tapped fittings
er
placed over a leaking defect.

2. It is recommended as a best practice for Save-A-Valves placed on the
top quadrant of a pipe to be tapped.”
en
Appendix C  Replaced “Top Quadrant of the Pipe” with “Save-A-Valves Limited to

the Top Quadrant of the Pipe and Must Get Tapped”
 After “Repair Clamps”, added “Model EM (Short) and PL (Long) listed
G
in GDS B-53.”
Appendix D  Added table notes:
F
“1. Limitation on fitting orientation does not apply to non-tapped

fittings placed over a leaking defect.
PD
2. It is recommended as a best practice for Save-A-Valves placed

on the top quadrant of a pipe to be tapped.”
 After “Repair Clamps”, added “Model EM (Short) and PL (Long) listed
in GDS B-53.”
Appendix F Replaced “Top Quadrant of the Pipe” with “Save-A-Valves Limited to the
Top Quadrant of the Pipe and Must Get Tapped.”
Revision 0 (Publication Date: 06/20/2018 Effective Date: 09/18/2018)
All New document.
Note: This new procedure will cancel direction from Utility Procedure TD-4100P-05, “Selection of
Steel Gas Pipeline Repair Methods” upon publication of the entire TD-4820 document series.
Page 294
p295
Appendix A, Non-leaking Corrosion in Body of Pipe or Fitting

Page 1 of 1
21
Extent of Defect Permissible Methods of Repair Limitations on Methods
(Beyond Standard or Procedure)
20
Depth ≤ 50% of the No Repair Required No Limitations
Pipe Wall Thickness
Patch or Half Sole No Limitations
4/
Full Encirclement Sleeve No Limitations
/1
Pipe Can No Limitations
Tap Nipple 2 in. Maximum Size
Depth > 50%, but < 80%, of
09
Save-A-Valves Limited to the Top
the Pipe Wall Thickness
Quadrant of the Pipe and Must Get Tapped
Leak Clamps No Limitations
Trident Leak Seal No Limitations
ed
Composite Wraps No Limitations
at

Depth ≥ 80% of the
er
Pipe Pall Thickness

Quadrant of the Pipe and Must Get Tapped
en

All Replace Segment of Pipe No Limitations
G
F
PD
Page 295
p296
Appendix B, Leaking Corrosion or Mechanical Damage in Body of Pipe or Fitting

Page 1 of 1
21
20
4/
Leaking Corrosion or
Mechanical Damage Tap Nipple 2 in. Maximum Size
/1
1,2
Top Quadrant of the Pipe
09
1. Limitation on fitting orientation does not apply to non-tapped fittings placed over a leaking defect.
It is recommended as a best practice for Save-A-Valves placed on the top quadrant of a pipe to be tapped.
ed
2.
at
er
en
G
F
PD
Page 296
p297
Appendix C, Non-leaking Cracks or Defects in Welds

Page 1 of 1
21
1
Extent of Defect Permissible Methods of Limitations on Methods
Repair (Beyond Standard or Procedure)
20
Grinding and Fill-Welding Pipe segment must be
depressurized during repair.
Patch or Half Sole Not Permitted for Fillet Weld Repairs
4/

/1
A non-crack-like defect that Pipe Can No Limitations
exceeds 50% wall loss Tap Nipple 2 in. Maximum Size.
 Corrosion that exceeds 50% wall Save-A-Valves limited to the top
09
loss quadrant of the pipe and must get
 An undercut that exceeds 1/32" tapped.
deep Not Permitted for Fillet Weld Repairs
 An undercut Leak Clamps Only the Skinner Leak Repair
≤ 1/32"deep, but > 1/64" deep that
ed
Clamps Model EM (Short) and PL (Long)
exceeds 17% of the total weld listed in GDS B-53 are rated by the
length manufacturer to repair welds.
Not permitted for fillet weld repairs.
at
Composite Wraps Not permitted for wall loss in

er
excess of 80%.
Pipe segment must be depressurized
en
Grinding and Fill-Welding during repair. If the crack penetrates

either the root or the second bead, stop
 A longitudinal seam weld crack grinding and repair with snug fitting
≤ 2 in. long sleeve or replace the pipe segment.
G
 A branch crack Patch or Half Sole Not Permitted for Fillet Weld Repairs
≤ 8% of the weld length
 A circumferential weld crack ≤ 8%
Full Encirclement Sleeve Only Dresser 220 sleeves, per
of the weld length
F
GDS A-60.3, are permitted over

another sleeve or fillet weld(s).
PD

 A longitudinal weld crack > 2 in. Full Encirclement Sleeve Only snug fit Type B in accordance with
long GDS A-60 or A-60.1 are permitted, or
 A branch weld crack > 8% of weld replace the piping.
length Snug fit sleeves are not permitted for
 A circumferential weld crack > 8% fillet weld repairs.
of weld length
 A crack that penetrates either the
root or second bead
1. Any non-leaking crack or defect in a weld less than the extent criteria listed in this table does not require repair.
Page 297
p298
Appendix D, Leaking Weld Defects
21
Page 1 of 1
20
Any Leaking Weld Defect Grinding and Fill-Welding Pipe segment must be
depressurized during repair.
Defect cannot be a crack.
4/
Patch or Half Sole Not Permitted for Fillet Weld Repairs
/1
Full Encirclement Sleeve Only Dresser 220 sleeves, per
GDS A-60.3, are permitted over
another sleeve or fillet weld(s).
09
1,2
Top Quadrant of the Pipe
Not Permitted for Fillet Weld Repairs
ed
Leak Clamps Only the Skinner Leak Repair
Clamps Model EM (Short) and PL
(Long) listed in GDS B-53 are rated
at
by the manufacturer to repair welds.

Not permitted for fillet weld repairs.
er

en
1. Limitation on fitting orientation does not apply to non-tapped fittings placed over a leaking defect.
2. It is recommended as a best practice for Save-A-Valves placed on the top quadrant of a pipe to be tapped.
G
F
PD
Page 298
p299
Appendix E, Leaks in Body of Mechanical Fittings or in Clamps

Page 1 of 1
21
Limitations on Methods (Beyond
Extent of Defect Permissible Methods of Repair
Standard or Procedure)
20
Any leak in the body of an existing Ensure fitting or clamp
Tighten Fitting or Clamp
mechanical fitting or clamp is in good condition.
4/
Replace Fitting or Clamp No Limitations
/1
09
ed
at
er
en
G
F
PD
Page 299
p300
Appendix F, Non-leaking Mechanical Damage

Page 1 of 1
21
20
Dent ≤ 10% distortion No Repair Required No Notches, Scratches, Gouges, or
(or 0.5 in. for 4.5 in. OD Grooves in the Dent
pipe and smaller)
4/
Any dent ≤ 10% distortion Full Encirclement Sleeve The Dent Must Not
(or 0.5 in. for 4.5 in. OD pipe and Prevent Proper Fit Up
/1
smaller) containing notches,
Pipe Can The Dent Must Not
scratches, gouges, grooves, or any
dent > 10% distortion (or 0.5 in. for Prevent Proper Fit Up
09
4 in. OD pipe and smaller)
A notch, scratch, gouge, or groove No Repair Required No Limitations
≤ 10% of the pipe-wall thickness.
A notch, scratch, gouge, or groove Grind Smooth Smooth grind in accordance with
ed
>10%, but ≤ 50% of the pipe wall Section 3.9 of this procedure.
thickness.
at

er

en
Quadrant of the Pipe and must get

tapped
A notch, scratch, gouge, or groove Grind smooth then apply Limited to 80%
> 50% of the pipe wall thickness. Composite Wrap, Leak Clamps, Pipe Wall Thickness Removal
G
or other repair technique

over grind area
F

PD

Quadrant of the Pipe and must get
tapped
All Replace segment of pipe. No Limitations
Page 300
p301
Appendix G, Leaks at Steel or Iron Pipe Threads in Existing Below Ground Piping
Page 1 of 3
21
(Beyond Standard or
20
Procedure)
Method 1
Pressure Control Fittings with  Remove enough pipe coating to expose  Verify threads are not
4/
Completion Plugs AND AND evaluate thread and piping. corroded or damaged.
Threaded Completion Caps  Remove completion cap.  Verify adjacent metal is
 Confirm integrity of completion plug good.
/1
AND make all attempts to seal  Verify Completion Plug is
completion plug, including extraction present and properly
and reinsertion following applicable installed.
09
procedures.  Use appropriate size wrench
 Re-dope completion cap threads. for the size of material being
 Reinstall cap AND tighten. tightened.
 Leak test with soap solution.
ed
Method 2
 Use approved Pressure Control No Limitations
Equipment to stop off service or main.
at
 Replace defective threaded connection.

er
Service Tees with Completion Method 1

Plugs AND Threaded  Verify threads are not
 Remove enough pipe coating to expose
Completion Caps corroded or damaged.
AND evaluate thread and piping.

en
Verify adjacent metal is

 Remove completion cap
good.
 Confirm integrity of completion plug
 Verify Completion Plug is
AND make all attempts to seal
present and properly
completion plug including extraction
G
installed.
and reinsertion following applicable
 Use appropriate size wrench
procedures.
for the size of material being
 Re-dope completion cap threads.
tightened.
F
 Reinstall cap AND tighten

PD
Method 2 No Limitations
 Use approved pressure control
equipment to stop off main
Page 301
p302
21
Page 2 of 3

(Beyond Standard or
20
Procedure)
Method 1
“Homemade” Service Tee  Remove enough pipe coating to expose  Verify two threads minimum
4/
Threaded Completion Caps AND evaluate thread and piping. exposed.
without Completion Plugs  Use back-up wrench AND tighten.  Verify threads are not
/1
corroded or damaged.
 Verify adjacent metal is
good.
09
 Use appropriate size
wrench for the size of
material being tightened.
 One full turn maximum.
ed
 Use approved Pressure Control
Equipment to stop off main.
at

er

Equipment to stop off tee.
 Cut of service.
en
 Abandon tee.
 Install welded Pipe Can over abandoned
tee.
G
 Use approved Pressure Control No Limitations

Threaded Caps on Service Equipment to stop off service or main.
and Main Cut-offs  Remove screw cap.
F
 Install a weld cap.

PD
Page 302
p303
Page 3 of 3
21
(Beyond Standard or
20
Procedure)
Threaded High Pressure Main Method 1 Verify fillet weld area of main is
Fittings  Install Dresser Style 220 or 22S Sleeve in good condition to weld.
over threaded fittings per approved gas
4/
procedures.
 Ensure that an air-gas mixture does not
/1
 develop in the sleeve cavity during
welding.
09
Method 2
 Wrap with Trident Leak Seal.
 Leak test with soap solution. No Limitations
ed
 Use approved pressure control
equipment to stop off main.
at
Method 1 
er
Verify two threads minimum

 Remove enough pipe coating to expose exposed.
Low Pressure Main Threaded AND evaluate thread and piping.  Verify threads are not
Fittings  Isolate from downstream piping.
en
corroded or damaged.
 Utilize back-up wrench AND tighten.  Verify adjacent metal is
 Leak test with soap solution. good.
 Use appropriate size wrench
G
for the size of material being

tightened.
F
Method 2
 Wrap with Trident Leak Seal.
PD
 Leak test with soap solution. No Limitations
Method 3
Equipment to stop off main. No Limitations
 Leak test with soap solution..
Page 303
p304
Appendix H, Leaks at Steel or Iron Pipe Threads in Regulator Stations and Station Piping
Page 1 of 1
21
20
Threaded Fittings and Method 1
Instrument Valves in  Remove enough pipe coating to  Verify two threads minimum
Regulator Stations and expose AND evaluate thread and exposed.

4/
Station Piping piping. Verify threads are not corroded or
 Shut off instrument valve. damaged.
 Isolate from downstream piping.  Verify adjacent metal is good.
/1
 Use back-up wrench AND tighten.  Use appropriate size wrench for
 Leak test with soap solution. the size of material being
tightened.
09
Method 2
 Shut in AND blow down station  Verify threads are not corroded or
ed
 Isolate from downstream piping. damaged.
 Remove fitting AND re-dope threads.  Verify adjacent metal is good.
 Replace with current approved
fittings AND tighten.
at

er
en
G
F
PD
Page 304
p305
Appendix I, Leaks at Steel or Iron Pipe Threads at Gas Service Risers and Meters
Page 1 of 1
21
Limitations on Methods
Extent of Defect Permissible Methods of Repair
20
Method 1
 Remove enough pipe coating to  Verify two threads minimum
expose AND evaluate thread and exposed.
4/
piping.  Verify threads are not corroded
 Shut off riser valve. or damaged.
 Isolate from downstream piping.  Verify adjacent metal is good.
/1
 Use back-up wrench AND tighten.  Use appropriate size wrench for
 Leak test valve AND meter set the size of material being
tightened.
09
assembly with soap solution.
Inlet threads at existing
Gas Service Riser Method 2
Valves  Remove enough pipe coating to  Verify threads are not corroded
ed
expose AND evaluate thread and or damaged.
piping.  Verify adjacent metal is good.
 Shut off riser valve.
 Isolate from downstream piping.
at
 Use Mueller Valve Changer to

remove AND re-dope threads.
 Install new approved valve if
er
necessary.
en
 Remove valve AND re-dope threads.

Inlet threads at New  Install new approved valve.  Verify threads are not corroded
Gas Service Riser  Leak test with soap solution. or damaged.

G
Valves  If leak resulted from a material Verify adjacent metal is good.

problem, initiate MPR report.
 Shut off riser valve.

F
 Isolate from downstream piping.  Verify threads are not corroded

Meter Set Components  Remove fitting AND re-dope threads.
PD
or damaged.
(downstream of riser  Replace with current approved  Verify adjacent metal is good.
valve) fittings AND tighten.
 Leak test valve and meter set
assembly with soap solution.
Page 305
p306

TD-4820P-05, Rev. 0b
21
20
To allow Gas Design Standard (GDS) A-93.1, “Installing and Maintaining a Polyethylene (PE) Gas
Distribution System,” to be removed from Utility Manual TD-4192M, Operations and Maintenance
4/
Manual for Gas Operations.
The prohibition of repair clamp use on plastic is the only federally-mandated plastic repair requirement.
/1
The rest of the guidance in GDS A-93.1 applies to work not in-scope for TD-4192M.
Utility Procedure TD-4820P-05, “Repair Method Selection for Steel Distribution Pipeline,” includes
09
several requirements that place it in-scope for TD-4192M. By adding the prohibition of repair clamp
use on plastic to Utility Procedure TD-4820P-05, it allows GDS A-93.1 to be removed from the O&M
manual.
ed
Minor corrections are also being made to Section 3.4 on composite wrap manufacturers, to Section 3.6
to replace a reference to GDS A-53 (which is being canceled), and to Appendixes B and I to address
comments from stakeholders.
at

er
Step 3.4 Revise second bullet ”…Clock Spring or Diamond Wrap® by ClockSpring-NRI
and Armor Plate® by Armor Plate Inc….”
en
Before Step 3.5 Caution: Mechanical leak repair clamps must not be installed on plastic pipe.
Use of clamps for plastic repair is prohibited by federal code.
Step 3.6 Change reference to GDS A-53 to refer to GDS A-51 instead.
G
COMPLIANCE Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) Title 49, Transportation, Part 192—
REQUIREMENT/REGULATORY Transportation of Natural and Other Gas by Pipeline: Minimum Federal Safety
COMMITMENT Standards, Section (§) 192.720, “Distribution Systems: Leak Repair.”
F
Supplemental References Remove GDS A-53 and add GDS A-51.

PD
Appendix B “Extent of Defect” column add “…or Mechanical Damage”

Appendix I Revise “Inlet threads at New Gas Service Riser Valves (Leak found on air
pressure test)”
Fourth bullet in above row:
If leak resulted from a material problem, initiate MPR report.

Page 306
p307

TD-4820P-05, Rev. 0b
21
NA
4. Stakeholders
20
4/
Standards Engineering Principal Gas Engineer, Document Scott Fannin 09/2020
Steward and Coordinator
/1
Standards Engineering Expert Gas Engineering, Lead Jennifer Lemus 09/2020
Engineer
09
Gas M&C South Director, Document Approver Erik Kurtz 01/2021

ed
Approvers: Scott Fannin, Jennifer Lemus, Erik Kurtz
at
6. Cost Information
NA
er
en
Effective Date: 90 days after publication.
G
Implementation plan is inclusion in the monthly publication email.

F
8. Cancellations
PD
NA
9. Manuals ☐ No Change to Manuals
Document is part of the O&M Manual. Publication of the updated procedure will allow the removal of
GDS A-93.1 from the O&M Manual because TD-4820P-05 will fully resolve distribution leak repair
requirements.

Page 307
p308

TD-4820P-05, Rev. 0b

21
20
4/
Management
/1
09
Distribution)
ed
Engineering
and Distribution)
at

Distribution)
er

Management
en

G
Process
F
PD

Specifications

Examination (NDE)

Page 308
p309

TD-4820P-05, Rev: 0
21
Workflow New
20
Although this is a new document number, this content is the revised gas distribution portion of Utility
4/
Procedure TD-4100P-05, “Selection of Steel Gas Pipeline Repair Methods,” which is being
superseded by multiple TD-4820 series documents. This distribution steel repair methods document
incorporates comments received from the impacted LOBs since the last update of this document in
/1
2013.
09
topic?
ed
NEW.
This utility procedure provides criteria for assessing damage levels and repair options of PG&E’s steel
distribution pipelines and related facilities. The damage assessment instruction is completely new
at
content to this version of the steel repair document. The Work Procedures and Design Requirements
for the allowable repair methods have been heavily updated, as well as the repair selection tables,
er
although the format of the tables was intentionally kept the same (choice of M&C Leadership) to aid in
change acceptance and familiarity.
en
This update incorporates affordability initiatives for leak management associated with WAVE projects
#1330 and #356.
G
This document lists appropriate repair methods for steel distribution pipelines that have been
F
developed in coordination with the Gas Distribution Leak Management process team in an effort to
PD
make this type of work more affordable.

Safety Risks are addressed in the respective repair method procedures, however, a reference to
appropriate gas clearance and lock-out tag-out procedures has been added to the “Before You Start”
section at the request of Gas Process Safety such that in their words, “people should know the
reasons behind just being compliant and they will get motivated for safety if they know that by doing
things right first time will decrease the likelihood of a high consequence event.”

Page 309
p310

TD-4820P-05, Rev: 0
21

(or reason if NA)
20
Gas Guidance Documents Document Steward Jerrod Meier 03/29/2018
Gas Guidance Documents Document Coordinator Jerrod Meier 03/29/2018
Jennifer Lemus &
Gas Guidance Documents Lead Engineer 03/2018
4/
Tuesdai Powers
Gas T&D Maintenance &
Document Approver Erik Kurtz 03/29/2018
Construction
/1
Document Reviewer Tylan Turner 03/29/2018
Construction
09
Document Reviewer (future
Gas Guidance Documents Payam Shekari 03/29/2018
document coordinator)
Process Safety Carlos Rengifo 04/03/2018
Senior
ed
Process Safety Vic Stanciu 04/23/2018
Senior
NA – No QM
at
Quality Management NA associated with NA

document
er
NA – No OQs
Operator Qualification NA associated with NA
document.
en
NA – Not associated
Gas Strategy and Solutions NA NA
with document.
NA – No Regulatory
Regulatory Compliance NA items associated with NA
G
document.
NA – No training
PG&E Academy NA associated with NA
F
document.
PD

Gas T&D
Single Point of Accountability (SPA) Erik Kurtz 03/29/2018
Maintenance & Construction

Reviewer: Payam Shekari
Approvers: Tuesdai Powers, Jennifer Lemus, Jerrod Meier, Tylan Turner, Erik Kurtz
Page 310
p311

TD-4820P-05, Rev: 0
21
The distribution welding changes included in WAVE #1330 were planned to achieve $460,000 annually
after an initial $40,000 investment made in 2017 for added Weld Procedure Specifications (WPS’s).
These practices are already being employed in M&C, so this publication just records the practice
already in place. No further training is expected.
20
Gas distribution WAVE project #356 regarding tool and product improvements for “Make Safe Repair
Actions” planned to achieve an $860,000 annual savings after an initial investment in 2017 of
4/
$150,000 to account for new tooling, training, and on-the-job training.
With the 2017 expenditures behind us, this update looks to achieve the $1.32 million in annual
/1
savings.
Effective Date: 09/18/2018. Additional time provided to tailboard large audience to new document.
09
At least once every calendar year, not to exceed 15 months, to the date
ed
at
er
en
G
F
PD

Page 311
p312
DOCUMENT NAME: Repair Method Selection for Steel Distribution Pipeline
21
20
What is changing?
4/
Utility Procedure TD-4100P-05, “Selection of Steel Gas Pipeline Repair Methods,” has been superseded
by the publication of separate transmission and distribution steel repair method selection documents.
/1
Utility Procedure TD-4820P-05, “Repair Method Selection for Steel Distribution Pipeline,” contains the
new instruction for the steel distribution pipelines and related facilities with a maximum allowable
operating pressure (MAOP) less than or equal to 60 pounds per square inch gauge (psig).
09
The content in the Distribution document is still organized in the familiar style with the selection tables at
the back of the document to help aid the adjustment to the new procedure. Most of the repair methods
remain unchanged; however, there are new allowances, created in 2017, that will make some leaks
ed
easier to address, from expanded allowances of Dresser 220 sleeves and pipe cans, to the incorporation
of the weld procedures for the repair of unknown welds. Also, Trident Seal was re-introduced to PG&E.
Why does it matter?

at
This updated utility procedure was revised to align with changes in the transmission repair techniques,
incorporates new repair choices where previously only pipe removal was permitted (making repairs easier
er
to accomplish), and provides better descriptions of defect acceptance criteria for use in the steel
distribution system.
en
Required Action
Target audience personnel must review and become familiar with the contents of this utility procedure.
G
Supervisors must ensure personnel are tailboarded by 09/18/2018.
Tools and Training

F
GAS-T804, “Repair Selection of Steel Distribution Pipeline”

PD
Timeline
Date Activity
09/18/2018 Tailboard-by date. Log the names of completion into My Learning.

Page 312
p313
Engineering Material Specification: EMS-4762

Publication Date: 05/19/2021 Effective Date: 05/19/2021 Rev. 1c
Specification for Furnishing and Delivery of 1/2 in. CTS through 8 in. IPS
Polyethylene (PE) Ball and Plug Valves
Summary This EMS is the technical specification for ½ inch CTS through 8 inch PE ball
21
and plug valves for any contract procurement process. This specification
covers PE valves for use on PE pipe (IPS) and tubing (CTS) meeting PG&E
(Company) specifications EMS 2502 and EMS 2503. PE valves must meet the
20
requirements of this specification, the current edition of ASME B16.40, and
ASTM D2513-18a.
4/
Target Audience PE valve manufacturers and distributors, procurement personnel, quality
assurance, receiving inspection personnel, and gas engineering.
/1
Table of Contents
09
Subsection Title .................................................................................................... Page
1 PE Valve Qualification.............................................................................. 2
2 General Requirements ............................................................................. 3
ed
3 Material Requirements ............................................................................. 4
4 Workmanship ........................................................................................... 4
at
5 Dimensions and Tolerances ..................................................................... 5

6 Marking Requirements ............................................................................. 6
er
7 Valve Design and Function ...................................................................... 7

8 Quality Control Requirements .................................................................. 7
en
9 Packaging Requirements ......................................................................... 8

10 Shipping Requirements ............................................................................ 8
G
11 Certification .............................................................................................. 8
12 PG&E Product Inspection ........................................................................ 9
13 Records ................................................................................................... 9
F
PD
PG&E Internal ©2021 Pacific Gas & Electric Company. All rights reserved. Page 1 of 14
Page 313
p314

Requirements
21
1 PE Valve Qualification
20
1.1 All product features of the valve must be qualified under this specification and accepted by gas
engineering.
1.2 The manufacturer must furnish to PG&E gas engineering drawings of all valves, tooling, and
4/
accessories supplied under this specification.
/1
1.3 A description for each of the raw materials used in the construction of these valves, as
described in Section 3, must be provided to gas engineering during product qualification.
Once the qualification of these valves is complete, no changes are allowed in construction
09
materials without approval from PG&E gas engineering.
1.4 The manufacturing Quality Control Manual described in Section 8 of this EMS must be
submitted and approved by PG&E gas engineering prior to product acceptance.
ed
1.5 Current detailed installation and maintenance instructions must be provided to the Company
for each valve prior to final product approval.
at
1.6 PE valves must meet all testing requirements of the current edition of ANSI/ASME B16.40 and
ASTM D2513-18a. The Company has the option of performing or requiring additional tests at
er
its discretion.
1.7 Valves provided with pipe extensions (pups) must meet the requirements outlined in
en
Appendix 1 of this specification.
1.8 Gas engineering must receive a full description of the tests and results for the valve
qualifications required by the current edition of ASME B16.40.
G
1.9 Before shipping, the manufacturer must notify the Company in writing, including a revised
engineering drawing, of any changes in its product design. This notification must include, but is
F
not limited to, material and dimensional changes. Failure to comply will be cause to reconsider
Company qualification and acceptance of manufacturer’s valves.
PD
Page 314
p315

21
2.1 The material listed in this Engineering Material Specification (EMS) must comply with the
applicable requirements of Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) Title 49, Transportation, Part
20
192—Transportation of Natural and Other Gas by Pipeline: Minimum Federal Safety
Standards.
2.2 The valves must be designed for use in gas distribution systems in all class locations, at
4/
pressures up to 100 psig, and at temperatures up to 140°F. All PE valves designs must be
capable of operating at 60 psig and 140°F simultaneously.
/1
2.3 Valves are to meet ASTM D2513-18a Hydrostatic Design Basis rating of 1000 psi at 140°F, as
well as other requirements necessary to gain CEC rating per ASTM D2513-18a.
09
2.4 These valves must be designed for use in a belowground environment that includes
installation in a subsurface valve frame and cover.
ed
2.5 PE valves meeting this specification must conform to:
a. 49 CFR 192.53.
at
b. 49 CFR 192.193.
c. ASME B16.40 (current addition).
er
d. ASTM D2513-18a.
en
2.6 PE valves must be designed so that no harmful or hazardous substances will be released from
the valves into the gas and/or ground.
2.7 PE valves must be designed so that oils and other agents and debris commonly found in
G
natural gas pipelines will not adversely affect the product serviceability and operation.
F
PD
Page 315
p316

3 Material Requirements
21
3.1 All materials used in the production of the valve must be qualified under Section 1 of this
specification and ASME B16.40. Changes to valve bodies or any valve component must be
20
submitted and approved by PG&E gas engineering prior to shipment.
3.2 The resins from which the valve bodies are molded must conform to the latest edition of ASTM
3350. The manufacturer must mold valves made from virgin materials listed in Section 3.3.
4/
Rework material is NOT allowed.
/1
3.3 PE valve bodies must be molded from one of the following:
a. Chevron Phillips Chemical, PE2406 (Marlex HHM TR418Q In-Plant Blend
09
Yellow Resin).
b. BP Solvay Polyethylene K38-20-160 Resin.

ed
c. DOW DGDA-2490 BK (black resin)
3.4 The PE valve material must contain suitable antioxidants, as required by ASTM D2513-18a.
at
3.5 Any Non-PE2406 plastic materials used for components must meet the qualification testing
required by ASME B16.40 (current edition) and be suitable for natural gas service.
er
3.6 Molded components, such as retaining clips, collets and washers, must be made from PA-11,
PE, DuPont Delrin 500P Acetal, Ticona Celcon Acetal, or other resin materials approved in
en
writing by Company.
3.7 Gaskets, O-rings, or other non-metallic internal components must be compatible with the
natural gas system. The gasket material must be approved by Company as part of the
G
qualification program in Section 1. No change may be made to the base polymer, rubber
formulation or molding time without notification and acceptance by Company prior to shipment.
F
3.8 Metallic components used in PE valves must comply with CFR 192.144.
PD
3.9 A documentation system to allow traceability of materials must be in place, as described in

ASTM D2513-18a.
4 Workmanship
4.1 PE valve components must be uniform in physical and chemical properties, and free of cracks,
voids, holes, foreign inclusions, areas of un-pigmented polymer (“windows”), or other injurious
defects.
4.2 PE valves must be clean and internally free of paint, dirt, sand, and other debris.
Page 316
p317

5 Dimensions and Tolerances
21
Mechanical-ended valve dimensions must be compatible with the pipe and tubing dimensions
as stated in Table 1 below.
20
Table 1. Dimensions of Polyethylene Pipe
Outside Diameter Wall Thickness
Standard
4/
(Inches) (Inches)
Nominal Pipe
and Tubing Dimension
Tolerance
/1
Size (Inches) Tolerance
Average Minimum (inches)
(Inches) Ratio (SDR)
is -0.0″
09
1/2″ CTS 0.625″ ±0.004 0.090″ +0.006 7.0
1″ CTS 1.125″ ±0.005 0.099″ +0.012 11.5

ed
1-1/4″ IPS 1.660″ ±0.005 0.166″ +0.020 10.0
2″ IPS 2.375″ ±0.006 0.216″ +0.026 11.0

at
3″ IPS 3.500″ ±0.008 0.304″ +0.036 11.5
4″ IPS 4.500″ ±0.009 0.333″ +0.040 13.5

er
4″ IPS 4.500″ ±0.009 0.391″ +0.047 11.5

en
6″ IPS 6.625″ ±0.011 0.576″ +0.069 11.5
6″ IPS 6.625″ ±0.011 0.491″ +0.059 13.5

G
8″ IPS 8.625″ ±0.013 0.639″ +0.077 13.5
10″ IPS 10.750″ ±0.015 0.796″ +0.096 13.5

F
PD
5.1 The dimensions of the valve port on 2-inch and 4-inch IPS PE valves must allow existing
PG&E hot tapping equipment to pass through when the valve is in an open position.
5.2 Butt fusion ended valves must meet the dimensional requirements of pipe and tubing in
accordance with ASTM D2513-18a and ASTM D 3261. Socket fusion ends must meet the
requirements for socket ends as referenced in ASTM D2513-18a and ASTM D 2683. Valves
must fit into existing Company-approved butt fusion equipment and tooling. All ends must be
designed to join to coiled as well as to straight lengths of polyethylene pipe having the
dimensions listed in Table 1 above.
Page 317
p318

6 Marking Requirements
21
6.1 Valves must be permanently marked as required by CFR 192.63 and outlined in ANSI/ASME
B16.40. These requirements include:
20
1. The manufacturer’s name or trademark.
2. The designation ANSI/ASME B16.40.
4/
3. The NVS.
/1
4. The pressure shell material designation code as defined in ASTM D2513-18a and
detailed in Section 6.2.
09
5. DRv.
6. Each molded pressure shell part must be marked with the date it was molded.
ed
7. The markings must include code that enables the manufacturer to determine the date
of manufacture, the location of manufacture, fitting production, and resin lots.
at
6.2 The temperature rating mark must be in accordance with ASTM D2513-18a, which consists of,
at minimum, a three-letter coding (i.e., “CEC”). The first code letter identifies the high
temperature rating and the second code letter identifies the HDB rating at that high
er
temperature rating. The third code letter identifies the melt index. The first code letter must
have a minimum of a “C” rating, which signifies a temperature rating of 140°F. The second
code letter pertaining to the HDB rating must be a minimum of an “E” rating, which signifies an
en
HDB rating of 1000 psi. The third code letter must be “C”, indicating a melt index range of 0.2
to 0.5 grams/10 minutes. Also acceptable is a third letter of “E”, indicating that the
manufacturer affirms that they have verified generic fusion joining in accordance with
G
TR33 PPI, “Generic Butt-Fusion Joining Procedure for Field Joining of Polyethylene Pipe.”
F
PD
Page 318
p319

7 Valve Design and Function
21
7.1 PE valves must be designed such that they are not directional type valves but will seal in
either direction.
20
7.2 PE valves must be designed as required by 49 CFR192.193 so as to protect the plastic
material against excessive torsional or shearing loads when the valve or shutoff is operated,
and from any other secondary stresses that might be exerted through the valve or its
4/
enclosure.
/1
7.3 PE valves must operate in ¼-turn and have mechanical stops provided to show both the open
and closed positions.
09
7.4 PE valves must be sealed from external contaminates and not require externally applied
lubrication to operate. If the stop accidentally breaks, it must function as a 360° valve, and the
stem head must indicate valve open and closed positions.
ed
7.5 PE valves must operate using existing Company-approved PE valve wrenches.
7.6 PE ball and plug valves must not have appreciable pressure drops across the valve under all
open flow conditions. The pressure drop must be acceptable to Company.
at
7.7 PE valves 2 inches and smaller must be supplied with a Company-approved valve support
er
base to prevent the valve from rotating and twisting.
7.8 Product features, tooling, and accessories must be acceptable to Company.

en
8 Quality Control Requirements
8.1 The manufacturer must submit a written quality control procedure incorporating the required
G
quality control testing in ASME B16.40, ASTM D2513-18a, and this EMS.
8.2 Quality control processes must monitor the PE valve inlet and outlet diameter and wall
F
thickness during the production process. Records of the dimensional checks for each lot of
material must be available for review by Company representatives as required by ASTM
PD
D2513-18a A1.1.
8.3 The valve assembler must perform quality control monitoring and inspection of all components
manufactured by others at the level of ISO 9001, as suggested by ASME B16.40 non-
mandatory Attachment A.
8.4 At Company request, the manufacturer must permit access of PG&E, or its agent, to the
manufacturer’s facilities to inspect valve-manufacturing facilities. Access must be permitted at
any time.
Page 319
p320

8.5 The manufacturer must use manufacturing facilities that have been qualified by PG&E. The
21
quality control process must include procedures to ensure that all material used in the
manufacture of PE valves meets the requirements of this specification. No other material may
be substituted without prior approval of PG&E.
20
9 Packaging Requirements
9.1 All packaging, wrapping, and labels for the fittings must conform to the following:
4/
 Be approved by the Company.
/1
 Adequately protect the fittings during shipment and storage.
09
 Be designed to facilitate safe handling during reshipment between stocking and user
locations.
 Cover and protect the fittings from sunlight and adverse weather conditions, including
ed
photochemical smog, rain, dust, wind, and hail.
10 Shipping Requirements
at
10.1 Valves must be adequately sealed and protected during shipment to prevent entrance of
foreign matter and possible damage from rough handling during transit.
er
10.2 The Manufacturer must:

en
 Comply with the terms listed within the purchase order and other material department
agreements.
 Submit a shipping plan detailing shipping quantities and expected arrival times.
G
11 Certification
F
11.1 The manufacturer must certify that the plastic fittings furnished under this specification meet all
specification requirements.
PD
11.2 Manufacturers of valves with extended pups as described in Appendix 1 must provide
certification of maximum pressure testing and the test time for each valve.
11.3 The manufacturer must provide marking or certification showing that the fittings shipped were
manufactured less than 1 year from the date of shipment.
11.4 The Company may request supporting test results for any lot or shipment received.
11.5 Failure to furnish the requested test results can be cause for rejecting the lot or shipment.
Page 320
p321

12 PG&E Product Inspection
21
12.1 The Company may inspect each shipment upon delivery or periodically in field locations.
20
1. A lot may be material covered by a single item on an incoming manifest OR any single
fitting size and run date.
2. IF any lot of material does not meet this specification,
4/
THEN the lot may be rejected.
/1
12.2 The manufacturer is responsible for meeting the requirements of this specification.
09
12.3 Acceptance at the Company receiving inspection does not relieve the manufacturer of
responsibility if a defective product is discovered later.
13 Records
ed
13.1 Retain records per the records retention schedule.
at
END of Requirements
er
en
G
F
PD
Page 321
p322

Abbreviations ANSI: American National Standards Institute
21
ASME: American Society of Mechanical Engineers
20
ASTM: American Society for Testing and Materials
CFR: Code of Federal Regulations
4/
CTS: copper tubing size
DRv designated valve dimension ratio
/1
EMS: Engineering Material Specification
09
HDB: hydrostatic design basis
ID: inside diameter

ed
IPS: iron pipe size
NVS: nominal valve size

at
OD: outside diameter
PE: polyethylene
er
PG&E: Pacific Gas and Electric Company (Company)

en
PPI: Plastics Pipe Institute
SDR: standard dimension ratio

G
UV: ultraviolet
WT: wall thickness

F
PD
Definitions NA
Page 322
p323

Compliance 49 CFR 192.53
21
Requirement/
Regulatory 49 CFR 192.63
Commitment
20
49 CFR 192.144
49 CFR 192.145
4/
49 CFR 192.193
/1
49 CFR 192.283
49 CFR 192.285
09
Information or records generated by this procedure must be managed in

ed
accordance with the Enterprise Records and Information (ERIM) Policy,
Standards and Enterprise Records Retention Schedule (ERRS). Refer to GOV-
7101S, “Enterprise Records and Information Management Standard,” and
related standards. Management of records includes, but is not limited to:
at
• Integrity
er
• Storage
•
en
Retention and Disposition
• Classification and Protection

G
Reference Developmental References:

Documents
ASME B16.40 (current edition) Manually Operated Thermoplastic Gas Shutoffs
F
and Valves in Gas Distribution Systems

PD
ASTM D2513-18a Standard Specifications for Polyethylene (PE) Gas Pressure

Pipe, Tubing and Fittings.
EMS 2502, “Specification for Furnishing and Delivery of Polyethylene (PE)

Plastic Tubing.”
EMS 2503, “Specification for Furnishing and Delivery of Polyethylene (PE)

Plastic Piping.”
TR33 PPI, “Generic Butt-Fusion Joining Procedure for Field Joining of

Polyethylene Pipe.”
Page 323
p324

21
ASTM D3350 (current edition) “Standard Specification for Polyethylene Plastic
Pipe and Fittings Materials.”
20
ASTM D3261 (current edition) “Standard Specification for Butt Heat Fusion
Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Fittings for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe and
Tubing.”
4/
ASTM D2683 (current edition) “Standard Specification for Socket Type
/1
Polyethylene Fittings for Outside Diameter Controlled Polyethylene Pipe and
Tubing.”
09
Appendices APPENDIX 1: Pipe extension requirements and post-production testing for
valves with pups
ed
Attachments Attachment 1, PG&E Approved Valves and Manufacturers
at
Document This EMS supersedes EMS 4762, Rev. 0, issued 04/22/2004.

er
Recision
en
Approved By Matteo Rossi, Supervising Engineer

G
Document Owner Lucas Huezo

F
Document Hamet Diop

PD
Contact
Document contact may change after publication. To find the current document
contact, see the Gas Standards and Procedures Responsibility List.
Revision Notes

Revision 1c
Page 324
p325

Summary Updated ASTM D2513 to ASTM D2513-18a
21
Step 1.6 Updated ASTM D2513 to ASTM D2513-18a
Step 2.5.d Updated ASTM D2513 to ASTM D2513-18a
20
4/
Step 6.1.4 Updated ASTM D2513 to ASTM D2513-18a
/1
09
Reference Documents Updated ASTM D2513 to ASTM D2513-18a
Revision 1b (Publication Date: 01/17/2019 Effective Date: 01/22/2019)
Step 2.1 Replaced content of step with new material.
ed
Revision 1a (Publication Date: 10/10/2013)
Section 13 Added Section 13, Records.
Revision 1
at
Section 1 Added valve qualification requirements.

Section 3 No change can be made to any base polymer or component of the
er
rubber formulation or mold time without prior approval from PG&E.

Updated EMS to include update of references.
en
Changed format using GDI numbering system.

Appendix 1 Added requirements for valve with pipe extensions and post-production
testing required for valves with pipe extensions.
G
F
PD
Page 325
p326

APPENDIX 1: PIPE EXTENSION REQUIREMENTS AND POST-PRODUCTION TESTING FOR
21
VALVES WITH PUPS
1. Requirements for Added Pipe Extensions (Pups)
20
1.1 The pipe or tubing used for pups must be produced by a Pacific Gas and Electric Company
(Company)-approved pipe manufacturer and plant and meet the requirements Company
EMS 2502, Specifications for Furnishing and Delivery of Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Tubing, or
4/
EMS 2503, Specifications for Furnishing and Delivery of Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Piping.
/1
1.2 A representative sample of incoming pipe must be tested by the valve manufacturer to ensure
that the pipe meets the dimensional requirements of Company EMS 2502 or EMS 2503.
09
1.3 Pipe or tubing cannot be more than 2 years old at the time it is fused to the valve ends.
1.4 A label stating the nominal size, sizing system copper tubing size or iron pipe size (CTS or
IPS), standard dimension ratio (SDR), and minimum wall thickness (WT) of the pipe/tubing
ed
must be affixed to the pipe/tubing pup.
1.5 The butt fusion must be made using a written procedure for the butt fusion in accordance with
Plastic Pipe Institute (PPI),TR33,“Generic Butt Fusion Joining Procedure for Field Joining of
at
Polyethylene Pipe.”

er
This written procedure must be qualified using the requirements of 49 CFR 192,
49 CFR 192, Subpart F, and 49 CFR 192.283.
1.6 Only personnel who have been qualified to perform the procedure in accordance with
en
49 CFR 192, 49 CFR 192 Subpart F, and 49 CFR 192.285 may make the butt fusion.
1. Quality control test the butt fusions during production using the test specified for
personnel, qualification specified in 49 CFR 192.285, OR other test approved by the
G
Company.
a. The butt fusion must be tested at the beginning and end of each work shift or
F
product run, whichever is shorter.

PD
b. IF a butt fusion fails testing,
THEN additional testing must be completed to identify any defects in the butt
fusions created since the last successful control test.
2 Post-production Product Test Requirements for Valves with Pups

2.1 Pressure tests defined in B16.40, section 6.2.1 for valves with pups must be performed with
the attached pups, EXCEPT the duration of the test must be 5 minutes.
2.2 IF the valves have been previously pressure tested,
THEN they must be retested as described in 2.1 with the attached pups prior to shipment.
Page 326
Specification for Furnishing and Delivery of ½″ p327
CTS Through 8″ IPS Polyethylene (PE) Ball and Engineering Material Specification:
Plug Valves EMS 4762
Attachment 1 Publication Date: 10/09/2013 Rev. 2
Attachment 1: Pacific Gas and Electric Company (Company) Approved Valves and
Manufacturers
1. Approved Valves:
21
Table 1 – Approved Valves and Manufacturers
Pipe Size SDR End Connection Company Manufacturer Manufacturer’s Part Number
(Inches) Code Number
20
(Valve Type in Parentheses)
½″ CTS 7.0 Mechanical 032474 Elster -Perfection 45051VS with support base (plug)
4/
½″ CTS 7.0 Pipe Pup 032802 Androcano Polyvalve .5-84500.090-VB with support base
(ball)
/1
½″ CTS 7.0 Socket Fusion 032836 Elster-Perfection 45078VS with support base (plug)
1″ CTS
09
11.5 Mechanical 032475 Elster-Perfection 45071VS with support base (plug)
1″ CTS 11.5 Pipe Pups 032812 Androcano Polyvalve 1-84500.099-VB with support base
(ball)
ed
1″ CTS 11.5 Socket Fusion 041540 Elster-Perfection 45010VS with support base (plug)
1-1/4″ IPS 10.0 Pipe Pups 032813 Androcano Polyvalve 1.25-84210-VB with support base
(ball)
at
1-1/4″ IPS 10.0 Socket Fusion 035278 Elster-Perfection 45036VS with support base (plug)
er
2″ IPS 11.0 Fusion 035279 Androcano Polyvalve 2-84111-VB (ball)
2″ IPS 11.0 10″ Pipe Pups 032263 Elster-Perfection 46021VSPGE (ball)

en
3″ IPS 11.0 Fusion 035280 Androcano Polyvalve 3-84111 (ball)
3″ IPS 11.0 12″ Pipe Pups 032262 Elster-Perfection 47014PGE (ball)

G

F

PD
2. Approved Manufacturing Facilities:
Elster-Perfection: Geneva, Ohio

Androcano Polyvalve: Kentwood, Michigan
PG&E Internal Use Information, SL2 © 2013 PG&E Corporation. All rights reserved. Page 1 of 1
Page 327
p328

Specification for Furnishing and Delivery of 1/2 in. CTS
through 8 in. IPS Polyethylene (PE) Ball and Plug Valves
EMS-4762, Rev. 1c
Document Type Engineering Material Specification (EMS)
21
Impact ☒ Only Updates Material Codes or Document References (sections 1–5 only)
20
☐ Includes Any Other Changes (complete all sections)
4/
To align with new Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration (PHMSA) updates for Code
/1
of Federal Regulations (CFR) Title 49, Transportation, Part 192—Transportation of Natural and Other
Gas by Pipeline: Minimum Federal Safety Standards, Section (§) 192.7, “What documents are
09
incorporated by reference partly or wholly in this part?”; 49 CFR §192.121, “Design of plastic pipe.”;
and 49 CFR Part 192, Appendix B, “Qualification of Pipe and Components.” The changes incorporate
by reference the 2018 edition of the ASTM International (ASTM, formerly the American Society for
Testing and Materials) document, “Standard Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Gas Pressure Pipe,
ed
Tubing, and Fittings,” (ASTM D2513 - 18a).
at

Summary Update ASTM D2513 to ASTM D2513-18a
er
Step 1.6 Update ASTM D2513 to ASTM D2513-18a

en
Step 2.5.d Update ASTM D2513 to ASTM D2513-18a

G

Step 6.1.4 Update ASTM D2513 to ASTM D2513-18a
F

PD

Reference Documents Update ASTM D2513 to ASTM D2513-18a

Page 328
p329

Specification for Furnishing and Delivery of 1/2 in. CTS
through 8 in. IPS Polyethylene (PE) Ball and Plug Valves
EMS-4762, Rev. 1c
21
NA
20
4. Stakeholders
4/
Standards Engineering Gas Engineer, Document Coordinator Stephanie Uhlich 03/2021
Standards Engineering Expert Gas Engineer, Lead Engineer Jen Lemus 03/2021
/1
Standards Engineering Expert Gas Specialist Michael Lumm 03/2021
09
ed
at
er
en
G
F
PD

Page 329
p330
Atmospheric Corrosion Inspection of Exposed Metallic Piping Systems
SUMMARY
21
This utility procedure describes how to perform required inspections and evaluations for
atmospheric corrosion on exposed metallic gas piping assets, including the following:
20
Spans (Transmission & Distribution [T&D])
 Compressor stations
4/
 Measurement and regulation stations
/1
 Tubing and fittings
 Valves
09
 Vessels (e.g., launchers and receivers, gas processing and treatment equipment)
 Risers (including farm taps)

ed
 Well heads and associated equipment

at
Main and services on rooftops
 Assets inside buildings

er
 Blowdowns
en
 Exposed Drips
This procedure does not apply to the following assets that may be exposed to the atmosphere:
G
 Distribution meters and meter set risers (go to Utility Procedure TD-4188P-01,
“Atmospheric Corrosion Inspection of Customer-Connected Risers and Meter Sets”)
F
 Unintentionally exposed pipe, reduced cover, submerged, and partially submerged

pipe (go to Utility Procedure TD-4813P-01, “Gas Transmission Pipelines Reduced
PD
Cover Evaluation”)
 Piping within a casing (including bridge encasements)
This procedure does not typically require the excavation or removal of any soil or coating.
Page 330
p331
TARGET AUDIENCE
21
Personnel performing or supervising atmospheric corrosion control inspections, including
corrosion personnel, gas transmission and distribution (T&D) maintenance and construction
(M&C) personnel, gas pipeline operations and maintenance (GPO&M) personnel, gas control
20
personnel, and gas engineering personnel.
SAFETY
4/
Use standard safe work practices, standard issue personal protective equipment (PPE), and
the following:
/1
 Fall protection, as applicable (per Utility Standard SAFE-1012S, “Fall Protection”)
09
 Environmental monitoring, as applicable (per Utility Operations (UO) Standard S4414,
“CGT Confined Space Entry Program”).
 Additional PPE, such as respirators or safety harnesses, as applicable (based on site

ed
specific conditions)
Potential hazards impacting this work include, but are not limited to, the following:
at
 Electrical hazards (e.g., electrical controls, AC-induced current)

er
Presence of lead (for paint known to be applied prior to 1978)
 Presence of asbestos (for pipe installed prior to 1972)

en
 Presence of polynuclear aromatic hydrocarbons (PAHs) (for asphaltic pipe wrap

regardless of year)
G
 Working at heights (e.g., ladders, scaffolding, lift equipment), in vaults/confined spaces

(per UO S4414), or in waterways/boats
F
Coating removal is not commonly required in this procedure. However, small sections of
coating might be removed inadvertently (flaking/disbonded coatings) or intentionally (exposing
PD
corrosion defects) during the inspection process. Inspection may require the removal of
insulation.
Existing pipe insulation and coating may contain lead, asbestos, or PAHs, which are listed as
hazardous materials in Pacific Gas and Electric Company (PG&E or Company) Proposition 65
Employee Warning and Precautions. Utility Procedure TD-4711P-01, “Gas Pipe Wrap
Removal, Handling, and Disposal,” and Utility Standard TD-4711S, “Natural Gas Pipe Wrap
and Flange Gaskets-Removal, Handling, and Disposal,” have additional details on the removal
process for pipe wrap potentially containing asbestos. Utility Standard SAFE 2005S, “Lead
Standard,” has additional details on safe handling of paint potentially containing lead.
Page 331
p332
BEFORE YOU START
21
1. Identify (along with supervisors) required PPE and discuss its proper use during
tailboards.
20
2. Qualify under the following Operator Qualification (OQ) tasks:
 OQ-03-04, “Atmospheric Corrosion/Monitor”
4/
 OQ-03-05, “Pipe Inspection”
/1
OQ-18-01, “Inspect Vault” (for vault inspections)
3. Use only Company-approved tools, materials, and equipment, including the following
09
items:
 Explosion-proof lights, per Gas Design Standard (GDS) M-83, “Explosion-Proof

Lights”
ed
 Air-monitoring instruments, per GDS M-04, “Multi-Gas Monitors”
 Digital camera or cellphone camera (and telephoto lenses if the inspection

at
requires viewing pipelines or spans from a distance)

er
Binoculars (if the inspection requires viewing pipelines or spans from a

distance)
en
4. IF Company-approved tools, materials, and equipment are inadequate or unavailable,
THEN follow instructions in Utility Bulletin TD-7999B-001, “Rules Regarding Material

Substitution.”
G
F
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PD
1 General Guidelines ........................................................................................... 4

2 Inspecting Exposed Spans ................................................................................ 8
3 Inspecting Piping System in Stations............................................................... 16
4 Inspecting Piping System in Vaults and Pits .................................................... 23
5 Inspecting Aboveground Piping Covered with Insulation ................................. 26
6 Corrective Action ............................................................................................. 28
7 Documentation ................................................................................................ 29
Page 332
p333
PROCEDURE STEPS
21
1 General Guidelines
NOTE
20
These corrosion inspections are performed in conjunction with Code of Federal
Regulations (CFR) Title 49, Transportation, Part 192—Transportation of Natural and
other Gas by Pipeline: Minimum Federal Safety Standards, Section (§) 192.481,
4/
"Atmospheric corrosion control: Monitoring," and may also be performed via the
course of regulator station maintenance and its related sub-processes, as well as
/1
inspection of gas distribution meters, which are governed by Utility Procedure TD-
4540P-01, “Maintenance of Regulator Stations,” and Utility Procedure TD-4188P-01,
“Atmospheric Corrosion Inspection of Customer-Connected Risers and Meter Sets,”
09
respectively.
1.1 Inspect the following areas (at a minimum) for each exposed span:
ed
1. Inspect the exposed piping or span, with attention to the bottom section of the pipe
where moisture tends to accumulate, as described in Step 2.1.
2. Inspect the condition of the coating system over the full span, checking for signs of
at
chalking, cracking, splitting, blistering, and disbondment, as described in Step 2.2.

er
NOTE
For the purposes of this procedure, “air-to-soil transitions” include all possible
en
interfaces (e.g., air-to-concrete transition inside station pits and/or vaults).
3. Inspect each air-to-soil transition as described in Step 2.3.

G
4. Inspect each pipe support as described in Step 2.4.
a. Pay particular attention at pipe-to-pipe support contact areas and concealed

F
areas (i.e., pipe under straps).

PD
b. Document any indications of corrosion to include rust streaking from areas that
cannot be visually inspected.
1.2 Document all inspection results on Form TD-4188P-02-F01, “Atmospheric Corrosion

Inspection Record.”
Page 333
p334
1.3 Document each abnormal operating condition (AOC) observed on an exposed asset with
photos AND description (in the “Detailed Description of AOC” field on Form TD-4188P-02-F01)
21
as follows:
1. Photos
20
a. Give particular attention to areas where corrosion, coating, or mechanical
damage is observed including at pipe supports, if present, and air-to-soil
transitions.
4/
b. Ensure photos capture the location and full extent of the AOC.
/1
c. Assign each photo an identifier (photo ID), such as the photo file name, the
timestamp when the photo is taken, a number written on the back, etc.
09
d. Note the quantity of photos taken for each AOC on Form TD-4188P-02-F01.
e. Identify location of AOC and corresponding photo IDs on back of

ed
Form TD-4188P-02-F01.
2. Description
at
a. Note the location of the damage as precisely as possible (e.g., footage from
transition zone, orientation [north, south, east, or west], damage location with
respect to pipe’s clock position).
er
b. Identify the type of coating on the span if possible (e.g., hot applied asphalt,
en
epoxy, concrete, or tape).
c. Describe the type of damage observed.

G
d. Provide other relevant information in the appropriate fields.
3. Station Size
F
a. Determine station size to confirm documentation requirements per the station

PD
Operating Diagram as such:
(1) Small station: Station containing less than 10 valves.
(2) Large station: Station containing 10 or more valves.
b. Document small stations following Step 1.3.1 and Step 1.3.2.
Page 334
p335
21
c. Document large stations following Step 1.3.1 and Step 1.3.2 and do the
following:
20
(1) Highlight AOC location on station operating diagram.
(2) Clearly circle AOCs with ink and properly label on the back of Form
TD-4188P-02-F01.
4/
(3) Attach station operating diagram to Form TD-4188P-02-F01. See Figure
/1
1.
09
ed
at
er
en
G
F
PD
Figure 1. Example Station Operating Diagram with AOCs
1.4 The appropriate engineering department evaluate all AOCs (including photos) that cannot be
corrected by local personnel.
1.5 IF gas odor is detected,
THEN make safe AND notify supervisor per Utility Procedure TD-4110P-13, “Maintenance and
Construction Odor and Leak Investigation.”
Page 335
p336
1.6 IF inspecting assets in stations, including vaults or pits,
21
THEN give particular attention to the following locations:
 Pipe
20
 Visible threads
 Shutoff and relief valves
4/
 Overpressure protection devices
/1
 Regulators
09
 Filters
 Meters
ed
 Assets under insulation

at
 Blow downs

er
Drips
 Any portions of the metallic piping system contacting or concealed by supports, straps,
en
or braces
1.7 IF pitting or mechanical damage that has not been assessed is observed,
G
THEN perform the following steps:
1. Check “Mechanical Damage Observed” on Form TD-4188P-02-F01.

F
2. IF mechanical damage is present on transmission pipelines,

PD
THEN notify gas control center of damage. The gas control center notifies the
responsible gas pipeline engineer or on-call engineer. Repairs are made only with
approval of the responsible gas pipeline engineer or gas facility engineer.
3. IF mechanical damage is present on distribution pipelines,
THEN notify responsible gas distribution engineer or on-call engineer. Repairs are
made only with approval of the responsible gas distribution engineer.
Page 336
p337
2 Inspecting Exposed Spans
21
2.1 Inspecting Exposed Piping
1. Visually inspect all portions of the exposed span.
20
a. Inspect large bridge spans (i.e., several hundred feet in length) with the aid of
binoculars.
4/
b. Visually inspect and photograph abnormal conditions on all pipe supports and
hangars if possible, per Step 2.4.
/1
c. IF span is partially or fully submerged in water,
09
THEN note the location of submerged areas on Form TD-4188P-02-F01.
(1) Create a Request for Work in SAP to inspect the span on a quarterly
interval to see if the span remains submerged or partially submerged.
ed
(2) If the span remains submerged or partially submerged after four
quarterly inspections,
at
THEN submit a Request for Work in SAP to change the G_SPAN to a

G_SPAN_U, to categorize the span under the unintentionally exposed
pipe, reduced cover, submerged, and partially submerged pipe program.
er
Refer to Utility Procedure TD-4813P-01, “Gas Transmission Pipelines

Reduced Cover Evaluation.”
en
d. IF any areas cannot be completely visually inspected (e.g., portion of span is

beyond binocular range),

G
(1) Note the locations of those areas in the “Additional Comments or

Observations” field on Form TD-4188P-02-F01.
F
(2) Consult with local supervisor to determine if other methods are

PD
necessary such as vegetation clearing, use of boat, cameras, etc.
2. IF no corrosion or pitting is observed (i.e., no exposed metal or rust stains along span,
as shown in Figure 2),
THEN check “No Corrosion Observed” on Form TD-4188P-02-F01.
Page 337
p338
21
20
4/
/1
09
ed
Figure 2. Well Coated Span with No Observable Corrosion
at
3. IF light rust is observed on the pipe surface (i.e., minimal red staining with no pitting, as
shown in Figure 3),
er
THEN check “Light Surface Rust” on Form TD-4188P-02-F01.

en
G
F
PD
Figure 3. Light Rust on Surface of Pipe
Page 338
p339
21
4. IF pitting is present on the pipe surface (i.e., localized corrosion damage characterized
by small holes penetrating the pipe surface, as shown in Figure 4),
THEN check “Pitting Observed” on Form TD-4188P-02-F01.
20
4/
/1
09
ed
at
Figure 4. Pitting in an Exposed Area of a Span

er
5. IF non-corrosion related pipe damage is observed (e.g., gouges, scratches, external

perforations to the pipe; as shown in Figure 5),
en
a. Check “Mechanical Damage Observed” on Form TD-4188P-02-F01.

G
b. IF damage is present on transmission pipelines,
F
responsible gas pipeline engineer or on-call engineer. Repairs are made only
with approval of the responsible gas pipeline engineer.
PD
c. IF damage is present on distribution pipelines,
THEN notify responsible gas distribution engineer or on-call engineer. Repairs

are made only with approval of the responsible gas distribution engineer.
Page 339
p340
21
20
4/
/1
09
Figure 5. Mechanical Damage on the Span
6. Document AOCs per Step 1.3. Describe the type of damage observed (e.g., dent,
gouge, scrape, or arc burn).
ed
2.2 Inspecting Pipe Coatings (Spans)
at
1. Visually inspect coatings on all portions of the exposed span for signs of chalking,
cracking, splitting, blistering, and disbondment.
er
a. IF areas cannot be visually inspected (e.g., portion of span is beyond binocular

range),
en
(1) Note the locations of those areas in the “Additional Comments or

Observations” field of Form TD-4188P-02-F01.
G
(2) Work with local supervisor for alternative methods to visually inspect
area.
F
2. Get as close as practical when inspecting the coating to inspect all the exposed edges.
PD
a. Look for signs of corrosion such as rust-color stains around the pipe or coating
flakes.
b. Look for places where moisture from the atmosphere could collect on the pipe
surface.
c. Pay particular attention to the coating at areas between a support and carrier
pipe and air-to-soil transitions.
Page 340
p341
21
3. Inspect and document (on Form TD-4188P-02-F01) the condition of the coating and
pipe according to the following:
20
a. IF there is no visible coating damage,
THEN check “No Coating Damage.”
4/
b. IF minor coating damage is observed (e.g., minor coating cracks, small
holidays, or inconsistent thickness),
/1
THEN check “Minor Issue (Small Holidays).”
c. IF sections of the pipeline are uncoated, the coating is disbonded from the
09
metal, or the coating is damaged,
THEN check “Major Issue (Disbonding or No Coating).”

ed
4. Document any AOCs per Step 1.3. Describe the type of coating damage observed
(e.g., disbonded coating, cracking, bubbling, or discoloration).
2.3 Inspecting Piping at Air-to-Soil Transitions (Spans)

at
NOTE
er
Air-to-soil transitions are locations where the pipe enters or leaves the ground. These
locations are particularly susceptible to atmospheric corrosion because they are
en
where maximum severity of wet and dry cycling occurs. Air-to soil transition of the
pipe extends from 18" below ground to 6" above the ground. Excavating air to soil
transition is not necessary unless there is an AOC.
G
1. Inspect each air-to-soil transition.
a. Document (per Step 1.3) any AOCs observed at the air-to-soil transitions of the
F
span.
PD
b. Verify the transition zone is properly coated to prevent moisture from getting in
between the pipe and coating.
c. Note the condition of the pipe and the severity of any observed corrosion
damage (e.g., pitting or rust) using the guidelines described in Step 2.1.
NOTE
The presence of surface rust in an air-to-soil transition is considered an AOC.
2. Closely check the coating for signs of damage. Document inspection results on
Form TD-4188P-02-F01 using the following guidelines:
Page 341
p342
21
a. IF there is no visible coating damage (as shown in Figure 6),
20
4/
/1
09
ed
Figure 6. New Coating at the Air-to-Soil Transition
at
b. IF minor coating damage is observed such as small holidays (as shown in

Figure 7), minor coating cracks, or inconsistent thickness,
er

en
G
F
PD
Figure 7. Holiday in a Coating at the Air-to-Soil Transition
c. IF sections of the pipeline are uncoated, (the coating is disbonded from the
metal as shown in Figure 8), or the coating is damaged (as shown in Figure 9),
Page 342
p343
21
20
4/
/1
09
ed
Figure 8. Coating Disbondment at the Air-to-Soil Transition
at
er
en
G
F
Figure 9. Coating Damage at the Air-to-Soil Transition

PD
d. Document any AOCs per Step 1.3. Describe the type of coating damage
observed (e.g., disbonded coating, cracking, bubbling, or discoloration).
3. At transitions involving air-to-concrete and air-to-asphalt interfaces for buried piping,

look for evidence that the caulking or seal at the interface has deteriorated and allowed
moisture ingress.
a. If rust stains are present along the wall, document the condition under the
“Detailed Description of AOC” field on Form TD-4188P-02-F01.
Page 343
p344
2.4 Inspecting Piping at Pipe Supports (Spans)
21
1. Remove pipe support if possible, visually inspect (per Step 1.3) on pipe support (e.g.,
rust-colored stains, pitting, or failed coating at pipe supports and pipe support/hanger
contact areas).
20
a. Pay particular attention to the area between the piping and the support where
moisture is retained between the coating and pipe support (as shown in Figure
10).
4/
/1
09
ed
at
er
en
Figure 10. Disbonded Coating Corrosion Damage Between Pipe and Pipe Support
G
2. Determine the corrosion condition of the support structure, using the same approach
described for spans in Step 2.1.
F
3. Determine the coating condition of the support structure, using the same approach
PD
4. IF non-corrosion related pipe support damage is observed,
b. Inform local corrosion supervisor, who contacts local pipeline engineering

personnel to determine if repair is required.
Page 344
p345
21
5. Inspect structural integrity of piping hangars and supports.
a. Record any instances of cracked or broken hangers, “bottoming out” of spring
20
supports, support shoes displaced from support members, or other improper
restraints, in the appropriate fields of Form TD-4188P-02-F01.
b. IF observed damage could affect the integrity of the structure,
4/
THEN inform local pipeline engineering personnel to determine if repair is
/1
required.
c. IF other improper or damaged supports are observed,
09
THEN check “Mechanical Damage Observed” on Form TD-4188P-02-F01.
6. Document any AOCs per Step 1.3. Describe the type of damage observed (e.g., fallen
support, gap between support and pipe, or missing insulating material).
ed
3 Inspecting Piping System in Stations
at
3.1 Visually inspect and document (per Step 1.3) any AOCs for corrosion on exposed piping in a
Station.
er
1. Pay particular attention to the following areas (if applicable):
 Pipe
en
 Visible threads
 Air-to-soil interfaces
G
 Shut off and relief valves

 Asset-to-support interfaces
F
 Filters
PD
 Regulator and overpressure protection devices

 Valves
 Meters
 Under pipe insulation
 Blow downs
 Drips
 Bottom of half of assets
Page 345
p346
21
2. Determine the corrosion and coating condition for each of these locations using Step
3.2 and Step 3.4 (except for under pipe insulation, use Section 4).
3.2 Evaluating Corrosion Condition (Stations)
20
1. Look for signs of pitting or rust at the air-to-soil transitions and along all piping
components (e.g., regulator, regulator bolts, relief valves).
4/
2. Document inspection results in the appropriate location on Form TD-4188P-02-F01
using the following guidelines:
/1
a. IF no corrosion or pitting is observed,
09
THEN check “No Corrosion Observed.”
b. IF light rust is observed on the pipe surface (i.e., thin red staining on the surface
of pipe or regulator, with no pitting, as shown in Figure 11),
ed
THEN check “Light Surface Rust.”
at
er
en
G
F
PD
Figure 11. Aboveground Example of Light Surface Rust
Page 346
p347
21
3. IF pitting is present on the pipe surface (i.e., corrosion damage penetrates surface
rust),
THEN check “Pitting Observed.”
20
4. Document any AOCs per Step 1.3.
4/
5. IF non-corrosion related pipe damage is observed,
/1
a. Check “Mechanical Damage Observed” on Form TD-4188P-02-F01. Minor tool
09
marks are not required to be recorded.
b. IF damage is present on transmission pipelines,

ed
responsible gas pipeline engineer, gas facility engineer or on-call engineer.
Repairs are made only with approval of the responsible gas pipeline engineer
or gas facility engineer.
at
c. IF damage is present on distribution pipelines,

er
THEN notify responsible gas distribution engineer or on-call engineer. Repairs

are made only with approval of the responsible gas distribution engineer.
en
3.3 Inspecting Piping at Air-to-Soil Transitions (Stations)
NOTE
G
Air-to-soil transitions are locations where the pipe enters or leaves the ground. These
locations are particularly susceptible to atmospheric corrosion because they are
F
where maximum severity of wet and dry cycling occurs. Air-to soil transition of the
pipe extends from 18" below ground to 6" above the ground.
PD
1. Inspect each air-to-soil transition.
a. Document (per Step 1.3) any AOCs observed at the air-to-soil transitions of the
pipe.
b. Verify the transition zone is properly coated to prevent moisture from getting in
between the pipe and coating.
c. Note the condition of the pipe and the severity of any observed corrosion
damage (e.g., pitting or rust) using the guidelines described in Step 2.1.
Page 347
p348
21
NOTE
The presence of surface rust in an air-to-soil transition is considered an AOC.
20
2. Closely check the coating for signs of damage. Document inspection results on
Form TD-4188P-02-F01 using the following guidelines:
4/
a. IF there is no visible coating damage (as shown in Figure 12),
/1
09
ed
at
er
en
G
Figure 12. New Coating at the Air-to-Soil Transition

F
b. IF minor coating damage is observed such as small holidays (as shown in

Figure 13), minor coating cracks, or inconsistent thickness,
PD
Page 348
p349
21
20
4/
/1
09
ed
Figure 13. Holiday in a Coating at the Air-to-Soil Transition
at
metal (as shown in Figure 14), or the coating is damaged (as shown in Figure
15),
er

en
G
F
PD
Figure 14. Coating Disbondment at the Air-to-Soil Transition
Page 349
p350
21
20
4/
/1
09
ed
Figure 15. Coating Damage at the Air-to-Soil Transition
at
3. At transitions involving air-to-concrete and air-to-asphalt interfaces for buried piping,

er
look for evidence that the caulking or seal at the interface has deteriorated and allowed
moisture ingress.
en
a. If rust stains are present along the wall, document the condition under the
“Detailed Description of AOC” field on Form TD-4188P-02-F01.
3.4 Evaluating the Coating Condition (Stations)

G
1. Inspect the coating condition inside vaults and pits and check for visual signs of coating
damage.
F

PD

holidays, inconsistent thickness),
Page 350
p351
21
20
3.5 Inspecting Piping at Pipe Support (Stations)
4/
1. Remove pipe support if possible, and visually inspect (per Step 1.3) the pipe support
for signs of corrosion (e.g., rust-colored stains, pitting, or failed coating at pipe supports
/1
and pipe support/hanger contact areas).
a. Pay particular attention to the area between the piping and the support where
09
moisture is retained between the coating and pipe support (as shown in
Figure 16). ed
at
er
en
G
F
PD
Figure 16. Disbonded Coating Corrosion Damage Between Pipe and Pipe Support
2. Determine the corrosion condition of the support structure, using the same approach
3. Determine the coating condition of the support structure, using the same approach
Page 351
p352
21
4. IF non-corrosion related pipe support damage is observed,
20
b. Inform local corrosion supervisor, who contacts local pipeline engineering
4/
personnel to determine whether repair is required.
5. Inspect structural integrity of piping hangars and supports.
/1
a. Record any instances of cracked or broken hangers, “bottoming out” of spring
09
supports, support shoes displaced from support members, or other improper
restraints in the appropriate fields of Form TD-4188P-02-F01.
b. IF observed damage could affect the integrity of the structure,

ed
THEN inform local pipeline engineering or gas facility engineer personnel to
determine if repair is required.
at
c. IF other improper or damaged supports are observed,
THEN check “Mechanical Damage Observed” on Form TD-4188P-02-F01.

er
6. Document any AOCs per Step 1.3. Describe the type of damage observed (e.g., fallen
support, gap between support and pipe, or missing insulating material).
en
4 Inspecting Piping System in Vaults and Pits
4.1 Visually inspect and document (per Step 1.3) any AOCs for corrosion on exposed piping in pits
G
and vaults.
1. Pay particular attention to the following areas (if applicable):

F
 Air-to-soil interfaces
PD
 Asset-to-support interfaces
 Filters
 Regulator and overpressure protection devices
 Valves
 Meters
 Under pipe insulation
Page 352
p353
21
2. Determine the corrosion and coating condition for each of these locations using Step
4.2 and Step 4.3 (except for under pipe insulation, use Section 5).
20
3. At air-to-concrete transitions zones in pits and vaults, perform the following steps:
a. Look for evidence the caulking or seal at the interface has deteriorated and
allowed moisture ingress. Pay particular attention to whether rust stains are
4/
present along the wall.
/1
b. Document any AOCs per Step 1.3.
4. Record if water is found in the vault or pit by checking the appropriate box in the “Water
09
present in vault or pit?” field on Form TD-4188P-02-F01.
a. IF water is found inside a pit or vault,

ed
THEN discharge the water per Utility Procedure ENV-2202P-01, “Vault
Dewatering Procedure,” before continuing inspection.
4.2 Evaluating Corrosion Condition (Vaults and Pits)
at
1. Look for signs of pitting or rust at the air-to-soil transitions and along all piping
components (e.g., regulator, regulator bolts, relief valves).
er

en
a. IF no corrosion or pitting is observed,
THEN check “No Corrosion Observed.”

G
b. IF light rust is observed on the pipe surface (i.e., thin red staining on the surface
F
of pipe or regulator, with no pitting, as shown in Figure 17),

PD
THEN check “Light Surface Rust.”
Page 353
p354
21
20
4/
/1
09
ed
Figure 17. Aboveground Example of Light Surface Rust
at
3. IF pitting is present on the pipe surface (i.e., corrosion damage penetrates surface
rust),
er
THEN check “Pitting Observed.”

en
4. Document any AOCs per Step 1.3.
5. IF non-corrosion related pipe damage is observed,

G

F
b. Inform local corrosion supervisor, who contacts local pipeline engineering or

PD
gas facility engineering personnel to determine whether repair is required.
4.3 Evaluating the Coating Condition (Vaults and Pits)
1. Inspect the coating condition inside vaults and pits and check for visual signs of coating
damage.
Page 354
p355
21
20
4/
holidays, inconsistent thickness),
/1
09

ed
at
5 Inspecting Aboveground Piping Covered with Insulation
5.1 Conduct external visual inspection to assess the insulation condition on all aboveground piping
er
systems, paying particular attention to systems:
 Exposed to flood conditions

en
 Subject to moisture intrusion

G
With deteriorated insulation, coatings, and/or wrapping; bulges or staining of the

insulation or jacketing system (bulges can indicate corrosion product buildup), or
missing bands
F
 Susceptible to physical damage of the coating or insulation, thereby exposing the

PD
piping to the environment
5.2 Conduct visual inspection for corrosion under insulation (CUI) along the pipe at locations
potentially susceptible to corrosion. However, due to the difficulty of removing and re-installing
insulation (e.g., acoustic or thermal), only selected areas of piping require inspection. Select
sections of pipe for inspection as follows:
 Include areas where the insulation is damaged.
 Include areas where the arrangement of the installation may aid collection of moisture
or development of corrosion.
Page 355
p356
21
 Consider making a permanent inspection window so the insulation can be removed
again during future inspections to check the integrity of the pipe.
20
5.3 Inspect pipe according to the following:
1. Identify probable areas where moisture could collect such as:
4/
 Pipe supports
/1
Pipe depressions
 Pipe slides
09
 Areas with open insulation seams such as blankets
 Areas where insulation systems begin or end

ed
 Areas where condensation can occur, such as cold surfaces not sealed from
the atmosphere
at
 Building penetrations
er
2. Before removing insulation, visually inspect and document locations with damage or
suspected damage (per Step 1.3).
en
WARNING
G
Existing pipe insulation may contain lead or asbestos, which are listed as hazardous
materials in PG&E Proposition 65 Employee Warning and Precautions.
F
3. Remove insulation from locations where insulation is identified as damaged or water

accumulation is likely to occur, and observe the following precautions:
PD
a. Take precautionary measures for lead and asbestos as discussed in the Safety
section.
b. Be careful not to damage the coating system below the insulation.
Page 356
p357
21
4. Remove at least 1 foot of insulation from the entire circumference.
a. IF indication of corrosion is found,
20
(1) Identify full extent of damage in the area.
4/
(2) Contact corrosion field support personnel to support an engineering
/1
review and support the development of a remediation plan, as needed.
5. Inspect and document the condition of the pipe and the coating according to
09
Step 2.1 and Step 2.2.
6. Document the presence of accumulated moisture (e.g., water present at the interface
between the insulation and pipe) per Step 1.3.
ed
7. Reinstall insulation where needed, ensuring it is weather tight.
a. All new insulation materials or insulating systems must be reviewed and

at
approved by station engineering personnel prior to installation.
6 Corrective Action
er
6.1 IF any AOCs are indicated on Form TD-4188P-02-F01,

en
THEN initiate a corrective work notification.
1. IF the AOC can be corrected without further engineering analysis,

G
THEN local personnel should proceed with corrective action AND document
completion under “Action Taken” on Form TD-4188P-02-F01.
F
2. IF any AOCs encountered during the inspection cannot be corrected by local

PD
personnel,
THEN contact Corrosion Field Support, Pipeline Services, Central Facility Engineering
or their representatives to evaluate the extent of issues found.
a. Corrosion Field Support, Pipeline Services, and Central Facility Engineering

personnel support in assessing each condition and prioritizing those conditions
for future repairs. Work notifications/orders are created as needed, and an
approximate date of completion for those repairs is provided to the local
corrosion department.
Page 357
p358
6.2 See Table 1 for examples of AOCs found and the appropriate corrective action.
21
Table 1. Guidelines for Condition Evaluation
Condition Description Action
20
Condition 1 No corrosion or coating damage observed, and the coating No action required.
is expected to perform adequately until next inspection
period
4/
Condition 2 Cannot inspect the specified asset (e.g., portion of span is Work with Local Corrosion Supervisor
beyond binocular range) on alternatives or contact Corrosion
Field Support for additional support.
/1
Condition 3 Light surface rust, major or minor coating damage with no Notify local supervisor, but no other
indications of pitting or coating disbondment (excludes action required. No compliance
air-to-soil transitions and pipe-to-support interfaces) repairs needed. However, spot repairs
09
or full recoats will extend the service
life of the coating system.
Condition 4 AOC consisting of light surface rust or coating issues at air- Contact local supervisor to create
to-soil transitions or under pipe insulation or at pipe-to- corrective to recoat. Compliance
ed
support interface evaluations or repairs required.
Condition 5 AOC consisting of pitting or mechanical damage Inform local corrosion supervisor, who
informs local pipeline engineering or
gas facility engineer personnel to
at
determine whether repair is required.

Compliance evaluations or repairs
required.
er
7 Documentation
en
7.1 Keep completed copies of Form TD-4188P-02-F01 and accompanying photos per local area
system of record practices.
G
END of Instructions
F
DEFINITIONS
PD
Blistering: The presence of dome-shaped projections on the surface of a coating that are
often filled with water or gas. The coating is usually disbonded from the substrate at each
blister site.
Disbonded paint/coating: Coating that no longer adheres to the metal surface it was applied
to.
Gouge: A groove or scooped out cavity damage to pipe caused by a foreign object.
Holiday: A discontinuity in a protective coating that exposes unprotected surface to the

environment.
Page 358
p359
21
Pit: An underground structure containing a pipeline segment. The structure may also contain
any of the following: valves, flanges, control piping, sensing lines, pressure taps, filters, and
strainers. The structure does not have a lid.
20
Pitting: Cavities formed in the surface of a material caused by corrosion.
Splitting: Refers to linear tears, gashes, or separation between coating layers.
4/
Vault: An enclosure (usually underground) with a lid, cover, or doors.
/1
09
Corrosion Engineering Services and Corrosion Field Support rolls out the procedure by each
division.
The document owner issues a guidance tailboard with this procedure. Supervisors tailboard
ed
this procedure with impacted personnel.
PG&E Academy integrates the information in this procedure into ACM-2101.

at
Superintendents provide the resources needed to perform the work required by this procedure.
GOVERNING DOCUMENT
er
Utility Standard TD-4188S, “Atmospheric Corrosion Control of Gas Facilities”

en

G
Natural and other Gas by Pipeline: Minimum Federal Safety Standards, Section (§) 192.479,
"Atmospheric corrosion control: General"
49 CFR §192.481, “Atmospheric corrosion control: Monitoring”

F
PD
Reference: November 19, 2014 GO 112E, 2014 O&M Plan Audit Response (6) - NOV 1-9
Reference: November 19, 2014 GO 112E, 2014 O&M Plan Audit Response (26) - AOC-18
Corrective Action Program (CAP) 7002203, task #2, part of SR-065 Corrosion Control Issues
Update
Page 359
p360
Compliance Requirement / Regulatory Commitment (continued)
21
20
limited to:
4/
 Integrity
/1
 Storage
09

ed
REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
at
Utility Procedure TD-4110P-03 Performing and Documenting Leak Survey
Utility Procedure TD-4412P-07, “Patrolling Gas Pipelines”

er
Utility Procedure TD-4430P-02, “Gas Transmission Stations Inspection, Testing, and

Maintenance”
en
Utility Procedure TD-4430P-04, “Gas Valve Maintenance”

G
Utility Procedure TD-4540P-01, “Maintenance of Regulator Stations”
Utility Procedure TD-4540P-02, “Maintenance of Gas Regulation Equipment on Meter Set

F
Assemblies”
PD
Utility Procedure TD-4545P-01, “Control Valve System – Maintenance and Performance

Testing”
Gas Design Standard M-83, “Explosion-Proof Lights”
Utility Bulletin TD-7999B-001, “Rules Regarding Material Substitution”
Utility Procedure ENV-2202P-01, “Vault Dewatering Procedure”
Utility Procedure TD-4100P-05, “Selection of Steel Gas Pipeline Repair Methods”
Page 360
p361
21
Utility Procedure TD-4110P-13, “Maintenance and Construction Odor and Leak Investigation.”
Utility Procedure TD-4188P-01, “Atmospheric Corrosion Inspection of Gas Distribution Meters”
20
Utility Procedure TD-4711P-01, “Gas Pipe Wrap Removal, Handling, and Disposal”
Utility Procedure TD-4813P-01, “Gas Transmission Pipelines Reduced Cover Evaluation”
4/
Utility Operations Standard S4414, “CGT Confined Space Entry Program”
/1
Utility Standard SAFE-1012S, “Fall Protection”
09
Utility Standard SAFE-2005S, “Lead Standard”
Utility Standard TD-4711S, “Natural Gas Pipe Wrap and Flange Gaskets-Removal, Handling,
and Disposal”
ed
APPENDICES
NA
at
ATTACHMENTS
er
Form TD-4188P-02-F01, “Atmospheric Corrosion Inspection Record”
DOCUMENT RECISION
en
Utility Procedure TD4188P-02, “Atmospheric Corrosion Inspection of Exposed Metallic Piping

Systems,” Rev. 0, published 02/17/2016.
G
DOCUMENT APPROVER
Kevin Armato, Manager, Corrosion Engineering

F
PD
DOCUMENT OWNER
John Heflin, Gas Engineer, Standards Engineering
DOCUMENT CONTACT
Patrick Chu, Career Corrosion Engineer, Corrosion Engineering Services
Page 361
p362
REVISION NOTES
21
Revision 1a
Summary Added meter set risers to the exceptions and updated title of TD-4188P-01.
20
Section 1, first Note Updated title of TD-4188P-01.
Revision 1
All  Removed references to “Cannot Inspect” checkbox that is no longer on
4/
form TD-4188P-02-F01
 Removed the term “Corrosion Services” and changed to “Corrosion
/1
Field Support”
Summary  Added blowdowns and drips
09
Section 1  Removed 1.3.1.b, “Photograph the presence of tool marks on pipe
components”
 Added Section 1.3.3, “Station Size”

ed
Added blowdowns and drips to Section 1.6
Section 2  Added 2.1.c.2 regarding fully or partially submerged spans
Section 3  Added “Inspecting Piping Systems in Stations” as Section 3
at
TD-4188P-02-F01  Removed the reference to the “Cannot Inspect” and “Exposed

Pipe/non-engineered Spans” checkbox, and added “Submerged or
partially submerged” checkbox
er
 Changed AOC to specific boxes instead of column specific

 Removed “Reviewed by” section from page 2
en
G
F
PD
Page 362
p363

Atmospheric Corrosion Inspection of Exposed Metallic Piping
Systems
TD-4188P-02, Rev. 1a
21
20
4/
For clarity on distribution meter set risers. Utility Procedure TD-4188P-01, “Atmospheric Corrosion
/1
Inspection of Customer-Connected Risers and Meter Sets,” is the governing procedure that must be
referenced when inspecting distribution meters and meter set risers. The intent of this procedure is for
09
the atmospheric corrosion inspection of most aboveground facilities, while TD-4188P-01 is for
customer-connected risers and meter sets. This revision clarifies those distinctions. TD-4188P-01 is
also currently being evaluated on risk and cost analysis to determine additional requirements for air-to-
soil transitions, if necessary
ed

at
Summary Add highlighted text and update document reference title:

Distribution meters and meter set risers (go to Utility Procedure TD-4188P-01,
er
“Atmospheric Corrosion Inspection of Gas Distribution Customer-Connected Risers

and Meter Sets”)
Section 1/Note Update document reference title:
en
“…Utility Procedure TD-4188P-01, “Atmospheric Corrosion Inspection of Gas

Distribution Customer-Connected Risers and Meter Sets” …”
G
NA
F
PD

Page 363
p364

Systems
TD-4188P-02, Rev. 1a
4. Stakeholders
21
20
Corrosion Engineering Corrosion Engineer, Document Patrick Chu 10/2020
Steward
Standards Engineering Gas Engineer, Document John Heflin 10/2020
4/
Coordinator
Standards Engineering Principal Engineer, Lead Engineer Tuesdai Powers 10/2020
/1
Corrosion Engineering Manager, Document Approver Lee Haynes 09/2020
Standards Engineering Supervisor Matt Davidson 10/2020
09
Corrosion Engineering Principal Corrosion Engineer Preston Ford 10/2020
M&C Director Erik Kurtz 10/2020
Various Various Corrosion Tech Team 09/2020
ed
Approvers: Patrick Chu, John Heflin, Tuesdai Powers, Lee Haynes
at

er
6. Cost Information
NA
en
G

Effective Date: Effective upon publication. There is no change in process or requirements.
Communication will be a 5MM to clarify that personnel continue to refer to TD-4188P-01 for customer
F
connected meters and risers.

PD
8. Cancellations
NA

Page 364
p365

Systems
TD-4188P-02, Rev. 1a
21
20
4/
/1
Management
09
Distribution)

ed
Engineering
at
and Distribution)
Distribution)
er

Management
en
G
F
PD

Page 365
p366

Systems
TD-4188P-02, Rev. 1a
21
☐ Coatings ☐ Asset Knowledge Management ☐ Damage Prevention (indicate subtype) 1

☐ Emergency Plans
20
Process
4/
Specifications
/1
☐ System Planning ☐ Measurement and Regulation (M&R)
09
☐ Plastic

ed
Examination (NDE)
at
er
en
G
F
PD

Page 366
p367

Atmospheric Corrosion Inspection of Exposed Metallic
Piping Systems
TD-4188P-02, Rev: 1
21
Workflow Revision
20
4/
The document is being revised to remediate the California Public Utilities Commission (CPUC) findings
on spans that used the “Cannot Inspect Checkbox” in Form TD-4188P-02-F01, “Atmospheric
Corrosion Inspection Record,” address a CAP item to incorporate atmospheric inspections of
/1
blowdowns and drips, and add the inspection of station assets.
09
topic?
This revision is rewritten. Key changes include:

ed
Revised steps for inspecting spans that are fully or partially submerged in water. Spans that are
submerged will be re-inspected on a quarterly basis, and after a year, if the span is still
submerged, it will be changed to an unintentional span per Utility Procedure TD-4813P-01,
“Gas Transmission Pipelines Reduced Cover Evaluation.”
at
 Updated the term Corrosion Services to Corrosion Field Support.

er
 Removed the checkbox “Cannot Inspect” from Form TD-4188P-02-F01, "Atmospheric

Corrosion Inspection Report.”
en
 Removed references to the “Cannot Inspect” checkbox in Form TD-4188P-02-F01 from the
procedure.
 Removed “Reviewed by” section from Form TD-4188P-02-F01.

G
 Added blowdowns and drips to the Summary section to address a CAP item which states these
assets are not being inspected from an atmospheric corrosion perspective.
F
 Added stations to Step 1.3 and Section 3, “Inspecting Piping Systems in Station,” to document
PD
inspection of the entire station from an atmospheric corrosion perspective versus a document
for each asset in a station.
NA

Page 367
p368

Piping Systems
TD-4188P-02, Rev: 1
21
20
(or reason if NA)
Corrosion Engineering Document Steward Patrick Chu 10/2018
Standards Engineering Document Coordinator John Heflin 10/2018
4/
Standards Engineering Lead Engineer Jerrod Meier 01/2019
Corrosion Engineering Document Approver Kevin Armato 10/2018
/1
Process Safety Stephen Sass 11/2018
Expert
09
Supervisor, Construction Records
Quality Management Kevin Lieberman 01/2019
QC
Operator Qualification Supervisor, Gas Qualification Todd Peralta 10/2018
Business System Specialist,
ed
Gas Strategy and Solutions Jay Leyno 10/2018
Expert
PG&E Academy Supervisor, Technical Training Melissa Christensen 10/2018
Regulatory Compliance NA - no support needed from regulatory compliance
at
As-Built Records NA – does not affect as-built documents

Regulatory Compliance NA – no previous regulatory compliance commitment
er

en

GPOM Gas Control Technician Phil Fazio 02/2018
GPOM Gas Control Technician Michael Bell 03/2017
G
GPOM Apprentice Gas Control Technician Kai Horlacher 04/2017

GPOM Supervisor, Gas T&D Pipeline O&M Bill Nunes 08/2018
GPOM Supervisor, Gas Transmission & Distribution Tom Nguyen 08/2018
F
GPOM Gas Transmission O&M Specialist Mike Thomas 08/2018

PD
GPOM Gas Qualification Specialist, Senior Mark Higginbotham 08/2018

Approvers: John Heflin, Patrick Chu, Jerrod Meier, Kevin Armato
NA

Page 368
p369

Piping Systems
TD-4188P-02, Rev: 1
21
20
4/
/1
09
ed
at
er
en
G
F
PD

Page 369
p370
DOCUMENT NAME: Atmospheric Corrosion Inspection of Exposed Metallic Piping Systems
21
DOCUMENT NUMBER: TD-4188P-02 Revision Number 1
20
4/
What is changing?
This utility procedure is rewritten. Key changes include:
/1
 Revised steps for inspecting spans that are fully or partially submerged in water. Spans that are
submerged will be re-inspected on a quarterly basis, and after a year, if the span is still submerged, it
09
will be changed to an unintentional span per Utility Procedure TD-4813P-01, “Gas Transmission
Pipelines Reduced Cover Evaluation.”
 Updated the term Corrosion Services to Corrosion Field Support.

ed
 Removed the checkbox “Cannot Inspect” from Form TD-4188P-02-F01, “Atmospheric Corrosion
Inspection Report.”
 Removed references to the “Cannot Inspect” checkbox in Form TD-4188P-02-F01 from the
at
procedure.
 Removed “Reviewed by” section from Form TD-4188P-02-F01.

er
 Added blowdowns and drips to the Summary section to address a CAP item which states these
assets are not being inspected from an atmospheric corrosion perspective.
en
 Added stations to Step 1.3 and Section 3, “Inspecting Piping Systems in Station,” to document
inspection of the entire station from an atmospheric corrosion perspective versus a document for
each asset in a station.
G
Why does it matter?

This utility procedure is being revised to remediate California Public Utilities Commission (CPUC) findings
F
on spans that used the “Cannot Inspect” checkbox in Form TD-4188P-02-01, addressed a CAP item to
incorporate atmospheric inspections of blowdowns and drips, and added the inspection of station assets.
PD
Required Action
Target audience personnel must review and become familiar with the content of this utility procedure and
changes made to the accompanying form.
Tools and Training

NA

Page 370
p371
Timeline
21
Date Activity
20
4/
/1
09
ed
at
er
en
G
F
PD

Page 371
p372
Natural Gas Pipe Wrap and Flange Gasket Removal, Handling, and Disposal
SUMMARY
21
This utility standard addresses work scope, methods, training, roles and responsibilities,
compliance and regulations, and medical program requirements for removing, handling, and
disposing of the materials listed below to comply with California and federal regulations,
20
including California Division of Occupational Safety and Health Administration (Cal/OSHA) and
the Department of Toxic Substances Control.
This utility standard and its associated procedures apply to the following materials:
4/
 Asphaltic pipe wrap:
/1
 Asphaltic pipe wrap installed prior to 1972 may contain asbestos.
09
 Asphaltic pipe wrap regardless of year contains polynuclear aromatic
hydrocarbons (PAHs), trace metals (such as lead), and other contaminants.
 Flange gaskets
ed
This utility standard and its associated procedures do not apply to:
 Handling or replacing valve packing that may contain asbestos.

at
 Handling or disposing of pipe with asphaltic pipe wrap still attached.

er
TARGET AUDIENCE
en
The target audience comprises gas personnel (employees and contractors) involved in
designing, removing, handling, mapping, or disposing of asphaltic pipe wrap or gaskets. This
includes:
G
 Personnel who remove, handle, or dispose of asphaltic pipe wrap or gaskets that
contain or may contain asbestos. Such personnel include:
F
 Gas general construction personnel


PD
Maintenance and construction personnel

 Gas pipeline operations and maintenance personnel
 Gas field services personnel
 Personnel who perform tasks related to asphaltic pipe wrap and flange gasket removal,
handling, and disposal but do not handle asbestos-containing material. Such
personnel include:
 Gas engineering and estimating personnel

 Gas mapping personnel
Page 372
p373
Target Audience (continued)
21
 Environmental field specialists
 Field safety personnel
20
 Industrial hygienists
SAFETY
4/
Both asbestos and PAHs are known carcinogens. Inhalation or ingestion of these materials
has been linked to cancer.
/1
Exposure to asbestos can cause:
09
Respiratory disease (asbestosis)
 Mesothelioma
 Lung cancer
ed
PAH dermal exposure can cause skin irritation; and when PAHs are ingested or inhaled, they
may cause cancer.
at
TABLE OF CONTENTS
er

en
1 General Requirements ...................................................................................... 2

2 Training Requirements ...................................................................................... 3
3 Medical Program Requirements ........................................................................ 5
G
4 Roles and Responsibilities ................................................................................ 6

5 Record Retention .............................................................................................. 8
F
PD
REQUIREMENTS
1.1 This utility standard and its associated procedures apply only to asphaltic pipe wrap and
gasket removal work for which current and valid negative exposure assessments (NEAs) are
on file. Per Cal/OSHA regulations and guidelines, a separate NEA is required for asphaltic
pipe wrap work and for gasket work. The NEAs are available in the Technical Information
Library (TIL).
Page 373
p374
1.2 NEAs are performed by a certified industrial hygienist (CIH) or qualified consultant
(certified asbestos consultant).
21
1.3 The NEAs must be updated and on file within 12 months of the date of the previous NEA.
Safety, health, and environmental personnel work with gas operations personnel to collect
20
samples and complete the NEAs.
1.4 Cal/OSHA categorizes asbestos work under four classifications. This utility standard and
accompanying procedures apply only to Class II and Class III asbestos work, as described in
4/
Table 1.
/1
1. There is no difference in scope between Class II and Class III for handling asphaltic
pipe wrap and gaskets.
09
1.5 Gas personnel who handle asphaltic pipe wrap or flange gaskets that potentially contain
asbestos must be trained in accordance with Section 2, “Training Requirements,” of this utility
standard before beginning asphaltic pipe wrap or gasket removal work.
ed
1.6 Personnel are not required to hold an operator qualification (OQ) to remove asphaltic pipe
wrap. However, pipe wrap removal is normally part of pipe preparation to apply pipe coating.
For covered task information, including dates available and effective dates, consult the Guide
to Operator Qualifications in the Technical Information Library (TIL) or contact the Gas
at
Qualifications department.
er
1.7 Asbestos-contaminated (or potentially contaminated) debris generated during work performed
must be disposed of following federal and state regulations:

en
California State Board of Equalization, Hazardous Waste Fee Health and Safety Code,
Chapter 6.5: “Hazardous Waste Control,” Article 2: “Definitions,” Section (§) 25121.3,
“Remote site”
G
 Hazardous Waste Fee Health and Safety Code, Chapter 6.5: “Hazardous Waste
Control,” Article 6: “Transportation,” §25163.3, “Remote site; exemption from manifest
requirements”
F
 Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) Title 40, Protection of Environment, Part 262—
PD
Standards Applicable to Generators of Hazardous Waste, Subpart B—“Manifest

Requirements Applicable to Small and Large Quantity Generators,” §262.20, “General
requirements”
2 Training Requirements
2.1 Training must be provided before personnel perform any physical work, and personnel must
take a refresher course annually thereafter (within 12 months of completing last training).
Page 374
p375
2.2 To remove asbestos-containing asphaltic pipe wrap or gaskets, which includes taking
samples, personnel must, at a minimum, be trained in a Class II or Class III course and must
21
complete the annual refresher. These courses are:
 SAFE-0135 (initial 8-hour course), “Asbestos-Pipe Wrap and Gasket Initial”
20
 SAFE-0136 (annual 4-hour refresher course), “Asbestos-Pipe Wrap and Gasket
Refresher”
4/
2.3 To handle bagged and sealed waste, personnel must complete one of the following awareness
courses:
/1
 ENVR-0100, “Hazardous Materials and Waste General Awareness”
09
 ENVR-0100WBT, “Hazardous Materials and Waste Awareness Training for Field
Personnel”
2.4 To transport hazardous waste greater than 10 pounds, personnel must complete the following
ed
training class:
 ENVR-9029WBT, “Hazardous Material Transportation”

at
2.5 Refer to Table 1 for specific training course requirements.

er
Table 1. Required Training Based on Work Classification

Asbestos Work
Class Content PG&E Course
Classification
en
 Information about asbestos and its various forms and uses

 Information about its potential health effects
 Locations of asbestos and suspect materials in the work
G
area SAFE-0135,
 Recognition of damage to asbestos-containing material “Asbestos-Pipe Wrap
and Gasket Initial,”
 How smoking might exacerbate health effects of asbestos 8-hour initial course,
F
exposure and availability of smoking cessation programs instructor-led

Class II  Proper methods for handling asbestos-containing material
PD
and (wet method)

Class III
1 SAFE-0136 “Asbestos-
 Information on the use and limitations of respiratory Pipe Wrap and Gasket
protection Refresher,” 4-hour
 In the initial course only, hands-on training on personal refresher course,
protective equipment (PPE) and work practices instructor-led or web-
based, annual
 Provisions of the Cal/OSHA regulations
 Warning that PAHs are found in all asphaltic material and
are listed in the Proposition 65 list of chemicals known to
the state of California to cause cancer
1
There is no difference in scope between Class II and Class III for handling asphaltic pipe wrap and gaskets.
Page 375
p376
3 Medical Program Requirements
21
3.1 Refer to Utility Standard SAFE-2004S, “Asbestos Standard,” for information on medical
programs for asbestos exposure surveillance.
20
3.2 The requirements associated with medical surveillance are listed below:
 California Code of Regulations (CCR) Title 8, Industrial Relations, Subchapter 4,

“Construction Safety Orders,” Article 4, “Dusts, Fumes, Mists, Vapors, and Gases,”
4/
§1529(m)(1)(A) requires that PG&E institute a medical surveillance program for all
employees who are engaged in Class I, Class II, and Class III work for 30 or more days
/1
per year OR are exposed at or above the permissible exposure limit (PEL).
 Per SAFE-2004S and Cal/OSHA regulations, any day in which a worker engages in
09
Class II or Class III operations on intact material for 1 hour or less (taking into account
the entire time spent on the removal operation, including cleanup) is not counted as
1 day.
ed
 CCR Title 8 §1529(m)(1)(A), Appendix D, “Medical Questionnaires Mandatory,” states:
“This mandatory appendix contains the medical questionnaires that must be
administered to all employees who are exposed to asbestos above the permissible
exposure limit, and who will therefore be included in their employer's medical
at
surveillance program.”
er
 Contractors are responsible for instituting a medical surveillance program for their
employees, per Cal/OSHA regulations.
en
3.3 PG&E is not required to perform medical surveillance based on the requirements in Step 3.2
for the following reasons:
 Removing gaskets (after flange face is separated) and cleaning up takes typically less
G
than 1 hour and therefore is not counted as 1 day.
 Based on an analysis documented in a PG&E white paper, “Data Analysis of Pipe

F
Wrap Asbestos Results: January 2014 – December 2017,” PG&E personnel are not
exposed for 30 days or more in a particular year.
PD
 CCR Title 8 §1529(m)(1)(A), Appendix D, requires medical questionnaires only when

employees are exposed to asbestos above the PEL. Step 3.4 and Step 3.5 of this utility
standard demonstrate that PG&E personnel who remove asphaltic pipe wrap and
gaskets are not exposed to asbestos above the PEL.
Page 376
p377
3.3 (continued)
21
 The NEAs performed from 2014 to 2017 contain objective data (per CCR Title 8
§1529(f)(2)(C)(1)) demonstrating that removal of asbestos-containing asphaltic pipe
wrap and gaskets does not generate airborne asbestos fibers in concentrations
20
exceeding the time-weighted average and excursion limit. Data includes air monitoring
conducted during dry handling, removal, and disposal as well as grinding and burning
off residue. The conclusion is supported by the data posted on the American Gas
Association (AGA) website.
4/
3.4 Supporting documentation shows that personnel who remove gaskets and asphaltic pipe wrap
/1
are not exposed to asbestos above the PEL, as listed below:
1. An AGA white paper, “Assessment of Asbestos Fiber Release and Asbestos Fiber
09
Exposure During Mechanical Removal of Coal Tar Wrapped Natural Gas Pipelines
(June 5, 2003),” states that working with pipe wrap in gas operations does not release
asbestos above the PEL.
ed
2. Historical assessments performed show that exposures from removing pipe wrap and
gaskets are below the PEL (CCR Title 8 §1529(c)) because of the following:
a. Pipe continues to be removed or deactivated in the system, which decreases

at
the amount of asbestos-containing pipe and lessens asbestos exposure. As a

result, it is increasingly difficult to find pipe wrap that contains asbestos (less
er
than 4% of the pipe wrap tested by the primary laboratory from 2014 to 2017
contained asbestos).
en
b. Assessments of airborne asbestos exposure during gasket removal show that

exposure is below the PEL when proper work practices, such as the wet
method, are used. See the NEAs, located in the TIL.
G
3. Training personnel in best practices, such as the wet method, further reduces
exposure.
F
3.5 A medical exam is available to employees upon exiting the company if an employee indicates
that asbestos-containing material might have been disturbed or removed as part of their job
PD
duties.
4 Roles and Responsibilities
4.1 Gas operations directors:
1. Ensure that the right resources, processes, and technologies are in place to support
the overall goals of this utility standard and its associated procedures.
Page 377
p378
4.1 (continued)
21
2. Allocate funding and work resources for annual gasket and asphaltic pipe wrap
removal NEAs.
20
3. Ensure personnel are properly profiled for the required training.
4.2 Gas operations managers, superintendents, and supervisors:
4/
1. Provide necessary resources (i.e., personnel, tools, equipment, and reports) to support
the overall goals of this utility standard and its associated procedures.
/1
2. Ensure personnel have completed required training prior to work that potentially
exposes them to asbestos.
09
3. Provide appropriate resources and materials for asphaltic pipe wrap removal and
gasket handling.
ed
4.3 Gas operations field personnel:
1. Complete required training prior to work that potentially exposes them to asbestos.
at
2. Handle potential asbestos material per training and procedures under this standard.
3. Complete all documentation legibly, accurately, and thoroughly.

er
4. If an asphaltic pipe wrap sample is to be taken, collect asphaltic pipe wrap samples for
asbestos analysis, submit samples to laboratory, and provide sample information on
en
the chain of custody form and in the job package.
5. Dispose of asphaltic pipe wrap and/or gaskets in proper waste containers in a timely
G
manner.
6. Add visual documentation (e.g., metal tag) to reworked flange connections to show that
F
gasket installed contains no asbestos.

PD
4.4 Gas engineering and estimating personnel:
1. Determine year pipe was installed.
2. If pipe was installed before 1972, add a note to the drawing to remove asphaltic pipe
wrap, per Utility Procedure TD-4711P-01, “Gas Asphaltic Pipe Wrap Removal,
Handling, and Disposal.”
3. Indicate on drawing any known previous asbestos results.
Page 378
p379
4.5 Gas mapping personnel:
21
1. If requested, assist foremen or field engineers to determine the year the pipe was
installed.
20
4.6 Document owner:
1. Monitor NEAs to ensure they are performed, current, and uploaded in the TIL.
4/
4.7 Environmental personnel:
/1
1. Support field projects to determine when it is cost effective to take a sample, track the
sample, and manage the results.
09
2. Oversee handling, transportation, and disposal of potential asbestos-containing
material.
4.8 Curriculum development and training delivery personnel:

ed
1. Review and update asbestos training as needed.
2. Maintain training records for required period (12 months after last day of employment).
at
5 Record Retention
er
5.1 Retain records per the Record Retention Schedule.
5.2 All training records must be maintained per Utility Standard SAFE-2004S and per Company
en
records management requirements. A worker’s training records must be kept for 12 months
after the worker’s last date of employment.
G
END of Requirements
DEFINITIONS
F
Asbestos: A mineral that breaks down into small fibers (like strands in a rope). Asbestos is
PD
listed in Proposition 65 documents and is known to the state of California to cause cancer.
When asbestos-containing materials are damaged or disturbed, microscopic fibers become
airborne and can be inhaled into the lungs, where they can cause significant health problems.
Asbestos was commonly used in a wide range of manufactured goods (such as roofing
shingles, asphaltic pipe wrap, gaskets, and automobile brakes).
Asphaltic pipe wrap: Heat-applied coal tar wrap used to prevent corrosion.
Class II asbestos work: Activities involving the removal of asbestos-containing material that
is not thermal system insulation or surfacing material. This includes, but is not limited to, the
removal of asbestos-containing wallboard, floor tile and sheeting, roofing and siding shingles,
and construction mastics (includes asphaltic pipe wrap and gaskets).
Page 379
p380
21
Class III asbestos work: Repair and maintenance operations where asbestos-containing
material is likely to be disturbed (e.g., removing asphaltic pipe wrap and flange gaskets).
20
Gaskets: Compressible sheets or rings used to make a leak-resistant seal between two
surfaces.
Mesothelioma: A type of cancer that spreads rapidly in the cells of membranes covering the
4/
lungs and body organs.
/1
Negative exposure assessment (NEA): A demonstration that personnel exposure during an
operation is expected to be consistently below the permissible exposure limits. An NEA must
be conducted at least annually.
09
Permissible exposure limit (PEL): Maximum allowable exposure. The PEL for asbestos
concentration is 0.1 fibers per cubic centimeter (f/cc) of air as an 8-hour time-weighted
average. The excursion limit (maximum exposure over a short period of time) is 1 asbestos
ed
fiber per cubic centimeter of air averaged over 30 minutes.
Polynuclear aromatic hydrocarbon (PAH): PAHs are byproducts of petroleum processing or

combustion. PAHs are typically components of asphalts, fuels, oils, heavy petroleum, and
at
asphaltic materials. PAHs might pose a skin hazard and when ingested or inhaled might cause
cancer.
er
Wet method: Using amended (soapy) water, ABC fiber spray/encapsulate, or other methods
to adequately wet material to ensure fibers do not become airborne.
en
Document owner will send an email from Standards Engineering to all personnel who have
G
taken the training courses, and to their leaders, stating that this utility standard is published.
GOVERNING DOCUMENT
F

PD
California Code of Regulations (CCR) Title 8, Industrial Relations, Subchapter 4, “Construction

Safety Orders,” Article 4, “Dusts, Fumes, Mists, Vapors, and Gases,” Section 1529, “Asbestos”
California Code of Regulations (CCR) Title 8, Industrial Relations, Subchapter 7, Group 16,
Article 109, Section 5194, Part (h), “Employee Information and Training”
Article 110, Section 5208, “Asbestos”
Page 380
p381
Compliance Requirement / Regulatory Commitment (continued)
21
Chapter 6.5: “Hazardous Waste Control,” Article 2: “Definitions,” Section 25121.3, “Remote
Site”
20
Chapter 6.5: “Hazardous Waste Control,” Article 6: “Transportation,” Section 25163.3,
“Remote site; exemption from manifest requirements”
4/
Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) Title 29, Labor, Part 1910—Occupational Safety and
/1
Health Standards, Subpart Z—“Toxic and Hazardous Substances,” Section 1910.1001,
“Asbestos”
09
Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) Title 40, Protection of Environment, Part 262—Standards
Applicable to Generators of Hazardous Waste, Subpart B—“Manifest Requirements Applicable
to Small and Large Quantity Generators,” Section 262.20, “General requirements”
ed
Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) Title 40, Protection of Environment, Part 763—Asbestos,
Subpart E—“Asbestos-Containing Materials in Schools,” Section 763.92, “Training and
periodic surveillance”
at
REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
er
Safety Procedure 227, “Asbestos Program”

en
American Gas Association web page “Asbestos and Coal Tar Pipe Wrap"
American Gas Association white paper “Assessment of Asbestos Fiber Release and Asbestos
G
Fiber Exposure During Mechanical Removal of Coal Tar Wrapped Natural Gas Pipelines (June
5, 2003),” February 10–11, 2003, by Peter S.J. Lees, PhD, CIH.
F
Code of Safe Practices

PD
Utility Procedure TD-4711P-02, “Flange Gaskets–Removal, Handling, and Disposal”
PG&E Negative Exposure Assessments, available in the TIL
PG&E white paper, “Data Analysis of Pipe Wrap Asbestos Results: January 2014 – December
2017,” (available in the TIL)
PG&E white paper, “Historical/Reference Gas Construction Pipe Wrap and Related Asbestos
Information,” (available in the TIL)
Page 381
p382
21
Utility Procedure TD-4711P-01, “Gas Asphaltic Pipe Wrap Removal, Handling, and Disposal”
20
APPENDICES
NA
4/
ATTACHMENTS
/1
NA
09
DOCUMENT RECISION
and Disposal,” published 04/01/2015, Rev. 0
ed
DOCUMENT APPROVER
Kcammee Vreman, Director, Safety, Quality and Contracts Management

at
DOCUMENT OWNER
er
Stephanie Uhlich, Gas Engineer, Standards Engineering
DOCUMENT CONTACT
en

G
(Document contact may change after publication. To find the current document contact, see
the Gas Standards and Procedures Responsibility List.)
F
PD
Page 382
p383
REVISION NOTES
21
Throughout This was a major rewrite of this standard. The high-level changes are listed
below:
20
 Simplified content where possible.
 Removed reference to Class IV asbestos work and required training.
 Added reference to PG&E white paper, “Data Analysis of Pipe Wrap
4/
Asbestos Results: January 2014 – December 2017,” to further
substantiate that PG&E is not required to perform medical surveillance.
/1
 Updated roles and responsibilities of field personnel, gas engineering
and estimating personnel, and gas mapping personnel to reflect that it
09
is no longer required to always collect a pipe wrap sample for statistical
analysis of employee exposure.
 Removed responsibilities that are not specific to this utility standard.
ed
at
er
en
G
F
PD
Page 383
p384
Gas Asphaltic Pipe Wrap Removal, Handling, and Disposal
SUMMARY
21
This utility procedure applies to the task of removing, handling, and disposing of asphaltic pipe
wrap AND the disposal of pipe with asphaltic pipe wrap still attached.
20
This utility procedure does not apply to the following:
 Other (non-asphaltic) wrap or coating types or other materials that may contain asbestos.
4/
 Removing and handling asphaltic pipe wrap while wearing a respirator.
/1
Asphaltic pipe wrap may contain asbestos or polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBs), which are
hazardous materials. All asphaltic pipe wrap contains polynuclear aromatic hydrocarbons
(PAHs) as well as trace metals (such as lead), and other contaminants, which are also
09
hazardous.

ed
TARGET AUDIENCE
Gas personnel (employees and contractors) involved in designing, removing, handling,

mapping, or disposing of natural gas asphaltic pipe wrap are the target audience. This
at
includes:
 Personnel who remove, handle, or dispose of asphaltic pipe wrap that contains or may
er
contain asbestos and who are required to complete training before removing, handling,
or disposing of asphaltic pipe wrap that may contain asbestos. Such personnel include:
en
 Gas general construction personnel

 Maintenance and construction personnel
G
 Gas pipeline operations and maintenance personnel

 Gas field services personnel
F
 Personnel who perform tasks related to asphaltic pipe wrap removal, handling, and
disposal but do not handle asbestos-containing asphaltic pipe wrap. Such personnel
PD
include:
 Gas engineering and estimating personnel

 Gas mapping personnel
 Construction management personnel
 Project management personnel
 Environmental field specialists
 Field safety personnel
 Industrial hygienists
Page 384
p385
SAFETY
21
Asbestos, PAHs, and PCBs are known carcinogens. Inhalation or ingestion of these materials
has been linked to cancer.
20
 Respiratory disease (asbestosis)


4/
Mesothelioma
 Lung cancer
/1
PAH and PCB dermal exposure can cause skin irritation; and when PAHs and PCBs are
ingested or inhaled, they may cause cancer.
09
BEFORE YOU START
Training Requirements
ed
To remove asphaltic pipe wrap that contains or potentially contains asbestos, at a minimum,
personnel must be trained in a Class II or Class III course and must complete the annual
refresher. These courses are:
at
 SAFE-0135 (initial 8-hour course), “Asbestos Pipe Wrap and Gasket Initial”
er
 SAFE-0136 (annual 4-hour refresher course), “Asbestos Pipe Wrap and Gasket
Refresher”
en
To handle bagged and sealed waste, personnel must complete one of the following awareness
courses:

G
ENVR-0100, “Hazardous Materials and Waste General Awareness”
 ENVR-0100WBT, “Hazardous Materials and Waste General Awareness”

F
To transport any amount of hazardous waste, employees must complete the following training
PD
class:
 ENVR-9029WBT, “Hazardous Material Transportation”
Operator Qualifications
No operator qualification is required for removing asphaltic pipe wrap. However, pipe wrap
removal is normally included in pipe preparation to weld and apply pipe coating. For covered
task information, including dates available and effective dates, consult the Guide to Operator
Qualifications in the Technical Information Library (TIL) or contact the Gas Qualifications
department.
Page 385
p386
Personal Protective Equipment
21
Personnel implementing this procedure must reference and use equipment listed in the Gas
Operations Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) Matrix.
20
In addition to the PPE Matrix, a face shield may be needed if personnel are removing wrap
directly below the pipe.
Tools and Equipment
4/
Personnel following this procedure may use, but are not limited to, the following tools and
equipment (see Attachment 1, “Asphaltic Pipe Wrap and Gasket Material Code List,” for
/1
material codes):
09
For removal of any asphaltic pipe wrap, including pipe installed in 1972 or later or pipe with a
negative asbestos result:
 Six milli-inches (mil) or thicker plastic drop cloth

ed
 Fiberlock ABC Fiberspray asbestos encapsulant OR sprayer containing soapy water
 Non-sparking brass hammer

at
 Approved knife to ring or score asphaltic pipe wrap

er
 Approved hand tools to scrape asphaltic pipe wrap residue from pipe
en
 Disposable rags
Additional tools and equipment for removal of pre-1972 asphaltic pipe with a positive or
unknown asbestos result include:
G
 “Danger, Asbestos” barricade tape or sign(s) to designate asbestos regulated area

F
 Six mil or thicker large plastic bags to store debris

PD
 Asbestos waste label and tags
 White plastic bucket, 3.5-gallon or 5-gallon, with removable lid
 Class 9 Department of Transportation (DOT) asbestos shipping labels
 DOT “Hazardous Waste” and “Non-Hazardous Waste” label
Page 386
p387
Tools and Equipment (continued)
21
Additional tools and equipment for taking a sample:
 Six mil or thicker plastic sampling bag
20
 Chain of custody form
 Mailing envelope
4/
TABLE OF CONTENTS
/1
09
1 General ............................................................................................................. 4
2 Determining Whether Asphaltic Pipe Wrap Contains Asbestos ......................... 7
ed
3 Removing Asphaltic Pipe Wrap That Has No Asbestos ..................................... 8
4 Establishing a Regulated Area ........................................................................ 10
at
5 Removing Asphaltic Pipe Wrap When Asbestos Is Present or Unknown ......... 11

6 Pipe With Asphaltic Pipe Wrap ........................................................................ 12
er
7 Waste Labeling, Accumulation, Storage, and Disposal .................................... 13

8 Exceptions for Keyhole Technology Operations .............................................. 15
en
9 Records........................................................................................................... 15
G
PROCEDURE STEPS
1 General
F
1.1 Asphaltic pipe wrap is the only gas pipe coating installed in the Pacific Gas and Electric
PD
Company (PG&E or Company) gas system that potentially contains asbestos.
1.2 Asphaltic pipe wrap installed prior to 1972 may contain asbestos.
1. Test results from SGS Forensic Laboratories indicate less than 5% of the pre-1972
asphaltic pipe wrap contains asbestos (PG&E white paper, “Data Analysis of Pipe
Wrap Asbestos Results: January 2014 – December 2017”).
1.3 Asbestos has been found in asphaltic pipe wrap on PG&E gas transmission lines, distribution
main, service lines, and service risers.
Page 387
p388
1.4 The difference between removing pipe wrap that contains asbestos and removing pipe wrap
that does not contain asbestos is the use of a regulated area, sample collection,
21
decontamination, and specialized waste disposal.
1.5 All asphaltic pipe wrap potentially contains PAHs, PCBs, trace metals (such as lead), and
20
other contaminants.
1. Using the wet method and following this procedure to remove the asphaltic pipe wrap
protects personnel from exposure to these components.
4/
1.6 Asbestos test results apply to segments of pipe with the same pipe installation year, pipe
/1
diameter, and installation (original) project management (PM) number. Different types of wrap
might have been used on different diameter pipe and installation jobs.
09
1.7 After removing any asphaltic pipe wrap, practice good hygiene, including washing hands
before performing the following activities:
 Eating
ed
 Drinking
 Applying cosmetics (including lip balm or sunscreen)

at
 Smoking or chewing tobacco

er
 Using personal electronic devices (such as phones or tablets)
 Driving a company or personal vehicle

en
 Other hand-to-mouth activities

G
1.8 Before leaving work site:
 Wet-wipe boots.
F
 Wipe down clothing as much as possible.

PD
 Wash hands.
Page 388
p389
1.9 See Figure 1 for an overview of the process depending on the year the pipe was installed and
the asbestos test results.
21
6
5
2 3 4 Remove pipe wrap per
Establish a regulated
1 Pipe installed Asphaltic pipe Negative Section 5, “Removing
20
YES YES NO area per Section 4
START before 1972? wrap? asbestos test? Asphaltic Pipe Wrap
“Establishing a
When Asbestos Is
Regulated Area”
Present or Unknown”
NO
NO
4/
7
YES
Exit this procedure
/1
NO
10
9
8 Label, transport, and
Remove pipe wrap per
09
Asphaltic pipe dispose of waste per
YES Section 3,“Removing
wrap? Section 6, “Waste
Asphaltic Pipe Wrap
Labeling, Accumulation,
That Has No Asbestos”
Storage, and Disposal”
ed
11
END
at
Figure 1. Process Overview
1.10 If using keyhole technology, refer to Section 7, “Exceptions for Keyhole Technology
er
Operations,” for keyhole exceptions that apply throughout the procedure.
1.11 An asphaltic pipe wrap sample is not required for all jobs.
en
1.12 An asphaltic pipe wrap sample may be required in some situations, such as:
 When the environmental field specialist (EFS) requests a sample

G
 To minimize hazardous waste pipe disposal during large pipe-removal jobs

F
To avoid having to set up a regulated area with signage and barricades for long-
duration jobs
PD
 To eliminate asbestos signage and barricades that customers may find unsettling
Page 389
p390
2 Determining Whether Asphaltic Pipe Wrap Contains Asbestos
21
2.1 For unplanned work, including emergency response activities, the foreman or field engineer
performs the following or asks mapping personnel for assistance:
20
1. Review the geographic information system (GIS) data, plat maps, or historical as-built
drawings (including construction drawings and gas service records [GSRs]) to
determine the year the pipe was installed.
4/
2. IF aware of previous asbestos sampling,
/1
THEN review GIS or historical data for previous results.
3. Relay this information to field personnel performing the work.
09
2.2 For scheduled work, engineering or estimating personnel perform the following actions:
1. Review GIS data, plat maps, or historical as-built drawings (including construction
ed
drawings and GSRs) to determine the year the pipe was installed and any historical
asbestos sampling results.
a. IF pipe was installed before 1972,

at
THEN include in the notes on the drawing that pre-1972 asphaltic pipe wrap
with positive or unknown test results must be removed according to this
er
procedure.
en
2. IF aware of previous asbestos sampling,
THEN review GIS or historical data for previous results and note on the drawing any
previous positive or negative results.
G
2.3 For both planned and unplanned work, field personnel perform the following actions:
F
1. IF, upon excavation, it is determined the pipe is NOT coated with asphaltic pipe wrap,
PD
THEN exit this utility procedure.
2. IF pipe was installed on or after 1972 OR there is a negative asbestos result,
THEN proceed to Section 3, “Removing Asphaltic Pipe Wrap That Has No Asbestos.”
3. IF pipe was installed before 1972 AND there is a positive or unknown asbestos result,
THEN proceed to Section 4, “Establishing a Regulated Area.”
Page 390
p391
3 Removing Asphaltic Pipe Wrap That Has No Asbestos
21
Field personnel perform the steps in this section.
20
WARNING
Ingesting or inhaling asphaltic pipe wrap is a form of exposure to PAHs and PCBs.
4/
PAHs and PCBs are listed in PG&E’s “Proposition 65 Employee Warning” document.
All asphaltic pipe wrap contains PAHs. Hand-to-mouth activities and inhalation of
asphaltic fumes increase exposure.
/1
3.1 Use approved construction practices, listed below, and PG&E-approved hand tools to remove
09
asphaltic pipe wrap.
1. Place 6 mil plastic drop cloth on a horizontal surface under pipe or in a position by
which it can collect all removed wrap.
ed
2. Wet asphaltic pipe wrap with Fiberlock ABC Fiberspray asbestos encapsulant OR with
a sprayer containing soapy water.
at
WARNING
er
Keeping the asphaltic pipe wrap wet protects personnel from potential airborne
fibers. This not only reduces potential exposure to asbestos but also PAHs, PCBs,
en
and other contaminants that may be present in the asphaltic pipe wrap.
3. Keep the asphaltic pipe wrap wet, using the wet method during the entire removal
G
process until all waste is bagged.
4. Keep asphaltic pipe wrap intact as much as possible. Do not crumble or pulverize the
removed pipe wrap.
F
PD
5. Ring or score the asphaltic pipe wrap so that when the pipe wrap is broken it stops at
the score. See Figure 2.
6. Remove pipe wrap section to a point where the remaining pipe wrap is well-bonded
and of normal thickness, minimizing the amount of wrap removed.
7. Square-cut the ends of the existing pipe wrap.
8. Using a non-sparking brass hammer, strike pipe wrap until it releases from pipe.
9. Scrape pipe wrap residue from pipe by using Company-approved hand tools.
Page 391
p392
3.1 (continued)
21
1. Scoring the 2. Scoring completed
asphaltic pipe wrap
20
4/
/1
3. Spraying 4. Scraping asphaltic
asphaltic pipe wrap pipe wrap by using
often during approved knife
09
removal process
ed
Figure 2. Scoring and Removing Asphaltic Pipe Wrap
at
NOTE
er
Personnel who use an approved respirator and have completed the associated
training may be requested to support asphaltic pipe wrap removal, which is outside
the scope of this procedure.
en
10. Do not remove asphaltic pipe wrap by using the following methods:
a. Power tools
G
b. Sandblasting, grinding, power-wire brushing, manual sanding, compressed air,

or any other method that may create dust that may be inhaled or ingested
F
c. Heat processes that create fumes or particles that may be inhaled or ingested,
PD
such as using an oxyacetylene torch to burn off asphaltic pipe wrap
(1) EXCEPTION: A small amount of residual asphaltic pipe wrap can be

burned, if necessary, to prepare the surface for welding or coating if
done in an open, well-ventilated area.
11. Remove only as much asphaltic pipe wrap as necessary.
3.2 Use disposable rags to wet-wipe tools and remaining pipe area.
Page 392
p393
3.3 Carefully roll up the drop cloth to contain all removed asphaltic pipe wrap and used wetting
solution.
21
3.4 Bag the rolled-up drop cloth and any other rags or debris.
Label and dispose of bagged waste per Section 6, “Waste Labeling, Accumulation, Storage,
20
3.5
and Disposal.”
4 Establishing a Regulated Area
4/
4.1 A regulated area is required any time asphaltic pipe wrap without a negative test is disturbed,
/1
even if it is only to take a sample for testing.
4.2 Establish a regulated area by performing the following steps:
09
1. Establish a boundary that minimizes the number of people who could enter the
regulated area or be exposed to asbestos. Only personnel who have completed an
asbestos Class II or Class III, or higher, course may enter the regulated area.
ed
 The regulated area must have a designated entrance. This can be created with
cones, barricade tape, or any other material that establishes a boundary.
at
 Display “Danger, Asbestos” warning signs OR “Danger, Asbestos” warning

barricade tape around the boundary of the regulated area. The warning signs
and tape must also display “May Cause Cancer. Causes Damage to Lungs.
er
Authorized Personnel Only.” See Attachment 1 for recommended material

codes.
en
 Post signs where they can be read so that any necessary protective action can
be taken before personnel enter the regulated area.
G
2. Place 6 mil (or thicker) polyethylene drop cloth under or around pipe large enough to
collect and contain removed asphaltic pipe wrap and any debris, including rags.
F
a. Use additional layers, as necessary, to ensure any punctures in the drop cloth
will not result in debris-wetting solution spills.
PD
3. If needed, use a second drop cloth for a step-off pad to accomplish tasks that cannot
be performed on the initial drop cloth, such as:
 Holding tools and equipment (e.g., wire brush, disposable rags)

 Decontaminating tools, gloves, and boots
Page 393
p394
5 Removing Asphaltic Pipe Wrap When Asbestos Is Present or Unknown
21
5.1 Ensure the regulated area has been set up per Section 4, “Establishing a Regulated Area.”
5.2 Follow Attachment 3, “Collecting Asphaltic Pipe Wrap Sample,” if taking an asphaltic pipe wrap
20
sample.
1. Refer to Attachment 2, “Example of Completed Chain of Custody and Forensic

Laboratory Reports,” for samples of completed COC forms and sample forensic
4/
analysis reports.
/1
5.3 Evaluate the asphaltic pipe wrap to be removed to determine the number of 60- by 60-inch
bags that will be needed for disposal.
09
5.4 Follow instructions in Step 3.1 to remove wrap, being careful to not crumble or pulverize
removed asphaltic pipe wrap. ed
WARNING
Failing to keep friable asphaltic pipe wrap wet will result in pipe wrap fibers becoming
at
airborne. Breathing in fibers that contain asbestos may result in asbestosis, lung
cancer, or mesothelioma.
er
1. Use wet methods throughout process by spraying pipe with soapy water or Fiberlock
ABC Fiberspray before, during, and after removal to adequately saturate the wrap and
ensure fibers do not become airborne.
en
5.5 Prior to leaving the regulated area, use disposable rags to wet-wipe contaminated items, such
as tools or footwear, to decontaminate them and prevent secondary exposures.
G
5.6 Keep asphaltic pipe wrap wet until it is placed in debris bag.
F
NOTE
PD
Waste labeling, accumulation, storage, and disposal depends

on whether the asbestos-containing material is friable or non-friable.
5.7 Determine whether asbestos is friable or non-friable. Friable asbestos must be disposed as
hazardous waste. See ENV-4000P-01-JA20, “ Asbestos-Friable,” and ENV-4000P-01-JA21,
“Asbestos-Non-Friable,” for storage, transportation, and disposal of asbestos-containing
materials.
 Friable is material that can be crumbled by hand pressure and is therefore likely to
emit fibers.
 Non-friable is material that cannot be crumbled by hand pressure.
Page 394
p395
5.8 IF it cannot be determined whether the asbestos-containing asphaltic pipe wrap is friable or
non-friable,
21
THEN treat it as friable OR contact EFS for assistance.
20
5.9 Place the debris on the 6 mil thick polyethylene drop cloth. Take care not to track debris off the
drop cloth while working.
5.10 Immediately after asphaltic pipe wrap removal work is complete, carefully roll up the plastic
4/
drop cloth and the step-off pad (if used) to contain all removed asphaltic pipe wrap, disposable
rags used for decontamination, and used wetting solution. Avoid creating air bellows while
/1
rolling up drop cloth.
5.11 Double-bag the rolled-up drop cloth while in the regulated area by following these steps:
09
1. Place rolled-up drop cloth in first debris bag.
2. Handle the debris bag carefully. Do not grip the debris bag in a way that squeezes or
ed
forcibly emits potential air pockets (within the bag) out of the top.
3. Seal the first debris bag so it is leak tight. This can be done by twisting the top of the
bag, taping around it, folding it back on itself, and taping around it again.
at
4. Put the first sealed debris bag inside a second debris bag OR in a plastic bucket with a
sealed lid if removing multiple small amounts of asphaltic pipe wrap in one day as field
er
services personnel do.

5. Seal the second debris bag so it is leak tight.
en
5.12 Label bagged waste per Table 1.
6 Pipe With Asphaltic Pipe Wrap

G
6.1 Use Table 1 to determine how to handle pipe with asphaltic pipe wrap attached.
F
1. To reduce the amount of regulated hazardous waste, asphaltic pipe wrap may be
removed from pipe following this procedure.
PD
6.2 For abandoned pipe, refer to Utility Procedure TD-9500P-16, “Abandonment of Underground
Gas Facilities,” for internal sampling requirements.
Page 395
p396
7 Waste Labeling, Accumulation, Storage, and Disposal
21
7.1 All asphaltic pipe wrap installed before 1979 must be managed as regulated hazardous waste
with a PCB concentration of 50 to 499 ppm until tested and characterized, regardless if it is
negative for asbestos.
20
7.2 Label, store, and transport debris using Table 1 guidelines. Labeling is updated by EFS after
characterization.
4/
7.3 Contact the EFS for accumulation, storage, transportation, and disposal management.
/1
1. IF asbestos sample has been collected,
THEN forward results to EFS.
09
7.4 EFS determines necessary next steps, such as collecting samples for contaminates of
concern.
ed
 EFS disposes of waste appropriately in accordance with Environmental Management
job aid ENV-4000P-01-JA15, “PG&E-Authorized Disposal and Recycling Facilities.”
at
er
en
G
F
PD
Page 396
p397
Table 1. Waste Labeling Requirements

Construction Solid Waste Regulated Hazardous Waste
21
Either of the following:
 1972–1978 asphaltic
pipe wrap, OR Pre-1972 asphaltic pipe wrap with
Requirement 1979 or later asphaltic pipe wrap a positive or unknown asbestos
 Pre-1979 asphaltic
20
test
pipe wrap with a
negative asbestos test
 Utility Procedure ENV-4000P-01, "Hazardous Waste
Storage at Management and Storage Procedure"
4/
Temporary Work NA  Job Aid ENV-4000P-01-JA20, "Job Aid – Asbestos-Friable"
Site  Job Aid ENV-4000P-01-JA21, "Job Aid – Asbestos-Non-
Friable"
/1
Doubled-bagged debris bag, drum, leak-tight bucket, or other
Any container (i.e., debris bag,
Storage Container appropriately sized container (see Utility Procedure ENV-4000P-
drum)
01)
09
Transport off-site at earliest
Transport to central accumulation area of a consolidation site
convenience (within 1 year per
Storage Duration within 10 days from date of waste generation for Class I landfill
PG&E policy) to consolidation site
disposal.
for Class II landfill disposal.
ed
Transportation Utility Procedure ENV-4000P-03, "Remote Waste Transportation
From Remote NA Procedure," including Hazardous Waste Shipping Paper for
1
Work Sites regulated hazardous waste over 10 pounds
Affix the following label to the Affix the following two Affix the following three labels to
at
container: labels to sealed containers: sealed containers:

1. “Non-Hazardous Waste” label
1. “Hazardous Waste” label 1. “Hazardous Waste” label
er
en
 Add PM number and waste

 Add PM number.  Add PM number.
generation date.
G
2. Department of
Transportation (DOT) 2. Department of Transportation
hazard Class 9 label (DOT) hazard Class 9 label
Labeling
F
PD
3. Asbestos waste label
1. Pre-1979 asphaltic pipe wrap with unknown PCB concentration is transported under Assembly Bill (AB) 1448.
Page 397
p398
8 Exceptions for Keyhole Technology Operations
21
8.1 Keyhole technology is the process of making a small excavation (typically 18-inch diameter) to
access buried gas lines for the purpose of locating, inspecting, repairing, maintaining, and
installing gas facilities.
20
8.2 When using keyhole technology, the following exceptions apply:
1. When setting up a regulated area, a designated entrance is not required and drop
4/
cloths are not required to be placed under the pipe.
/1
2. Asphaltic pipe wrap that cannot be readily recovered can be left in the keyhole.
3. Wet method is not required for asphaltic pipe wrap removal.
09
4. Power tools may be used to remove asphaltic pipe wrap.
8.3 As a best practice, remove as much debris as possible from the keyhole equipment before
ed
removing equipment from the keyhole and wet-wiping equipment.
8.4 Dispose of consumable grinding wheels and debris (including material used to wipe down
equipment) as regulated non-hazardous waste (see Table 1).
at
8.5 Follow all other parts of this procedure when using keyhole technology.
er
9 Records

en
END of Instructions
G
DEFINITIONS
Amended (soapy) water: Water to which surfactant (wetting agent) has been added to
F
increase the ability of the liquid to penetrate asbestos-containing material.

PD
listed in Proposition 65 documents and is known to the State of California to cause cancer.
When asbestos-containing materials are damaged or disturbed, microscopic fibers become
airborne and can be inhaled into the lungs, where they can cause significant health problems.
Asbestos was commonly used in a wide range of manufactured goods (such as roofing
shingles, asphaltic pipe wrap, gaskets, and automobile brakes).
Asphaltic pipe wrap: Heat-applied coal tar wrap used to prevent corrosion.
Page 398
p399
21
Class II asbestos work: Activities involving the removal of asbestos-containing material that
is not thermal system insulation or surfacing material. This includes, but is not limited to, the
removal of asbestos-containing wallboard, floor tile and sheeting, roofing and siding shingles,
20
and construction mastics (includes asphaltic pipe wrap and gaskets).
Class III asbestos work: Repair and maintenance operations in which asbestos-containing
material is likely to be disturbed (e.g., removing asphaltic pipe wrap and removing flange
4/
gaskets).
/1
Friable: Any material that can be crumbled by hand pressure when dry.
Mesothelioma: A type of cancer that spreads rapidly in the cells of membranes covering the
09
lungs and body organs.
Non-friable asbestos: Any material that cannot be crumbled by hand pressure when dry.
ed
Polynuclear aromatic hydrocarbon (PAH): PAHs are byproducts of petroleum processing or
combustion. PAHs are typically components of asphalts, fuels, oils, heavy petroleum, and
asphaltic materials. PAHs might pose a skin hazard and when ingested or inhaled might cause
cancer.
at
Wet method: Using amended (soapy) water, Fiberlock ABC Fiberspray asbestos encapsulant,
or other methods to adequately wet material to ensure fibers do not become airborne.
er
en
Document owner will send an email from Standards Engineering to all personnel who have
taken the training courses, and to their leaders, stating that this utility procedure is published.
G
Supervisors of personnel who remove asphaltic pipe wrap will communicate this revised utility
procedure and explain that sampling is no longer required.
F
Environmental personnel will communicate to their teams that samples will be collected only
when requested by them or the project team.
PD
Academy will update required training courses.
Previous versions of Form TD-4711P-01-F01, “Chain of Custody Form – Asbestos PLM

Asphaltic Pipe Wrap Samples Only,” can continue to be used past the effective date.
GOVERNING DOCUMENT
Utility Standard TD-4711S, “Natural Gas Pipe Wrap and Flange Gaskets Removal, Handling,
and Disposal”
Page 399
p400
21
California Code of Regulations (CCR) Title 8, Industrial Relations, Subchapter 4, “Construction
Safety Orders,” Article 4, “Dusts, Fumes, Mists, Vapors, and Gases,” Section 1529, “Asbestos”
20
Article 109, Section 5194, Part (h), “Employee Information and Training”
4/
Article 110, Section 5208, “Asbestos”
/1
Chapter 6.5: “Hazardous Waste Control,” Article 2: “Definitions,” Section 25121.3, “Remote
Site”
09
Chapter 6.5: “Hazardous Waste Control,” Article 6: “Transportation,” Section 25163.3,
“Remote site; exemption from manifest requirements”
ed
Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) Title 29, Labor, Part 1910—Occupational Safety and
Health Standards, Subpart Z—“Toxic and Hazardous Substances,” Section 1910.1001,
“Asbestos”
at
Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) Title 40, Protection of Environment, Part 262—Standards
Applicable to Generators of Hazardous Waste, Subpart B—“Manifest Requirements Applicable
er
to Small and Large Quantity Generators,” Section 262.20, “General requirements”

en
Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) Title 40, Protection of Environment, Part 763—Asbestos,
Subpart E—“Asbestos-Containing Materials in Schools,” Section 763.92, “Training and
periodic surveillance”
G
F
PD
limited to:
 Integrity
 Storage
Page 400
p401
REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
21
American Gas Association web page, “Asbestos and Coal Tar Pipe Wrap”
20
American Gas Association white paper, “Assessment of Asbestos Fiber Release and Asbestos
Fiber Exposure During Mechanical Removal of Coal Tar Wrapped Natural Gas Pipelines (June
5, 2003),” February 10–11, 2003 by Peter S.J. Lees, PhD, Certified Industrial Hygienist
4/
Code of Safe Practices, Section 1310, “Precautions Prior to Welding and Cutting in
Excavations”
/1
PG&E white paper, “Data Analysis of Pipe Wrap Asbestos Results: January 2014 – December
09
2017,” (available in the TIL)
PG&E white paper, “Historical/Reference Gas Construction Pipe Wrap and Related Asbestos
Information,” (available in the TIL)
ed
Utility Procedure ENV-4000P-03, Attachment 6, “PG&E AB 1448 Remote Waste Consolidation
Site Annual Notification Latter”
at
Utility Procedure ENV-4100P-01, “PCB Program Procedure”
Utility Procedure TD-4160P-20, “General Welding Requirements”

er
Utility Standard ENV-4000S, “Hazardous Waste Management Standard”

en

G
Job Aid ENV-4000P-01-JA15, “PG&E-Authorized Disposal and Recycling Facilities”

F
Job Aid ENV-4000P-01-JA20, “Asbestos-Friable”

PD
Job Aid ENV-4000P-01-JA21, “Asbestos-Non-Friable”
Utility Procedure ENV-4000P-01, “Hazardous Waste Management and Storage”
Utility Procedure ENV-4000P-03, “Remote Waste Transportation Procedure”
APPENDICES
NA
Page 401
p402
ATTACHMENTS
21
 Attachment 1, “Asphaltic Pipe Wrap and Gasket Material Code List”
 Attachment 2, “Example of Completed Chain of Custody and Forensic Laboratory
20
Reports”
 Attachment 3, “Collecting Asphaltic Pipe Wrap Samples”
4/
 TD-4711P-01-F01, “Chain of Custody Form – Asbestos PLM Asphaltic Pipe Wrap
Samples Only”
/1
 TD-4711P-01-JA01, “Reviewing Asbestos Lab Reports”
09
DOCUMENT RECISION
and Disposal,” Rev. 0b, published 08/31/2017
ed
DOCUMENT APPROVER
John Gilginas, Manager, Gas Workforce Safety

at
DOCUMENT OWNER
er

en
DOCUMENT CONTACT

G
(Document contact may change after publication. To find the current document contact, see
the Gas Standards and Procedures Responsibility List.)
F
REVISION NOTES
PD

Rev. 1a
Document throughout  Added reference to PCBs as a specific contaminant found in
asphaltic pipe wrap.
Summary and new  Added pipe with asphaltic pipe wrap attached to the scope of this
Section 6 procedure for disposal requirements.
Section 7 (previously  Revised waste labeling, accumulation, storage and disposal
Section 6) requirements for all pre-1979 asphaltic pipe wrap to be treated as
50–499 ppm PCB until final waste characterization.
Page 402
p403
21
Rev. 1 (Publication Date: 06/17/2020, Effective Date: 08/01/2020)
Throughout This was a major rewrite of this procedure. The high-level changes are
listed below:
20
 Simplified content where possible.
 Clarified that this utility procedure applies only to asphaltic pipe
wrap, not all types of pipe wrap.
4/
 Removed reference to SAFE-0174, “Asbestos Class IV General
Awareness,” because personnel following this procedure do only
/1
Class II or Class III work.
 Reorganized tools and equipment by task being performed.
09
 Wrote new Section 1 to consolidate information that was repeated in
multiple sections and provide process overview.
 Removed requirement to always determine if pipe was previously
tested for asbestos.
ed
 Removed requirement to collect asphaltic pipe wrap sample.
 Removed references to Mapping Engineering Tool (MET).
 Removed requirement to map future asbestos results in the
at
geographic information system (GIS).

 Replaced pipe wrap stamp with a note on the construction drawing,
er
stating if pipe was installed before 1972 and if a sample is

requested.
 Moved process for collecting samples to new Attachment 3.
en
 Replaced lead mapper or project lead with the sample requestor.

 Updated Table 1, clarifying that material that does not contain
G
asbestos is construction solid waste and needs to be labeled as

non-hazardous.
Form TD-4711P-01-F01  Updated laboratory costs and removed option to specify a turn-
F
around time greater than 2 days.

 Added field for provider cost center (PCC).
PD
 Replaced lead mapper or project lead with the sample requestor.

 Reordered location and site information to group by transmission
and distribution.
Page 403
p404
Attachment Publication Date: 06/17/2020 Effective Date: 08/01/2020 Rev: 1
Attachment 1, Asphaltic Pipe Wrap and Gasket Material Code List
1
Item Picture Description PG&E Material Code
21
M621820
Barricade tape: 3 inches Purchase through SAP
(in.) by 1000-foot (ft) roll, Ariba Maintenance,
20
4 milli-inches (mil) thick Repair, and Operations
vinyl Integrated Solutions
(MROIS) catalog
1. Regulated area
4/
signage:
Sign, small: 5 by 7 in., M621812
“DANGER 0.055 in. thick Purchase through SAP
/1
Asbestos polyethylene Ariba MROIS
May Cause Cancer
Causes Damage to
09
Lungs
Authorized Personnel
Only”
Sign, large: 8 by 11 in., M621816
ed
0.055 in. thick Purchase through SAP
polyethylene Ariba MROIS
at
Asbestos Binding
er
® Compound (ABC) 2602063

2. Fiberlock ABC asbestos encapsulant,
FiberSpray Purchase through SAP
8-ounce airless spray can Ariba MROIS
en
12 cans per case
Clear sheeting, 20 by 17890

G
3. Plastic sheeting
100 ft roll, 6 mil thick Purchase through SAP
(drop cloth)
polyethylene Ariba MROIS
F
60 by 60 in., 6 mil thick 2688819

PD
4. Plastic flat debris polyethylene

bag Purchase through SAP
25 bags per case Ariba MROIS
38 by 75 in., 6 mil thick M569278

5. Plastic debris bag plastic Purchase through SAP
50 bags per case Ariba MROIS
1
PG&E: Pacific Gas and Electric Company
Page 404
p405
1
21
White bucket with screw-
top lid, white 2768865
6. 3.5-gallon bucket polyethylene, United Purchase through SAP
Nations (UN) Rated
20
Ariba MROIS
1H2/Y19/S
White bucket with screw- 2750758
4/
7. 5-gallon bucket top lid, polyethylene, UN Purchase through SAP
Rated 1H2/Y30/S Ariba MROIS
/1
09
8. Asbestos waste Label: adhesive back, M621397
label/tag: 4 by 6 in., 4 mil thick Purchase through SAP
vinyl Ariba MROIS
“Danger – Contains
ed
Asbestos Fibers
May Cause Cancer
Causes Damage to
Lungs Tag: 1.875 by
M623011
at
Do Not Breathe Dust 3.75 in., 13-point

cardstock Purchase through SAP
Avoid Creating Dust” Ariba MROIS
50 tags per pack
er
en
Adhesive back, 6 by 6 in,

green and white letters M621112
9. “Non-Hazardous
Waste” label 25 per package with Purchase through SAP
4-package minimum Ariba MROIS
G
order
F
PD
Adhesive back, 6 by 6 in,

M621126
10. “Hazardous red and black print on
Waste” label yellow background Purchase through SAP
Ariba MROIS
100 per package
1
Page 405
p406
1
21
Adhesive back, 4 by 4
in., meeting requirements
of Code of Federal
Regulations (CFR) Title
20
49, Transportation, Part
172—Hazardous
Materials Table, Special
11. Department of Provisions, Hazardous M621795
4/
Transportation Materials
(DOT) hazard Purchase through SAP
Communications, Ariba MROIS
Class 9 label Emergency Response
/1
Information, Training
Requirements, and
Security Plans, Section
09
172.446, “CLASS 9
label.”
500 per roll
ed
5 by 8 in., 6 mil thick M569279
12. Plastic sampling plastic ziplock bag
bag Purchase through SAP
1000 bags per box Ariba MROIS
at
Form TD-4711P-01-F01,
er
“Chain of Custody Form

– Asbestos PLM Pipe M610645
13. Chain of Custody Wrap Samples Only” in
form, in triplicate Purchase through
triplicate (white, canary,
en
PG&E Reprographics
pink)
50 forms per pack
G
14. Tag embossed Aluminum tag: 1¼ by 2¾ M621888

with ¼ in. high in., 32 mil thick, with 24
letters “NO ASB in. long, 16-gauge Purchase through SAP
F
ASSEMBLY” stainless steel wire Ariba MROIS

PD
15. Tag embossed Aluminum tag: 1¼ by 2¾ M621887

with ¼ in. high in., 32 mil thick, with
letters “NO ASB 24 in. long, 16-gauge Purchase through SAP
GASKET” stainless steel wire Ariba MROIS
1
Page 406
p407
REVISION NOTES
21
Throughout Reworded the Item and Description cells to be consistent among the items.
Updated the location from where materials can be purchased (SRM, One Source is now
20
SAP Ariba MROIS).
Removed large asbestos waste tag that is no longer available for purchase.
Removed asbestos sampling kit that is no longer available for purchase.
4/
/1
09
ed
at
er
en
G
F
PD
Page 407
p408
Attachment 2, Example of Completed Chain of Custody and Forensic Laboratory Reports
21
20
4/
/1
09
ed
at
er
en
G
F
PD
Figure 1. Example of Completed Chain of Custody (Gas Distribution)
Page 408
p409
21
20
4/
/1
09
ed
at
er
en
G
F
PD
Figure 2. Example of Completed Chain of Custody (Gas Transmission)
Page 409
p410
21
20
4/
/1
09
ed
at
er
en
G
F
PD
Figure 3. Forensic Analytical Laboratories Report Showing Asbestos as Not Detected in Sample
Page 410
p411
21
20
4/
/1
09
ed
at
er
en
G
F
PD
Figure 4. Forensic Analytical Laboratories Report Showing Asbestos Detected in Sample
Page 411
p412
REVISION NOTES
21
Figure 1 Updated example of completed Form TD-4711P-01-F01, “Chain of
Custody Form – Asbestos PLM Asphaltic Pipe Wrap Samples Only,” for
20
distribution.
Figure 2 Added new figure with example of completed Form TD-4711P-01-F01 for
transmission.
4/
Figures 3 and 4 Advanced figure numbers.
/1
09
ed
at
er
en
G
F
PD
Page 412
p413
Attachment 3, Collecting Asphaltic Pipe Wrap Sample
Below are the steps to be taken if the environmental specialist, project engineer, or other personnel
21
request an asphaltic pipe wrap sample be sent for analysis.
1 Collecting Pipe Wrap Sample
20
1.1 Obtain the following:
1. Mailing envelope
4/
2. Plastic sampling bag (see Attachment 1, “Gas Asphaltic Pipe Wrap Removal, Handling,
and Disposal,” for ordering information)
/1
3. Chain of Custody (COC) form, in triplicate (see Attachment 1 for ordering information)
09
1.2 Collect samples.
1. Ensure regulated area is in place, per Utility Procedure TD-4711P-01, Section 4,

ed
“Establishing a Regulated Area.”
2. Use the wet method (spraying pipe with soapy water or Fiberlock ABC Fiberspray
asbestos encapsulant before, during, and after removal) to adequately wet the wrap,
at
which ensures fibers do not become airborne.
3. Collect approximately a 1½-inch (in.) square sample that is representative of the entire
er
thickness of the wrap to bare metal. The wrap sample must be taken within the boundary
of the proposed work scope.
en
a. IF sample is smaller than 1½ in. square or is not representative of the entire

thickness,
G
THEN collect multiple samples in the same ziplock bag to make approximately a
1½ in. square.
F
4. Collect one sample representing asphaltic pipe wrap with the same pipe year, pipe wrap
thickness, and original pipe installation project number.
PD
5. Place the asphaltic pipe wrap sample in a 6-milli-inch (mil) thick, 5 by 8 in. plastic ziplock
bag, listed in Attachment 1.
Page 413
p414
1.3 Label, prepare, and send samples.
21
1. Label the 6 mil thick plastic ziplock bag with the following information, using a non-
smearing marker:
20
NOTE
The sample ID is critical for data interpretation. The laboratory provides the asbestos
4/
results electronically for Pacific Gas and Electric Company (PG&E or Company)
analysis. The sample ID is used to determine the sample characteristics, such as
/1
asphaltic pipe wrap and project management (PM) number. This allows for data
analysis without having to refer to each individual COC form.
09
a. The sample ID must be unique. Examples of how to create a unique sample ID
include:
(1) Use “PW” (for asphaltic pipe wrap), the current job’s 8-digit PM number,
ed
and a sequential number if multiple samples are collected. For example:
 First location: PW-PM12345678-01

at
 Second location: PW-PM12345678-02

er
(2) Use the current job’s 8-digit PM number OR job ID (such as T-1535,
D-333, V-486) and sampling location if there are multiple samples on the
job.
en
b. Record the sample date and sample time of collection.
c. Record the type or description of the sample, such as “2-inch diameter asphaltic
G
pipe wrap, 1971.”
d. Identify the site location, such as address or location from nearest cross street
F
OR line number and mile point.

PD
e. Include the original general manager (GM) or PM number.
2. Complete COC form. See Attachment 2, “Example of Completed Chain of Custody and
Forensic Laboratory Reports,” for samples of completed COC forms.
 Ensure writing is legible and the “Return Results To” contact information is
complete.
 Call the sample requestor with any questions on how to complete the COC form.
Page 414
p415
1.3 (continued)
21
3. Do not place COC form (white color) in the plastic ziplock sample bag OR staple the
COC form to the plastic ziplock sample bag.
20
NOTE
SGS Forensic Laboratories is the preferred laboratory,
4/
and using it is a Company best practice.
/1
4. Write the following on the mailing envelope:
 SGS Forensic Laboratories shipping address as shown in the “Ship To” section
09
of the COC form
 PCC number for department’s mailing postal charge

ed
NOTE
One COC form may be used for multiple samples collected,
but only one COC form may be used per current job PM number.
at
5. Place the following items in the mailing envelope:

er
 The 6 mil thick ziplock plastic sample bag containing asphaltic pipe wrap
samples
en
 The completed top (white) copy of the triplicate COC form

G
6. Insert canary (yellow) duplicate of COC form in job package folder.
7. Give pink duplicate of COC form to supervisor or field engineer so they are aware a
F
sample was collected.
Place addressed envelope to SGS Forensic Laboratories in “outgoing office mail” bin for
PD
8.
proper U.S. mailing postage, or give to appropriate office personnel to mail (or hand-
deliver) the envelope to SGS Forensic Laboratories.
Page 415
p416
2 Reviewing the Results
21
2.1 The testing laboratory returns results to the person who requested a sample be taken (as listed
on the COC form, Item 2).
20
2.2 The sample requestor is responsible for the following:
1. Ensure the following is included in the as-built job package:
4/
a. Canary copy of completed COC form
/1
b. Asbestos laboratory results
09
2. If necessary, refer to Job Aid TD-4711P-01-JA01, “Reviewing Asbestos Lab Reports,” to
learn how to read and interpret an asbestos lab report.
3. IF asbestos was detected in the samples, per the analytical results,

ed
THEN provide the laboratory data to the supervisor or field engineer so they know that
the asphaltic pipe wrap contains asbestos.
at
4. IF the asphaltic pipe wrap is friable asbestos AND the sample requestor was not the
environmental specialist,
er
THEN the sample requestor provides analytical results to environmental specialist for
proper disposal.
en
5. Follow Utility Standard TD-4461S, “Gas As-Built Packages,” to ensure the completed job
file is stored in the appropriate systems of record.
G
REVISION NOTES
F

Throughout This new attachment used to be a section in the procedure. Key changes
PD
include:
 Removed reference to sample kit that is no longer available.
 Clarified that if one 1½ in. square representative sample cannot be
taken, then collect multiple smaller samples.
 Updated that the testing laboratory returns results to the person who
requested the sample be taken instead of the lead mapper or project
lead estimating personnel.
Page 416
TD-4711P-01-JA01
Publication Date: 4/1/2015; Effective Date: 1/1/2016, Rev: 0
Reviewing Asbestos Lab Reports
21
TD-4711P-01-JA01 – Codes and Standards
Reviewing Lab Reports for Asbestos Samples
1 See below to determine whether asbestos is in the sample based on the lab report.
20
See TD-4711P-01 Attachment 2 for example of completed chain of custody form and
example of full lab report.
4/
Example of Positive Asbestos Result:
The percentage of asbestos in each layer of the sample is shown in “Percent in Layer.” The final
/1
percentage shown in the gray box is the total percentage of asbestos in the sample. The number
of layers is dependent on the pipe wrap but normally is only one to two layers.
09
ed
at
er
Example of No Asbestos in Result:

en
An “ND” in the “Percent in Layer” column indicates there was no asbestos detected. The “ND” in
the gray box means there was no asbestos detected in the entire sample (all layers).
G
F
PD
NOTE: If asbestos is detected in any one of the layers, the entire sample (and the section of wrap
it came from) must be treated as asbestos-containing material.
ND = asbestos not detected at or above 1% asbestos
Page
Effective Date: 00/00/0000 1 of 1417
Page
p418

TD-4711P-01, Rev. 1a
21
20
4/
PG&E recently self-reported incorrect disposal of asbestos waste to the Environmental Protection
Agency (EPA). Pre-1972 steel pipe with asphaltic pipe wrap was sent for recycling with unknown
/1
asbestos results. When the lab report came back that the wrap was positive for asbestos, the pipe and
wrap had already been sent to PG&E’s recycler. The recycler had already combined the asphaltic
09
wrap-covered pipe with other steel, and could no longer return just that pipe to PG&E.
As part of the EPA's preliminary investigation into improper disposal of regulated waste, a verbal
request was made for polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB) data for PG&E's asphaltic pipe wrap. Gas
utilities in colder regions have reported PCB concentration greater than 50 ppm in their asphaltic pipe
ed
wrap because PCBs were used to ensure the wrap remained malleable.
Until this data can be provided, all pre-1979 asphaltic pipe waste will be considered to have 50–499
ppm PCB concentration until actual concentration is known (similar to pre-1972 asphaltic pipe wrap
at
considered to be positive for asbestos until a negative lab result). Therefore, all asphaltic pipe wrap
installed before 1979 must be collected, stored, transported, and disposed of as regulated hazardous
er
waste.
There are no changes to the asbestos process for pre-1972 pipe except for the additional labeling,
en
storage, and transportation requirements for PCBs.

The additional PCB testing does not affect the gas as-built packages as environmental will be
responsible for collecting and analyzing PCB results.
G
Existing requirements in this utility procedure that apply to removing and handling all asphaltic pipe
wrap that are in place to protect personnel from polynuclear aromatic hydrocarbons (PAHs), trace
metals (such as lead), and other contaminants also protect personnel from PCB exposure.
F
PD

Summary Update entire section (see strike-through and highlighted text):
This utility procedure applies onlyto the task of removing, handling, and disposing of
asphaltic pipe wrap AND the disposal of pipe with asphaltic pipe wrap still attached(not
pipe removal).
This utility procedure does not apply to the following:
 oOther (non-asphaltic) wrap or coating types or other materials that may contain
asbestos.
 Removing and handling asphaltic pipe wrap while wearing a respirator.The
Page 418
p419

TD-4711P-01, Rev. 1a
procedure also does not apply when using a respirator for asphaltic pipe wrap
removal.
21
Asphaltic pipe wrap may contain asbestos or polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBs), which
are is a hazardous materials. All asphaltic pipe wrap contains polynuclear aromatic
hydrocarbons (PAHs) as well as trace metals (such as lead), and other contaminants,
which are also hazardous.
20
Safety Update as follows (see strike-through and highlighted text):
Both aAsbestos, and PAHs, and PCBs are known carcinogens. Inhalation or ingestion of
4/
these materials has been linked to cancer.
/1
 Respiratory disease (asbestosis)
 Mesothelioma
09
 Lung cancer
PAH and PCB dermal exposure can cause skin irritation; and when PAHs and PCBs are
ingested or inhaled, they may cause cancer.
ed
Before You Start Update as follows (see strike-through and highlighted text):
To transport any amount of hazardous waste greater than 10 pounds, employees must
complete the following training class:
at
Step 1.5 Insert highlighted text:

All asphaltic pipe wrap potentially contains PAHs, PCBs, trace metals …
er
Warning before Step Ingesting or inhaling asphaltic pipe wrap is a form of exposure to PAHs and PCBs. PAHs
3.1 and PCBs are listed…
en
Warning before Step Insert highlighted text:

3.1.3 … but also PAHs, PCBs, and other contaminants…
New Section 6 Insert new section (previous Section 6 moved to Section 7):
G
6 Pipe With Asphaltic Pipe Wrap

6.1 Use Table 1 to determine how to handle pipe with asphaltic pipe wrap attached.
1. To reduce the amount of regulated hazardous waste, asphaltic pipe wrap
F
may be removed from pipe following this procedure.

6.2 For abandoned pipe, refer to Utility Procedure TD-9500P-16,”Abandonment of
PD
Underground Gas Facilities,” for internal sampling requirements.

Section 7 (previously Replace entire section with the following
Section 6)
7 Waste Labeling, Accumulation, Storage, and Disposal
7.1 All asphaltic pipe wrap installed before 1979 must be managed as regulated
hazardous waste with a PCB concentration of 50 to 499 ppm until tested and
characterized, regardless if it is negative for asbestos.
7.2 Label, store, and transport debris using Table 1 guidelines. Labeling will be
updated by EFS after characterization.
7.3 Contact the EFS for accumulation, storage, transportation, and disposal
management.

Page 419
p420

TD-4711P-01, Rev. 1a
1. IF asbestos sample has been collected,

THEN forward results to EFS.
21
7.4 EFS determines necessary next steps, such as collecting samples for
contaminates of concern.
 EFS disposes of waste appropriately in accordance with
20
Environmental Management job aid ENV-4000P-01-JA15, “PG&E-
Authorized Disposal and Recycling Facilities.”
Table 1. Waste Labeling Requirements
4/
Construction Solid
Regulated Hazardous Waste
Waste
Either of the following:
/1
 1972-1978
asphaltic pipe
wrap, OR Pre-1972 asphaltic pipe
09
1979 or later
Requirement  Pre-1979 wrap with a positive or
asphaltic pipe wrap
asphaltic pipe unknown asbestos test.
wrap with a
negative asbestos
test.
ed
 Utility Procedure ENV-4000P-01,
"Hazardous Waste Management and
Storage at Storage Procedure"
Temporary NA  Job Aid ENV-4000P-01-JA20, "Job Aid –
at
Work Site Asbestos-Friable"

 Job Aid ENV-4000P-01-JA21, "Job Aid –
Asbestos-Non-Friable"
er
Doubled-bagged debris bag, drum, leak-tight bucket,

Storage Any container (i.e.,
or other appropriately sized container (see Utility
Container debris bag, drum)
Procedure ENV-4000P-01).
Transport off-site at
en
earliest convenience
(within 1 year per Transport to central accumulation area of a
Storage
PG&E policy) to consolidation site within 10 days from date of waste
Duration consolidation site for generation for Class I landfill disposal.
G
Class II landfill
disposal.
Utility Procedure ENV-4000P-03, "Remote Waste
Transportation
F
Transportation Procedure," including Hazardous

From Remote NA
Waste Shipping Paper for regulated hazardous waste
Work Sites over 10 pounds
1
PD
Affix the following two Affix the following three

Affix the following
Labeling labels to sealed labels to sealed
label to the container:
containers: containers:

Page 420
p421

TD-4711P-01, Rev. 1a
1. “Non-Hazardous 1. “Hazardous Waste”

Waste” label label 1. “Hazardous Waste”
label
21
20
 Add PM number
4/
and waste  Add PM number.
 Add PM number.
generation date.
/1
2. Department of 2. Department of
Transportation (DOT) Transportation (DOT)
hazard Class 9 label hazard Class 9 label
09
ed
3. Asbestos waste label
at
er
en
1. Pre-1979 asphaltic pipe wrap with unknown PCB concentration is transported under
Assembly Bill (AB) 1448.
Step 8.2.2 (Previously Update as follows (see highlighted and strike-through text):
G
7.2.2) Asphaltic pipe wrap does not need tothat cannot be bagged and disposed of andreadily
recovered can be left in the keyhole.
Reference Documents Add the following:
F
(Developmental Utility Procedure ENV-4100P-01, "PCB Program Procedure"

References)
PD
Reference Documents Add the following:

(Supplemental Utility Procedure ENV-4000P-01, "Hazardous Waste Management and Storage
References) Procedure"
Utility Procedure ENV-4000P-03, "Remote Waste Transportation Procedure"

Page 421
p422

TD-4711P-01, Rev. 1a
21
NA
4. Stakeholders
20
Gas Engineer, Document Steward
4/
Standards Engineering Stephanie Uhlich 02/24/2021
Gas Engineer, Document Coordinator
Standards Engineering Principal Gas Engineer, Lead Engineer Tuesdai Powers 02/24/2021
/1
Gas Safety Manager, Document Approver Daniel Keferl 02/24/2021
OSHA Programs Principal Industrial Hygienist Jo Forchione 02/10/2021
09
Environmental Management Gas
Senior Environmental Scientist Colt Hawkins 02/24/2021
Transmission Projects
Hazardous Material Programs Senior Environmental Scientist Zantha Ricks 02/24/2021
ed
Environmental Management Facility
Senior Manager Larry Jeffris 02/10/2021
Compliance
Construction Management Senior Director Pierre Bigras 03/01/2021
at
Transmission General Construction Director Bill Meredith 03/01/2021

Director Erik Kurtz 03/01/2021
Construction, South
er

Director Ty Turner 03/01/2021
Construction, North
en
ECS&S Training Design &

Manager, Curriculum Development Tricia Coan 03/01/2021
Development
Environmental Management
Supervisor, Gas Transmission Projects Tim Andrews 03/01/2021
Transmission Projects
G

F
Approvers: Stephanie Uhlich, Tuesdai Powers, Zantha Ricks, Colt Hawkins, Daniel Keferl
PD

6. Cost Information
We anticipate an additional yearly cost of $150,000 because of this procedure change using the
following assumptions:
 Approximately 1000 jobs constructed year with pre-1979 asphaltic pipe wrap in the scope of
work
 Time spent for EFS to take a sample approximately 1 hour at $100/hour = $100,000

Page 422
p423

TD-4711P-01, Rev. 1a
 Cost for lab to analyze PCB sample approximately $50/test = $50,000
21
For larger projects where waste is accumulated on site, the EFS's time and cost to analyze the sample
will be charged back to the project.
For small jobs where waste is transported to the service center for accumulation, the EFS's time and
20
cost to analyze the sample will be charged to the facility.
There will be minimum cost to updating Academy courses SAFE-0135 (initial 8-hour course),
“Asbestos Gas Pipe Wrap/Gasket Removal Initial” and SAFE-0136 (annual 4-hour refresher course),
4/
“Asbestos Gas Pipe Wrap/ Gasket Removal Refresher” and communicating this revision.
If there happens to be PCB concentration greater than or equal to 50 ppm, there could be substantial
/1
disposal costs. If PCB concentration is below 50 ppm as expected, there will be no additional disposal
costs.
09
Priority: ☐ Regular (monthly publication) ☒ High (publish within 24 hours of EDRS approval)
Reason (for High priority only): This revision is high priority as it is to begin collecting data requested
ed
by the EPA
at
A 5MM will be sent from Standards Engineering to affected personnel for leadership to tailboard.
Standards Engineering will set up a quick (15 min) call with leadership of affected personnel to ensure
they have received the 5MM. EFS will follow up to coordinate new process changes.
er
There are no new design requirements or changes to the as-built checklist.

en
8. Cancellations
NA
G

F
PD

Page 423
p424

TD-4711P-01, Rev. 1a

21
20
4/
Management
/1
09
Distribution)
ed
Engineering
and Distribution)
at

Distribution)
er

Management
en

G
Process
F
PD

Specifications

Examination (NDE)

Page 424
p425

TD-4711P-01, Rev: 1
21
Workflow Revision
20
1. Reason for Writing / Revising the Guidance Document
This utility procedure is being revised based on recommendations from the results of an asbestos data
analysis and to address Cal/OSHA requirements regarding medical surveillance and employee
4/
exposure, as detailed in Pacific Gas and Electric Company (PG&E or Company) white paper “Data
Analysis of Pipe Wrap Asbestos Results: January 2014 – December 2017.”
/1
2. Description of the Topic (if new) or the Changes (if revised)
09
 The asphaltic pipe wrap sample collection process has been moved to Attachment 3, “Collecting
Asphaltic Pipe Wrap Sample.” Gas operations personnel follow Attachment 3 when environmental
personnel or the project team request that they collect the sample to determine appropriate waste
ed
disposal (usually less conservative) or to determine that asbestos is not present (relaxed regulated
area requirements).
 A new Section 1 was added that consolidates general information and requires personnel to
at
practice good hygiene by wiping down clothing before leaving the work site, which minimizes the
spread of potential exposure to asphaltic pipe wrap fibers.
 Form TD-4711P-01-F01, “Chain of Custody Form – Asbestos PLM Asphaltic Pipe Wrap Samples
er
Only,” (COC form) has been updated, but these changes do not require the new form to be used
immediately. The previous version of the triplicate COC form can continue to be used past the
effective date until existing supply is used up.
en
 New language has been added, specifying that asphaltic pipe wrap that does not contain asbestos
(1972 or later OR negative asbestos result) is considered construction solid waste. As construction
solid waste, this type of wrap is labeled as non-hazardous waste and disposed of in a Class II
G
landfill.
The requirements to remove pipe wrap by using a wet method or other method applies to all asphaltic
pipe wrap, whether the wrap potentially contains asbestos or not.
F
PD
Process safety (PS) personnel reviewed the documents and did not find any hazards that might be
introduced by changes to this procedure and form. The procedure describes steps and controls for
controlling the health hazards involved with this type of work.

Page 425
p426

TD-4711P-01, Rev: 1
4. Stakeholders
21
(or reason if NA)
20
Engineer, Document Steward
Standards Engineering Principal Engineer, Lead Engineer Tuesdai Powers 05/06/2020
4/
Gas Workforce Safety Manager, Document Approver John Gilginas 05/06/2020
Process Safety Principal Gas Process Safety Engineer Vic Stanciu 05/18/2020
/1
1
Quality Management, Field Supervisor Brian Affleck 05/13/2020
Operator Qualification NA – No associated qualifications
09
Regulatory Compliance,
Principal Industrial Hygienist Jo Forchione 05/06/2020
OSHA Programs
1
PG&E Academy Manager Tricia Coan 05/13/2020
ed
Director, As-Built Process Owner 1
As-Built Records Stephen Simon 05/13/2020
(or delegate)
1- Notified by email.
at

er

Environmental Management Environmental Field Specialist Colt Hawkins 05/06/2020
en
1
Data Quality Management (DQM) Supervisor Manuel Romero 05/13/2020
1
Construction Field Quality Control Supervisor Eloy Vidales 05/13/2020
1
Construction Records Quality Control Manager Kevin Lieberman 05/13/2020
G
1
Construction Records Quality Control Supervisor Fabien Hsu 05/13/2020
F

Approvers: Stephanie Uhlich, Tuesdai Powers, Jo Forchione, John Gilginas
PD

Cost savings began to be realized when Variance 2018-87838 was approved.
Expected savings of $500,000/year and reduction in labor and materials are listed below:
 Labor hours for estimators to look up asbestos results in the geographic information system (GIS)
and add a stamp to the map
 Labor hours for field personnel to collect samples and complete the chain of custody (COC)
 Administrative costs for the labor and materials to ship samples

Page 426
p427

TD-4711P-01, Rev: 1
 SGS Forensic Laboratories costs

 Labor hours for mappers to track samples and add asbestos results to GIS attributes
21
 Labor hours for gas guidance document coordinator to track, manage, and review asbestos results
20
The change to Form TD-4711P-01-F01 does not require personnel to begin using the revised COC
form before the effective date. Personnel may continue to use existing triplicate copies of Revision 0a
4/
of Form TD-4711P-01-F01 until existing supply is depleted.
7. Review Frequency
/1
At least once every five calendar years, not to exceed 63 months, to the date.
09
8. Cancellations
NA
9. Manuals
ed
NA
at
er
en
G
F
PD

Page 427
p428

TD-4711P-01, Rev: 1
21
Functional Area
20
Target Audiences
☐ Asset Strategy ☐ Facility Integrity Management ☒ Leak Repair ☐ R&D and Innovation
☒ Associate Distribution Engineers ☒ GPOM (I&R) ☐ Leak Survey ☒ Records and Information
4/
Management
/1
☒ Contract Management ☐ Gas Distribution Control Center ☒ Mapping (Transmission and ☐ Risk Management
Distribution)
☒ Corrosion Mechanics ☐ Gas Emergency Preparedness ☐ Metering Plant ☒ Service Planning
09
☐ Data Quality ☒ Gas Service Representatives ☒ Pipeline Engineering ☐ Super Gas Ops
Engineering
ed
and Distribution)
☒ Distribution Engineering ☒ Hydrotesting ☒ Project Management (Transmission and ☒ Transmission Construction
Distribution)
at
☒ Estimating ☐ LNG|CNG Operations ☐ Quality and Improvement ☐ Transmission Integrity

Management
er
GODOCS
en

☐ Coatings ☐ Asset Knowledge Management ☐ Damage Prevention ☐ Emergency Plans

G

☒ Construction Methods ☐ Distribution Engineering ☐ Field Services (GSRs)
Process
☒ Environmental and Safety ☐ Gas Control and Clearances
F
Specifications
PD

Examination (NDE)

Page 428
p429
DOCUMENT NAME: Gas Asphaltic Pipe Wrap Removal, Handling, and Disposal
21
20
4/
What is changing?
This major revision removes the mandatory requirement to collect samples of pre-1972 asphaltic pipe
/1
wrap to align with Variance 2018-87838. The variance will no longer be in affect with the publication of
this procedure.
09
 The asphaltic pipe wrap sample collection process has been moved to Attachment 3, “Collecting
Asphaltic Pipe Wrap Sample.” Gas operations personnel follow Attachment 3 when environmental
personnel or the project team request that they collect the sample to determine appropriate waste
ed
disposal (usually less conservative) or to determine that asbestos is not present (relaxed regulated
area requirements).
 A new Section 1 was added that consolidates general information and requires personnel to practice
at
good hygiene by wiping down clothing before leaving the work site, which minimizes the spread of
potential exposure to asphaltic pipe wrap fibers.
 Form TD-4711P-01-F01, “Chain of Custody Form – Asbestos PLM Asphaltic Pipe Wrap Samples
er
Only,” (COC form) has been updated, but these changes do not require the new form to be used
immediately. The previous version of the triplicate COC form can continue to be used past the
effective date until existing supply is used up.
en
 New language has been added, specifying that asphaltic pipe wrap that does not contain asbestos
(1972 or later OR negative asbestos result) is considered construction solid waste. As construction
solid waste, this type of wrap is labeled as non-hazardous waste and disposed of in a Class II landfill.
G
The requirements to remove pipe wrap by using a wet method or other method applies to all asphaltic
pipe wrap, whether the wrap potentially contains asbestos or not.
F
Why does it matter?

PD
This utility procedure is being revised based on recommendations from the results of an asbestos data
analysis and to address Cal/OSHA requirements regarding medical surveillance and employee exposure,
as detailed in Pacific Gas and Electric Company (PG&E or Company) white paper “Data Analysis of Pipe
Wrap Asbestos Results: January 2014 – December 2017.”

Page 429
p430
Required Action
21
Supervisors of personnel who remove asphaltic pipe wrap are responsible for communicating this revised
utility procedure and explaining that sampling is no longer required.
Previous versions of Form TD-4711P-01-F01, “Chain of Custody Form – Asbestos PLM Pipe Wrap
20
Samples Only,” can continue to be used past the effective date.
Academy will update required training courses.
4/
Tools and Training
/1
Personnel who remove asphaltic pipe wrap are still required to take the asbestos training class if they
handle asphaltic pipe wrap that contains or might contain asbestos.
09
Timeline
Date Activity
06/17/2020 Publication date
ed
Tailboard-by date: Sign-off is required for all who have completed the asbestos training.
08/01/2020
Attach roster to this tailboard document.
at
er
en
G
F
PD

Page 430
p431
Publication Date: 4/1/2015; Effective Date 1/1/2016 Rev: 0
Flange Gaskets–Removal, Handling, and Disposal
SUMMARY
21
This utility procedure provides instructions for the safe removal, handling, and disposal of
flange gaskets from Pacific Gas and Electric Company (PG&E or Company) gas transmission
and distribution (T&D) systems. Gaskets have been known to contain asbestos.
20
Removing asbestos-containing material requires compliance with Occupation Safety and
Health Association (OSHA), federal, and state regulations. This procedure only addresses
work where a current and valid Negative Exposure Assessment (NEA) is on file for gasket
4/
removal. See Utility Standard TD-4711S, “Natural Gas Pipe Wrap and Flange Gaskets—
Removal, Handling, and Disposal,” for regulatory requirements and guidance on NEAs.
/1
The scope of this utility procedure is limited to removing, handling, and disposing of flange
gaskets. For instructions on removing pipe wrap to access gaskets, refer to Utility Procedure
09
TD-4711P-01, “Gas Pipe Wrap Removal, Handling, and Disposal.”
Gaskets are used at flange connections to ensure proper, leak-free connections. Gas flange
gaskets are normally found in, but not limited to, the following locations:
ed
• Large gas meter sets
• Gas regulator stations
at
• Major stations
• Flanged valves
er
Level of Use: Reference Use

en
TARGET AUDIENCE
• Gas personnel involved in removing, handling, or disposing of flange gaskets, including

G
but not limited to those in the work groups listed below. The asbestos training class is
required if asbestos-containing material may be handled.
•
F
Gas general construction

• Maintenance and construction
PD
• Instrumentation and regulation

• Gas pipeline operations and maintenance
• Gas field services
• Welding
• Gas meter shop (build, repair, and test meter sets)
• Corrosion mechanics
• Environmental field specialist
PG&E Internal ©2015 Pacific Gas and Electric Company. All rights reserved Page 1 of 18
.
Page 431
p432
SAFETY
21
Asbestos is a known carcinogen. Inhalation or ingestion of this material has been linked to
cancer. To ensure safety while handling asbestos gaskets, personnel must be trained in how
to identify, handle, and remove flange gaskets that contain or are presumed to contain
20
asbestos, and how to properly dispose of asbestos-containing material. Training also includes
how to use the proper personal protective equipment (PPE), and how to practice good
hygiene.
4/
• Asbestos inhalation can cause:
/1
• Respiratory disease (asbestosis)
• Mesothelioma
09
• Lung cancer
• Asbestos ingestion has been linked to cancer

ed
BEFORE YOU START
1. Supervisor must ensure that all required training has been completed. See Training
Requirements section below.
at
2. Individuals are required to ensure that their asbestos Class II/III training is current and
er
follows the procedural requirements.
Training Requirements
en
To remove asbestos-containing gaskets, at a minimum personnel must be trained in a Class

II/III course and complete the annual refresher. These courses are:
G
• SAFE-0135 (initial 8-hour course), “Asbestos Pipe Wrap and Gasket Initial”
• SAFE-0136 (annual refresher 4-hour course), “Asbestos Pipe Wrap and Gasket
F
Refresher”
PD
Personnel who contact but do not disturb asbestos-containing material, and only perform
activities to clean up dust, waste, and debris resulting from Class II and Class III activities, are
required to complete the following course:
• SAFE-0174, “Asbestos Class IV General Awareness”
.
Page 432
p433
Before You Start (continued)
21
To handle bagged and sealed waste, personnel must complete one of the following awareness
courses:
20
ENVR-0100, “Hazardous Materials and Waste General Awareness”
• ENVR-0100WBT, “Hazardous Materials and Waste General Awareness”
4/
To transport hazardous waste greater than 10 pounds, employees must complete the following
training class:
/1
• ENVR-9029WBT, “Hazardous Material Transportation”
09
Personal Protective Equipment:
The following PPE is required as a minimum while removing flange gaskets:

ed
• Gloves
• Hard hat
• Safety glasses
at
• Face shield (if working directly below the pipe)

er
• Hearing protection, if necessary
Tools and Equipment:

en
Personnel following this procedure may use, but are not limited to, the following hand tools
and equipment. See Utility Procedure TD-4711P-01, Attachment 1, “Pipe Wrap/Gasket
Material Code List” for list of material codes:
G
• Drop cloth: 6 millimeter (mil) or thicker polyethylene plastic sheeting

•
F
“Danger Asbestos…” barricade tape or “Danger Asbestos…” warning signs to

demarcate the regulated area
PD
• Asbestos fiber spray encapsulate (such as ABC asbestos fiber spray) OR hand/bottle
sprayer with soapy water
• 6 mil thick small impermeable plastic bag
• Putty knife
• Debris bag: 6 mil thick large plastic bag to store debris
• 4-inch (in.) by 6-in. label: “Danger Contains Asbestos Fibers” for debris bag
• Plastic bucket: 3.5-gallon or 5-gallon white polyethylene with removable lid (optional)
.
Page 433
p434
Before You Start (continued)
21
• 6-in. by 6-in. “Hazardous Waste” label
• 6-in. by 6-in. “Non-Hazardous Waste” label
20
• Wire brush, designated and labeled for gasket removal only
• Metal tag engraved with “No ASB Gasket” or “No ASB Assembly” with stainless steel
wire to attach
4/
TABLE OF CONTENTS
/1
09
1 Determining Whether Gasket Contains Asbestos .............................................. 4
2 Establishing a Regulated Area .......................................................................... 9
3 Removing Flange Gaskets when Asbestos is Present or Unknown ................. 11
ed
4 Waste Disposal ............................................................................................... 14
at
PROCEDURE STEPS
1 Determining Whether Gasket Contains Asbestos

er
1.1 Field personnel review work scope to determine whether a flange gasket(s) needs to be
removed.
en
• If possible, consult Geographic Information System (GIS) asset attributes to determine

whether asbestos information is available.
G
1.2 Following instructions below (before performing work involving the removal of flange gaskets),
separate flanges and determine whether the gasket contains asbestos.
F
• IF metal tag marked “No ASB” is attached to flange or assembly (See Table 1, “Non-
PD
Asbestos Tags”),
THEN gasket does not contain asbestos. Proceed to Step 1.8 to remove gasket.
.
Page 434
p435
1.2 (continued)
21
Table 1. Non-Asbestos Tags
Type of Tag Image
20
Metal tag attached to assembly with
“No ASB Assembly” label
4/
Metal tag attached to flange with
/1
“No ASB Gasket” label
09
• IF it cannot be confirmed that the gasket does NOT contain asbestos,
THEN all work must be performed as if it does contain asbestos.

ed
NOTE
Pacific Gas and Electric Company has required the purchase of asbestos-free
at
gaskets since 1983 for use in gas transmission and distribution systems. However,
asbestos-containing gaskets were used after 1983 and are still in the system.
er
• Do NOT use the date to determine whether the gasket contains asbestos.
en
CAUTION
G
Eating, drinking, smoking, chewing, and applying cosmetics (including lip balm and
sunscreen) are hand-to-mouth activities that increase your exposure to asbestos.
F
• Practice good hygiene: wash your hands before eating, drinking, applying cosmetics
(including lip balm or sunscreen), or doing other hand-to-mouth activities.
PD
.
Page 435
p436
1.3 Prepare the work area to catch the gasket when the flanges are separated. Two options are
listed below:
21
1. Place 6 mil (or thicker) polyethylene drop cloth under the flange connection that is large
enough to contain gasket and any potential debris when it falls from flange. Use
20
additional layers, as necessary, to ensure debris does not puncture drop cloth.
2. Place 6-mil plastic bag under flange connection to catch gasket when it falls from
between flange faces.
4/
1.4 Be prepared to catch gasket because it may immediately fall from flanges when separated.
/1
Always wear gloves while performing this work.
1.5 Separate flanges to make the gasket visible.
09
1. If the flanges are separated and the gasket is intact, but gasket does not immediately
fall from flange (see Figure 1, “Intact Gasket on Flange,” and Figure 2, “Example of
Asbestos-Containing Gasket Attached to Flange,” for pictures of gaskets attached to
ed
flange), continue to Step 1.6.
2. IF the flange does not separate easily and gasket is pulling apart,
at
THEN STOP and apply amended (soapy) water or ABC fiber spray to gasket material
and flange faces.
er
3. If drop cloth was not used previously, use one now. See Step 1.3.1.
en
4. Continue applying soapy water until the gasket material is saturated. Two or more
people might be necessary to perform this work.
5. Separate flanges until the gasket is visible. Use putty knife to scrape the gasket from
G
one side of the flange and to keep the gasket as intact as possible.
F
PD
.
Page 436
p437
1.5 (continued)
21
20
4/
/1
09
ed
at
Figure 1. Intact Gasket on Flange Figure 2. Example of Asbestos-Containing

er
Gasket Attached to Flange
1.6 Visually inspect the gasket to determine whether it might contain asbestos. The gasket does
en
NOT contain asbestos if it has any one of the characteristics described in Table 2, “Non-
Asbestos Gaskets” or characteristics listed in Step 1.7.
1.7 The gasket does NOT contain asbestos if it fits any of these descriptions:
G
• It has the marks and characteristics described in Gas Design Standard B-45, “Full
Face and Flat Ring Gaskets.” This Gas Design Standard addresses the most
F
commonly used gasket material, Manville No. 978 (also known as JM 978), or its
equivalent. This gasket material is Buna-N rubber (also called nitrile) with white aramid
PD
fibers. It is mostly black in color and flexible. This material is used in most low pressure
situations (below American National Standards Institute [ANSI] 400) and in piping
situations not requiring electrical isolation. The Company has purchased these gaskets
since 1983.
.
Page 437
p438
1.7 (continued)
21
• It has the marks and characteristics described in Gas Design Standard B-45.1,
“Glass-Epoxy Retainer Gaskets.” This Gas Design Standard covers the next most
commonly used gasket material, which is glass-epoxy (fiberglass). These gaskets are
20
thicker, non-bendable, and light green in color. They are also stamped with the material
designation “G10,” which indicates a non-asbestos material. These gaskets are
required in high pressure situations (ANSI 400 and above) and where the piping
system needs electrical isolation. They can also be used in lower pressure
4/
applications. The Company has purchased these gaskets since 1977.
/1
• It is manufactured by Garlock and is made of Aramid fibers with a nitrile binder. These
gaskets are labeled “Garlock BLUE-GARD 3000,” are blue in color, and are asbestos-
free.
09
Table 2. Non-Asbestos Gaskets
Type of Gasket or Marking Image
ed
at
Garlock style # 2950 gasket

er
en
G
Linebacker style gasket

F
PD
Stamped as “non-asbestos” with

NON-ASBESTOS Sticker
.
Page 438
p439
1.8 IF it is determined the gasket does NOT contain asbestos,
21
THEN proceed with work.
• No regulated area is required for asbestos controls.
20
• Remove gasket following approved work practices.
• Place gasket in plastic bags (see Utility Procedure TD-4711P-01, Attachment 1 for a
4/
variety of material codes).
/1
• Label plastic debris bag as “Non-hazardous.”
• Dispose of gaskets as non-hazardous as outlined in Table 3, “Waste Accumulation and
09
Disposal Requirements for Field Personnel.”
1.9 When a new non-asbestos gasket is installed, attach a metal tag to the flange or
riser. See Table 1 for picture of metal tag. Follow these steps:
ed
1. Attach metal tag with label “No ASB Gasket” to the flange when one new non-asbestos
gasket is installed or the entire assembly is not replaced or installed.
at
2. Attach metal tag to riser (stopcock location) with label “No ASB Assembly” if the entire
meter set/flange assembly (with multiple non-asbestos gaskets installed) is replaced.
er
3. Secure metal tag as close as possible to the flange connection using provided
stainless steel wire.
en
1.10 IF the gasket is determined to contain or potentially contain asbestos,
THEN it must be treated as hazardous material when removing and handling. Proceed to
G
Section 2, “Establishing a Regulated Area,” to perform the work.
2 Establishing a Regulated Area

F
2.1 A regulated area is not required if:

PD
• It was determined asbestos is not present, per Section 1, Determining Whether Gasket
Contains Asbestos, OR
• Gasket immediately fell into prepared plastic bag and there is no gasket material
remaining on flange faces (i.e., no cleaning will be necessary). Go to Step 3.6 for area
clean up and waste disposal instructions.
.
Page 439
p440
21
WARNING
Only personnel who have completed an Asbestos Class III or above course may
enter the regulated area.
20
2.2 Do not eat, drink, smoke, chew, or apply cosmetics (including lip balm and sunscreen) in the
regulated area.
4/
2.3 If a gasket that contains or potentially contains asbestos needs to be removed from a flange,
follow these steps to establish a regulated area:
/1
1. Establish a boundary that minimizes the number of people who could be exposed to
09
asbestos. Follow these requirements:
• Create a designated entrance to the regulated area. The entrance can be

created with cones or barricade tape.
ed
• Display Danger Asbestos warning sign(s) OR Danger Asbestos barricade tape
as the boundary of the regulated area (see TD-4711P-01, Attachment 1 for
material codes).
at
2. Ensure that asbestos warning signs meet the following requirements:

er
• Use these exact words: “Danger: Asbestos. May Cause Cancer. Causes
Damage to Lungs. Authorized Personnel Only”.
en
• Post signs where they can be read and any necessary protective action can be
taken BEFORE entering the regulated area.
G
3. If drop cloth was not used when the flanges were separated (as described in Step 1.3),
place a 6 mil (or thicker) polyethylene drop cloth large enough to contain you, the
removed gasket, and any potential debris (including wetting solution) under the
F
flanges.
PD
a. Use additional layers, as necessary, to ensure debris and wetting solution do

not puncture or escape from the drop cloth.
4. A second drop cloth may be used for a step-off pad to accomplish tasks that cannot be
performed on the initial drop cloth. These tasks may include:
• Placing tools and equipment, such as a wire brush
• Decontaminating tools, gloves, and boots
.
Page 440
p441
3 Removing Flange Gaskets when Asbestos is Present or Unknown
21
3.1 DO NOT use power tools OR heat processes, which might generate airborne fibers or
particulates when removing flange gaskets.
20
3.2 Remove gasket using the wet method, as described in Step 3.3 and Step 3.4 below.
4/
WARNING
Saturating potential asbestos-containing material prevents the gasket material from
/1
becoming airborne, which is the most common method of exposure.
09
3.3 Use a hand sprayer with soapy water or ABC fiber spray encapsulate to SATURATE the
gaskets to ensure fibers do not become airborne. Follow these steps:
1. Keep the gasket intact as much as possible.

ed
2. Do not crumble or pulverize the removed gasket.
3. Use putty knife (or other approved hand tool) to gently remove gasket from flange
at
faces.
4. Keep gasket wet until placement in the debris bag.

er
5. Place the gasket/debris in the prepared 6-mil thick plastic bag or on the plastic drop
cloth. See Section 2, Establishing a Regulated Area.
en
3.4 Continue to wet material while removing any material remaining on the flange.
G
1. A wire brush may be used to gently remove material on the flange faces.
a. The wire brush may be reused ONLY if:

F
• The removal process does not emit airborne particulates.

PD
• The wire brush is stored separate from other tools (recommend in a

6 mil impermeable bag).
• The wire brush or bag is labeled that it is for gasket removal use only.
• The wire brush is only used for removing gaskets.
b. Replace the wire brush when it becomes visibly worn or dirty (dispose with
asbestos waste/debris, as described in Step 3.6).
.
Page 441
p442
3.4 (continued)
21
2. Continue to wet flange gasket material while working until gasket is completely
removed from the flange.
20
3.5 Prior to leaving the regulated area, use disposable rags to wet wipe contaminated items (such
as tools or the bottom of your boots) to decontaminate them and prevent secondary
exposures.
4/
3.6 Keep gasket wet until placement in the 6-mil thick debris bag.
/1
NOTE
Gaskets are typically non-friable when removed using the wet method and following
09
this procedure.
3.7 Determine whether asbestos is friable or non-friable. Friable asbestos must be disposed as
hazardous waste. See Env-4000P-01-JA20, “Job Aid–Asbestos-Friable” and Env-4000P-01-
ed
JA21, “Job Aid–Asbestos-Non-friable” for storage, transportation, and disposal of asbestos-
containing materials.
• Friable asbestos is material containing asbestos that is easily reduced to very

at
small pieces (powder) under hand pressure. Dry material is friable if it can be
crumbled, pulverized, or reduced to powder by hand pressure alone
er
• Non-friable asbestos is material containing asbestos that cannot be reduced

to dust or powder under hand pressure.
en
1. If you cannot determine whether the asbestos-containing gasket is friable or non-

friable, then treat it as friable hazardous waste with greater than 1% asbestos.
G
2. A gasket handled using wet method and best practices outlined in this utility procedure
is normally non-friable.
F
3.8 Place the debris (including rags used to clean up) on the 6-mil thick polyethylene drop cloth.
Take care not to track debris off the drop cloth while working.
PD
3.9 Immediately after gasket removal work is complete, roll up the plastic drop cloth and step off
pad (if used) containing the removed gasket material. During cleanup, take care to avoid
creating air bellows while rolling up drop cloth, and be sure to contain all removed debris.
.
Page 442
p443
NOTE
21
If removing multiple gaskets in one day, a plastic bucket with a sealed lid can be
used as the second bag.
20
3.10 Double bag the rolled up drop cloth following these steps:
1. Place debris (rolled up drop cloth) in first bag, which must be completely sealed and
leak-tight (i.e., twist the top of the bag, tape around it, and fold back on itself and tape
4/
around it again [gooseneck]).
/1
2. Put the 6-mil thick sealed first bag of debris inside another 6-mil or thicker plastic bag.
There are now two layers of plastic around any possible asbestos fibers.
09
3. Seal and secure all plastic storage bags and “gooseneck” with duct tape. Take care
during this process NOT to handle the bag in a way that squeezes or forcibly emits
potential air pockets within the bag out the top while sealing. Exit the regulated area
with sealed/bagged debris.
ed
3.11 Label bag appropriately per Table 3. The labeling instructions are not limited to the labels
shown below:
at
1. For non-friable waste: Use green non-hazardous waste label.

er
2. For friable waste: Use yellow state hazardous waste label.
3.12 Follow these instructions for transportation of asbestos (per Utility Procedure ENV-4000P-03,
en
Attachment 6, “PG&E AB1448 Remote Waste/Consolidation Site Annual Notification”):
1. Non-friable asbestos-containing waste:

G
For non-friable waste, the only requirement is the non-hazardous waste label. (In most
cases, if using the “wet method” and removing the gasket following this utility
procedure, the waste will be non-friable.)
F
2. Friable asbestos-containing waste (for informational purposes):

PD
IF friable waste contains greater than or equal to 1% asbestos AND weighs less than
10 pounds,
THEN no hazardous shipping paper is required. Since the asbestos content of gaskets
is unknown, assume that friable material contains greater than 1% asbestos for
disposal purposes.
3.13 Prepare waste for disposal per Section 4, “Waste Disposal.”
3.14 Follow Step 1.9 for instructions on installing new asbestos-free gasket.
.
Page 443
p444
4 Waste Disposal
21
NOTE
Material containing less than 1% asbestos is not regulated for disposal as hazardous
20
waste (whether or not it is friable).
4.1 Determine whether the waste is hazardous or non-hazardous material for disposal.
4/
1. Gaskets that do not contain asbestos are not considered hazardous waste.
/1
NOTE
Gaskets are typically non-friable when removed using the wet method and following
09
this procedure.
2. The following asbestos-containing materials are considered regulated non-hazardous

waste and require special labeling. See Table 3.
ed
• Any non-friable asbestos-containing material
•
at
Friable material that contains less than 1% asbestos
a. Material that is friable or becomes friable AND contains less than 1% asbestos
er
is considered to be non-hazardous BUT it requires special labeling. (See

Table 3).
en
b. Gasket sampling is not required; assume friable material contains greater than
or equal to 1% asbestos and is regulated hazardous waste. See Step 4.1.3.
3. Asbestos-containing material is considered hazardous waste if it meets these

G
requirements:
• The material is friable, becomes friable, OR is degraded to the point where it

F
generates dust (i.e., during removal, transportation, or storage), AND

PD
• The material contains greater than or equal to 1% asbestos. Gaskets are

assumed to contain greater than 1% asbestos for waste disposal since the
asbestos content is unknown.
4.2 Label, store, and dispose of debris container following guidelines in Table 3.
4.3 Environmental field specialist disposes of waste appropriately in accordance with

ENV-4000P-01-JA15, “PG&E-Authorized Disposal and Recycling Facilities.”
• Contact an environmental field specialist for storage, transportation, and/or disposal

questions.
.
Page 444
p445
4.3 (continued)
21
Table 3. Waste Accumulation and Disposal Requirements for Field Personnel*
Regulated Non-Hazardous
20
Waste: Material Contains Regulated Hazardous Waste:
Material Does Not
Requirement Non-Friable Asbestos or Material Contains Greater Than
Contain Asbestos
Less Than 1% Friable or Equal to 1% Friable Asbestos
Asbestos
4/
Any container (i.e., Double bagged debris bag,
Storage container at
drum, or leak-tight bucket (see
/1
debris bag, drum, or Double bagged debris bag, drum, or
temporary remote
designated Step 3.10) leak-tight bucket (see Step 3.10)
location
container for trash)
09
Recommended: transport 10 days from date of waste
off-site at earliest convenience generation (then transport to
Storage Duration No limitations
to consolidation site for consolidation site accumulation
Class II disposal area, Class I facility)
ed
-Completed yellow and red
“Hazardous Waste” label (include
-Completed green and white PM number, if available)
“Non-hazardous waste” label
at
-Add PM number (if available)

and waste generation date
er
en
-Write “Contains Friable Asbestos”

under “Contents/Composition” line
Labeling* None Required of label
-Write “Contains Non-friable -Add “Danger–Contains Asbestos
G
asbestos” on label Fibers” label

-Add “Danger–Contains -Add Department of Transportation
Asbestos Fibers” label
F
(DOT) Hazardous Class 9 label

PD
* Contact an environmental field specialist for storage, transportation and/or disposal questions.
END of Instructions
.
Page 445
p446
DEFINITIONS
21
Amended/Soapy Water: Water to which surfactant (wetting agent) has been added to
increase the ability of the liquid to penetrate asbestos-containing material (soapy water).
20
listed in Proposition 65 and known to the State of California to cause cancer. When asbestos-
containing materials are damaged or disturbed, microscopic fibers become airborne and can
be inhaled into the lungs, where they can cause significant health problems. Asbestos was
4/
commonly used in a wide range of manufactured goods (i.e., roofing shingles, asphaltic pipe
wrap, gaskets, automobile brakes, and more).
/1
Asbestos Work Classification II: Activities involving the removal of asbestos-containing
material which is not thermal system insulation or surfacing material. This includes, but is not
09
limited to, the removal of asbestos-containing wallboard, floor tile and sheeting, roofing and
siding shingles, and construction mastics (includes asphaltic pipe wrap and gaskets).
Asbestos Work Classification III: Repair and maintenance operations where asbestos-
ed
containing material is likely to be disturbed (e.g., removing pipe wrap and removing flange
gaskets).
Class II Disposal Facility: Landfill that typically accepts disposal of all non-hazardous
at
municipal solid wastes, non-hazardous industrial wastes, and special wastes.

er
Friable: Easily reduced to very small pieces (powder) under hand pressure. Dry material is
friable if it can be crumbled, pulverized, or reduced to powder by hand pressure alone.
en
Gaskets: Compressible sheets or rings used to make a leak resistant seal between two
surfaces.
Negative Exposure Assessment (NEA): A demonstration that employee exposure to

G
asbestos during an operation is expected to be consistently below the Permissible Exposure

Limit (PEL). An NEA must be conducted at least annually.
F
Non-Friable Asbestos: Material containing asbestos that cannot be reduced to dust or

powder under hand pressure.
PD
Permissible Exposure Limit (PEL): Maximum allowable exposure. The PEL for asbestos
concentration is 0.1 fibers per cubic centimeter (0.1 f/cc) of air as an 8-hour time weighted
average. The excursion limit (maximum exposure over a short period of time) is1 asbestos
fiber per cubic centimeter of air averaged over 30 minutes.
Wet Method: Using amended (soapy) water, ABC fiber spray/encapsulate, or other methods
to adequately wet material to ensure fibers do not become airborne.
.
Page 446
p447
21
Supervisors of personnel who perform gas transmission, distribution operations, corrosion or
instrumentation and regulation maintenance, or construction activities must ensure that their
personnel are trained and comply with the requirements as applicable to their job function
20
listed in this utility procedure.
GOVERNING DOCUMENT
4/
Utility standard TD-4711S, “Natural Gas Pipe Wrap and Flange Gaskets–Removal, Handling,
and Disposal”
/1
09
See Utility Standard TD-4711S, “Natural Gas Pipe Wrap and Flange Gaskets–Removal,
Handling, and Disposal” for list of OSHA, federal, and state regulations that are addressed in
the TD-4711 set of documents.
ed
Failure to follow this utility procedure could result in regulatory agency action, including but not
limited to fines and/or a Notice of Violation (NOV) or citation.
REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
at
• Code of Safe Practices

er
• Gas Design Standard B-45, "Full Face and Flat Ring Gaskets"
•
en
Gas Design Standard B-45.1, “Glass-Epoxy Retainer Gaskets”
• Safety Procedure 227, “Asbestos Program”

G
• Utility Procedure ENV-4000P-01-JA15, “PG&E-Authorized Disposal and Recycling

Facilities”
F
• Utility Procedure TD-4711P-01, “Gas Pipe Wrap Removal, Handling, and Disposal”
PD
• Utility Standard SAFE 1001S, “Safety and Health Program Standard”
• Utility Standard SAFE-2004S, “Asbestos Standard”
• Utility Standard TD-4711S, “Natural Gas Pipe Wrap and Flange Gaskets—Removal,
Handling, and Disposal”
APPENDICES
NA
.
Page 447
p448
ATTACHMENTS
21
See TD-4711P-01, Attachment 1, “Pipe Wrap/Gasket Material Code List” for material code list
DOCUMENT RECISION
20
This utility procedure cancels and supersedes Utility Work Procedure WP4711-02, “Gas Piping
Flange Gasket Removal, Handling, and Disposal Procedures,” issued 1/2008.
4/
DOCUMENT APPROVER
/1
Terrence Williams, Manager, Maintenance and Construction Safety
Jo Forchione, Principal Industrial Hygienist, Safety Programs
09
Lenny Caldwell, Manager, Gas Methods and Procedures
DOCUMENT OWNER
ed
Tuesdai Powers, Supervisor, Gas Methods and Procedures
DOCUMENT CONTACT
at
Denis Pietershanski, Senior Specialist, Gas Methods and Procedures

er
REVISION NOTES

en
Throughout Entire utility procedure was completely rewritten and placed in new template
document with new number. This procedure was formerly Work Procedure WP4711P-02.
Process changes Added requirement that a negative exposure assessment (NEA) be on file.
G
throughout – see list The NEA is required annually. See TD-4711S for NEA requirements.
on right.
Updated required training classes (initial 8-hour class and annual refresher).
F
No Tyvek suits or respirators for typical removal of possible asbestos-

PD
containing material are required since an NEA is on file.

Added the use of a metal tag labeled “No ASB Gasket” or “No ASB Assembly”
when a new non-asbestos gasket is installed. This will help personnel doing
work in the future to confirm that the gasket contains no asbestos.
Added guidance for waste disposal.
Updated Danger Caution tags and signs to conform to California Occupational
Safety and Health (Cal/OSHA) requirements.
.
Page 448
p449
DOCUMENT NAME: Flange Gaskets–Removal, Handling, and Disposal
21
20
4/
What is changing?
This utility procedure (formerly WP4711-02) was completely rewritten and placed in new template
/1
with new number. Changes/incorporations include:
• Added requirement that a negative exposure assessment (NEA) be on file. The NEA is
09
required annually. See Utility Standard TD-4711S for NEA requirements.
• Updated required training classes (initial 8-hour class and annual refresher).
• Updated Danger Caution tags and signs to conform to California Occupational Safety and
Health (Cal/OSHA) requirements.
• No Tyvek suits or respirators for typical removal of possible asbestos-containing material are
ed
required since an NEA is on file.
• Added the use of a metal tag labeled “No ASB Gasket” or “No ASB Assembly” when a new
non-asbestos gasket is installed. This will help personnel doing work in the future to confirm
that the gasket contains no asbestos.
at
• Added guidance for waste disposal.

er
Why does it matter?

The current version of this utility procedure does not comply with the applicable codes. The
en
requirements in the revised procedure will impact work methods and training.
Required Action
G
All personnel removing gaskets need to complete the required training and follow the revised
work practices. This includes using “Danger, Asbestos...” signs when working with gaskets that
contain or potentially contain asbestos, using a metal tag when installing an asbestos-free gasket,
F
and labeling material for disposal.

PD
Pacific Gas and Electric Company (PG&E or Company) Academy curriculum development team
will update the initial 8-hour training course and 4-hour annual refresher training course with the
new material from the revised procedure.
Order materials required to perform work tasks such as “Danger, Asbestos…” signs, metals tags,
etc.
This utility procedure is available to use once it is published on the Technical Information Library
(TIL) on April 1, 2015. The required annual refresher courses will be scheduled from June 1
through December 31, 2015.
Page 449
p450
The utility procedure and related procedure (TD-4711P-01) and standard (TD-4711S) will become
effective across all of gas operations January 1, 2016, to allow sufficient time for the impacted
21
workforce to:
• Receive communication of process changes to all impacted employees
• Complete required training courses for those employees who remove asbestos pipe wrap
20
or gaskets
• Order and receive required new materials
• Complete GIS programming so mapping personnel can update maps with asbestos
analytical results.
4/
Tools and Training
/1
All personnel potentially handling asbestos gaskets must complete training as specified in the
utility procedure. New materials need to be purchased so they may be received prior to the
09
effective date. Expect 4 to 6 weeks for delivery from material request date.
The table below lists the required training based on work classification.
ed
Type of Work PG&E Course
SAFE-0135 (8-hour initial–instructor lead)
Class II/III*
SAFE-0136 (4-hour refresher–instructor lead, annual)
at
SAFE-0174
Class IV
(2 hour–instructor lead, annual)
*There is no difference in scope between Class II and Class III for handling pipe wrap and gaskets.
er
en
Timeline
G
Date Activity
4/01/2015 Utility procedure published
4/01/2015 –
F
Communication and mandatory training provided.

12/31/2015
1
PD
6/01/2015 Tailboard utility procedure by this date.

1/1/2016 Utility procedure becomes effective.
1
Page 450
p451

For Flange Gaskets–Removal, Handling, and Disposal
TD-4711P-02, Rev. 0
21
Document Author Denis Pietershanski, Senior Specialist
Document Owner Tuesdai Powers, Senior Gas Engineer
20
Document Approver Jo Forchione, Terrence Williams, and Lenny Caldwell
Section 1: Planning
4/
/1
This utility procedure (formerly WP4711-02) was completely rewritten and placed in new template with a
new number. Changes/incorporations include:
09
• Added requirement that a Negative Exposure Assessment (NEA) be on file. The NEA is required
annually. See Utility Standard TD-4711S, Natural Gas Pipe Wrap and Flange Gaskets—Removal,
Handling, and Disposal,” for NEA requirements.
ed
• Updated required training classes (initial 8-hour class and annual refresher).
• Updated Danger Caution tags and signs to conform to California Occupational Safety and Health
(Cal/OSHA) requirements.
• No Tyvek suits or respirators for typical removal of possible asbestos-containing material are required
at
since an NEA is on file.

• Added the use of a metal tag labeled “No ASB Gasket” or “No ASB Assembly” when a new non-
er
asbestos gasket is installed. This will help personnel doing work in the future to confirm that the gasket
contains no asbestos.
• Added guidance for waste disposal.
en

G
This utility procedure is being revised to:

• Align with Utility Standard SAFE-2004S, “Asbestos Standard” and California and federal code of
regulations
F
• Update training class course codes and content

•
PD
Incorporate the NEA results and impacts

• Provide additional instruction for the field

Page 451
p452

TD-4711P-02, Rev. 0
21
This utility procedure provides instructions for the safe removal, handling, and disposal of flange gaskets
from gas transmission and distribution (T&D) systems. Gaskets have been known to contain asbestos.
20
Removing asbestos-containing material requires compliance with Occupation Safety and Health
Association (OSHA), federal, and state regulations. This procedure only addresses work where a current
and valid NEA is on file for gasket removal. See Utility Standard TD-4711S, “Natural Gas Pipe Wrap and
Flange Gaskets—Removal, Handling, and Disposal” for regulatory requirements and guidance on NEAs.
4/
The scope of this utility procedure is limited to removing, handling, and disposing of flange gaskets. For
/1
instructions on removing pipe wrap to access gaskets, refer to Utility Procedure TD-4711P-01, “Gas Pipe
Wrap Removal, Handling, and Disposal”.
09
This document addresses OSHA codes but has no regulatory commitment. See Utility Standard TD-
ed
4711S for a list of applicable regulations.
at
A. Is the task performed on a pipeline facility? Yes
er

C. Is the task performed as a requirement of 49 CFR Part 192? No
en
G
Gaskets have been known to contain asbestos, which is a known carcinogen. To avoid the health risks
associated with handling this material, proper procedures and work methods must be implemented and
followed. Depending on the condition of the gasket, the debris can be classified as a hazardous material.
F
PD

Page 452
p453

TD-4711P-02, Rev. 0
21
Gas personnel (listed below) involved in removing, handling, or disposing of gaskets. The asbestos
Class II/III training course is required if asbestos-containing material may be handled.
20
Gas general construction personnel
• Maintenance and construction personnel
• Instrumentation and regulation personnel
4/
• Gas pipeline operations and maintenance personnel
/1
• Gas field services personnel
• Welding personnel
09
• Gas meter shop personnel (build, repair, and test meter sets)
• Corrosion mechanics
• Environmental field specialists
ed
at
All personnel potentially handling pipe wrap and gaskets are profiled to complete required asbestos
er
training. The Line of Business updates profiles each year to determine the number of personnel required
to undergo the various levels of training. In 2014, 1731 employees attended the required training, but it is
estimated 500 employees remove or handle gaskets. Additional costs for this new procedure are
en
resources to update the training curriculum and cost of new materials.
The new materials and estimated costs for 500 employees are listed below:
G
“Danger Asbestos…” signs ($3 each, two per employee, varies depending on employee preference):
$3000
Metal tag to designate asbestos-free gaskets installed on a flange ($2 each, 10 per employee): $10,000
F
Note: The materials listed below are not considered new because they were required in WP4711-02:
PD
- Plastic sheeting and 6 mil bags

- Waste transportation and disposal labels

Page 453
p454

TD-4711P-02, Rev. 0
21
Field employees who remove gaskets receive:
• Asbestos training: see Utility Procedure TD-4711P-02 for class numbers if they remove asbestos-
containing gaskets
20
• TDMComms email announcing publication of the utility procedure
• Tailboard by supervisor
4/
Why communicate?
This utility procedure needs to be communicated to ensure employees and contractors understand the
safety and health concerns of removing and handling asbestos-containing gaskets. Using proper wet
/1
method work practices greatly decreases exposure to asbestos.
09
Who needs to know about it?
• Employees and contractors who remove, handle, or dispose of gaskets, including but not limited to:
gas general construction personnel, maintenance and construction personnel, instrumentation and
regulation personnel, gas pipeline operations and maintenance personnel, gas field services
ed
personnel, welding personnel, gas meter shop personnel (build, repair and test meter sets), corrosion
mechanics personnel, and environmental specialists.
• Employees and contractors who must be aware of the process described in this utility procedure
(informational only). This includes employees and contractors in the following groups: standards,
at
procedures, and training; Pacific Gas and Electric Company (Company or PG&E) Academy and
curriculum development; quality control; operator qualification; safety programs; gas engineering
er
estimating; and gas engineering. This also includes industrial hygienists and environmental personnel
(hazardous material and water quality program).
en
Gaskets can contain asbestos that is a hazardous material and is proven to cause adverse health effects.
It is important to follow OSHA, federal, and state requirements to eliminate exposure to asbestos.
Following the work practices outlined in this new procedure protects employees from exposure to
G
asbestos.
When does this become effective?

This utility procedure is available to use once it is published on the Technical Information Library (TIL) on
F
April 1, 2015. The required annual refresher courses will be scheduled from June 1 through December 31,
PD
2015.
This utility procedure, Utility Procedure TD-4711P-01, “Gas Pipe Wrap Removal, Handling, and Disposal,”
and Utility Standard TD-4711S, “Natural Gas Pipe Wrap and Flange Gaskets—Removal, Handling, and
Disposal,” will become effective across all of gas operations January 1, 2016, to allow sufficient time for
the impacted workforce to:
- Receive communication of process changes to all impacted employees
- Complete required training course for those employees who remove asbestos pipe wrap or gaskets
- Order and receive required new materials

Page 454
p455

TD-4711P-02, Rev. 0
21
Supervisors are responsible for communicating this utility procedure and ensuring affected employees
attend the required training classes. Academy training dates will be communicated once the classes are
available.
20
Supervisors must tailboard utility standard TD-4711S and associated utility procedures TD-4711P-01,
“Gas Pipe Wrap Removal, Handling, and Disposal Procedures” and TD-4711P-02, "Flange Gaskets–
Removal, Handling, and Disposal" with field employees and contractors.
4/
What manual does this apply to?
/1
This procedure belongs in the Gas Distribution Operations and Maintenance Manual (TD-4380M), and the
Gas Transmission Operations and Maintenance Manual (TD-4382M).
09
9. What keywords will personnel use to search for this document?
Gaskets, asbestos, flanges, metal tag, friable, non-friable

ed
Yes.
at

er
Review of the document as outlined in the Company document review plan.

en
Mapping gaskets with asbestos in the Geographic Information System (GIS) was considered. However,
there can be many gaskets at each station and it would not be possible to note each gasket on the map. In
G
order to document a non-asbestos gasket, documentation will be attached to the flange (using a metal
tag).
F

PD
EDRS Routing:
Reviewers: Susan Minarcin, Denis Pietershanski
Approvers: Tuesdai Powers, Terrence Williams, Jo Forchione, Lenny Caldwell
At least once every calendar year, not exceeding 15 months, to the date.

Page 455
p456

TD-4711P-02, Rev. 0
21
20
4/
/1
TD-4711S Ensure If TD-4711S is Tuesdai Powers NA
consistency updated, Utility
09
Procedure TD-
4711P-02 should be
reviewed and
updated as needed
to verify that they
ed
both align.
at

er
Mechanism(s) for Monitoring Compliance Responsible

Person
en
Field supervisors are responsible for monitoring compliance by ensuring Supervisors

that work is performed in accordance with this utility procedure.
G
Maintenance and construction safety manager is responsible for ensuring Terrence Williams
supervisors have resources available to comply with the utility procedure.
F
Document steward is responsible for reviewing document annually, not to Denis

PD
exceed 15 months. Pietershanski and

Tuesdai Powers

Page 456
p457

TD-4711P-02, Rev. 0
21
20
Technical Stakeholder Review
Terrence Williams Gas Operations Manager —Safety 02/20/2015
Tim MacLean Gas Operations Manager —Safety 01/16/2015
4/
Tuesdai Powers Gas Methods and Procedures Supervisor 01/15/2015
/1
Denis Pietershanski Gas Methods and Procedures Senior 01/15/2015
Specialist
09
Jo Forchione Safety Programs Industrial Hygienist 01/15/2015
Joe Joaquim Maintenance and Construction (M&C) – Gas 01/16/2015
Construction – Santa Rosa
Tom Robinson Subject Matter Expert, GIS Solutions 01/15/2015
ed
Cynthia Pappas Senior Environmental Consultant, Hazardous 01/15/2015
Material and Water Quality Program
at
Matthew Montez Instrument and Regulation Supervisor, 02/20/2015

Mission Division
Doug Weihnacht Senior Instructional Designer, Academy 02/20/2015
er
Safety and Compliance Training

Gary Wright Manager, Safety Compliance and Strategy 2/20/2015
en
Environmental and Safety Technical Team Review 02/20/2015

Team
G
F
PD

Page 457
p458

Natural Gas Pipe Wrap and Flange Gasket Removal,
Handling, and Disposal
TD-4711S, Rev: 1
Document Type Utility Standard
21
Workflow Revision
20
1. Why Is the Document Being Written / Revised?
This utility standard is being revised based on recommendations from the results of an asbestos data
4/
analysis, as detailed in a Pacific Gas and Electric Company (PG&E or Company) white paper, “Data
Analysis of Pipe Wrap Asbestos Results: January 2014 – December 2017.”
/1
This revision incorporates Variance 2018-87838, “Variance from TD-4711P-01 to not Collect Asbestos
Sample,” which ended mandatory pipe sampling after the white paper was completed.
09
2. What Is the Topic (if new) or What Is Changing (if revised)?
This revision of Utility Standard TD-4711S updates the roles and responsibilities of field personnel, gas
engineering and estimating personnel, and gas mapping personnel to reflect that it is no longer
ed
required to always collect a pipe wrap sample. The revision also removes actions from the medical
program requirements that have been completed with the PG&E white paper.
at
Process safety personnel reviewed the attached documents and decided that the documents are not
introducing any new hazards and contain enough safeguards in place to make sure employees are
er
safe when performing activities described in the standard.

en
G
F
PD

Page 458
p459

TD-4711S, Rev: 1
4. Stakeholders
21
20
(or reason if NA)
Engineer, Document Steward
4/
Standards Engineering Principal Engineer, Lead Engineer Tuesdai Powers 04/28/2020
Safety Quality and Contract Senior Director, Document
Kcammee Vreman 06/08/2020
Management Approver
/1
Principal Gas Process Safety
Process Safety Vic Stanciu 05/14/2020
Engineer
09
1
Quality Management, Field Supervisor Brian Affleck 05/13/2020
Operator Qualification NA – No associated qualifications
ed
Regulatory Compliance,
Principal Industrial Hygienist Jo Forchione 04/28/2020
OSHA Programs
1
PG&E Academy Manager Tricia Coan 05/13/2020
at
Director, As-Built Process Owner 1

As-Built Records Stephen Simon 05/13/2020
(or delegate)
er

en

1
Data Quality Management (DQM) Supervisor Manuel Romero 05/13/2020
1
Construction Field Quality Control Supervisor Eloy Vidales 05/13/2020
G
Construction Records Quality 1

Manager Kevin Lieberman 05/13/2020
Control
Construction Records Quality
F
1
Supervisor Fabien Hsu 05/13/2020
Control
PD

Approvers: Stephanie Uhlich, Tuesdai Powers, Jo Forchione, Kcammee Vreman

Page 459
p460

TD-4711S, Rev: 1
21
Cost savings began to be realized when Variance 2018-87838 was approved.
Expected savings of $500,000/year and reduction in labor and materials are listed below:
20
 Labor hours for estimators to look up asbestos results in the geographic information system (GIS)
and add a stamp to the map
4/
 Labor hours for field personnel to collect samples and complete the chain of custody
 Administrative costs for the labor and materials to ship samples
/1
 SGS Forensic Laboratories costs
 Labor hours for mappers to track samples and add asbestos results to GIS attributes
09
 Labor hours for gas guidance document coordinator to track, manage, and review asbestos results

ed
This is a relaxation of the sample collection requirement in Revision 0. By following Revision 0 and
Variance 2018-87838, the target audience will be in full compliance with Revision 1. Therefore, an
extended effective date is not necessary for implementation.
at
7. Review Frequency
er
8. Cancellations
NA
en
9. Manuals
NA
G
F
PD

Page 460
p461

TD-4711S, Rev: 1
21
Functional Area
20
Target Audiences
4/
☐ Asset Strategy ☐ Facility Integrity Management ☒ Leak Repair ☐ R&D and Innovation
☒ Associate Distribution Engineers ☒ GPOM (I&R) ☐ Leak Survey ☒ Records and Information
/1
Management
☒ Contract Management ☐ Gas Distribution Control Center ☒ Mapping (Transmission and ☐ Risk Management
09
Distribution)
☒ Corrosion Mechanics ☐ Gas Emergency Preparedness ☐ Metering Plant ☒ Service Planning
☐ Data Quality ☒ Gas Service Representatives ☒ Pipeline Engineering ☐ Super Gas Ops
ed
Engineering
and Distribution)
at
☒ Distribution Engineering ☒ Hydrotesting ☐ Project Management (Transmission and ☒ Transmission Construction

Distribution)
er
☒ Estimating ☐ LNG|CNG Operations ☐ Quality and Improvement ☐ Transmission Integrity

Management
en
GODOCS
☐ Corrosion Control ☐ Dispatch and Scheduling
G
☐ As-Builts ☐ Applicant Design Manual
☐ Coatings ☐ Asset Knowledge Management ☐ Damage Prevention ☐ Emergency Plans
Process
F
☒ Environmental and Safety ☐ Engineering for Integrity ☐ Gas Control and Clearances ☐ Gas Operations Quality
PD

Specifications

Examination (NDE)

Page 461
p462
DOCUMENT NAME: Natural Gas Pipe Wrap and Flange Gaskets–Removal, Handling, and Disposal
21
DOCUMENT NUMBER: TD-4711S, Rev. 0
20
4/
What is changing?
This utility standard (formerly S4711) has been completely rewritten, renumbered, and placed in a
/1
new template. Changes/incorporations include:
• Updated scope of work to be performed and requirements that apply to this standard
09
• Added associated operator qualifications, waste disposal, and medical surveillance
requirements
• Updated training class course codes and content

ed
• Added information on Negative Exposure Assessments (NEAs) as required by code
• Added section on roles and responsibilities

at
Why does it matter?

er
The utility standard is being revised to provide updates in training classes, incorporate the
negative exposure assessment results and impacts, and align with Utility Standard SAFE-2004S,
“Asbestos Standard,” and California and Federal Code of Regulations.
en
This standard needs to be communicated to ensure the safety of personnel who handle pipe wrap
or gaskets. Pipe wrap (pre-1972) and gaskets may contain asbestos, which can cause cancer
when ingested or inhaled. Exposure to asbestos is greatly decreased when proper work practices
G
are performed. This standard and its associated procedures are aligned with California Division of
Occupational Safety and Health (Cal/OSHA) requirements, and Pacific Gas and Electric
Company (Company or PG&E) SAFE-2004S, “Asbestos Standard,” for training, personnel safety,
F
and best work practices.

PD
Page 462
p463
Required Action
21
Supervisors of personnel who remove pipe wrap are responsible for communicating the revised
standard and associated utility procedures TD-4711P-01, “Gas Pipe Wrap Removal, Handling,
and Disposal,” and TD-4711P-02, “Flange Gaskets—Removal, Handling, and Disposal,” and
20
ensuring that affected personnel attend required training. Course code schedule will be
communicated once the classes are available.
4/
Impacted groups that do not remove pipe wrap will be invited to attend communications on the
changes to pipe wrap and gasket documents and work practices, including collecting asbestos
samples and reporting the results on maps.
/1
Academy curriculum development will update the initial 8-hour training course and 4-hour annual
refresher training course with the new material from the revised procedures.
09
Order materials required to perform work tasks such as “Danger, Asbestos…” signs, sample kits,
metals tags, etc.
ed
This utility standard is available to use once it is published on the Technical Information Library
(TIL) on April 1, 2015. The required annual refresher courses will be scheduled from June 1
through December 31, 2015.
at
This utility standard and its related procedures will become effective across all of gas operations
January 1, 2016 to allow sufficient time for the impacted workforce to:
• Receive communication of process changes to all impacted employees
er
• Complete required training course for those employees who remove asbestos pipe wrap
or gaskets
• Order and receive required new materials
en
• Complete GIS programming so mapping personnel can update maps with asbestos
analytical results.
Tools and Training

G
The table below lists the required training based on work classification.
F
Type of Work PG&E Course

PD
SAFE-0135 (8-hour initial–instructor lead)

Class II/III*
SAFE-0136 (4-hour refresher–instructor lead, annual)
SAFE-0174
Class IV
(2 hour–instructor lead, annual)
*There is no difference in scope between Class II and Class III for handling pipe wrap and gaskets.
Page 463
p464
21
Timeline
Date Activity
20
4/01/2015 Document published.
4/01/2015 – Communication and mandatory training provided.
12/31/2015
4/
6/01/2015 Tailboard document by this date.
1/1/2016 Document becomes effective.
1
/1
09
ed
at
er
en
G
F
PD
Page 464

OQ-0305-Study List For OQ-0305 - Pipe Inspection

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

You might also like

OQ-0305-Study List For OQ-0305 - Pipe Inspection

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

OQ-0305-Study List For OQ-0305 - Pipe Inspection

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

21

Checklist - Template: OQ-0305-0

TD-4186P-300 - Tailboard for TD-4186P-300 104

TD-4186P-400 - Internal Corrosion Control: Mitigation 110

TD-4186P-400 - GDA for TD-4186P-400 125

TD-4186P-500 - GDA for TD-4186P-500 138

TD-4186S - Tailboard for TD-4186S 147

TD-5100P-01 - Leak Repair and Pipe Inspection Documentation 149

TD-4711P-02 - Flange Gaskets-Removal, Handling, and Disposal 431

TD-4711P-02 - TD-4711P-02 - Tailboard 449

TD-4711S - GDA for TD-4711S 458

OQ-0305, “Pipe inspection”

GAS DESIGN STANDARD E-25

Purpose and Scope

Table 1. Approved Trenton Tape System

(40 tubs per case)

Wrap Wax-Tape #2a 2″ × 9″ Rolls M560381

painting) (24 rolls per case)

9″ × 18″ Rolls M561543

6″ × 27″ Rolls M561596

Field Wrapping with Petrolatum Tape Wrap Systems

Table 2. Approved Denso / Densyl Tape System

coating systems. Follow environmental condition and surface preparation

Piping and Equipment Exposed to Severe Conditions,” for a cross-reference to

Field Wrapping with Petrolatum Tape Wrap Systems

A. Air, surface and material temperature per Table 4.

C. Work area must be free of airborne dust to prevent contamination of prepared

surfaces or freshly applied coatings.

Material Recommended Material Air Temperature Surface Temperature

Field Wrapping with Petrolatum Tape Wrap Systems

the underlying surface and provide a smooth outer surface.

spiral-wrap applied with an overlap of 55%, effectively providing a double-thickness

Field Wrapping with Petrolatum Tape Wrap Systems

Field Wrapping with Petrolatum Tape Wrap Systems

Society for Protective Coatings Surface Preparation Standard 1, “Solvent Cleaning”

Revision 4 has the following changes:

2. Removed all references of PE tape for field wrapping.

4. Added optional color and UV coatings and instructions.

Field Wrapping with Petrolatum Tape Wrap Systems

Asset Type: Gas Transmission and Distribution

Function: Design, Construction, Maintenance, and Operation

Gas Guidance Document Analysis (GDA)

 Added optional color and UV coatings and instructions.

Table 1. Technical Stakeholder Reviewers (required to be considered)

(or reason if NA)

Gas Engineer, Document Coordinator John Heflin 09/2020

Principal Engineer, Lead Engineer Tuesdai Powers 10/2020

SQ-09-F01, Gas Operations Guidance Document Analysis

Gas Guidance Document Analysis (GDA)

Table 2. Target Audience Usability Review (stakeholders that may review)

Document Number Title Description Reasons for Cancelation

SQ-09-F01, Gas Operations Guidance Document Analysis

Gas Guidance Document Analysis (GDA)

10. Document Properties

☒ Corrosion Services ☐ Gas Operations Leadership ☐ Picarro ☐ Sourcing

☐ Estimating ☐ LNG|CNG Operations ☐ Quality and Improvement ☐ Transmission Integrity

CONSTRUCTION ENGINEERING MAINTENANCE & OPERATIONS EMERGENCY / ADMIN

☒ Coatings ☐ Asset Knowledge Management ☐ Damage Prevention ☐ Emergency Plans